dp_c262_sm

Order Number: MGCS050101C0H21

Digital Imaging SystemsDP-C262/C322

[ Version 1.1 ]

This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

© 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution isa violation of law.

The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.Published in Japan.

Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:

Distinction of PbF PCB:PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.

Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:

URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.

This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).

2

http://www.senju-m.co.jp

6

Unpacking CautionDo not lift the Paper Transport Unit by the PC Board, asdamage to the PC Board will occur.Make sure to lift the Paper Transport Unit as shown in the illustrations below.

Note:Refer to the Installation Instructions when installing the Unit.

7

Precautions

Power and Ground Connection CautionsEnsure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminatedconnector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventuallycause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.

Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord isrequired, always use a properly rated cord.

120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 AIf you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke orbecome hot to the touch.

Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do notplace a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.

If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric

Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, orabnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic .

Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug andcause fire.

When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cordforcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.

When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulationcan cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.

Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machinefor cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can causeelectric shock.

For Your SafetyTo prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonicmachine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.

This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedurethat must not be performed.

These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedurethat must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.

WARNING

Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.

shocks.

dealer.

8

Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusualcondition, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer.

The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.The plug and receptacle are free of dust.The cord is not cracked or frayed.

Operating SafeguardsDo not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may causesevere burns.

Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire orshock hazard.

Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into themachine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.

If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.

Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can causesmoke or fire.

Consumable SafeguardsNever dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in thecartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.

Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,get medical treatment immediately.

Installation and Relocation CautionsDo not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains thatmay catch fire.

Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure tothese adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.

Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can with stand.If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with thepower cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine with properpacking materials for shipping.

9

Operating SafeguardsDo not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate themachine accidentally, resulting in injuries.

Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.

When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanningglass. The glass may break and cause injuries.

Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet ofpaper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries orburns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When apaper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.

Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or theheavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.

Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimizethe ozone density in the air.

When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.

Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.

When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrappedaround the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see,do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off themachine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Consumable SafeguardsNever heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can behazardous to your health.

Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only..

Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries canburst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.

OthersWhen clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightningstrikes in your neighborhood, switch Off the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machineand reconnect only when the lightning has stopped.If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine maybe causing radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is thecause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.

Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio.Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoorantenna, ask your local electrician for support.Use a coaxial cable antenna.

CAUTION

Table of Contents

Specifications Table ..............................121.1. Copy Function.........................................121.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax

Functions ................................................211.3. System Combination:..............................321.4. Options List.............................................331.5. External View..........................................361.6. Control Panel ..........................................401.7. Fans........................................................411.8. Motors.....................................................411.9. Sensors...................................................421.10. Clutches and Switches ...........................431.11. PC Board ................................................43

Disassembly Instructions .....................442.1. General Disassembly..............................442.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................452.3. Hardware Identification

Template...............................................150

Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points ........................................154

3.1. Preventive Maintenance .......................1543.2. Required Tools .....................................1553.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ............1563.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .....1573.5. Resetting the P/M

(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......1603.6. Lubrication Point ...................................1613.7. Updating the Firmware .........................1623.8. Adjusting Copy Quality .........................1713.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration,

LSU Image Side to Side, Color Registration .................................174

3.10. Calibrating the LCD ..............................1753.11. LEDs on the EC PCB............................1753.12. Adjusting Scanner Skew ......................176

Troubleshooting ..................................1774.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........1774.2. Improper LCD Display ..........................1784.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............1794.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......2004.5. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................2084.6. Information Codes Table

(For Facsimile)......................................2264.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........2324.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................239

Service Modes ..................................... 2415.1. Service Modes (For Copier) ................. 2415.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 302

System Description ............................. 3346.1. Mechanical Operation .......................... 3346.2. Inverting Automatic Document

Feeder (i-ADF) ..................................... 3366.3. Printer Mechanism ............................... 3386.4. Printing Process ................................... 3446.5. Glossary of Electrical

Abbreviations ....................................... 352

Installation............................................ 3737.1. Set Up Precautions .............................. 3737.2. Unpacking ............................................ 3757.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 3777.4. Adjustment ........................................... 386

Options and Supplies.......................... 3888.1. Installing the Network Scanner/Email

Module (DA-NS320)............................. 3888.2. Installing the Network Scanner Module/

Email Module for Document Distribution System (DA-NS321).......... 390

8.3. Installing the Internet Fax Module (DA-NF320) ......................................... 392

8.4. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG320) ............................... 395

8.5. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) ........................................... 405

8.6. Installing the Main Memory 256MB (DA-EMN56)......................................... 410

8.7. Installing the Page Memory 256MB (DA-PMN56)......................................... 412

8.8. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)........................................... 414

8.9. Installing the Printer Controller Module (DA-MC320) ........................... 415

8.10. Installing the SD Memory Card (64 MB up to 1 GB) .............................. 422

8.11. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS320) and System Console 2 (DA-DS321) ........... 424

8.12. Installing the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320) .......................................... 429

8.13. Installing the Exit Tray (Outer) (DA-XT320) .......................................... 432

8.14. Installing the 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS320) .......................................... 434

10

Table of Contents

8.15. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325).............................439

8.16. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41) ............................................446

8.17. Installing the ADF Handle for Accessibility (DA-UD321) ................453

8.18. Installing the Mechanical Counter (PJWEF2170PU) ..................................454

8.19. Replacing the OPC Drum .....................4568.20. Replacing the Toner Waste

Container ..............................................456

General Network Information .............4579.1. Network Protocol ..................................4579.2. Layer Functions and

Technology ...........................................4599.3. Network Layer.......................................4639.4. Transport Layer ....................................4679.5. Upper Layer ..........................................4699.6. SMTP

(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ............4749.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305

(New RFC3965)....................................4759.8. Communication Protocols.....................4819.9. POP

(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ...........4849.10. Troubleshooting from a PC...................4879.11. Verifying the Configuration and

Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ......4889.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP) - Extended Feature .................4899.13. Message Disposition Notifications

(MDN) - Extended Feature ...................4929.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

(LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................4969.15. Lightweight Challenge-response

Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature ...............................496

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature ...............................498

9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature ...............................500

9.18. Remote Entry........................................5019.19. Error Messages Generated during

Remote Entry........................................510

Schematic Diagram .............................51310.1. General Circuit Diagram .......................513

Finisher Options .................................. 51511.1. DA-FS325, DA-SP41 ........................... 51511.2. DA-FS320 ............................................ 627

11

DP-C262/C322

1 Specifications Table1.1. Copy Function

Items Description RemarksDP-C262 DP-C322

Multi Function1 Copy Function Yes

2 Printer Function Std : PCL6 Option : PS3

3 Scanner Function Option : Mono / Color Network only4 Facsimile Function Option : Mono 5 Internet Fax Function Option : Mono

Basic Specifications1 Type Semi Console

Paper Transport Vertical Paper PathPaper Feed Position CenterPaper Output Face Down

2 Platen FixedOriginal Position

Platen Left / Rear / Face DownADF/i-ADF Left / Center / Face Up

3 Copy Process Dry Electrostatic System4 Copy Resolution 600 dpi5 Color Mode

Auto YesFull Color Yes2 Color Yes1 Color YesBlack Yes

6 Copy Mode

TextPrinted Text YesPencil Text Yes

Text / Photo

Photo PaperError DiffusionLaser Printed

Commercial

PhotoPhoto Paper Error Diffusion Screen : Service settingLaser Printed

Error DiffusionCommercial

Other Types

Map YesTracing Paper YesNewspaper Yes

7 Developing System Dry Dual Component, TrickleDrum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)Toner Recycling No

8 Scanning Method 3 Line Color CCD9 Fusing System Induction Heating (IH) System

10 Max Original Size Ledger (11 x 17 in) / A3 (297 x 420 mm)

12APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11 ADF

Paper Capacity (Original) 70 sheets (LTR / A4)

USA and CanadaLTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)Other DestinationsA4 : 80 g/m2

Original Exchange SpeedMono 32 cpm (LTR / A4) Color 29 cpm (LTR / A4)

Collation Stack Yes12 Paper Size

Paper Tray 1LTR For USA and CanadaA4 For EU

A4, B5 For Other Destinations

Paper Tray (2/3/4)

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada

A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FLS For EUFLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations

Sheet Bypass

12 x 18 in, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada

A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EUFLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5 For Other DestinationsBypass Envelope Yes

13 Warm-up Time 68 °F (20 °C)From Platen / Letter / A4 Portrait / 1st Paper Tray. Period between Start Key is pressed and Paper exits to the Inner tray.When LSU is ready.

MonoApprox. 15 sec.

Color14 First Copy Time

Mono Approx. 7.3 sec. Approx. 6.2 sec.Color Approx. 12 sec.

15 Copy SpeedMono Continuous Copy

Ledger / A3 13 cpm 16 cpmFrom Paper Tray (2/3/4), exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).Legal / B4 18 / 17 cpm 22 / 21 cpm

Letter-R / A4-R 21 / 20 cpm 26 / 25 cpm

Letter / A4 26 cpm 32 cpm From Paper Tray (1/2/3/4), exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).

OHP (Letter / A4) 10 cpm 10 cpm From Sheet Bypass, exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).

Color Continuous CopyLedger / A3 10 cpm

From Paper Tray (2/3/4), exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).Legal / B4 14 cpm

Letter-R / A4-R 17 / 16 cpm

Letter / A4 21 cpm From Paper Tray (1/2/3/4), exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).

OHP (Letter / A4) 10 cpm From Sheet Bypass, exit to Tray (Inner/Outer).


13APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

16 Tone ScaleMono 256 stepsColor 256 steps (Each Color)

17 Color Mode Selection Auto / Black / Full Color 2 Color / 1 Color

18 Color Balance Low / Mid / High19 Color Tone Adjustment

Lively YesBright YesWarmer YesCooler Yes

20 Background Removal Yes21 Bleed Through Prevention Yes22 Sharpness

(Lower <-> Higher) Yes

23 ZoomEnlargement Selected Original size / Copy sizeReduction Selected Original size / Copy sizeZoom 25 - 400% 1% Step

24 Maximum Tray CapacitiesPaper Tray Front Loading USA and Canada

LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)Other DestinationsA4 : 80 g/m2

Capacity 550 sheets x 2

Low Level Warning 4 steps (0% and Less than10%,50%,100%)

Sheet BypassLTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2Capacity 50 sheets

Auto Size Setting YesPaper Capacity (Std. Configuration = Tray 1 + 2 + Sheet Bypass)

1,150 sheets USA and CanadaLTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)Other DestinationsA4 : 80 g/m2

Paper Capacity (Max. Configuration = Std. + Tray 3 + 4)

2,250 sheets

25 Acceptable Paper WeightPaper Tray 18-28 lb / 64-105 g/m2

Sheet Bypass15-40 lb (Glossy)

90-121 lb (Index) / 55-220 g/m2

Duplex 18-28 lb / 64-105 g/m2

26 Multi Copy Range 999 sheets27 Memory

Main MemoryStd. 256 MBMax. 512 MB

Page MemoryStd. 256 MBMax. 640 MB


14APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Sort MemoryStd. 128 MBMax. 12 GB (HDD Option) DA-HD32

Fax MemoryStd. 3 MBMax. 64 MB - 1 GB (SD Card)

Hard Disk UnitCapacity 40 GB (Option) DA-HD32

28 Paper Stack CapacityInner Tray LTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2

These numbers may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient conditions by detecting Paper Full Sensor.

Std. 250 sheets

With Paper Transport (Opt.) 150 sheets

Outer Tray 250 sheets LTR : 24 lb / A4 : 90 g/m2

Over Flow Sensor Detection Yes29 Dimensions

(W x D x H) 25.8 x 32.5 x 36.7 in (656 x 825 x 933 mm) Includes projections

30 Operating Space

(W x D) 83.8 x 32.5 in(946 x 825 mm)

Includes Sheet Bypass Paper Tray

31 WeightScanner & i-ADF 85.8 lb (39 kg)Printer Unit 275 lb (125 kg)

Options1 Paper Feed System

System Console 1 (Tray 3) YesDA-DS320(550 sheets x 1)

Paper Size Detection Manual (Control Panel)

Low Level Paper Warning 4 steps (0% and Less than10%, 50%, 100%)

System Console 2 (Tray 3/4) YesDA-DS321(550 sheets x 2)

Paper Size Detection Manual (Control Panel)

Low Level Paper Warning 4 steps (0% and Less than10%, 50%, 100%)

2 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Yes DA-FS3253 Punch Unit for DA-FS325 Yes DA-SP414 1-Bin Finisher Yes DA-FS3205 Exit Tray (Outer) Yes Not available with Finisher.

Number of Bins 1Face Up / Face Down Face DownBin Capacity 250 sheets LTR / A4Multi Tray Function Yes 2 way

6 Paper Transport Unit Yes To be used for Exit Tray (Outer) and Finisher.

7 Counter


15APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Key Counter Capability No

Mechanical Total Counter Yes Supplied as a Service Part forUSA and Canada.

8 MemoryMain Memory 256 MB 256 MB x 1Page Memory 256 MB 128 MB x 2

Hard Disk Drive Unit (HDD) 40 GB For 1000 Address, additional Sorting Memory, etc.

Sort MemoryStd. 128 MBMax. 12 GB (with HDD Option) DA-HD32

SD Memory Card 64 MB - 1 GB

For Fax/Internet Fax Memory & PS3.Use Genuine SD Memory Cards only.

Features1 Automatic Features

Auto Magnification Selection YesAuto Paper Selection YesAuto Paper Tray Selection Yes

Auto Start No Reservation while Power On Initializing

Energy SaverStandby ModePower Saving Mode Yes (65 W)Sleep Mode Yes (25 W) Turns Off the Heater PowerOff Mode Copying No

Remote Diagnostic Yes

Requires the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG320) option, or the Internet Fax / E-MAIL Module (DA-NF320) option.

2 Additional FeaturesPhoto Mode Yes 256 steps

Original Detection Release Yes Manually overridden when using the Original Size keys.

Edit / EffectsBook Mode YesEdge Mode YesMargin Mode YesX-Y Zoom Yes 25 - 400%Stamping

Page, Date, Issue Yes Available only when using the ADF.

2-Sided Copy YesInverse Mode (Negative / Positive)

No

Centering Mode Yes With Digital Sky Shot


16APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Mirror Mode No

Image Overlay Yes (1 Image) Max 12 Images with HDD Option

Image Repeat YesOthers (Inverting ADF & ADU)

2-Page Copy Mode Yes LDR → LTR x 2(A3 → A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)

2 in 1 Yes4 in 1 Yes6 in 1 Yes For USA and Canada

8 in 1 Yes For EU and Other Destinations

Booklet Mode YesCopy from four 1-Sidedpages to 1 Booklet Modesheet.

Duplex Copy1→2 Yes2→1 Yes2→2 YesBook→2 Yes

1st Page BLANK Yes 1 → 2/2 → 1/2 → 2 1st Page IMAGE Yes Book → 2

Image Rotation (90 or 270 °) YesElectronic Sorting YesRotation Sorting YesInsertion Job

Cover Mode YesAvailable when using the i-ADF.Page Insertion Mode Yes

OHP Interleave Mode YesPresentation Mode No

Department Counter Yes 1,000 DepartmentsADF

Multi Size Feed Yes

Same Paper Width;LDR and LTR, LGL and LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and B5, A4-R and A5

JOB Build and SADF Mode YesOriginal Counter No

Job Memory Yes 10 Jobs in MemoryJob Time Display YesConcurrent Copy Yes 12 Concurrent Copy JobsTandem Copy Mode NoRemote Copy Mode NoScan Once Print Many Mode YesJob Completion Notice YesProof Copy Mode YesWeekly Timer Yes


17APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Function Mode YesInterrupt YesElectronic Counter YesDigital Sky Shot Mode YesCheck / Slip Mode Yes

3 Control PanelDisplay Color VGA Wide Touch Panel LCD

Status Lamp YesGREEN : Data & ActiveRED/Yellow : Caution &

WarningKey

Energy Saver YesCopy YesFax YesScan / Email YesPrint YesInterrupt YesFunction Mode YesReset YesKeypad YesStart YesStop YesClear Yes

Mode Change Yes Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax and Internet Fax Mode

LCD Main Indication

Message Language (Default)

English (American) For USA and Canada

Specified Language For EU and Other Destinations

Original Size / Image Indication

Yes (without Image)

Paper Size / Image Indication

Yes (without Image)

Paper Tray Selection YesSelected Paper Tray / Tray Status Yes

Original Mode Selection Yes Text / Text-Photo / PhotoCopy Density Selection YesSetting Confirmation YesFunction Classification YesZoom Magnification YesNumber of Copies YesJOB Build and SADF / Multi Size Feed Mode Yes

Error Code YesFinishing YesWarning Indicators Yes


18APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Add Toner YesToner Waste Container Full Yes

Paper Indicator Yes 0% and less than 10%, 50%, 100%

Add Paper(Under 50 sheets) No

Paper Jam Indication YesPaper Jam Location YesService Alert Call YesUser Error YesMachine Error YesHistory of Jam Errors Yes

4 Main Unit

Total Counter Yes (Electronic)Mechanical Counter:Supplied as a Service Part forUSA and Canada.

Max. Weight of Documents on the Platen Glass 11.02 lb (5 kg)

ADF with Document Guide YesClip Pocket NoOperating Instructions Pocket NoWarning / Caution Label Specified Language

5 Optical SystemOriginal Detection Method Reflective Photo Sensor TypeScanning Method 600 dpi CCDMechanical Multi Copy Mode No

6 Process SystemToner

Black 28 k Image Coverage 5%, Letter/A4, Continuous PrintColor: C, M, Y 20 k

Drum LifeBlack 39 k Color : Black = 8 : 2,

Letter/A4, 4 pages/job.Color: C, M, Y 36 k

Toner Waste Container 28 kColor : Black = 8 : 2,Image Coverage 5%, Letter/A4, 4 pages/job.

Developer Life 480 k Change as Developer UnitEfficiency

1 ProductivityADF Productivity (LTR / A4)

ADF 100%i-ADF 100%


19APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

ADU Copy Productivity(LTR / A4) Throughput

When exiting to lower Inner Tray; paper supplied from 1st Tray, and LSU is ready.

Transport Method Stack less1→2 (Mono / Color)

1 copy 50% / 60%5 copies 85% / 85% 80% / 85%10 copies 90% / 90%

PM Cycle1 PM Cycle

Major PM 120 kMinor PM (Cleaning) N/A

Packing Configuration1 Packing Dimension

(W x D x H)

Including the Shipping Pallet

Scanner & i-ADF Unit 30.7 x 35.4 x 20.9 in (780 x 900 x 532 mm)

Printer Unit 32.9 x 35.0 x 34.4 in (835 x 890 x 875 mm)

2 Packing WeightScanner & i-ADF Unit 123.2 lb (56 kg)Printer Unit 321.2 lb (146 kg)

3 AccessoriesProcess Unit YesDeveloper YesToner NoToner Waste Container YesOuter Tray No OptionOperating Instructions Yes

Power Supply

1 Power Requirement

110V, 120V, 60 Hz Single phase 100 VAC Power Supply

220 - 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz Single phase 220 VAC Power Supply

2 Power Consumption Less than 1500 WAmbient Conditions

1 Temperature 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%

3 SafetyUL1950-1 / CSA C22.2 No. 950-1 For USA and Canada

EN60950-1 For EU and Other Destinations

4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant

5 EMI Class A computing device in FCC Rules Part 15 and 18 For USA and Canada

6 Lead Free Solder (PbF) This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) PCBs

Refer to the Parts Manual for details


20APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.2. Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions1.2.1. Fax Function

ItemsDescription

RemarksDP-C262 DP-C322

Main Specifications1 Compatibility G3 ITU-T Std & Non-Std2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line only3 Leased Line Port No4 V.24 Line Port No5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4kbps T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter6 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)

9 Transmission Speed Approx. 2 sec ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std Resolution)

10Communication Resolution dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm)

Transmission Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi

Reception Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi

600 dpi communication is only available between T.30 compliant machines.

Scanner Mechanism1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen)2 Scanning Speed (ADF)

Resolution Vertical Horizontal

A4, Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal Direction.Excluding Initializing Time and ADF slipping factor.

Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm)

1.0 sec 0.7 secFine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm)S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) dpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm) 2.0 sec 1.4 sec

600dpi: 600 x 6003 Scanning Speed (Platen)

Resolution Vertical Horizontal600dpi: 600 x 600 2.0 sec 1.4 sec

4Scanning Resolutiondpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm)

Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)600dpi 600 x 600 dpi

5 Document Size (Max.) ADF: Ledger / A3

21APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6 Effective Scanning Width LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)7 A3 Size TX/RX Yes Conforms to ITU-T A38 Reduction XMT Yes A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4

9 ADF Capacity 70 sheets

Face-Up, feed from top pageUSA and CanadaLTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2)Other DestinationsA4 : 80 g/m2

10 Collation Stack Yes Face DownPrinter Mechanism

1 Recording Method LP

2 Recording Speed 26 ppm (A4 Horizontal)

32 ppm (A4 Horizontal)

Recording Speed attained after the 1st copy.

3 Recording Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi

4 Recording Paper Size Ledger / Legal / Letter / A3 / B4 / A4 / A5

Invoice : Not supported.Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size for N. American models. If A3 is received, approx. 1" of image on both edges are not printed on the Ledger size paper.

5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A36 Recording Paper Capacity 1,150 sheets Optional max. 2,250 sheets7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down

Fax Memory

1 Standard Memory 3 MB Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)

2 Optional Memory 64 MB-1 GB SD Memory CardDual Operation

1 Multi Task Operation Yes2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes

4 Number of Memory Job Files Yes Max. 70 files

Dialing/Telephone Features

1 Auto Dialers 200 Stations

Plus an additional 800 stations available to select from, when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is installed.

2 Phone Book Directory Search Dialing Yes

3 Total Auto Dialers 270 Stations 200 Address Book + 70 Full Number Dialing

4 Program Dials 125 Max. Tel Number Digits 36

6 Max. Station Name Characters 15

7 Full Number Dialing (Buffered Dialing) Yes Max. 70 stations

ItemsDescription


22APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8 Direct Dialing(Monitor Dialing) Yes Voice mode

9 Automatic Redialing Yes

Default setting is up to 5 times at 3 min. intervals, however, if a busy line is not detected, it will redial only 1 time.(See Fax Service Mode 1, Parameter No. 043 & 044)

10 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button11 Line Monitor Speaker Yes12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only13 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF14 Pulse to Tone Change Yes15 Flash Key Yes16 Handset No

Transmission Features1 Direct Transmission Yes2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission

3 Quick Memory Transmission Yes

4 Multi-Station Transmission (Sequential Broadcasting) Yes Max. 270 stations

5 Direct Deferred Transmission No ADF Deferred Transmission

6 Deferred Transmission Yes

7 Deferred Multi-Station Transmission Yes

8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes 1 File

9 Priority Memory Transmission No

10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)

11 90 Degree Rotation Transmission Yes

12 Cover Sheet Yes13 Confidential Mail Box No14 Multi-Copy Transmission No

15 Memory Back-Up YesFAX : Back-up with Flash Memory Copy / Printer : No Back-up with

D-RAM16 Duplex Scanning Yes With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

ItemsDescription


23APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Reception Features1 Substitute Reception Yes

2 Fixed Reduction Yes LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment

3 Auto Reduction Yes LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment

4 Overlap Printing Yes Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)5 Receive to Memory Yes

6 Distinctive Ring Detector (DRD) No

7 90 Degree Rotation Reception Yes

8 Duplex Printing YesPolling

1 Polling Yes2 Turnaround Polling No3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 270 stations4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 timers

5 Deferred Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 50 timers / 270 stations

6 Direct Polling Tx No7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File8 Preset Polling Password Yes

9 Temporary Polling Password Yes

10 Continuous Polling YesConvenience

1 Panel Display Wide Touch Panel Display2 Voice Contact No3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes

Certainty1 Verification Stamp Yes2 Header / Total Page Print Yes3 Transaction Journal Yes 200 Transactions / with View Mode4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes

List Printouts1 One-Touch List -2 ABBR. No. List -3 Program List Yes4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List5 Fax Parameter List Yes6 File List Yes With View Mode7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes8 Directory Sheet No

ItemsDescription


24APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Identifications1 Logo Yes 25 Characters2 Multiple Logo No3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits

Special Communications1 Password XMT / RCV No2 Selective Reception No TSI Check3 Relay XMT Request No4 Relay XMT Center No5 Confidential XMT / Polling No6 Confidential Center No7 Mailbox XMT / Polling No8 Mailbox Center No9 File XMT No

10 Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer 11 Sub-Address XMT Yes T. Routing 12 Sub-Address RCV No13 OMR-XMT No

Standards

1 PSTNFCC Part 68: 1997 /

Industry CanadaNo. CS-03: Issue 8 1996

Others1 Fax Access Code Yes2 PIN Code Access Yes3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 5 Files4 Department Code Yes 1000 Departmental Codes5 Power Saver Mode Yes6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes

7 Remote Diagnostic Function Yes

8 Check & Call Function Yes9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No

ItemsDescription


25APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.2.2. Printer Function

ItemsDescription


Interface1 Centronics Parallel I/F No

2 LAN (Network) Ethernet 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX

3 USB Port Yes USB 2.0 High/Full Speed Support4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire

Printer Function

1 Printing SizeLDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada

A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4, FLS For EUA3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations

2 Sheet Bypass Yes3 Stapling Yes Requires Optional Finisher4 Printing Resolution (dpi)

Black & White 600 x 600 / 1200 x 1200 1200 x 1200: Requires Optional Page MemoryColor 600 x 600 / 1200 x 1200

5 Monochrome Printing without Color Tone Yes

6 Direct Print from SD Memory CardTIFF Yes Black & White onlyJPEG YesPDF Yes Requires PS OptionWord, Power Point No For USA and Canada

(From Sept. 2005)7 Direct Print from PCMCIA/

PC Card AdapterTIFF Yes Black & White onlyJPEG YesPDF Yes Requires PS OptionWord, Power Point No For USA and Canada

(From Sept. 2005)

8 OSWin 98 / Win Me /

Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.3

MAC 8.6-10.3 is PS only.

9 GDI No10 PCL6 Yes

11 PS3 Yes Requires optional Printer Controller Module.

12 Duplex Printing Yes Custom Size/Postcard Size is not available.

13 Collation Stack Yes14 Status Monitor No15 Network Printing Yes16 Network Status Monitor Yes17 Smoothing Yes

26APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:1. PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.2. PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.

18 Applicable PC IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC MAC is PS only.

19 Multi-Task OperationPrinting while Fax-XMT from Memory Yes

Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Yes

Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Yes

Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing Yes

20 Output to a separate tray for Printing, Fax, Copy Yes

21 Font Yes22 Mailbox Requires Optional HDD Unit.

Max. 100 Users.Max. 100 Jobs (mailboxes) for each User ID.

Check then Print YesMailbox YesSecure Mailbox Yes

ItemsDescription


27APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.2.3. Network Scanner Function

ItemsDescription


Interface1 Centronics Parallel I/F No


3 USB Port No Port is used for Printing only.4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire

Network Scanning Function1 Scanning Device Color CCD Using the i-ADF / Platen2 Coding Scheme MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG

3 File Format Multi-page TIFF / JPEG / PDF High compression PDF

TIFF file can be converted to a PDF file with the PDMS Software

4 Tone ScaleBlack & White 256 stepsColor 256 steps / each Color

5 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3

6 Scanning Resolution(dpi) 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 Selectable, 600 dpi Optical Scanner

7 OS Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP

8 2-Sided Scanning Yes9 PC Scan (TWAIN) No

10 Completion Notice YesAuto Pop-up on the PC Screen (requires Network Status Monitor - installed with PDMS Software)

11 Protocol TCP/IP, Non-StdNetwork Scanner Address Features

1 Network Registration(Using Panasonic-DMS Communication Utility)

120Independent additional 180 addresses for Network Scanner.Plus Fax/Internet Fax 200, an additional 800 addresses available to select from, when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is installed.

2 Touch Panel Registration 60

28APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.2.4. Internet Fax Function

ItemsDescription


Main Specifications1 Communication Protocols SMTP / POP32 Max. Modem Speed N/A3 Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH4 File Format TIFF


Scanner Mechanism1 Max. Document Size Ledger, A32 Effective Scanning Width 11.4 in (289 mm)

3 Scanning Resolutiondpi x lpi (dot/mm x lines/mm)

Std. 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)

406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)600dpi 600 x 600 dpi

LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 (dot/mm x lines/mm) Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting

Printer Mechanism1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi2 Effective Recording Width 11.4 in (289 mm)

Transmission Features

1 Multi-Task Operation Yes Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and LAN is available.

2 Memory Transmission Yes

3 Sequential Multi-Station Transmission Yes

4 Simultaneous Multi-Station Transmission Yes Max. 270 stations

(200 Address Book + 70)5 Sender Selection Yes

6 G3 / Email Mixed Broadcasting Yes

7 Deferred Transmission Yes8 Fax Forward Yes9 Sub-Address RCV Yes

10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Yes “All” or “From / To / Subject” onlySubject Line Random Entry

29APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

LAN Features

1 Internet Fax Communication Yes A3 Communication is available with Parameter setting.

2 Internet Mail Reception Yes3 Internet Fax Server Features

Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes Internet Fax → Internet Fax → G3 Fax

Email Relay XMT Yes PC → Internet Fax → G3 FaxReceived Fax / Email Forward

Yes Local print available

PC to FAX Transmission No

Inbound Routing Yes Using Sub-AddressLocal print available

Phone Book Registration from PC Yes Via Email

4 Internet Fax Parameters Registration via Email Yes

5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Yes With MDN 6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi7 Network Printing

LPR / LPD YesGDI NoPCL6 Yes

PS3 Yes Requires optional PostScript 3 Controller Module.

8 DHCP Client Yes

9 LDAP Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF ViewerCertainty

1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes Email from RCV side to Panasonic Internet Fax's only

ID1 Email Address Yes

ItemsDescription


30APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.2.5. SD Memory Card on the SC PCB (Not the Front Slot)

SD Memory Card Formatting Structure and Partitioning by Function

Note:1. This function is available only when an SD Memory Card is installed on the PCB (Not in the Front Slot),

and is used only for G3 Fax / Internet Fax and for storing PS (PostScript) Fonts.2. The SD Memory Card is formatted automatically for the Fax/Internet Fax memory when the Power

Switch is turned ON. This format is not compatible with the PC's memory.3. Max. Number of Pages is based on ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Standard Resolution).4. G3 Fax / Internet Fax XMT memory storage = Max. 255 pages/file, Max. 50 Files.5. G3 Fax / Internet Fax RCV memory storage = Max. 999 pages. 6. Max. page number may differ depending on the manufacturer of the SD Memory Card.

(Recommended Card Size is 64 MB or 128 MB).7. The Color Image is stored into the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32).8. When the SD Memory Card is formatted by the machine, it can not be used for the PC's memory. If the

Card need to be used on the PC again, it must be reformatted by using a PC tool which is availablefrom the Web site below.http://panasonic.jp/support/audio/sd/download/sd_formatter_e.html

SD Memory Card Formatting StructureSD Memory Size 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GBMax. Number of Pages 2,300 6,900

Memory Partition Usage by FunctionFunction 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GBG3 Fax / Internet Fax YesPS (PostScript) Yes

31APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.3. System Combination:

Scanner Unit

Main PC Board(SC PC Board)

- USB Interface

- 10/100 Ethernet Interface

Tray 2 (550 Sheet Paper)

1-Bin Finisher,

1-Bin Saddle-Stitch

Finisher

or

Exit Tray (Outer)

Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

ADF PC Board

Option

Standard Configuration

Color Panel(PNL PC Board)

Main Memory256 MB x1 128 MB x 2

Page Memory

Used for Fax, Internet Fax and PS3 Fonts

Used for SD Print, Scan Data, andFirmware Update

<Front Slot>

PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter

Used for Print andScan Data

SDCard

SDCard

Printer Controller Module (PS3) Option

<On the SC PCB>

Hard Disk Drive Unit Option

Internet Fax Module Option

Fax CommunicationBoard Option

Network Scanner/Email Module Option

Network Scanner/Email Module for Document Distribution System Option

Automatic Duplex Unit

Paper Transport Unit

System Console 1 (550 Sheet Paper x 1)

or

System Console 2 (550 Sheet Paper x 2)

Tray 1 (550 Sheet Paper)

EC PC Board

SCN PC Board

Scan Memory128 MB x1

CST PC Board

TRU PC Board

Card Reader(SDI PC Board)

- PCL 6 Controller

32APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.4. Options List Options

Note:1. PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.2. PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.3. The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales

company for details.4. Genuine SD Memory Cards depict an SD Logo on their label.

(Panasonic's 512 MB Sample is shown below).

Option Name Option Number RemarksSystem Console 1 (Tray x 1) DA-DS320System Console 2 (Tray x 2) DA-DS321Stand for 2-Tray Configuration DA-DA322 Available for Specified Destinations1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher DA-FS325Punch Unit for DA-FS325 DA-SP411-Bin Finisher DA-FS320Exit Tray (Outer) DA-XT320Paper Transport Unit DA-FK320Fax Communication Board DA-FG320 G3 Fax CommunicationInternet Fax Module DA-NF320 Internet Fax CommunicationPrinter Controller Module DA-MC320 Print Controller for PS3Network Scanner/Email Module DA-NS320Network Scanner/Email Module for Document Distribution System DA-NS321

Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD32Page Memory 256MB DA-PMN56 128 MB x 2 pcsMain Memory 256MB DA-EMN56 256 MB x 1 pcsDocument Distribution System DA-WR10Accounting Software DA-WA10 Accounting FunctionRemote Operation Panel Software DA-UD320 For USA onlyADF Handle for Accessibility DA-UD321

SD Memory Card ---- Up to 1 GBUse Genuine SD Memory Cards only

33APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Supplies

Note:The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales company for details.

Part Name Part Number RemarksToner Cartridge (Black) DQ-TUN28KToner Cartridge (Cyan) DQ-TUN20CToner Cartridge (Magenta) DQ-TUN20MToner Cartridge (Yellow) DQ-TUN20YDrum Unit (Black) DQ-UHN36K Drum used for BlackDrum Unit (Color) DQ-UHN30 Drum used for Cyan, Magenta, and YellowToner Waste Container DQ-BFN45

Staple CartridgeFQ-SS32 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS320DQ-SS35 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS325

Verification Stamp ---- Supplied as a Service Part, refer to the Parts Manual

34APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Option Configuration

A D UP

rin

ter

Sca

nn

eri-A

DF

DA

-FS

325

DA

-FS

320

DA

-XT

320

DA

-SP

41

1-B

in F

inis

her

Exi

t T

ray

(Ou

ter)

1-B

in S

add

le-S

titc

hF

inis

her

Pu

nch

Un

it

Pap

erT

ran

spo

rtU

nit

Fax

Co

mm

un

icat

ion

Bo

ard

DA

-FG

320

550

x 2

550

+ C

abin

et

DA

-DS

320

DA

-DS

321

Sys

tem

Co

nso

le

Sys

tem

Co

nso

le 2

Cab

inet

DA

-DA

322

Sta

nd

fo

r 2-

Tra

yC

on

fig

ura

tio

n

Pag

e M

emo

ry25

6MB

(128

MB

2 p

cs

HD

DU

nit

Mai

nM

emo

ry25

6MB

Fo

r 12

00d

pi /

Lo

ng

Siz

e D

oc.

Pri

nti

ng

Dir

ect

pri

nt

of

PD

FF

on

t E

xpan

sio

n

DA

-MC

320

Acc

ou

nti

ng

So

ftw

are

DA

-WA

10

DA

-E

MN

56

Net

wo

rkS

can

ner

/Em

ail

Mo

du

le f

or

DD

SD

A-N

S32

1

DA

-H

D32

DA

-PM

N56

Net

wo

rkS

can

ner

(Har

dw

are

Key

)

Imag

eM

emo

ry12

8MB

Net

wo

rk S

can

ner

/Em

ail M

od

ule

DA

-NS

320

Net

wo

rkS

can

ner

+D

DS

Imag

eM

emo

ry12

8MB

DD

S S

oft

war

eD

A-W

R10

So

(Ad

dit

ion

al)

rt M

emo

ryIn

tern

et F

axM

od

ule

DA

-NF

320

1000

Ad

dre

ss B

oo

k

Op

tio

n C

on

fig

ura

tio

nO

pti

on

Co

nfi

gu

rati

on

SD

Mem

ory

Car

d

(64M

B-

1GB

)

Fax

/ In

Mem

ory

(A

dd

itio

nal

)te

rnet

Fax

DA

-FK

320

Pri

nte

r C

on

tro

ller

Mo

du

le

35APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.5. External View1. Standard Configuration

32.52 in (826 mm)

36.2

2 in

(920

mm

)

23.62 in (600 mm)

Manufacturer's Name and Address Factory ID

Complies with FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J

(For USA Only)

Front View Right ViewLeft View Rear View

Top View

CAUTION!

Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.

Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.

For USA, Canada and Europe For Other Destinations

36APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. With Optional System Console and Finisher Configuration

1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)

1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325)

46.73

in (1

187 m

m)

10.51

in (2

67 m

m)

14.84 in (377 mm)

Front View Right ViewLeft View

Top View

Rear View

46.73

in (1

187 m

m)

10.51

in (2

67 m

m)

26.38 in (670 mm)

Front View Right ViewLeft View

Top View

Rear View

37APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. Space Requirements With Options

Main Unit + Exit Tray (Outer)

Main Unit

Main Unit + 1 Bin Finisher

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

45.14 in (1147mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

11.45 in (291 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

Main Unit + 1 Bin Saddle Finisher

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

59.44 in (1510 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

10.83 in (275 mm)

3.46 in (88 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

69.86 in (1776 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

14.84 in (377 mm)

9.88 in (251 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

86.48 in (2197 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

11.81 in (300 mm)

29.53 in (750 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

38APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.5.1. Serial Number ContentsThe contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:

2 3 4 5 61

Sequential Production Number5-Digit Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 unitsA0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units(Letters "I" and "O" are skipped)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation(Except Letters "I" and "O")

For Example:

= DP-C262-PU= DP-C322-PU

Production Facility

Production YearStarting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year isrepresented as: A ~ T

A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)B : 02 L : 12C : 03 M : 13D : 04 N : 14E : 05 O : 15F : 06 P : 16G : 07 Q : 17H : 08 R : 18I : 09 S : 19J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)

Production Month

A : January G : JulyB : February H : AugustC : March I : SeptemberD : April J : OctoberE : May K : NovemberF : June L : December

7 8 9 10 11

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

44L44H = DP-C262-PB451

= DP-C322-PB452

(For USA and Canada) (For UK)

39APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.6. Control Panel

DP-C262/C322

40APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.7. Fans

1.8. Motors

Pressure Roller Fan

Right Cover Fan

IH Fan

LSU Fan

LVPS Fan

IH Driver Fan

Toner Bottle Fan

Lift Motor (Tray 1)

Lift Motor (Tray 2)

Lift Motor(Tray 3)

Lift Motor(Tray 4)

ADF Paper Feed Motor

ADF Feed Motor

Drum Motor 1

Paper Transport UnitMotor

Scanning Motor

Bottle Motor

Belt Motor

Developer Motor 1 Developer Motor 2

Optional Paper FeedMotor

STR Motor

IH Core Motor

Paper Feed Motor

Drum Motor 2

FTR and LSU Shutter Motor

Fuser Motor

41APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.9. Sensors

< Figure A >

Paper Size Sensor

Platen Cover (ADF) OpenSensor

Platen Cover (ADF) AngleSensor

ADF Original Length Sensor 2


ADF Original Width Sensor 1


Paper Path Sensor

Outer Exit Sensor

Paper Transport CoverOpen Sensor

Sheet Bypass Size Sensor

Sheet Bypass NP Sensor

ADF Paper Pass Sensor

ADF Registration Sensor 2



ADF Cover Open Sensor

ADF Original Sensor

Home Position Sensor

Toner Waste ContainerDetection Sensor

Toner Waste ContainerFull Detection Sensor

Paper Tray Sensor (Tray 1)




Right 4th Cover Open Sensor

Right 3rd Cover Open Sensor

Intermediate Transfer BeltInitial Point Sensor

Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 1)NP Sensor (Tray 1)

Paper Path Sensor (Tray 1)

Paper Path Sensor (ADU 0)Inner Exit SensorFuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor

Fuser Enter SensorRight Cover Open SensorRegistration SensorOHP Film SensorPaper Path Sensor (ADU 2)

Paper Path Sensor (ADU 1)

Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 3)

NP Sensor (Tray 3)


Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 2)NP Sensor (Tray 2)Paper Path Sensor (Tray 2)

Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 4)

NP Sensor (Tray 4)


Intermediate Roller Sensor

Optional Intermediate RollerSensor

ADF Exit Sensor

Temperature & HumiditySensor

FTR Cam Sensor

STR Cam Sensor

Color Deviation Sensor

Density & Color Deviation Sensor

Drum Unit Detection Sensor

Fuser Unit Sensors (See Figure A)

Paper Full Sensor

IH Core Sensor 2 IH Core Sensor 1

Thermistor (HR1)

Thermistor (HR3)

Thermistor (HR2)

Fuser Roller Rotating Encoder 1


Thermistor (PR)

Fuser Pressure Release Sensor 1


Fuser Entrance Sensor

42APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1.10. Clutches and Switches

1.11. PC Board

Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 1)Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 1)Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 2)Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray2)Pickup Roller Solenoid(Tray 3)

Paper Feed Roller Clutch(Tray 3)

Pickup Roller Solenoid(Tray 4)

Paper Feed Roller Clutch(Tray 4)Optional Intermediate Roller Clutch

Intermediate Roller ClutchPickup Roller Solenoid(Sheet Bypass)

Paper Feed Roller Clutch(Sheet Bypass)

ADF Inverting Roller Clutch 1ADF Inverting Roller Clutch 2

ADF Pinch Solenoid

Control Panel Power Switch

ADF Pinch Solenoid

Front Cover Detection Switch

Front Cover Interlock Switch

Front Cover RightDetection Switch

Right Cover Detection Switch 2

Right Lower CoverInterlock Switch 2

Right Upper Cover Interlock Switch 1Right Upper Cover Interlock Switch 2Right Upper Cover Detection Switch

Right Lower Cover Interlock Switch 2

2 WAY Inverting Roller Clutch2 WAY Ordinary Roller Clutch

ADU Roller Clutch 2ADU Roller Clutch 1

ADU Paper Guide Solenoid

Registration Roller Clutch

ADF Paper Feed Roller ClutchADF Registration Roller Clutch 1ADF Registration Roller Clutch 2

ADF Exit Roller ClutchADF Inverting Roller Solenoid

Paper Exit Guide SolenoidPaper Transport Unit Roller Clutch

Main Power Switch

Intermediate Roller Clutch

SDI PCBLCD Inverter PCB

PNL3 PCB

PNL1 PCB

PNL2 PCB

PNL4 PCB

DX PCB

ADU PCBDC PCB

PCL PCBDC PCB

HDD

FCB PCB

IH PCB

MOTDRV PCB

SC PCB

EC PCB

Connect PCBHVPS1 PCB

HVPS2 PCB

HVPS1 PCB

Optional LVPS PCB

RLB PCB

NFL PCB

LVPS PCB

CCD PCB

Inverter PCB

ADF PCBSCN PCB

AFE PCB

SDI PCB

CST PCB

TRU PCB

43APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

2 Disassembly Instructions2.1. General Disassembly

Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.

44APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

2.2. Disassembly Instructions2.2.1. Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit

(1) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.(2) Clean the Exit Roller (814).

(3) Open the ADF Cover.

(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed Roller (508), Separation Roller (610) and Registration Roller 1 (817) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

45APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(6) Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft (505) Assembly by pulling towards the arrow direction.

(7) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (508).

(8) Move the Pickup Bracket.(9) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H7).

(10) Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft (510).(11) Remove the Pickup Roller (511).

46APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(12) Remove 3 Screws (X8).(13) Remove the Lower Opening and Shutting

Guide 1 (601).

(14) Remove the Separation Roller Assembly.

(15) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

Note:When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is installed properly as illustrated.

47APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(16) Remove the Separation Roller Shaft (607).(17) Remove the Separation Roller (610).Note:

When reassembling the Separation Roller, make sure that the Yellow Tooler's Die on the side of the roller is positioned as illustrated (facing the Front Frame).

(18) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2 Assembly.

(19) Clean the Inverting Roller (809) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(20) Open the ADF Unit.(21) Remove 2 Screws (H5).(22) Remove the ADF Front Cover (418).(23) Close the ADF Unit.

Note:Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front Cover.

48APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(24) Remove 1 Screw (J2).(25) Loosen 3 Screws (S6).(26) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly.(27) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (627).

(28) Remove 3 Screws (5M).(29) Remove the Front ADF Gear Bracket (632)

Assembly.

(30) Remove the 16T Gear (825).

(31) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(32) Remove the Shaft Mounting Bracket (622).

49APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(33) Release the ADF Cover Arm (624).(34) Remove the ADF Cover (502) Assembly.

Note:When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

Note:When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make sure that the lever is positioned on the inside of the ADF Cover.The illustration on the left shows the incorrect lever position.

(35) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(36) Remove the Registration Guide 2 (721).

50APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(37) Clean the Registration Roller 2 (818).

(38) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(39) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(40) Loosen 1 Screw.(41) Remove the Registration Limiter Bracket (829)

as illustrated.

(42) Remove the Limiter Joint (828).(43) Remove the Registration Roller Torque

Limiter (827).(44) Remove the Registration Joint (825).

51APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(45) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G6).(46) Remove the Clutch 1 (801).

(47) Remove 2 D8 Bearings (822).

(48) Remove the Registration Roller 2 (818).

(49) Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 (1119) and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 (1120).

Caution:Do not remove the illustrated 3 Screws.

52APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Note:When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1 and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on the marks as illustrated.

(50) Open the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide Assembly.

(51) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.(52) Lower the Inverting Guide Assembly.

(53) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(54) Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly.

Mark

Registration Guide Sheet

Adhesive DoubleCoated Tape

53APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(55) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(56) Remove the Lower Exit Guide (716).

(57) Clean the Transport Roller (816).

54APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.2. Scanner Unit

(1) Open the ADF.

<Cleaning the Scanner>

(2) Clean the White Reference Sheet and Scanning Pad with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(3) Clean the Scanning (S) Glass and Platen (L) Glass with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

<Scanning Lamp>

(4) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(5) Remove the Right Platen Cover (104).

55APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(6) Remove the Glass Assembly.

(7) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(8) Remove 2 Screws (X3).(9) Remove the Heat Sink Plate (1608).

(10) Move the Scanning Lamp to a position where it can be easily replaced.

(11) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(12) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(13) Remove the Scanning Lamp.

56APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(14) Turn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down.(15) Disconnect the Flat Harness on the Inverter PC

Board.(16) Remove the Inverter PC Board Assembly.

(17) Disconnect the Lamp Harness.(18) Remove the Scanning Lamp (1615).

(19) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(20) Remove the Inverter PC Board (1612).

Note:Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is reinstalled properly as illustrated.

57APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<CCD Unit>

(21) Remove 8 Screws (X5).(22) Remove the CCD Cover (1627).

(23) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board.

(24) Remove 2 Screws (Y23).(25) Remove the CCD Unit (1631).

Important:

Before proceeding, make a note of the position of the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.

58APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(26) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the AFE PC Board.

(27) Remove 6 Screws (X5).(28) Remove the AFE PC Board (1630).

<Paper Size Sensor>

(29) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(30) Disconnect 2 Harnesses from the Sensors.(31) Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors 1 (1722).

(32) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(33) Disconnect the Harness from the Sensor.(34) Remove the Multi Beam Sensor 2 (1723).

59APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning Mirrors>

(35) Clean the Mirror 2 (1621) with a soft cloth,saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(36) Clean the Mirror 1 (1602) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

60APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<SCN PC Board>

(1) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(2) Remove the Center Scanner Cover (102).

(3) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SCN PC Board.

(4) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(5) Remove the SCN PC Board (6502).

<Scanning Motor>

(6) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(7) Remove the ADF Harness Holder (1517).

61APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(8) Disconnect the ADF Harness.

(9) Open the ADF Unit.(10) Remove 2 Screws (N6).(11) Loosen 2 Screws.(12) Remove the ADF Unit.

(13) Remove 4 Screws (S6).(14) Remove the Rear Platen Cover (101).

(15) Unhook and remove the Motor Spring (1708).

62APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(16) Disconnect the Harness.(17) Remove 2 Screws (Y21).(18) Remove the Motor Bracket Assembly.

(19) Remove the E-Ring (J7).(20) Remove the Reduction Gear (1711).

(21) Remove 2 Screws (Y16).(22) Remove the Scanning Motor (1713).

<Home Position Sensor>

(23) Disconnect the Harness.(24) Remove the Photo Sensor (401).

63APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Platen Cover (ADF) Angle Sensor, Platen Cover (ADF) Open Sensor>

(25) Disconnect the 2 Harnesses.(26) Remove the Photo Sensors (401).

Note:Ensure that the Sensor Harnesses are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

64APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.3. Control Panel Unit

<Replacing the Battery>

(1) Remove 1 Screw (X5).

(2) Remove the Battery Holder (1306).

(3) Replace the Battery (1330).(4) Reinstall the Battery Holder and

fasten it with 1 Screw.

CAUTION!

Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

* THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.

Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.

65APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Control Panel Unit>

(5) Remove 4 Black Screws (1218).

Note:This allows the removal of the Control Panel Unit in the following steps.

(6) Adjust the Control Panel to the 4th position.(7) Loosen 1 Screw (Y47).

(8) Loosen 1 Screw (Y47).(9) Remove the Back Panel Cover (1206).

(This step is for Euro only)

(10) Remove 2 Screws (X5).

66APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(11) Adjust the Control Panel to the 2nd position.(12) Unhook and remove the Damper Spring (1208).

(13) Remove the Control Panel Unit by pulling the Release Lever as illustrated.

(14) Remove the Control Panel Unit by pulling the Release Lever as illustrated.

(15) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the INV PC Board.

67APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(16) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.(17) Remove 1 Screw (X8).(18) Remove the Battery Holder (1306).(19) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(20) Remove the Release Lever (1305).(21) Remove 2 Screws (X1).(22) Remove the Lower Panel Cover (1304).

(23) Release the Harnesses from the 2 Harness Clamps.

(24) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the PNL 1 PC Board.

(25) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(26) Remove the INV PC Board (1327).(27) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(28) Remove the PNL 1 PC Board (6505).

(29) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(30) Remove the Panel Base and Guide Assembly

(1303).

68APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(31) Remove 1 Screw (X8).(32) Remove the PNL 4 PC Board (1333).(33) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(34) Remove the PNL 3 PC Board (1332).(35) Remove 4 Screws (X8).(36) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (1331).

(37) Remove 4 Screws (X8).(38) Remove the LCD Module (1326).

(39) Remove the Touch Panel (1325).

(40) Remove the Scanner Front Cover Assembly (1201).

69APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(41) Disconnect the Harness on the SDI PC Board.

(42) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(43) Remove the SDI Cover (1203) and SDI PC

Board (1217).

70APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.4. Fuser Unit

(1) Open the Right Side Upper Cover.

(2) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(3) Remove the Harness Cover 2 (4813).

(4) Disconnect the Harness.

(5) Loosen 2 Screws.(6) Remove the Fuser Unit (4815).

71APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(7) Unhook 2 Pressure Springs (5006).

(8) Remove 1 Black Screw (Y41).(9) Remove the Harness Cover 3 (4921).

(10) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(11) Remove 3 Black Screws (Y41).(12) Remove the Shaft Plate (4916).

72APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(13) Remove 3 Black Screws (Y41).(14) Remove the Shaft Plate (4916).

(15) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.

(16) Remove the used up Fuser Belt Unit (4926).

<Replacing the Fuser Belt Unit (4926) >

(17) Remove all the tapes and shipping material from the new Belt Unit.

(18) Remove the 2 Bands.

73APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(19) Remove the Protective Paper and Shipping materials.

(20) Remove 2 Pins.

(21) Install the New Fuser Belt Unit on the Fuser Main Unit.

(22) Hook 2 Pressure Springs.

(23) Reinstall 2 Black Screws.(24) ReInstall the Shaft Plate.(25) Reinstall 1 Black Screw.

74APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(26) Reinstall 2 Black Screws.(27) Reinstall the Shaft Plate.(28) Reinstall 1 Black Screw.

(29) Connect 2 Harnesses.

Note:Ensure that the Sensor Harnesses are reinstalledproperly as illustrated. Red Harness : “R” Carved Sensor Black Harness : “BK” Carved Sensor.

(30) Remove the Shipping Cover.

(31) Connect the 3 Harnesses.

75APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Note:When connecting, exercise care not to touch the Fuser Belt.

Note:Ensure that the Harnesses are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

(32) Reinstall the Connector Cover.(33) Reinstall 1 Black Screw.

<Install the Fuser Unit>

(34) Install the Fuser Unit.(35) Secure 2 Screws.(36) Connect the Harness.(37) Reinstall the Connector Cover.(38) Reinstall 1 Screw.(39) Close the Upper Right Side Cover.

Note:When reinstall the Fuser Belt Unit, resetting the PM Counter.Perform “F8-26” Fuser Belt Counter Reset. (F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count is also initializedby this operation)

76APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Replacing the Complete Fuser Unit>

(40) Remove all tapes and cushioning materials.(41) Remove the Shipping Cover.

(42) Remove the Protective Paper and Shipping materials.

<Installing the Complete Fuser Unit>

See the installation steps in this section.

Note:When reinstall the Complete Fuser Unit, resetting the PM Counter.Perform “F8-26” Fuser Belt Counter Reset, and “F8-27” Fuser Main Counter Reset. (F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count, and F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count are also initialized by this operation)

77APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.5. Auto Duplex Unit (ADU)

(1) Open the Jam Cover.(2) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray.

(3) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(4) Remove the Right Side Front Cover (206).(5) Remove 3 Screws (S6).(6) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (205).

(7) Open the Upper Right Side Cover.

<Cleaning the ADU 2nd Roller, Feed Roller and Exit Roller>

Clean the ADU 2nd Roller, Feed Roller and Exit Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

78APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ADU PC Board(CN403, CN404, CN405)

(9) Release 3 Harnesses from the Edge Saddle.

(10) Remove the Lower Dumper Bracket (2114).

(11) Remove the Dumper (2116).

(12) Open the Lower Right Side Cover.(13) Remove 1 Snap Ring (G6).(14) Remove the Hinge Pin (2103).

Note:When reinstalling or installing the Hinge Pin, take care not to hold it by its side.

79APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(15) Remove the ADU.

Note:When reinstalling the ADU, make sure that the Harnesses are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

(16) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(17) Remove the Exit Guide Bracket (2308).

80APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(18) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(19) Remove the Exit Guide Bracket (2308).

(20) Remove 3 Screws (X8).(21) Remove the Guide Cover (2307).

<Paper Path Sensor (ADU0)>

(22) Disconnect the Harness.(23) Remove the Photo Sensor (1809) Assembly.

(24) Remove 3 Screws (X8).(25) Remove the ADU Upper Guide (2207).

81APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the ADU 1st Roller>

Clean the ADU 1st Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(26) Remove 1 Screw (X3).

(27) Remove the Cover Knob (2202).

(28) Remove 9 Screws (X8).(29) Remove the Coating Clip (2219).

82APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(30) Remove the Harness Clamp (2218).

Note:When reinstalling the Harness Clamp, make sure to reinstall the harness Clamp properly as illustrated.

(31) Remove the ADU Cover (2201).

(32) Remove 5 Screws (X8).(33) Remove the Cover Plate (2203).

83APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(34) Remove 1 E-Ring (J7).(35) Remove the Latch (2210).(36) Remove the Left Latch Spring (2211).(37) Remove the Bushing (2213).(38) Remove the Latch Lever Shaft (2209)

Assembly.

(39) Release the Harness from the Clamps.(40) Remove 2 Screws (X4).(41) Remove the Right Cover Fan (2214).



Note:When reinstalling the ADU Plate Assembly to the ADU Cover, pull up the notch as illustrated.

Caution:When reinstalling the Cover, do not pinch the Harness with the Steel Plate.

84APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Note:When reinstalling the Cover, make sure that the harness band is reinstalled properly as illustrated.

85APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.6. Paper Exit Transportation

(1) Open the Right Side Upper Cover. (See sect. 2.2.4.)

(2) Remove the Fuser Unit. (See sect. 2.2.4.)(3) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(4) Remove the Top Cover (207).

(5) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ADU PC Board (CN401, CN402), and the intermediate connector.

(6) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(7) Remove the Paper Exit Unit.

Note:If the Paper Transport Unit Option is installed, remove the Paper Exit Unit by following the steps below.

(8) Remove 1 Screw (X5) by pushing the Flap downward as illustrated.

(9) Remove the Front Cover (7112).

86APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(10) Move the Paper Transport Unit slightly to the left by pulling the lock lever as illustrated.

(11) Remove the Paper Exit Unit (see the previous step).

<Paper Full Sensor>(12) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(13) Disconnect the Harness.(14) Remove the Photo Sensor (1918).

(15) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(16) Remove the Harness Guide (3216).(17) Disconnect the Harnesses.

(18) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(19) Remove the Clutch Bracket Assembly.

87APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(20) Remove the Arm Spring (3227).(21) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(22) Remove 2 Screws (Y16).(23) Remove the Clutch Bracket (3226).

(24) Remove the D Z27M1 Gear (3224).(25) Remove the Clutch Shaft (3225).

<Inner Exit Sensor>(26) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(27) Remove the Sensor Cover Assembly.


88APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the Exit Roller>

(30) Remove 1 Screw (Y1).(31) Remove the Exit Guide (227).

(32) Clean the Exit Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

89APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.7. Lower Right Side Cover Unit

(1) Remove the Right Front Cover. (See sect. 2.2.5.)

(2) Remove the Right Rear Cover. (See sect. 2.2.5.)

(3) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray Cover. (See sect. 2.2.8.)

(4) Open the Lower Right Side Cover. (See sect. 2.2.9.)

(5) Remove the Snap Ring. (See sect. 2.2.9.)(6) Remove the Cover Stay. (See sect. 2.2.9.)(7) Disconnect the Harness on the ADU PC Board

(CN406).(8) Release the lock lever by pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow.

(9) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit by pushing the lock lever in the direction shown by the arrow.

Note:When disassembling, exercise care not to damage the Second Transfer Roller (STR).

90APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the OHP Detection Reflector>

Clean the OHP Detection Reflector with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

Note:When reinstalling the Lower Right Side Cover Unit, pull the lock lever to the locked position in the direction illustrated by the arrow.

(10) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(11) Remove 2 Screws (Y24).(12) Remove the Gear Assembly.

Note:When reinstalling the Gear Assembly, make sure that the convex part of the gear bracket and clutch are properly positioned as illustrated.

91APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(13) Disconnect the Harness.(14) Remove 1 Screw (Y24).(15) Remove the Sensor Bracket (2825) Assembly.

<Right Cover Open Sensor>

(16) Remove the Photo Sensor (1819).

(17) Remove 2 Screws (Y16).(18) Remove Guide Bracket Assembly.

(19) Remove the STR Unit (2535) as illustrated.

92APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(20) Remove 1 Screw (X8).(21) Remove the Plate Cover Bracket (2734).

(22) Turn the Lower Right Side Cover Unit upside down.

Note:Before turning the Unit upside down, make sure to remove the STR Unit, or the STR may get damaged.

(23) Open the Lower ADU Door.(24) Remove 1 Screw (Y1).(25) Remove the ADU Cover Arm (2746).

(26) Remove the ADU Door Assembly as illustrated.

<Cleaning the ADU 4th Roller>

Clean the ADU 4th Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

93APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(27) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(28) Remove the ADU Guide 2 (2824).

(29) Disconnect the Harness.(30) Release the Harness from 2 latches.

(31) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(32) Remove the ADU Sensor Base (2821)

Assembly.


(33) Remove the Photo Sensor (1819).

94APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(34) Disconnect the Harness on the ADU PC Board (CN407).

(35) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(36) Remove the Registration Unit.

(37) Disconnect the Harness.(38) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(39) Remove the ROHP PC Board (2110).

<Cleaning the ADU 3rd Roller>

(1) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray.(2) Open the Lower ADU Door.(3) Clean the ADU 3rd Roller with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

95APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the Registration Roller>

(1) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray.(2) Open the Lower Right Side Cover.(3) Clean the Registration Roller with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

96APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.8. Sheet Bypass Unit

(1) Open the Jam Cover. (See sect. 2.2.5.)(2) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray. (See sect. 2.2.5.)(3) Remove the Right Front Cover.

(See sect. 2.2.5.)(4) Remove the Right Rear Cover.

(See sect. 2.2.5.)(5) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray Cover (2918)

as illustrated.

(6) Release the Harness from the 8 Clamps.

(7) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (CN408, CN410).

(8) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(9) Remove the Sheet Bypass Assembly.

97APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(10) Lift the Sheet Bypass Tray as illustrated.(11) Remove the Tray Spring (2916).

(12) Remove 1 Screw (X8).(13) Remove the Tray Plate Shaft (2917).

(14) Remove the Tray Assembly.

Note:When removing the Tray Assembly, carefully separate as illustrated.

(15) Turn the Sheet Bypass Assembly upside down as illustrated.

(16) Remove 5 Screws (X8).(17) Remove the Ground Plate (3023) and Sheet

Bypass Tray Base (3120).

98APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(18) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(19) Remove the Arm Bracket Assembly.

(20) Remove the DFP Roller (3111).

<Cleaning DFP Roller>

Clean the DFP Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

(21) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(22) Remove the Upper Plate (3008).

(23) Remove 1 Screws (X5).(24) Remove the Upper Guide (3034).

99APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(25) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H6).(26) Remove 2 Stoppers (3007).(27) Remove 2 Spacers (3006).(28) Remove the Front Pickup Roller (3005).(29) Remove the Rear Pickup Roller (3012).

<Cleaning Pickup Roller>

Clean the Pickup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

Caution:When reinstalling the Pickup Rollers, position the bushing so that the Black color is facing the Front side and the White color is facing the Rear side.

(30) Remove 1 Snap Ring (H6).(31) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (3003), and the

Timing Belt (3004).

<Cleaning Paper Feed Roller>

Clean the Paper Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

100APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.9. STR Unit and Intermediate Transfer (IT) Unit

(1) Open the Sheet Bypass Tray.(2) Open the Lower Right Side Cover.(3) Remove 2 Screws (Y16).(4) Remove the Guide Bracket Assembly.

(5) Remove the STR Unit (2535).

(6) Remove the Snap Ring (2714).

(7) Remove the Support Arm Assembly.

101APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(8) Push on the STR Guide to lock it in the down position.

(9) Remove 2 Screws (Y45).

<Pulling out the Intermediate Transfer (IT) Unit>

(10) Push down the white latches on both sides and pull on them to release the IT Unit from the locked position.

(11) While holding the IT Unit by the center as illustrated, slide it out until it stops.

102APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(12) While holding the IT Unit on both sides, release the lock by pushing the lever to the right.

(13) Carefully pull the IT Unit (3420) out of the machine while holding it by both sides.

<Cleaning the Initial Point Sensor>

(14) Clean the Initial Point Sensor with a dry cotton swab.

Note:When cleaning, wipe the surface of the sensor with a dry cotton swab a few times as illustrated.

<Cleaning the Color Registration and Toner Density Sensor>

(15) Slide the Sensor Cover toward the front as illustrated.

(16) While holding it in the open position, wipe the surface of the Color Registration and Toner Density Sensors through the frame holes.

Note:When cleaning, wipe the surface of the sensors with a dry cotton swab a few times as illustrated.

103APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Caution:Pull the IT Unit out straight and leveled (horizontal), or the IT Belt may get damaged and the printing quality will be affected.

<Replacing the Cleaner Unit, IT Belt, FTR and Brush Assembly >

(17) Place a clean sheet of paper (i.e. Ledger or A3) under the IT Unit to catch any spilled toner.

(18) Remove 2 Black Screws (Y29).(19) Remove the Cleaning Unit (3418).

(20) Remove 2 Black Screws (Y29).(21) Remove the Lower Paper Guide (3412).

(22) Remove 2 Black Screws (Y29).(23) Remove the Upper Paper Guide (3411).

104APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(24) Unhook 4 Link Arm Springs (3408).

(25) Set 4 Link Arms to the locked position as illustrated.

(26) Remove 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the right side.

105APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(27) Remove 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the left side.

(28) Remove the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.

Caution:When Removing and Installing the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly, hold both side of the Bracket as illustrated and don’t touch the IT Belt.

(29) Remove 1 Black Screw (Y29).(30) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, remove the

Right Position Plate (3417).

(31) Remove 1 Black Screw (Y29).(32) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, remove the

Left Position Plate (3416).

106APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(33) Place the IT Unit on its side with the side that has the belt position mark facing upward.

(34) Bend the IT Unit at the bending point up to maximum bending position.

Caution:Confirm that the IT Unit is at the maximum bending position for removing the IT Belt.

(35) Remove the IT Belt (3419).

Caution:When Removing and installing the IT Belt, hold the side band of the belt as illustrated. Don’t touch the center of the belt, or the printing quality will be affected.

Note:While removing the IT Belt, exercise care not to snag the belt projections onto the frame of the IT Unit.

(36) Straighten the IT Unit.

107APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(37) Remove 4 Snap Rings (3545) securing the FTR by turning over the Protect Sheet as illustrated.

Note:When removing snap rings, exercise care not to remove the Snap Ring holding the Backup Roller.

(38) Remove 4 FTR (3546) by turning over the Protective Sheet as illustrated.

<Cleaning the Tension Roller, Tension Shaft and Backup Roller>

(39) Clean the Tension Roller, Tension Shaft and Backup Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol, then clean them with a soft dry cloth.

(40) Turn the IT Unit upside down.

Note:When turning it upside down, hold properly by both sides as illustrated.

108APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(41) Remove 2 Black Screws (Y29).(42) Remove the Drive Roller Brush Assembly

(3635).

<Cleaning the Bias Roller, Initial Point Sensor Roller, Adjustment Roller, and Drive Roller>

(43) Clean the Bias Roller, Initial Point Sensor Roller, Adjustment Roller, and Drive Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol, and then wipe them with a soft dry cloth.

Note:Before cleaning the Drive Roller, make sure to remove the Drive Roller Brush Bracket (see the previous step).

Note:When replacing the IT Belt, make sure to clean these Rollers, especially the Bias Roller at the same time.

(44) Remove the Snap Ring (3613).

(45) Remove the Adjustment Roller (3612).

109APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(46) Remove 2 Adjust Bushings (3419).

Note:The Ball Bearings and the Adjustment Bushingsare attached to the Adjustment Roller.

Use the Adjustment Bushings enclosed with the new IT Belt to accommodate for the belt length variations.

(47) Install 1 (new) Adjustment Bushing (3419) to the Right Side.

(48) Install 1 (new) Adjustment Bushing (3419) to the Left Side.

(49) Reinstall the Adjustment Roller and the Snap Ring as illustrated.

Note:When reinstalling the Snap Ring, ensure the Ball Bearings are installed into the Adjustment Bushings.

110APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Note:When reinstalling the Snap Ring, use a pair of pliers as illustrated.

(50) Reinstall the 4 FTR.

Note:Reinstall the FTR by turning over the Protective Sheet.

Note:When reinstalling the FTR, the direction is not critical, and it can be installed in either direction as illustrated.

(51) Bend the IT Unit at the bending point up to the maximum bending position.

(52) Carefully install the new IT Belt.

Caution:When installing the new IT Belt, follow the description of the label on the Unit’s frame.

111APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Caution:When Removing and installing the IT Belt, hold the side band of the IT Belt as illustrated. Don’t touch the center of the belt, or the printing quality will be affected.

Caution:When installing the IT Belt, align the position of roller steps and belt projections as illustrated.

112APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(53) Straighten the IT Unit to its original shape as illustrated.

Note:Take your time during the installation, and proceed cautiously.

(54) Reinstall the Left Position Plate.(55) Reinstall the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.(56) Hook 4 Springs.(57) Reinstall the Upper Paper Guide.(58) Reinstall the Lower Paper GUide.(59) Reinstall the Cleaning Unit.

(60) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, reinstall the Right Position Plate (3417).

(61) Reinstall 1 Black Screw (Y29).

113APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(62) Using a pair of pliers as illustrated, reinstall the Left Position Plate (3416).

(63) Reinstall 1 Black Screw (Y29).

(64) Reinstall the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly.(65) Reinstall 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the left

side.

Caution:When Removing and Installing the Handle Plate Bracket Assembly, hold both sides of the Bracket as illustrated and don’t touch the IT Belt.

(66) Reinstall 4 Black Screws (Y29) from the right side.

114APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(67) Release 4 Link Arms from the locked position as illustrated.

(68) Hook 4 Link Arm Springs (3408).

(69) Reinstall the Upper Paper Guide (3411).(70) Reinstall 2 Black Screws (Y29).

(71) Reinstall the Lower Paper Guide (3412).(72) Reinstall 2 Black Screws (Y29).

115APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(73) Reinstall the Cleaning Unit (3418).(74) Reinstall 2 Black Screws (Y29).

<Reinstalling the IT Unit>

(75) Maintain the IT Unit leveled by holding it on both sides while installing it into the machine.

Note:When installing, ensure that the STR Bracket locks in place.

Note:Slide the IT Unit along the guide rails on both sides.

(76) Push on both sides until the 2 white levers lock the IT Unit into place.

116APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(77) Unlock the STR Guide.

Caution:When unlocking, exercise care not to pinch your fingers with the STR Guide.

(78) Install the STR Unit.

Note:During the installation ensure that the hook is properly attached.

(79) Reinstall the Guide Bracket.

Note:When reinstalling, make sure that the convex is in the hole as illustrated.

(80) Reinstall the Support Arm Assembly.(81) Reinstall the Snap Ring.(82) Close the Lower Right Side Cover.(83) Close the Sheet Bypass Tray.

<Resetting the PM Counters>

(84) Perform "F8-29 Transfer Belt Life Count Down".(F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life CountDown is alsoinitialized by this operation)

(85) Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”. (F7-02-52 STRLife Count is also initialized by this operation)

(86) Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.

117APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.10. Process Unit <Replacing the Developer Unit >

<Replacing the Developer Unit>

Note:The procedure below describes how to replace the Developer Unit for the Cyan Color.

(1) Open the Front Cover.

(2) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

Note:Exercise care not to incline the container, or Toner may spill out.

(3) Turn the Toner Cartridge (Cyan) counterclockwise.

(4) Pull out the Toner Cartridge (Cyan).

(5) Unlock the Drum Units (Cyan and Magenta) by turning the Drum Release Knob counterclockwise.

Note:To remove the Hopper Unit in Step 16, the Drum Unit(s) relevant to the Developer Unit being replaced must be unlocked, and removed first. (See the Table below)

Developer Unit Drum Unit(s) -----------------------------------------------------------------Cyan Cyan and MagentaBlack Black and CyanMagenta Magenta and YellowYellow Yellow only

118APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(6) Pull out the Drum Units (Cyan and Magenta).

Caution:Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the Drum Unit (Brown), and not to touch it with bare hands.

Caution:The Drum is very sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or bright light. Even if it is a fluorescent lamp of approximately 1000 lm/m2 (1000 lx).

(7) Cover the Drum with 4 sheets of white paper and a sheet of Black paper as illustrated, or use a Black Plastic Bag.

Note:Copied Black paper can also be used, and inserted in any position.

(8) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(9) Remove the Inner Stack Cover (203).

119APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the Toner Supply Cylinder>

(10) Clean the Toner Supply Cylinder with a Vacuum cleaner.

(11) Remove 6 Screws (Y33).(12) Remove the Pipe Cover (4421).

(13) Place a clean sheet of paper (i.e. Ledger or A3) on top of the Front Cover to catch any toner spill.

(14) Lock the Drum Unit by turning the Drum Release Knob clockwise.

Note:This step eases the removal of the Hopper Unit in the next step.

120APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(15) Remove 1 Screw (S6).(16) Remove the Hopper Unit as illustrated.

Note:Pull out the bottom portion by clasping with the leftforefinger.

<Cleaning the Supply Cylinder>

(17) Clean the Supply Cylinder with a Vacuum cleaner.

(18) Clean the Toner Entrance with a Vacuum cleaner.

121APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(19) Release the Lever Arm.

(20) Remove 2 Screws (Y1).(21) Remove the WTB Lower Cover (4401).

(22) Release 2 Harness Clamps.(23) Disconnect the Developer Harness.

(24) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(25) Remove the Developer Front Bracket (4422).

122APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

<Cleaning the Developer Cover>

(26) Clean the Developer Front Bracket (4422) with a Vacuum cleaner.

(27) Pull out the Developer Unit (Cyan) (5443).

Note:Do not open the shutter, or Toner will spill out.

Note:Ensure the Lever Arm is at the maximum down position, or Drum may get damaged.

<Installing the new Developer Unit>

(28) Remove the new Developer Unit out of the box.(29) Remove all the Shipping materials.

(30) Gently peel the Tape off in the direction of the arrow.

123APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(31) Remove 2 Screws (X8).(32) Remove the Developer Cover (5401) by

releasing 4 latches.

<Replacing the Developer> Note:

Only if a problem occurs, perform the step below.If there is no problem, skip to the step (34).

(33) Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a suitable waste container or a sheet of paper, and dump the used Developer and Toner by rotating the gear counterclockwise.

<Pouring the Developer>

(34) Shake the Developer Bottle a few times to loosen its contents.

(35) Carefully pour the developer evenly into the developer unit while turning the Gear as illustrated. Make sure to empty the bottle.

(36) Reinstall the Developer Cover.(37) Install the new Developer Unit.(38) Connect the Developer Harness.(39) Hook 2 Harness Clamps.

(40) Reinstall the Developer Front Bracket.

Note:When reinstalling the Developer Cover, exercisecare not to pinch the Harness with the Cover.

124APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(41) Reinstall the Hopper Unit.

Note:When reinstalling, make sure that the 2 projections on the Hopper Unit are seated in the 2 holes firmly, and at the same time, the supply cylinder is properly positioned as illustrated.

(42) Reinstall the WTB Lower Cover.(43) Reinstall the Pipe Cover.(44) Reinstall the Inner Cover.(45) Remove the papers covering the Drum.(46) Hook the Lever Arm.(47) Reinstall the Drum Unit.(48) Lock all the Drum Units by turning the Drum

Release Knob clockwise.(49) Remove the sheet of paper.

125APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(50) Turn the Toner Cartridge upside down as illustrated, then reinstall the Toner Cartridge.

(51) Reinstall the Toner Waste Container.

<Resetting the PM Counters>

Note:1. Do not close the Front Cover.2. If replacing the Developer Unit, follow step (52).3. If replacing only the Developer, skip to step (53).

(52) Perform "F8-09 Deve. Unit Count".(F7-02-40, 41, 42, 43 Deve. Unit Count, and F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this operation)

(53) Perform "F8-11 Developer Count".(F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this operation)

(54) Plug the AC Power Cord.(55) Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the

Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(56) Close the Front Cover.

126APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.11. LSU

(1) Open the Front Cover.(2) Pull out the 2nd Paper Tray.

(3) Remove 5 Screws (S6).(4) Remove the Left Cover.

(5) Remove 1 Screw (Y45).(6) Remove the Ground Harness.(7) Remove 1 Screw (Y33).(8) Remove the LSU Fan (4302).

(9) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the LSU PC Board.

127APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Important:Before proceeding, make a note of the alignment pointer position. If the LSU is not reinstalled at the same position, the scanning quality will be affected.

Note:LSU and Serial Numbers are printed as illustrated.

(10) Remove 3 Screws (Y33).(11) Remove the LSU (4303).

<Cleaning the LSU Aperture Glass>

Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic Operations, Maintenance Section).

128APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.12. Paper Feed Module

(1) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray. (See sect. 2.2.8.)

(2) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit. (See sect. 2.2.7.)

(3) Disconnect the Harness on the ADU PC Board (CN408, CN409).

(4) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps.

(5) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.

(6) Remove 1 Screw (Y19).(7) Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module.

129APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(8) Remove the Snap Ring (H7) and Pickup Roller (1926) while pushing the solenoid as illustrated to lift the shaft of the Pickup Roller, for easy removal.

<Cleaning the Pickup Roller>

Clean the Pickup Roller surface with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

(9) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).(10) Remove the DFP Roller (1911).

<Cleaning the DFP Roller>

Clean the DFP Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

Note:During reinstallation ensure that the Gears are aligned, and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled properly as illustrated.

(11) Remove 1 Screw (X5).(12) Remove the Guide Cover.

130APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(13) Remove the Bushing (1915).(14) Remove the One Way Clutch (1923).(15) Remove the Feed Roller (1922).

<Cleaning the Feed Roller>

Clean the Feed Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

(16) Disconnect the Harnesses.(17) Remove 2 Sensors (401).

(18) Remove the Jam Cover.

(19) Pull out the 2nd Paper Tray.

131APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(20) Disconnect the Harness.(21) Remove 1 Screw (Y19).(22) Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module.

Note:Follow the instructions of steps (8)~(17) for the 1st Paper Feed Module.

<Cleaning the Intermediate Roller>

(23) Remove the Sheet Bypass Tray. (See sect. 2.2.8.)

(24) Remove the Lower Right Side Cover Unit. (See sect. 2.2.7.)

(25) Clean the Upper Intermediate Roller with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(26) Open the Jam Cover.(27) Clean the Lower Intermediate Roller with a soft

cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

132APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.13. System Console

(1) Open the Jam Cover.(2) Pull out the 3rd Paper Tray.

(3) Remove 2 Screws (S6).(4) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (6704).

(5) Remove 1 Screw (Y19).(6) Remove the Cover Belt (6715).

(7) Remove the Jam Cover while pushing the release button.

133APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(8) Disconnect the Harness.(9) Release the Harness from the clamp.

(10) Remove 1 Screw (Y19).(11) Remove the 3rd Paper Feed Module.

Note:Follow the instructions for steps (8)~(17) of the 1st Paper Feed Module. (See sect. 2.2.12.)

(12) Pull out the 4th paper tray.

(13) Disconnect the Harness.(14) Release the Harness from the clamp.

134APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(15) Remove 1 Screw (Y19).(16) Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module.

Note:Follow the instructions for steps (8)~(17) for the 1st Paper Feed Module. (See sect. 2.2.12.)

<Cleaning the Intermediate Roller>

(17) Open the Jam Cover.(18) Clean the 3rd/4th Intermediate Roller with a

soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

135APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.14. PC Boards

(1) Remove 11 Screws (S6).(2) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly.

(3) Remove 1 Screw (Y31).(4) Remove the CONE PC Board (3922).

(5) Disconnect all Harnesses on the SC PC Board.(6) Remove 10 Screws (Y31).(7) Remove the SC PC Board (6401).

(8) Disconnect all Harnesses on the EC PC Board.(9) Remove 8 Screws (Y31).

(10) Remove the EC PC Board (6402).

136APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(11) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(12) Remove the Left EC PCB Bracket (3909).

(13) Remove 12 Screws (X5).(14) Remove the SC PCB Bracket (3901).

(15) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(16) Remove the DC25 PC Board (6506).

(17) Release the Harnesses from 4 Clamps and 3 Edge Saddles.

(18) Remove Harnesses on the EC PC Board Bracket.

137APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(19) Remove 6 Screws (X5).(20) Remove the Center Bracket (3906).

(21) Remove 7 Screws (X5).(22) Remove the EC PCB Bracket (3908).

(23) Disconnect all Harnesses on the HVPS2 PC Board.

(24) Remove 8 Screws (Y31).(25) Remove the HVPS2 PC Board (4015).

138APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(26) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(27) Pull out the HVPS1 PC Board Assembly.

(28) Remove 12 Screws (X5).(29) Remove 2 HVPS1 PC Boards (4014).

(A) : For Yellow / Magenta(B) : For Cyan / Black

(30) Remove 4 Screw (X5).(31) Pull out the HVPS2 PCB Bracket (4003).

<Removing the Motor Assemblies>

(32) Open the Front Cover.(33) Remove the Toner Waste Container.(34) Turn the Levers counterclockwise.(35) Pull out all the Drum Units approximately 20mm.

Note:When pulling out the Drum Unit, exercise care not to expose the Drum.

139APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(36) Remove 6 Motor Assemblies According to the following steps.

Note:The Motor Assemblies are keyed for their respective locations; do not force them into an incorrect position as damage to the Motor Assembly or machine may occur.

(37) Disconnect the Harness on the Motor PC Board Assembly.

(38) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(39) Remove the Motor Assembly.

Note:These procedures are for Motor Assemblies of No. 1 (5901), No. 3 (5903), No. 4 (5905), No. 6 (6126) in the illustration of step (34).

(40) Disconnect the Harness on the Motor PC Board Assembly.

(41) Remove 4 Screws (X5).(42) Remove the Motor Assembly.

Note:These procedures are for Motor Assemblies of No. 2 (5902) and No. 5 (5904) in the illustration of step (31).

Caution:When removing the motor of No. 3, set the Drum Units for Yellow, Magenta and Cyan color and turn the levers clockwise.

140APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

Caution:When removing motor assemblies, don’t touch nor rotate the drive gears shown in the illustration, or the printing quality will be affected.

(43) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the MOTDRV PC Board.

(44) Release 3 PCB Spacers (4006).(45) Remove the MOTDRV PC Board (6504).

(46) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps.(47) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(48) Remove the Fan Assembly.

(49) Remove 5 Screws (X5).(50) Remove the IH PCB Bracket (4004).

141APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(51) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the IH PC Board.

(52) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(53) Release 2 PCB Spacers (4016).(54) Remove the IH PC Board (4020).

142APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.15. Drive Unit

(1) Open the Front Cover(2) Remove the Toner Waste Container.(3) Pull out all the Drum Units approximately 20 mm

(0.79 in).

(4) Remove the 2 Screws (X5).(5) Remove the SC Support Bracket (3903).

(6) Release the Harness from 11 Clamps.

(7) Remove the Main Drive Unit (5811).(8) Remove 12 Screws (Y19).

143APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(9) Remove 7 Screws (X5).(10) Remove 1 Screw (Y30).(11) Remove the Gear Box Cover (5912).

(12) Remove 4 Snap Rings (H6).(13) Remove the E-Ring (J6).(14) Remove 6 FTR Coupling Gears (5906).

Caution:When reinstalling, align the Gear holes and frameholes as illustrated.

(15) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).(16) Remove the 20T Pulley (6131).(17) Remove the Timing Belt (6130).(18) Remove the Clutch (6129).

144APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(19) Disconnect the Clutch Harness.

(20) Release the Harness from Harness Clamp.(21) Disconnect the Motor Harness.(22) Release the Spacer on the Motor Assembly.(23) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(24) Remove the Motor Assembly (6126).

(25) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps.(26) Disconnect the Clutch Harness.(27) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).(28) Remove the Clutch (6129).

(29) Disconnect the Lift Up Motor Harness on the SC PCB.

(30) Release the Harness from 2 Harness Clamps.

145APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(31) Remove 3 Screws (X5).(32) Remove the Lift Up Motor Assembly.

(33) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(34) Remove the Lift Up Motor Bracket (2013)

Assembly.(35) Remove the Photo Sensor (1819).

(36) Remove 2 Screws (Y26).(37) Remove the Lift Up Motor (2001).

146APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/3222.2.16. LVPS Unit

(1) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (See sect. 2.2.14)

(2) Disconnect 5 Harnesses on the SC PCB (CN52, CN53) and the EC PCB (CN519, CN520) and the intermediate connector.

(3) Release the Harnesses from 14 Harness Clamps.

(4) Release the Harnesses from 3 Harness Clamps.

(5) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(6) Remove the NFL 2 Bracket (4107).

(7) Disconnect 1 Harness on the NFL PCB (CN132).

(8) Remove 5 Screws (X5).(9) Remove the LVPS Unit.

147APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(10) Disconnect the Harness.(11) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(12) Remove the NFL PCB Assembly (4116).

(13) Release the Harnesses from the Edge Saddle.

(14) Remove 2 Screws (X5).(15) Remove the LVPS Duct Cover (4106).

(16) Release the Harnesses from Harness 5 Clamps.

148APR 2005Ver. 1.1

Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322

(17) Remove 6 Screws (X5).(18) Remove 3 Screws (Y16).(19) Remove the LVPS Bracket (4102).(20) Disconnect the Fan Harness.

(21) Release the Harness from Harness Clamp.(22) Remove 2 Screws (4104).(23) Remove the LVPS Fan (4103).

(24) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the LVPS.

(25) Remove 6 Screws (X5).(26) Remove 4 Screws (Y16).(27) Remove the LVPS (4117).

Caution:When reinstalling the LVPS, secure the side Screws first.

149APR 2005

DP-C262/322

2.3. Hardware Identification Template

Part No. Figure RemarkRef. No.

ScrewDZPA000086S6

Snap RingFFPFJ0033BH6

Snap RingFFPFJ0041BH7

Snap RingFFPFJ0039BG6

Silver ScrewXTB4+10GFNH5

Silver ScrewXTT4+8HFNJ2

XUC5VM

XUC6VM

XUC4VM

E-Ring

E-Ring

E-Ring

K5

K6

J7

XUC3VM E-RingJ6

E-RingXUC7VMJ8

Shoulder ScrewFFPFA0176K7

FFPFJ0043B Snap RingK9

ScrewXTB3+10GFJX1

ScrewX3 XYN3+F8FJ

Shoulder ScrewFFPFA0161N6

ScrewPF2217P319P4

ScrewXTB3+20GFJX4

150APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322


ScrewX9 XTB3+8FFJ

ScrewXTB3+8GFJX8

ScrewXTW3+8PFJY1

ScrewXTB3+6FFJ-RPY2

ScrewXTW3+6LFJY3

ScrewXYN4+F6FJY10

XYN3+F6FJ ScrewY16

XTB4+8FFJ ScrewY19

XTB4+6FFJ ScrewY21

ScrewXYA3+FF6FJY22

ScrewXYN4+F8FJY23

ScrewXTB4+10GFJY24

ScrewXYN26+F6FJY25

ScrewXYN3+F4FJY26

E-RingXUC8VMY27

ScrewXTW4+10PFJY28

XTB3+6FFJ ScrewX5

ScrewXSB3+8FJKY29

151APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322


ScrewXYA3+FF8FJY31

ScrewXSB23+10FJY32

ScrewXTB2+6GFJY34

ScrewXTW3+8PFJRY35

ScrewXYC3+FG10FJY38

ScrewXTN5+10FFJY40

ScrewXYN3+F8FJKY41

ScrewXTB3+12GFJY42

Shoulder ScrewDZPA000098Y43

ScrewXYN3+J6FJY44

ScrewXTB4+10FFJY33

ScrewXTW3+12QFJY36

ScrewXTB3+6GFJY37

ScrewXTB4+8HFJY39

ScrewXSB3+6FJY30

ScrewXYN4+F10FJY45

ScrewXTB3+12FFJY46

ScrewXST3+4FJY47

152APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/322


ScrewXTB3+4FFJY48

153APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points3.1. Preventive MaintenancePreventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine cleaning and parts replacement. It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals for customer satisfaction.The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.

1. You should prepare the replacement parts, and cleaning tools beforehand.2. After completing the preventive maintenance, discard the used parts and packaging in accordance with

local regulations and clean the surrounding area.3. Before servicing the equipment, turn the power switches Off and disconnect the power cord from the

wall outlet.4. Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), wear rubber gloves and eye protection.

3.1.1. Timing1. Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive Maintenance Check List (refer

to 3.4) in the service manual.

3.1.2. Cleaning the Rollers1. Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.2. Use the IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) sparingly.

3.1.3. Disassembly and Adjustment PrecautionsCaution:

Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning servicing or installation. (When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. To protect yourself, disconnect the Telephone Line Cable before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

1. After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.2. When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful and avoid clothing from being caught by

moving components.3. While the electricity is applied to the unit, do not connect nor disconnect the connectors on any PC

Board.4. When handling the drum, follow the precautions listed in section 3.3.5. Ensure to use correct screws.6. Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity.7. To reassemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.8. Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.

3.1.4. Laser Handling PrecautionsThe optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopying operation.However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:

1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective properties into the laser's path.2. Before servicing the machine, remove watches, rings, or other metallic objects that you may be

wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.) Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum safety, please follow the above precautions.

154APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.2. Required Tools

3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method

No. Tools No. Tools1 Personal Notebook Computer 10 Pliers2 Cables (USB Cable, Crossover LAN

Cable, etc.) 11 Nipper

3 SD Memory Card (128 MB - 1GB) 12 Cutter4 Soft Cloth 13 Vacuum Cleaner5 Isopropyl Alcohol 14 Cotton Swab6 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 15 Brush

7 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 16KS-660 - Conductive Grease(Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc. URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)

8Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 17

Molykote EM-50L Grease (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)

9 Tweezer 18 Color Test Chart (P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3)

No. Part Description Important Action Comments

1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution.2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM

DATA with the previously printed one.2 Auto Document

Feeder (ADF)Check & Clean

1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with a soft cloth saturated with water.Note:

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

2. Clean the White Reference Sheet with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.

3 Scanner Unit Check & Clean

1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.

4 Transmitter Unit Check & Clean

1. Remove any foreign obstacles.2. Clean the Rollers with a soft cloth saturated with water.

5 Mirrors Check & Clean

1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your bare hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol.

6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.2. Check the Connectors.3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.

7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & Grease

1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.

8 Timing Belts Check & Clean

1. Check for belt looseness or abrasion.2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.

155APR 2005Ver. 1.1

http://www.shinetsusilicones.com

http://www.dowcorning.com

DP-C262/C322

3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points

2 13

4

5

6

7 8

9

29

30

31

33

11

19

21, 22, 23

24

10

32

15

25

46, 48

27

28

39

4745

4241

44

4241

40

16

26

38

20

14

1813

17

12

49

34, 35, 36, 37

43

4241

424143

43

43

44

156APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check ListThe chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance.

No. Mechanical Parts Ref. No.

Cleaning Replacement/AdjustmentRef. CounterCycle

(Sheets) Method Cycle (Sheets) Procedure

i-ADF Unit1 Pickup Roller 511 120K Alcohol 240K

Refer to Sect 2.2.1.

F7-02-12 ADF Count

2 Paper Feed Roller 508 120K Alcohol 240K3 Separation Roller 610 120K Alcohol 240K4 Registration Roller 1 817 120K Alcohol -5 Registration Roller 2 818 120K Alcohol -6 Transport Roller 816 120K Alcohol -7 Inverting Roller 809 120K Alcohol -8 Exit Roller 814 120K Alcohol -

Fuser Unit

9 Fuser Belt Unit 4926 - - 120K


F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count(Count Down)

10 Fuser Main Unit 4927 - - 240K

F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count (Count Down)

-Complete Fuser Unit(Fuser Belt Unit andFuser Main Unit)

4815 - - -

F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain CountF7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count

Intermediate Transfer Unit

11 Intermediate Transfer (IT) Belt 3419 - - 240K Refer to

Sect 2.2.9.(Replace together with STR Unit and Cleaning Unit)

F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count Down

12 First Transfer Roller (FTR) 3546 - - 240K

13 Drive Roller Brush Assembly 3635 - - 240K

157APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

14 Drive Roller 3604 240K Alcohol -


F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count Down

15 Tension Roller 3506 240K Alcohol -16 Bias Roller 3501 240K Alcohol -17 Backup Roller 3624 240K Alcohol -18 Adjustment Roller 3612 240K Alcohol -

19 Initial Point Sensor Roller 3507 240K Alcohol -

20 Tension Shaft 3507 240K Alcohol -

21 Initial Point Sensor 3709 120K Dry Cotton Swab -

22Color Registration and Image Density Sensor

3820 120K Dry Cotton Swab -

23 Color Registration Sensor 3821 120K Dry Cotton

Swab -

24 Cleaning Unit 3418 - - 120K

Refer to Sect 2.2.9.(Replace together with STR Unit)

F7-02-52 STR Life Count

Automatic Duplex Unit (Lower)

25 Second Transfer Roller (STR) Unit 2535 - - 120K

Refer to Sect 2.2.5.(Replace together with Cleaning Unit)


26 ADU 3rd Roller 2723 120K Alcohol -Refer to Sect 2.2.5.

27 ADU 4th Roller 2722 120K Alcohol -

28 OHP Detection Reflector 2721 120K Alcohol -

Automatic Duplex Unit (Upper)29 Exit Roller 2401 120K Alcohol -


30 Feed Roller 2402 120K Alcohol -31 ADU 1st Roller 2408 120K Alcohol -32 ADU 2nd Roller 2304 120K Alcohol -

Paper Exit Transportation Unit

33 Exit Roller 3302 120K Alcohol - Refer to Sect 2.2.6.

Developer Unit34 Y (Yellow)

5443.

- - 480KRefer to Sect 2.2.10.

F7-02-40-44Deve. Unit Count

35 M (Magenta) - - 480K36 C (Cyan) - - 480K37 BK (Black) - - 480K




158APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.

For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.

2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module. To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic Counter - 00 (List Print).

3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size, orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions.

Developer- Y (Yellow)

5445

- - 480KRefer to Sect 2.2.10.

F7-02-40-44Deve. Unit Count

- M (Magenta) - - 480K- C (Cyan) - - 480K- BK (Black) - - 480K

Main Paper Feed Module38 Registration Roller 2112 120K Alcohol -


39 Upper Intermediate Roller 1834 120K Alcohol -

40 Lower Intermediate Roller 1835 120K Alcohol -

Paper Feed Module

41 Paper Feed Roller (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1922 120K Alcohol 240K


F7-03 1st/2nd/3rd/4th Paper Tray Count

42 DFP Roller(1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1911 120K Alcohol 240K

43 Pickup Roller (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1926 120K Alcohol 240K

44 Intermediate Roller(3rd/4th) 6801 120K Alcohol -

Sheet Bypass45 Paper Feed Roller 3003 120K Alcohol 240K


F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count

46 Pickup Roller F 3005 120K Alcohol 240K47 DFP Roller 3111 120K Alcohol 240K48 Pickup Roller R 3012 120K Alcohol 240K

LSU

49 LSU Aperture Glass -

When Toner Waste

Container is

Replaced

Aperture Cleaning

Tool- - -




159APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.5. Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) CounterWhen the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show "Call for P/M" on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance), refer to section 3.3. and 3.4.2. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously.3. Press “8” to enter the F8 Mode.4. Reset the desired Counter on the list below.5. Press "Stop" key first, and then press "Function" + "Clear" keys simultaneously to return to standby.


Replace Ref. Counter

Replace Alarm

Reset CounterCycle

(Sheets)i-ADF Unit

1 Pickup Roller 511 240KF7-02-12 ADF Count

PM Display(MachineContinues)

Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.

2 Paper Feed Roller 508 240K3 Separation Roller 610 240K

Fuser Unit

9 Fuser Belt Unit 4926 120K

F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count(Count Down)

119K:Alarm

121k:MachineStop

Perform “F8-26 Fuser Belt Counter Reset”.(F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count is also initialized by this operation)

10 Fuser Main Unit 4927 240K

F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count (Count Down)

239K:Alarm

241K:MachineStop

Perform “F8-27 Fuser Main Counter Reset”.(F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count is also initialized by this operation)

-Complete Fuser Unit(Fuser Belt Unit and

Fuser Main Unit) 4815 - - -

Perform “F8-26 Fuser Belt Counter Reset”, and “F8-27 Fuser Main Counter Reset”.(F7-02-65 Fuser Belt Remain Count, and F7-02-66 Fuser Main Remain Count are also initialized by this operation)

Intermediate Transfer Unit

11 Intermediate Transfer (IT) Belt 3419 240K F7-02-51

Transfer Belt Life Count Down

239K:Alarm

241K:MachineStop

Perform “F8-29 Transfer Belt Life Count Down”.(F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count Down is also initialized by this operation)Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.

12 First Transfer Roller (FTR) 3546 240K

13 Drive Roller Brush Assembly 3635 240K

24 Cleaning Unit 3418 120KF7-02-52 STR Life Count

120K:Alarm

(MachineContinues)

Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”.(F7-02-52 STR Life Count is also initialized by this operation)

Automatic Duplex Unit (Lower)

25 Second Transfer Roller (STR) Unit 2535 120K


160APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:When replacing the IT Unit, the STR Unit and Cleaning Unit are also replaced at the same time, and then perform F8-29, F8-32 and F8-30 Service Mode operations.

3.6. Lubrication PointPlease refer to the Preventive Maintenance (PM) list to ensure the highest degree of reliability. The inspection interval is usually 120K copies or more, however this interval may be reduced due to environmental conditions.

- IT Unit, STR Unit andCleaning Unit - - - -

Perform “F8-29 Transfer Belt Life Count Down”.(F7-02-51 Transfer Belt Life Count Down is also initialized by this operation)Perform “F8-32 STR Life Count”.(F7-02-52 STR Life Count is also initialized by this operation)Perform “F8-30 Color Registration”.

Developer Unit34 Y (Yellow)

5443.

480K F7-02-40-43Deve. Unit Count

480K:Alarm

(MachineContinues)

Perform “F8-09 Deve. Unit Count”.(F7-02-40, 41, 42, 43 Deve. Unit Count, and F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this operation)

35 M (Magenta) 480K36 C (Cyan) 480K

37 BK (Black) 480K

Developer- Y (Yellow)

5445

- F7-02-45-48Deve. Unit Count

-<Only in case of Problem>Perform “F8-11 Developer Count”.(F7-02-45, 46, 47, 48 are also initialized by this operation)

- M (Magenta) -- C (Cyan) -- BK (Black) -

Paper Feed Module

41 Paper Feed Roller (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1922 240K F7-03

1st/2nd/3rd/4th Paper Tray Count

PM Displayonly

(MachineContinues)

Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM Cycle) and change to the desired value.

42 DFP Roller(1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1911 240K

43 Pickup Roller (1st/2nd/3rd/4th) 1926 240K

Sheet Bypass45 Paper Feed Roller 3003 240K F7-03

Sheet Bypass Count

46 Pickup Roller F 3005 240K47 DFP Roller 3111 240K48 Pickup Roller R 3012 240K


Replace Ref. Counter

Replace Alarm

Reset CounterCycle

(Sheets)

161APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.7. Updating the Firmware3.7.1. Firmware Configuration

A. Hardware ConfigurationThis machine is controlled by a Main CPU which is located on the System Control (SC) PC Board and other sub CPUs on the other PCBs. The Firmware of SC PCB, Engine Control (EC) PCB, Scanner Control (SCN) PCB and Fax Control (FCB) PCB can be updated using a PC or an SD Memory Card.

B. SC PC Board FirmwareA total of 66 MB of Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB.

C. Firmware Updating PortsThree (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.

(1) Ethernet LAN PortThe machine's Firmware can be updated using a PC via Local Area Network (LAN) Port. This method is convenient when the PC and the machine are already connected to LAN. Even if the machine is not connected to a LAN, it can be updated by connecting Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.Refer to the Firmware Update Operating Instructions and 3.7.2. for additional details.

SC PC Board

On Board

PCCPU 64 MB

Ethernet Port

F-ROM

PC

USB Port

SD Memory Card(64 MB up to 1 GB)

Panel Control Program

CPU 1 MB

Scanner Control Program

F-ROMPrinter Engine Control Program

CPU

Engine Control PC Board

SD Memory Card Portin Front

CPU 512 KB

F-ROM

CPU 4 MB

F-ROM

Scanner Control PC Board

Fax Control PC Board

Panel PC Board

SD Memory Card Port on the SC PC Boardfor G3 Fax / Internet Fax Image Memory& PS Fonts

SD Memory Card(64 MB up to 1 GB)

Fax Communication Control Program

PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front

PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter

F-ROM

2 MBNIP

162APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322(2) USB Port

The machine's Firmware can be updated using your Notebook PC via an USB Port. This method is convenient when you brought a Notebook PC into the customer's site for the purpose of updating the firmware. Refer to the Firmware Update Operating Instructions and 3.7.3. for additional details.

(3) SD Memory Card (New Method: Convenient Method without a PC)The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master SD Memory Card in the SD Card Slot in Front of the machine (not the SD Card Slot on the SC PCB). This method is convenient when you are visiting the customer's site for the purpose of updating the firmware without a PC. The Master SD Memory Card can be created by copying the Firmware from the Web site using the SD Memory Firmware Writing Tool Software and a PC with SD Memory Card Slot or with an SD Memory Card Reader & Writer. Just a single Master SD Memory Card is sufficient to update the SC PCB with the Standard, or with all Optional configurations (PS and Fax options included), as long as all the necessary firmware codes are stored onto the card. The easiest way is to use “Auto Mode” for updating all necessary firmware at once.Caution:

Before updating the Firmware using the SD Memory Card, remove the PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.

163APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.7.2. Updating through a LAN PortThe firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a Crossover Cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

Caution:Before proceeding with the Firmware Update, clear all Fax or Internet Fax jobs first or the Firmware will not update properly. Follow the steps below to perform All Job Clear.

1. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press "9", and then “Start” keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).3. Select "00 FAX Service Mode".4. Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.5. Select "09 All Job Clear", and then “Yes”.

After clearing the jobs, the machine reboots automatically and returns to the standby mode.

1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, oraccess onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool.

Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio".Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access the Service Web site to download the latest Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File: DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeBefore starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. Then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

164APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5) ConfirmationAfter the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.Confirm the F5 & F6 parameters according to the printed lists in Step 3 above if the settings are different.

Note:1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing

the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions.

2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update.

3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware Emergency Recovery”.

4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

3.7.3. Updating through USB PortIf the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.




1. Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.

Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder\ DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx \ Sc_Std \ CMFP1_SCAAVxxxxx_xx

\ Sc_Ps \ CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x\ Fcb \ CMFP1FCBAAVxxxxx_xx\ Ec \ CMFP1_ECAAVxxxxx\ Scn \ CMFP1SCNAAVxxxxx_xx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

165APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool and Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File: DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeBefore starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 (Update From USB) to enable the unit to accept the programming codefrom the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. Then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.


\ Sc_Ps \ CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x\ Fcb \ CMFP1FCBAAVxxxxx_xx\ Ec \ CMFP1_ECAAVxxxxx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

166APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3225) Confirmation

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.Confirm the F5 & F6 parameters according to the printed lists in Step 3 above if the settings are different.Note:



3.7.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory CardIf the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package.(Only one SD Memory Card is required (minimum 128 MB size) to update the SC PCB with the Standard, or with all Optional firmware configurations.)Caution:

Before proceeding with the Firmware Update, clear all Fax or Internet Fax jobs first or the Firmware will not update properly. Follow the steps below to perform All Job Clear.



Caution:1. Remove the PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.2. Install the Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.

Do not install it into the Card Slot on the SC PCB, or the machine will automatically format the SD Card for the Fax Image Memory.

3. Do not remove the SD Memory Card from the SD Card Slot in Front of the machine or turn the power OFF during Formatting or while Updating the Firmware.

<Procedure>1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).2. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.4. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the ON position.5. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously. 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Card).7. The firmware is copied into the machine.

If selecting the "Auto Mode", copies all the necessary firmware at once, and after the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.

8. Turn the Power Switch on the back side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the Master Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine.

10. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the ON position.11. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are

other than factory default.

Caution:If the unit does not boot up properly in Step 7, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware Emergency Recovery”.

167APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.7.5. Creating a Master Firmware SD Memory Card using a PC1) Install the “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” to your PC.

The “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” can be downloaded from your sales company’s Web Site or the PCC DIC Service Web site. Please refer to the Readme file for additional details.

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool and Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File: DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Master Firmware SD Memory Card1. Insert the SD Memory Card (128 MB to 1 GB) into the SD Memory Card Slot.2. Perform the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool.3. After all firmware codes are copied, remove the SD Memory Card from the Slot.

The SD Memory Card is now ready to use for firmware update.(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD and the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool OI.)

3.7.6. Notice after installing the HDD optionAfter the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.

1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive

Unit.3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.

3.7.7. Firmware Emergency RecoveryThe easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master SD Memory Card method. (Even the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package, only SC PCB Firmware can be recovered.)

If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:1. Turn the power OFF.

Before proceeding to the next step, you must create the Master SD Memory Card (read the appropriate sections first 3.5.5).

2. Turn the power On while holding the [Energy Saver] key.3. When the message “Selected Emergency Firmware Update” is on the LCD display, release the

[Energy Saver] key.During the recovery mode, the LCD displays “Reading SC Firmware”, “Writing SC Firmware” and “SC Firmware updated has been completed”. Then the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.

After the SC Firmware recovering, if other firmware for EC, FCB, SCN PCBs and PS option are required,

168APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322use the Master SD Memory Card to update the firmware by selecting the “Auto Mode” to the required level. Refer to 3.7.4. (Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory Card).

Note:After the SC Firmware recovering, if the Error Code E5-12 or E5-13 is showed, use the Master SD Memory Card to update the firmware selecting the required firmware, ES, SCN, FCB or PS, refer to 3.7.4. In this case, the Network update method can not be used.

3.7.8. Firmware Version

SC :

EC :

SCN :

CMFP1 SC A A Vxxxxx PU

Destination Code PU : USA/Canada PB : UKFirmware Version (V1xxxx)Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese

Firmware Type A : Standard D : PS Option

Model Number

etc.

b : English, French & Spanishg : German, French & Italian

CMFP1 EC A A V1xxxx

Firmware Version (V1xxxx)

AA: Fixed

Model Number

CMFP1SCN A A V1xxxx


AA: Fixed

Model Number

169APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

FCB : CMFP1FCB A A Vxxxxx AU

Destination Code (FAX) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK


Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese

Firmware Type A : Standard D : PS Option

Model Number

etc.

b : English, French & Spanishg : German, French & Italian

170APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.8. Adjusting Copy Quality3.8.1. Manual Copy Quality Adjustment

1. Press the “Function” key.2. Select “General Settings”.3. Select “01 Manual Copy Quality Adj”.4. Select “On”. 5. Select “OK” to begin the Manual Copy Quality adjustment. Note:

Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops (approximately 1-2 minutes).

6. Press the “Reset” key, to exit the General Settings mode.

3.8.2. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)1. Press the “Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.3. Select “Quality Adj.” and set the Density to the center position.

Select “Black”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial” and “OK” to set the machine to Mono Text/ Photo Density.

4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown below.

5. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.6. Press the “6”, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Service Mode.7. Enter F6-221 Mono T/P Density(lt) Mode.8. Select "Input".9. Enter the new content.

10. Enter a 2-digit value.Note:The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.

(+) : Lighter(-) : Darker

1. Select "OK", and then “Close”.2. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter F2 Service Mode.3. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.Note:

Repeat Step (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.<Light Part Adjustment>F6-220 : Mono Text Density(lt)F6-222 : Mono Photo Density(lt)

1. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.2. Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

A

1

2

3

Not visible

Hardly visible

Text/Photo

. .. .. .

Not visible Not visible

Clearly visibleNot visible

Photo

Clearly visible Clearly visibleClearly visible

A

1

2

3

. .. .. .

A

1

2

3

. .. .. .

Text

171APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.8.3. Color Exposure (Special Adjustment for Customer's Requirement)1. Press the "Function”, “Copy" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.3. Select “Quality Adj” and set the Density to the center position.

Select “Full Color”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial” and “OK” to set the machine to Color T/ P Density.4. Make a copy of Color Test Chart 101, or the Customer’s Document and verify the density.5. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.6. Press the “6”, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Service Mode.7. Enter F6-211 Color T/P Density(lt) Mode.8. Select "Input".9. Enter the new content.

10. Enter a 2-digit value.Note:

The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.(+) : Lighter(-) : Darker

1. Select "OK", and then “Close”.2. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.3. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.Note:

Repeat Step (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.<Light Part Adjustment>

F6-210 : Color Text Density(lt)F6-212 : Color Photo Density(lt)

<Dark Part Adjustment>F6-215 : Color Text Density(dk)F6-216 : Color T/P Density(dk)F6-217 : Color Photo Density(dk)


Color Test Chart 101 (P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3)

172APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.8.4. Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)

Wh

en t

he

follo

win

g it

ems

are

rep

lace

d o

r cl

ean

ed, p

erfo

rm t

he

adju

stm

ents

in t

he

corr

ect

ord

er.

Mec

h.

Gen

eral

Set

tin

gs

Imag

eR

emar

ks

Par

t It

em

Op

enF

ron

tC

ove

r,th

enP

ow

erS

W O

N

TD

CA

dj.

(F8-

09)

Clo

seF

ron

tC

ove

r

Op

enF

ron

tC

ove

r,th

enP

ow

erS

W O

N

To

ner

Den

sity

Ad

j.

(F8-

11)

Clo

seF

ron

tC

ove

r

1In

stal

latio

nM

ain

12

2O

ptic

s1

23

Tone

r Reg

. / D

ensi

ty S

enso

r1

24

4To

ner R

eg. S

enso

rs (L

/R)

12

45

Bel

t Ini

tial P

oint

Sen

sor

12

45

6D

evel

oper

Uni

t1

*42

34

Whe

n pe

rform

ing

F8-0

9, A

PIC

is a

lso

perfo

rmed

.7

Dev

elop

er1

*42

34

Whe

n pe

rform

ing

F8-1

1, A

PIC

is a

lso

perfo

rmed

.

8D

rum

Uni

t1

Whe

n ne

w D

rum

is d

etec

ted,

Dru

m c

ount

er is

rese

t, C

olor

Reg

. and

AP

IC a

re a

lso

perfo

rmed

.

9D

evel

oper

Uni

t / D

evel

oper

/ D

rum

Uni

t10

Tone

r Reg

. / D

ensi

ty S

enso

r1

311

Tone

r Reg

. Sen

sors

(L/R

)1

312

Tone

r Den

sity

Sen

sor &

Dev

elop

er1

*42

34

Whe

n pe

rform

ing

F8-1

1, A

PIC

is a

lso

perfo

rmed

.

13IT

Bel

t / F

TR /

Driv

e R

olle

r Bru

sh1

*52

34

Whe

n pe

rform

ing

F8-2

9, A

PIC

and

Bel

t len

gth

mea

sure

men

t are

als

o pe

rform

ed.

14C

lean

ing

Bla

de A

ssy

& S

TR U

nit

12

3W

hen

perfo

rmin

g F8

-32,

AP

IC is

als

o pe

rform

ed.

Rep

lace

toge

ther

at t

he s

ame

time.

15S

C P

CB

1*2

16E

C P

CB

1*2

217

PN

L1 P

CB

1*2

18S

C P

CB

/EC

PC

B/P

NL1

PC

BTo

pre

vent

the

Ser

ial N

umbe

r Err

or fr

om

occu

rrin

g.19

LSU

1*3

23

20Fu

ser B

elt U

nit

121

Fuse

r Mai

n U

nit

1

22C

ompl

ete

Fuse

r Uni

t1

23

Ord

erN

o.

Fu

ser

Mai

nC

ou

nte

rR

eset

F8-

27

Co

lor

Ske

wA

dj.

IT B

elt

Len

gth

Mea

su-

rem

ent

(F8-

28)

IT b

elt

Co

un

ter

Res

etF

8-29

ST

RC

ou

nte

rR

eset

F8-

32

Co

lor

Reg

.F

8-30

Cle

anF

8 M

od

e

ITM

etal

Ro

llers

TD

C A

dju

stm

ent

(Wh

en r

epla

cin

g t

he

Dev

elo

per

Un

it )

A

uto

Pri

nt

Imag

eC

on

tro

l(A

PIC

)*1

Co

py

Qu

alit

yC

hec

k

Fu

ser

Bel

tC

ou

nte

rR

eset

F8-

26

Cle

anin

g

TD

C A

dju

stm

ent

Dev

elo

per

on

ly)

Rep

lace

Op

tics

To

ner

Reg

. /D

ensi

tyS

enso

r

To

ner

Reg

.S

enso

rs(L

/R)

Bel

tIn

itia

lP

oin

t

Ad

just

men

t

Wo

rk

3 3

22

22

3

(Wh

en r

epla

cin

g t

he

Do

no

t re

pla

ce t

he

Dev

elo

per

Un

it (

Dev

elo

per

) &

Dru

m U

nit

to

get

her

. Rep

lace

on

e at

a t

ime.

Do

no

t re

pla

ce t

he

SC

, EC

& P

NL

1 P

CB

s to

get

her

. Rep

lace

on

e at

a t

ime.

No

te:

*1. P

erfo

rm A

uto

Prin

t Im

age

Con

trol (

AP

IC) b

y fo

llow

ing

thes

e st

eps:

Pre

ss F

un

ctio

n, a

nd th

en s

elec

t Gen

eral

Set

tin

gs,

01

Man

ual

Co

py

Qu

alit

y A

dj.,

ON

, and

then

OK

. *2

. Bef

ore

repl

acin

g an

y P

CB

s, p

rint o

ut th

e F5

/F6/

F7 P

aram

eter

Lis

ts u

sing

the

F7, a

nd F

9 M

odes

. *3

. Afte

r Mec

hani

cal a

djus

tmen

t, al

so a

djus

t the

Prin

ter R

egis

tratio

n, L

SU

Imag

e S

ide

to S

ide,

etc

.*4

. To

perfo

rm F

8-09

or F

8-11

, ope

n th

e Fr

ont C

over

firs

t bef

ore

turn

ing

the

Pow

er S

W O

N.

*5. W

hen

repl

acin

g th

e IT

Bel

t, cl

ean

all t

he M

etal

Rol

lers

, suc

h as

Bia

s R

olle

r, an

d Fe

ed R

olle

rs w

ith a

sof

t clo

th s

atur

ated

with

Alc

ohol

firs

t. To

ner s

tuck

on

the

Rol

lers

will

affe

ct th

e P

rint q

ualit

y, a

nd m

ay re

duce

the

life

of th

e IT

.6.

App

roxi

mat

ely

afte

r prin

ting

100

page

s, th

e m

achi

ne w

ill s

elf-a

djus

t its

elf f

or C

opy

Qua

lity.

173APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.9. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side, Color Registration

After installing the System Console option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be performed.The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following procedure.

3.9.1. Printer Registration 1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into Tray 2, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size.

Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.3. Perform the Service Modes F1-03 to F1-07 (Print Test Pattern 1 to 5).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.5. Perform the Service Mode F6-000 to F6-007 (F6-002, and F6-003 are not used),

to adjust the gap to 5 mm.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.7. Press "Reset" key first, and then Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit

the Service Mode.

3.9.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray1. Insert paper into Tray 1, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out

all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.3. Perform the Service Modes F1-03 to F1-07 (Print Test Pattern 1 to 5).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.5. Perform the Service Modes F6-040 to F6-044, to adjust the gap to 5 mm, for all the trays.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.7. Press "Reset" key first, and then press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit

the Service Mode.

3.9.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU1. Insert paper intoTray 1, and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out

all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.3. Perform the Service Modes F1-14 to F1-18 (Print Test Pattern 12 to 16).4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.5. Perform the Service Mode F6-045 to F6-049, to adjust the gap to 5 mm, for all the trays.6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.7. Press "Reset" key first, and then press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit

the Service Mode.

<Figure>Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.

5 mmTop (Lead edge)

Two lines are printed

5 mm 5 mm

Two lines are printed

174APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.9.4. Color Registration1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull

out all the remaining trays (including the Sheet Bypass tray) to disable them.2. Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.3. Perform the Service Mode F8-30.4. Press "Reset" key first and then press "Function" + "Clear" keys simultaneously to return to

standby.

3.10. Calibrating the LCD1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power

Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.2. Ensure that the SD Memory Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is

installed in the machine, remove it. 3. Press and hold the “Energy Saver “and “Copy” keys down simultaneously, then turn the Main Power

Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a “+” on the upper left edge of the display.Note:

If you do not hold the "Energy Saver" and "Copy" keys down long enough, the Display may go OFF.

4. Press the “+” on the upper left edge of the display, press the “+” on the center and press the “+” on the lower right edge of the display. Then the display goes to standby.Caution:

Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball Point Pen, etc.

5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.

3.11. LEDs on the EC PCBThe LEDs are mounted on the EC PCB, which are working properly. The LEDs and the signal names are listed below.

LED 1 : +5VLED 3 : +24VF (Voltage for Fan)LED 2 : +24VM (Voltage for Interlock and Motor drive)LED 5 : +5Vp (5V pilot)

Note:1. LED 1 to 3 will be off when machine is in Sleep mode.2. The LED numbers are printed near the IPC PCB connector. (Order from left side)

175APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

3.12. Adjusting Scanner Skew <Leading Edge>

1. Remove the Glass Assembly, refer to Section 2.2.2.2. When the printed image is skewed to the left as illustrated.

a. Turn Screw (A) Clockwise.b. Turn Screw (B) Counterclockwise.

Note: (1) Turn both Screws (A) and (B) for each adjustment by the same amount.(2) Amount of adjustment: Half a turn of both screws, adjusts the skewed image by approximately

0.0275 in (0.7 mm).(3) Do not turn 2-3 turns at once.

<Side Edge>1. Remove the Glass Assembly and move the Scanner Front Cover, refer to Section 2.2.3.2. When the printed image is skewed to the left as illustrated.

a. Loosen the Screw (C).b. Slide the Mirror Frame 2 in the direction illustrated below.

Note: (1) Amount of adjustment: Sliding the Mirror Frame 0.0394 in (1 mm) in the Direction (D), adjusts the

skewed image by approximately 0.0315 in (0.8 mm).(2) Do not slide the Mirror Frame 2-3 mm at a time.

Screw (A)Screw (B)7.87 in (200 mm)

11.81 in (300 mm)

<Leading Edge>

<Side Edge>

Screw (C)

SlidingDirection (D)

Amount of Adjustment:

Amount of Adjustment:0.0275 in (0.7 mm) / Half Turn

0.0315 in (0.8 mm) / 0.0394 in (1 mm) Slide

176APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4 Troubleshooting4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart

START

Plug in the Power Cord, and thenturn the Power Switches ON.

Does the LCD displayfunction correctly?

Does the original documentfeed through correctly?

Does the recording paperexit the unit?

Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems

Troubleshoot the Document Feeder

Check for recordingpaper path problems.

Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display

Troubleshoot any 3-digitCODE displayed

Does the unit producenormal copies?

Troubleshoot communicationproblems (transmission,reception, dialing, polling,information codes, ordiagnostic codes.)

Does the unit power upnormally?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

177APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.2. Improper LCD Display

Replace the SC PCB.

Is the troubleresolved?

Replace the LowVoltage PowerSupply Unit.

Is the trouble resolved?

Check connectors: CN58 & 59 (SC PCB)and CN5 & 8 (PNL1 PCB).

Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?

Replace the LCD Module. Replace the

Touch Panel.

Does CN58, pin 3 on the SCPCB measure +5 VDC?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

NoNo

START

END

END

178APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems4.3.1. Printed Image

4.3.2. Copy Image Quality Adjustment

4.3.2.1. Monochrome Image Quality Adjustment

Mode Adjustment F-Code Function

MonoCopy

Density Adj. Highlight

Text F6-220 Density Adjustment of Highlighted area* Perform after completing the printer and scanner adjustment

* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Lighter to Darker)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo

T/P F6-221Photo F6-222-32 - 310 (default)

14 44.018 28.318 56.521 66.028 88.030 94.2-- 148-- 986

OK

Not OK

Horizontal Line (Front to Rear), Vertical Line (Feed direction), CyclicalStripes or Dots on the Printed Image

Vertical Stripe Check: OPC Drum; Charge/Developer Clean: IT Belt, STR Unit, Cleaning Unit, LSU/Scanner, Glass/Mirror/Lens

Horizontal Stripe (Cyclical) - Check the periodic pitch. - Clean the appropriated parts. - Replace the inoperative parts/unit.

Print Test Pattern Check the Image

Print Test Pattern

END

Check/Clean/Replace

Diameter (mm)

Pitch (mm)

1. Gently clean the soiled area only as described below: a) Clean the Cleaning Unit with a Dry Soft cloth; carefully removing paper powder, pieces of paper. b) Clean the IT Belt & the STR Unit with a Dry Soft cloth; carefully removing the Toner first, and then cleaning with a Soft cloth saturated with Alcohol.2. If the problem is not resolved, then replace the inoperative Part/Unit.

Test Pattern F1 Mode F1-24/25/26/27: Y/M/C/BK Halftone (2x2dots) F1-36 : BK Solid Patch A3/LDR F1-37 : BK by YMC Halftone Patch A3/LDR

Charge Roller

Magnet RollerFTR Roller

STR Bias RollerSTR RollerOPC DrumFuser Belt

IT Belt

Caution:

179APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.2.2. Color Image Quality Adjustment

MonoCopy

Density Adj. Dark

Text F6-225 Density Adjustment of Dark area* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Lighter to Darker)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo


Contrast Adjustment

Text F6-205 Contrast Adjustment (For 1-Color, 2-Color)* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Higher to Lower)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo


Sharpness (BK/Color)

Text F6-230 Image sharpness adjustment (Color and Monochrome)* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -3 => 3 + (Higher to Lower)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo


Color Judge Level

Slice level F6-235 Detection level for color document(s) in Auto Mode* Copier Function Setting No: 31 Color Judge Level setting is also available: 1 (Monochrome)=>4 (Default)=>7 (Color) (Combination with slice level and area)

(1) Slice Level* Use for the light density color original Default: 6 : 0 => 15 (Color to Monochrome)

(2) Area Level * Use for the small color area originalNote:

Dust might be detected under low area level settingDefault: 6 : 0 => 15 (Color to Monochrome)

Area level F6-2360 - 156 (default)


ColorCopy

Density Adj. Highlight

Text F6-210 Density Adjustment of Highlighted area for Color Image* Perform after completing the printer and scanner adjustment

* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Lighter to Darker)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo


Density Adj. Dark

Text F6-215 Density Adjustment of Dark Area* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Lighter to Darker)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo



180APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

ColorCopy

Contrast Adjustment

Text F6-200 Contrast Adjustment (For 1-Color, 2-Color)* Not used for reducing the density compensation* Adjust according to customer's needsDefault: 0 : -32 => 31 + (Higher to Lower)Text mode: Useful for Newspapers, Tracing Paper, etcT/P mode: Useful for Maps, 1-Color, 2-Color Photo mode: Useful for Photo


Saturation -32 - 310 (default) F6-240

Chroma Adjustment* Not used for Monochrome and 2-Color copy* Halftone step will decrease under high saturationDefault: 0 : -32 => 32 + (Higher to Lower)

Color Balance Ratio

0 - 105 (default) F6-241

Color Balance Magnification Ratio Adjustment for 1 Step* Used for Color mode ( Y/M/C/K )Note:

Copier Function Setting No: 15 Default: 5 : 0 => 10 + (Smaller to Larger)

Tint Ratio -1 - 20 (default) F6-242

Tint Magnification Ratio Adjustment for 1 StepNote:

Copier Function Setting No: 14 Default: 0 : -1 => 2 + (Smaller to Larger)

Hue Circle -3 - 30 (default) F6-243

Hue Circle AdjustmentNote:

Not required under normal conditionsDefault: 0 : -3 => 3 + (CW -: CCW rotation 10deg./step)


181APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.3. Copy Skewing or Color Deviation

END

START

Is the Scanner operatingproperly?

3. Check or replace the LSU. (section 2.2.11)

No

Yes

Is the Test Pattern printoutin Copier F1 Mode normal?

Copy Mode

Sample

Check the Scanner mechanism.(section 2.2.2)

No

Yes

1. Adjust the Printer Registration. (section 3.9)

Is the ADF operatingproperly?

Check the ADF mechanism.(section 2.2.1)

No

Yes

2. Perform F8-30 Color Registration for Color Document. (section 3.9.4)

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

182APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.4. Black Copy

START

Yes (Normal)

No

1. Check all the connectors on the SC PCB.2. Check the Scanner mechanism.3. Replace the SC PCB.4. Replace the AFE PCB.5. Replace the CCD Unit.

Is the HVPS1 operatingproperly?

Is the EC PCB operatingproperly?

Is the OPC Drum/DeveloperUnit operating properly?

Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

1. Check all the connectors and voltages on the HVPS1.

3. Replace two (2 ) HVPS1 Units.

2. Check the high voltage terminal on the HVPS1.

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the EC PCB. 2. Replace the EC PCB.

END

Pape

r Tra

vel

Is the Test Pattern printout inCopier F1 Mode normal?

183APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.5. Blank Copy

START

END

Is "F8-30 Color Registration"results normal?

Is the HVPS1, HVPS2normal?

No

Yes

No

Replace the SC PCB.No

Are there any foreign particlesor stains blocking the LaserBeam path?

Yes

NoIs the EC PCB operatingproperly?

1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains.2. Replace the LSU.

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the EC PCB.

2. Replace the EC PCB.

Yes

No

Pape

r Tra

vel


1. Check all the connectors on the SC PCB.2. Check the Scanner mechanism.3. Replace the SC PCB.4. Replace the AFE PCB.5. Replace the CCD Unit.

Yes (Normal)

1. Check all the connectors and voltages on the HVPS1 and HVPS2.

3. Replace two (2 ) HVPS1 and HVPS2.

2. Check the high voltage terminal on the HVPS1.

Yes (Normal)

184APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.6. Vertical White Lines

START

END

Replace the recording paper.

Yes

No

Replace the Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particlesor stains blocking the LaserBeam path?

No

Yes

No

Replace the Fuser Belt Unit.

Yes

No

Check the Scanner mechanism.

No

Yes

Yes

Is the recording paper damp?

Is the Drum/DeveloperUnit operating properly?


Is the Fuser belt surfacesclean?

Pape

r Tra

velP


185APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

To differentiate whether the Vertical Line(s) is caused by the Scanner, or the Printer.1. Make a copy of the Test Chart by enlarging it to 110%.2. If the Vertical Line moves, then it is caused by the Scanner.

If the Vertical Line does not move, then it is caused by the Printer.

Clean the Glass & Mirror

ADF Flatbed

White BalancePlate

Optical Line

White BalancePlateOriginal Document

Check point:The Vertical Line is easier to see in this area

The Vertical Line is harder to see in this area.

Vertical Line Sample

186APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.7. Ghost Images

START

END

Yes

No



No

Yes

Is the Fuser Belt surfaceclean?


No

Yes

Yes

No




Pap

er T

rave

lA

AA A A


Is the IT Unit operatingproperly?

Check the IT mechanism.

187APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.8. Vertical Dark Lines

START

Yes

No


Is the Drum/Developer Unitoperating properly?

No

Yes

Yes

No


Is the LSU operating properly?

No

Yes

Replace the LSU.

END

No

Yes

Pape

r Tra

velP






188APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.9. Horizontal Dark Lines

START

Yes

No

Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Yes

No


Is the OPC Drum/DeveloperUnit operating properly?

Is the LSU operatingproperly?

Yes Replace the LSU.

Yes

No

END

No

Yes

Pape

r Tra

vel

P




No

Yes Check the IT mechanism.


Is the HVPS operatingproperly?

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the HVPS.2. Check the Spring Connector and voltages on the HVPS.3. Replace the HVPS.

189APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.10. Dark Background

Is the LSU operating properly?No

Yes Replace the LSU.

START

Yes

No



No

YesIs the recording paper damp?

Yes

No





Yes

No

END

No

Yes

Pape

r Tra

velP




190APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.11. Light Print

END

No

Yes

START

Yes

NoCheck the Scanner mechanism.

No

Yes

Is the Drum/Developer Unitoperating properly?


Yes

No

Replace the paper.

Are there any foreign particles orstains blocking the Laser Unitpath?

Yes

No


Yes

No

Pape

r Tra

vel


Is the HVPS operating properly?


Is the IT Unit operating properly?



191APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.12. Horizontal White Lines

END

No

Yes

START

Yes

No



No


Yes

No



Yes

No

No

Yes

Pape

r Tra

velP








192APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.13. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

Note:Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor breakdown into an open-circuit.

No

Yes

No

Yes

P

END

START



Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

Is the Fuser Unit operatingproperly?

193APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.14. Voids in Solid Areas

END

No

Yes

START

No




Yes

No


P

Pap

er T

rave

l

No

Yes





194APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.15. Black Dots

END

No

Yes

START


Yes

No


P

Pape

r Tra

vel

No

Yes





195APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.16. Recording Paper Creases

START

No



END

Are the Fuser Belt and Pressure Roller surfaces soiled or are there any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit?

2. Replace the Fuser Belt Unit.

1. Remove any foreign particles and / or clean the stains.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path?

Yes

No Remove any obstructions and / or clean the paper path.

No

YesIs the recording paper skewing?

Ensure the paper is set correctly in the Paper Tray and that the Paper Guides are properly adjusted.

No

Yes

3. Replace the Fuser Unit.

Pape

r Tra

vel

196APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.17. Poor Printed Copy QualitySTART

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? 1. Replace the EC PCB.

2. Replace the LSU.3. Replace the HVPS.4. Replace the Developer Unit.

END

Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit.

Is the printed copy correct?

Yes

No

Make a local copy.

No

YesCheck the connections of CN 56/57 on the SC PCB, the Scanning Lamp.

Is the received copy correct?

1. Check CN352/353 on the FCB PCB.2. Check the Telephone Line Cord.3. Replace the FCB PCB.

Yes

No

Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter?

Yes

No

Telephone line quality is poor.

The transmitting machine may be defective.

197APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.18. Abnormal Printing

START

Is the recording paper loaded in the Paper Tray properly?

1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.

Is Panasonic Toner being used?

Yes

No

Is the recording paper size andthickness within specification?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Replace with correct paper.

Replace with the Panasonic Toner.

Are all switches and sensorsoperating properly?

Do the rollers rotate properly?

Yes

No

Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit?

Yes

No

Remove the foreign particles or paper piecesfrom the receiver unit.

1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches andsprings.

2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Adjust, clean or replace.

Yes

No

Is the receiving mechanismoperating correctly?

Yes

No

Adjust or replace any defective parts.

END

198APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.3.19. Scanned Copy Quality ProblemsSTART

No

YesIs the Lamp abnormal?

Check and replace the Lamp.

END

Are the Feed Rollers dirty?

Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area?

Yes

NoRemove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area.

No

YesIs the scanning area dirty?

1. Clean the Scanning Glass.2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.

No

Yes

Clean the Rollers.

Is the Scanner Block abnormal?

1. Check the connectors on the SC PCB. 2. Check the connectors on the CCD PCB.3. Replace the CCD Assembly.4. Replace the SC PCB.

Yes

No

199APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface4.4.1. Checking Network Configuration

START

From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all

Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit

Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unitInternet Parameters ?

Print the current Internet Parameters List

Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping IP" command ?

From the DOS Prompt, enter the followingcommand-line utility: "route print"

Does the current routing table for theGateway match ?

Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway.

Ask the Network Administrator to verifythe proper information.

Check the power switch, cables and the current settings of unit.

Does the Default Gateway respond to the "ping IP" command ?

Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status.

Does the unit respond to the "ping host name" command ?

Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status.

Ask the Network Administrator to verify the POP/SMTP account and system status.

Does the unit respond to the "telnet" command ?

Replace the SC PCB

Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation Information form filled out by the Network Administrator. Verify this information with the InternetParameters List that you just printed. Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit?

Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask:

200APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.4.2. Testing the TCP/IP NetworkIt is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.

When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.

In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).

In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.

1. System Diagram ModelAsk the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required.

201APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Checking Current Configuration

Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.

Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit:

Default Gateway IP Address:DNS Server IP Address:Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)

For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XPThe following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com (obtained from the Host Name).

3. Using "PING" to Test Physical ConnectivityThe Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned).

Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.

-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not

responding.

Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1 Node Type : Hybrid NetBIOS Scope ID : IP Routing Enabled. : No WINS Proxy Enabled : No NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No

Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 : Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter

Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 DHCP Enabled : No IP Address : 192.168.3.4 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254 Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18

C:\>ipconfig /all

Windows NT IP Configuration

202APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322PINGing the Unit

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed:

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com

Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254

Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:


C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com

Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:


C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com

Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:

Request timed out.Request timed out.Request timed out.Request timed out.

Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

203APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.e.g.

4. Tracing a Packet RouteAnother useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination.

The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well.

This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you

know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.

b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded.

To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>

Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send. -w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not

responding.

C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000

Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.comTracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]over a maximum of 30 hops:

1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254 2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

204APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3225. Managing Network Route Tables

In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments.

The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.

IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1.

The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop.

When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.

Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below:

• MASKIf this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.

• NetmaskIf included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255.

• GatewaySpecifies the gateway.

• METRICSpecifies the metric / cost for the destination.

All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253

205APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:

6. Host Name Query on DNS ServerWindows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:

NS (Name Server) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

MX (Mail Exchange) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

A (Address) Record in DomainFrom the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

C:\WINDOWS>route printActive Routes:

Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1 192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1

C:\>nslookupDefault Server: sv1.labo.pcc.comAddress: 192.168.1.1

> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.[sv1.labo.pcc.com.] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com[sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com

> ls -t A labo.pcc.com[sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com sv1 sv2 ec5 ec4 ef1

A 192.168.1.1

A 192.168.1.4A 192.168.3.4A 192.168.3.5

A 192.168.1.2

206APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3227. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command

TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.

For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button.Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.For example,

C:\WINDOWS>telnet

telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]

220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx

helo250 Hello

mail from:test250 Sender OK

rcpt to:[email protected] Receipient OK

data354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"

[Press the Enter Key]Panasonic Internet Faxtesttest[Press the Enter Key][Press the Enter Key][Press the Enter Key]250 OK, Mail accept

quit221 Closing transaction channel

207APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.5. Error Codes (For Copier)The self-diagnostic functions detect malfunctions in the important components of the copier.When any malfunction occurs, the copier stops, and displays a relevant error message on the Panel Display.

4.5.1. User Error Codes (U Code)Note:

Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.

User Error Codes (U Code) TableCode Item Check Points

U0 Key Counter 1. Card Key is not installed.2. Key Counter Harness is disconnected.3. Department Code is not assigned.

U1 Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover is open.2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Front Cover Sensor is defective4. LVPS connector is disconnected.5. LVPS is defective.6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.

U4 Close Finisher 1. Finisher is open.2. Paper is in the output bin.3. Stapler is empty.4. LVPS connector is disconnected.5. LVPS is defective.6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.

U6 Close Right Cover(Feed Cover 1/ Feed Cover 2 / ADU Cover)

1. Right Cover is open.2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.4. LVPS connector is disconnected.5. LVPS is defective.6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.

208APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

U7 Close Right Cover Lower (Paper Tray 1-4)

1. Right Cover is open.2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.4. LVPS connector is disconnected.5. LVPS is defective.6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.

U8 Close Paper Transport Unit 1. Paper Transport Unit open.2. Paper Transport Unit Sensor disconnected.3. LVPS connector disconnected.4. LVPS defective.5. EC PCB connector disconnected.6. EC PCB defective.

U9 Close Left Cover 1. Left Cover is open.2. Left Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Left Cover Sensor is defective.

U11 Remove Paper in Finisher 1. Paper left in the Finisher.2. Finisher Paper Exit Sensor defective.

U12 Close Finisher Staple Cover /Upper Cover

No Punch Dust Box

1. Close Finisher Staple Cover.2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is defective.4. Punch Dust Box is not installed(FS325 only).

U13 No Toner or Low Toner(Y, M, C, BK)

1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed.2. No or Low Toner.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

U14 Replace Toner Waste Container

1. Toner Waste Container is full.

U15 No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container is not installed.2. Toner Waste Container Sensor is disconnected.3. Toner Waste Container Sensor is defective.

U16 No Developer Unit(Y, M, C, BK)

1. Developer Unit is not installed.

U18 Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter is full.U20 Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover is open.

2. ADF is not installed correctly.3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected. 4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.5. LVPS connector is disconnected.6. LVPS is defective.

U21 Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover are open.2. ADF Sensor is disconnected.3. ADF Sensor is defective.

U25 Toner Cartridge Motor Rotation Error(Y, M, C, BK)

1. Toner blocked in the Toner Cartridge. (Shake the Toner Cartridge to loosen the contents)

U27 No Fuser Unit 1. Fuser Unit is not installed.U28 No Drum Unit

(Y, M, C, BK)1. Drum Unit is not installed.


209APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.5.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)

U30 Close Punch Cover(Upper/Front Cover)

1. Punch Cover is open.2. Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Punch Cover Sensor is defective.

U31 Remove Paper in Saddle Unit 1. Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit.2. Paper Sensor is disconnected.3. Paper Sensor is defective.

U32 Close Saddle Unit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Cover is open.2. Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Saddle Cover Sensor is defective.

U33 No Saddle Staple Unit 1. Staple Unit is not installed properly.U34 Close Saddle Unit Front Cover 1. Saddle Unit Front Cover is open.

2. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is defective.

U35 Close Saddle Unit Exit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Exit Cover is open.2. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is disconnected.3. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is defective.

U90 Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.


210APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322• Jam Sensor Location of Printer

• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF




Paper Tray 4

Paper Tray 3

Paper Tray 2

Paper Tray 1

Sheet Bypass


OHP Film Sensor

Registration Sensor

Fuser Entrance Sensor

Inner Exit Sensor

Paper Path Sensor(Paper Transport Unit)Outer Exit Sensor

Optional IntermediateRoller Sensor

IntermediateRoller Sensor




Sheet BypassNP Sensor

Fuser Paper Exit Sensor

ADU

Intermediate Transfer Belt


ADF Exit SensorADF Selection

Sensor



211APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Jam Error Codes (J Code) TableCode Contents SectionJ00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the

paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)Sheet

BypassJ01 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after

the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 1)

Paper Tray

J02 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 2)

J03 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3)

J04 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 4)

J06 The Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 2)

Paper Feed

J07 The Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3-4)

J08 The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3)

J09 The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 4)

J11 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated.

Paper Tray

J12 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated.

J13 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated.

J14 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path Sensor is activated.

J18 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. (Paper Tray 1-4) Paper

FeedJ19 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. (ADU)J21 1. The 1st Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

2. The 1st Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller rotating. (Paper Tray 1)

Paper Tray

J22 1. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.2. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Paper Tray 2)J23 1. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

2. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3)

J24 1. The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.2. The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Paper Tray 4)J26 1. The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

2. The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 2) Paper

FeedJ27 The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Paper Tray 3-4)

212APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

J28 1. The Option Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

2. The Option Intermediate Roller detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 3)

3. The Option Intermediate Roller detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Paper Tray 4)

Paper Feed

J30 1. The Registration Sensor goes Off within a predetermined time. (Abnormal Paper Length) Fuser

2. Printing does not go Off after the Fuser Exit Sensor goes Off. (Abnormal Paper Length)

Paper Exit

J31 The Registration Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time.

Paper Feed

J33 1. The Registration Sensor detects paper before initialization.2. The Registration Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Paper Tray 1)3. The Registration Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Paper Tray 2-4)4. The Registration Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

(Sheet Bypass)J35 The Media type (OHP / Paper) is mis-matched.J38 The Paper Entrance Sensor does not go On within a predetermined time.

Fuser

J39 1. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.2. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper during initialization.3. The Paper Entrance Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

J40 The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Registration Sensor is activated.

J41 The Paper Exit Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time. J42 1. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

2. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during initialization.3. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.

J43 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser Exit Paper Sensor is activated. (Inner Tray)

Paper ExitJ44 The Exit Sensor does not go Off within a predetermined time. (Inner Tray)

J45 1. The Exit Sensor detects paper before initialization. (Outer Tray)2. The Exit Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Inner Tray)

J50 The Transport Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. TransportJ51 The Transport Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.

(ADU)Transport

ADUJ52 1. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before initialization

2. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (Outer Tray)

3. The Transport Paper Path Sensor detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating. (ADU) Transport

J54 The Outer Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.J55 The Outer Exit Sensor keeps does not go Off within a predetermined time.J56 The Outer Exit Sensor detects paper before initialization.J60 1. The Finisher Enter Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time.

2. The Finisher Enter Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Sensor is activated.

3. The Finisher Enter Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

Finisher

Jam Error Codes (J Code) TableCode Contents Section

213APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

<J70~79 and J92~94 Codes for i-ADF>

J63 1. The Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the Saddle. (FS325)

2. The Paper Path Sensor does not go Off within a determined time after the sensor is activated. (FS325)

FinisherSaddle

J64 1. The Puncher is not activated correctly. (FS325)2. The Punch Sensor goes On at the time before initialization.

FinisherPunch

J65 1. The Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the Finisher. (FS320)

2. The Paper Exit Sensor does not go Off within a determined time in the Finisher. (FS320)

3. The Paper Exit Sensor detects paper at the time before initialization.

Finisher

J66 The Stapler is not activated correctly. (FS325)J70-79 (See the following table below)

J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Paper Path Sensor 0 does not detect paper within a predetermined time.

ADU

J81 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time. J82 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined time.J83 The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 does not go Off within a determined time. J86 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 detects paper before initialization.

2. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 0 detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.J87 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 1 detects paper before initialization.

2. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 1 detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.J88 1. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 2 detects paper before initialization.

2. The ADU Paper Path Sensor 2 detects paper before Feed Roller starts rotating.J91 A Paper Tray is pulled out when feeding a paper. Paper

TrayJ92-94 (See the following table below)

Code Contents SectionJ70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a predetermined time in

the ADF.

ADF

J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps dedicating paper after a predetermined time in the ADF.

J72 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is activated.

2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is activated.

J73 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is deactivated.

2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is deactivated.

Jam Error Codes (J Code) TableCode Contents Section

214APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.5.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

J74 The ADF Exit Sensor does not detect paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.

ADF

J75 The ADF Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided Scanning.J76 The ADF Selection Sensor does not detect paper during 2-Sided Scanning.J77 The ADF Registration Sensor 3 keeps detecting paper during the Back Page

Scanning.J78 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the Face Page is

scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning.2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided Scanning.

J79 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF.J92 The paper is not detected.J93 The paper remained in the ADF.J94 The ADF does not go Off after the predetermined time.

E1: Optical Unit Error CodesCode Function Check PointsE1-01 Abnormal Platen Glass

scanning 1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.2. Home Position Sensor is defective.3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.4. Scanner Motor is defective.5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.6. SCN PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN710/709 &

703)7. SCN PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F1& F3)8. LVPS1 connector is disconnected. (Check CN702)

E1-22 Polygon Motor synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected. (Check CN3)2. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN701)3. LSU Relay Harness connector is disconnected.4. Polygon Motor is defective.5. LVPS1 is defective. (+24 V)6. EC PCB is defective. (+24 V Circuit is defective)

E1-23 LSU Shutter Error 1. LSU Shutter Sensor is defective.2. LSU Shutter Sensor connector is disconnected.3. LSU Shutter Drive is defective.4. LSU Shutter Mechanism is defective.

E1-31 Scanning Lamp (Does not turn On)

1. Scanning Lamp Inverter PCB connector is disconnected.2. Scanning Lamp Inverter PCB is defective. 3. Scanning Lamp is defective. 4. SCN PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN704/709)5. SCN PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F1)6. LVPS1 connector is disconnected. (Check CN702)7. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (Check CN56/57)8. CCD PCB is defective.

E1-45 LSU Fan Rotation 1. LSU Fan connector is disconnected.2. LSU Fan is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

Code Contents Section

215APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E1-60 Beam Detect (Y) Error 1. LSU is defective.2. EC PCB is defective.3. LSU - EC PCB Harness is defective.4. LSU or EC PCB connector is disconnected.

E1-61 Beam Detect (M) ErrorE1-62 Laser (Y) ErrorE1-63 Laser (M) Error E1-64 Laser (C) ErrorE1-65 Laser (BK) Error

E2: Lift DC Motor Error CodesCode Function Check PointsE2-01

E2-02

Lift Motor rotation(1st Paper Tray)Lift Motor rotation(2nd Paper Tray)

1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected.2. Level Sensor is defective.3. Lift Mechanism is defective.4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.5. Lift Motor is defective.6. LVPS connector is disconnected.7. LVPS is defective.8. EC PCB connector is disconnected.9. EC PCB is defective.

10. CST PCB connector is disconnected.11. CST PCB is defective.12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected.

E2-03

E2-04

Lift Motor rotation(3rd Paper Tray)Lift Motor rotation(4th Paper Tray)

E2-10 System Console Drive Motor rotation

1. System Console Cable is disconnected.2. Drive Mechanism is defective.3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected.4. Drive Motor is defective.5. CST PCB connector is disconnected.6. CST PCB is defective.7. LVPS connector is disconnected.8. LVPS is defective.9. EC PCB connector is disconnected.

10. EC PCB is defective.

E3: Development System Error CodesCode Function Check PointsE3-14 STR High Voltage Power

Supply leak1. STR Terminal is contaminated with Toner.2. STR Terminal is abnormal.3. HVPS is defective.4. EC PCB is defective.

E3-22 Toner Cartridge Fan rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.2. Fan is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

E3-26 OPC Drum Motor 1 rotation(Y/M/C)

1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Y/M/C Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.6. Y/M/C Drum Unit is defective.

E1: Optical Unit Error CodesCode Function Check Points

216APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E3-27 OPC Drum Motor 2 rotation(BK)

1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. BK Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.6. BK Drum Unit is defective.

E3-28 Developer Motor 1 rotation(Y/M/C)

1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Y/M/C Drive Mechanism is defective.6. Y/M/C Developer Unit is defective.

E3-29 Developer Motor 2 rotation(BK)

1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. BK Drive Mechanism is defective.6. BK Developer Unit is defective.

E3-30 Feed Motor rotation 1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Paper Feed Mechanism is defective.6. Paper Feed, Sheet Bypass or Paper Exit Unit is defective.

E3-31 Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor rotation

1. Motor connector is disconnected.2. Motor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Intermediate Transfer Belt Drive Mechanism is defective.6. Intermediate Transfer Belt or Toner Waste Transfer Unit is

defective.E3-33 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor

rotation (Y)1. Toner Cartridge is locked. (Shake Toner Cartridge to

loosen the contents)2. Motor connector is disconnected.3. Motor is defective.4. Motor mechanism is defective.5. EC PCB connector is disconnected.6. EC PCB is defective.7. Motor mechanism is defective.

E3-34 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor rotation (M)

E3-35 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor rotation (C)

E3-36 Toner Cartridge Drive Motor rotation (BK)

E3-37 FTR Motor rotation 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected.2. EC PCB is defective.E3-38 STR Motor rotation

E3-63 FTR Cam Position Error 1. FTR Cam Motor is defective.2. FTR Cam Motor connector is disconnected.3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected.4. MOTDRV PCB is defective.5. FTR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 is defective.6. FTR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.8. EC PCB connector is disconnected.9. FTR Cam Drive mechanism is defective.

E3: Development System Error CodesCode Function Check Points

217APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E3-64 STR Cam Position Error 1. STR Cam Motor is defective.2. STR Cam Motor connector is disconnected.3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected.4. MOTDRV PCB is defective.5. STR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 is defective.6. STR Cam Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.8. EC PCB connector is disconnected.9. STR Cam Drive mechanism is defective.

E3-65 STR Monitor Current Read Error

1. STR Connection Error.2. STR HVPS is abnormal.3. STR HVPS connector is disconnected.

E3-66 FTR (Y) Monitor Voltage Read Error

1. FTR (Y) Connection Error.2. FTR (Y) HVPS is abnormal.3. FTR (Y) HVPS connector is disconnected.

E3-67 FTR (M) Monitor Voltage Read Error

1. FTR (M) Connection Error.2. FTR (M) HVPS is abnormal.3. FTR (M) HVPS connector is disconnected.

E3-68 FTR (C) Monitor Voltage Read Error

1. FTR (C) Connection Error.2. FTR (C) HVPS is abnormal.3. FTR (C) HVPS connector is disconnected.

E3-69 FTR (BK) Monitor Voltage Read Error

1. FTR (BK) Connection Error.2. FTR (BK) HVPS is abnormal.3. FTR (BK) HVPS connector is disconnected.

E3-79 Intermediate Transfer Belt Length Detection Error

1. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor is defective.2. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor connector is

disconnected.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Intermediate Transfer Belt is defective.6. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor is defective.7. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Connector is disconnected.

E3-80 Intermediate Transfer Belt Initial Point Detection Error

1. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor is defective.2. Belt Initial Point Detection Sensor connector is

disconnected.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. Intermediate Transfer Belt is defective.5. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor is defective.6. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Connector is disconnected.7. Intermediate Transfer Belt Motor Harness is defective.8. EC PCB is defective.9. Belt Initial Point mark is defective.

E3-85 Color Registration Sensor (Right) Calibration Error

1. Toner Registration Sensor (Right) connector is disconnected.

2. Toner Registration Sensor (Right) is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.


218APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E3-86 Color Registration Sensor (Left) Calibration Error

1. Sensor Shutter Solenoid connector is disconnected.2. Sensor Shutter Open-Close is abnormal.3. Toner Registration Sensor (Left) connector is disconnected.4. Toner Registration Sensor (Left) is defective.5. EC PCB connector is disconnected.6. EC PCB is defective.

E3-87 Color Registration Sensor (Center) Calibration Error

1. Toner Registration Density Sensor (Center) connector is disconnected.

2. Toner Registration Density Sensor (Center) is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

E3-88 Color Registration Compensation Error

1. Belt surface is scratched or dirty.2. OPC Drum is scratched or dirty.3. EC PCB is defective.4. Sensor PCB is defective.

E3-89 Color Registration Detection Error

1. Belt surface is scratched or dirty.2. OPC Drum is scratched or dirty.3. LSU Shutter Open-Close is abnormal.4. EC PCB is defective.5. Sensor PCB is defective.

E3-90 TDC Sensor (Y) Calibration Error

1. Toner Sensor connector is disconnected.2. Toner Sensor is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

E3-91 TDC Sensor (M) Calibration Error

E3-92 TDC Sensor (C) Calibration Error

E3-93 TDC Sensor (BK) Calibration Error

E3-94 Intermediate Transfer Belt Detection Error for color registration pattern on the right side of sensor.

1. Belt surface is scratched or contaminated with dirt.2. OPC surface is scratched.

E3-95 Intermediate Transfer Belt Detection Error for color registration pattern on the center of sensor.


E3-96 Intermediate Transfer Belt Detection Error for color registration pattern on the left side of sensor.


E4: Induction Heating (IH) Fuser Unit Error CodesCode Function Check PointsE4-01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Unit is defective.

2. Induction Heating (IH) Unit is defective.3. Thermistor is defective.4. EC PCB connector is disconnected.5. EC PCB is defective.


219APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E4-02 Fuser Paper Jam 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.2. Paper Entrance Sensor is disconnected.3. Paper Entrance Sensor is defective.4. Paper Exit Sensor is disconnected.5. Paper Exit Sensor is defective.6. EC PCB connector is disconnected.7. EC PCB is defective.

E4-03 Fuser Pressure Sensor Position Error

1. Fuser Motor is defective.2. Fuser Motor connector is disconnected.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)4. EC PCB is defective (Fuse is open).5. EC PCB is defective.6. Home Position Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.7. Home Position Sensor connector 1 or 2 is disconnected.8. Fuser Unit Relay connector is disconnected.

E4-05 Fuser Safety Timer The Induction Heating (IH) unit was stopped when the software failed to control the temperature within a certain range.Turn the Power SW OFF to Reset.

E4-11 Right Cover Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.2. Fan is defective.3. ADU PCB connector is disconnected. (CN403) 4. ADU PCB is defective.

E4-12 Fuser Pressure Roller Fan Rotation

1. Fan connector is disconnected.2. Fan is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN510)4. EC PCB is defective.

E4-13 Fuser IH Cooling Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.2. Fan is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN503)4. EC PCB is defective.

E4-14 Fuser IH Driver Fan Rotation 1. Fan connector is disconnected.2. Fan is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN704)4. EC PCB is defective.

E4-20 Thermistor (TH1) Open Error 1. Thermistor (TH1) is defective.2. Thermistor (TH1) connector is disconnected.3. Fuser Unit Relay connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)5. EC PCB is defective.

E4-21 Thermistor (TH2) Open Error 1. Thermistor (TH2) is defective.2. Thermistor (TH2) connector is disconnected. 3. Fuser Unit Relay connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)5. EC PCB is defective.


E4: Induction Heating (IH) Fuser Unit Error CodesCode Function Check Points

220APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322


E4-24 Thermistor (TH1) High Temperature Error

1. Thermistor (TH1) is defective.2. Thermistor (TH1) connector is disconnected.3. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective.4. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN508)5. EC PCB is defective.


1. Thermistor (TH1) is defective.2. Thermistor (TH1) connector is disconnected.3. Contact of Thermistor (TH1) and Heater Belt is abnormal.4. Thermistor (TH2) is defective.5. Thermistor (TH2) connector is disconnected.6. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective.7. EC PCB connector is disconnected.8. EC PCB is defective.





E4-41 Fuser IH Core Motor Rotation 1. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor is defective.2. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor connector is

disconnected.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN504)4. EC PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)5. EC PCB is defective.

E4-42 Fuser IH Core Motor Position 1. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor is defective.2. Induction Heating (IH) Core Motor connector is

disconnected.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)4. EC PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)5. EC PCB is defective.


221APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E4-43 Fuser Roller Rotate Detection Sensor

1. Fuser Motor is defective.2. Fuser Motor connector is disconnected.3. MOTDRV PCB connector is disconnected. (CN502)4. MOTDRV PCB is defective. (Fuse is open)5. MOTDRV PCB is defective.6. Rotation detect Sensor 1 is defective.7. Rotation detect Sensor 1 connector is disconnected.8. Rotation detect Sensor 2 is defective.9. Rotation detect Sensor 2 connector is disconnected.

10. Fuser Unit Relay connector is disconnected.E4-44 Fuser Input Voltage Upper Limit Power Voltage is too high. (Power Source is out of

specification)E4-46 Fuser Temperature Rising Error 1. Intermittent blackouts occur frequently. (Power Source is out

of specification)2. Induction Heating (IH) Unit is defective.3. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective.4. Fuser Unit is defective. (Heater Belt / Thermistor)

E4-48 Fuser Input Current Upper Limit 1. Induction Heating (IH) PCB is defective. (Check Fuse F002)2. Induction Heating (IH) Coil is defective.

E5: System Error CodesCode Function Check PointsE5-01 Vp (+24V, Printer) 1. LVPS Output is abnormal.

2. EC PCB connector is disconnected.3. EC PCB is defective.

E5-02 Vp (+12V, Printer)E5-05 Vp (+24V, Scanner)E5-10 Sequence Error 1. EC ROM Version is not correct.

2. EC PCB connector is disconnected.3. EC PCB is defective.

E5-11 Printer Engine Communication Abnormal

1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN717)2. EC PCB is defective.3. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN61)4. SC PCB is defective.

E5-12 Scanner Engine Communication Abnormal


E5-13 Printer Engine Communication Abnormal During Initialization


E5-17 Scanner Synchronization 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN709)2. EC PCB is defective.3. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN51)4. SC PCB is defective.

E5-19 Scanner Line Synchronization


222APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E5-22 Finisher Communication 1. EC PCB connector is disconnected.2. EC PCB is defective.3. IPC PCB is disconnected.4. IPC PCB is defective.5. Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected.6. OP LVPS connector is disconnected.7. OP LVPS is defective.8. DC PCB connector is disconnected.9. Finisher is defective.

E5-42 Total Counter 1 Connection(Upper side)

1. Total Counter connector is disconnected.2. Total Counter is defective.3. EC PCB connector is disconnected.4. EC PCB is defective.

E5-43 Total Counter 2 Connection(Down side)

E5-60 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor Rotation

1. Cooling Fan connector is disconnected.2. Cooling Fan is defective.3. SC PCB connector is disconnected. (CN98)4. SC PCB is defective.

E5-70 SC PCB Abnormal 1 1. SC PCB is defective.E5-71 SC PCB Abnormal 2E5-72 SC PCB Abnormal 3 1. Update SC Firmware.

2. SC PCB is defective.E5-90 LSU & PCB Mismatched 1. LSU is incorrect.

2. EC PCB is incorrect.3. LSU is defective.4. EC PCB is defective.

E5-91 Serial Number Mismatched Register Serial Number again.

E7: Optional Unit Error CodesCode Function Check Points UnitE7-21 Finisher Paper Exit Motor 1. Paper Feed Motor connector is disconnected.

2. Paper Feed Motor is locked by Paper Jam.

DA-FS320/FS325

E7-23 Finisher Staple Motor 1. Stapler Unit connector is disconnected.2. Stapler Unit is defective.3. Stapler Home Position Sensor is defective.4. Stapler Cover Micro-SW is defective.5. Saddle Unit Micro-SW is defective.6. Large Gear Solenoid is defective.7. Large Gear Solenoid connector is disconnected.8. Paper Feed Motor connector is disconnected.9. Staple Motor is jammed with a staple.

E7-24 Finisher Staple Sift Motor

DA-FS320

only

E7-27 Finisher Tray Lift Motor 1. Stack Tray Paper Height detection Sensor or Paper Hold Lever detection Sensor is defective, or the connector is disconnected.

2. Lift Motor is defective.3. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.4. PCB is defective.5. Lift Drive Gear is defective.

E5: System Error CodesCode Function Check Points

223APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

E7-51 Finisher Delivery Motor 1. Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is defective.2. Wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the

delivery motor is abnormal.3. Stack Delivery Roller is abnormal.4. Delivery Motor is defective.5. PCB is defective.

DA-FS325

only

E7-52 Finisher Paddle Motor 1. Paddle Home Position Sensor is defective.2. Swing Guide Home Position Sensor is defective.3. Wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB, and

the Paddle Motor is abnormal.4. Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly is abnormal. Try

turning the Paddle Motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hand. Is there mechanical tapping in the rotation of the Paddle or the up/down movement of the swing guide? Correct the mechanical mechanism.

5. Finisher Controller PCB is defective. DA-FS325

onlyE7-53 Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor 1. Saddle Folding Sensor is defective.

2. Finisher PCB is defective.E7-54 Finisher Punch Communication 1. Finisher PCB is defective.

2. Punch PCB is defective.E7-55 Finisher Punch Power Supply 1. Punch PCB is defective.E7-56 Finisher Punch Registration

Sensor1. Punch Registration Sensor is defective.2. Punch PCB is defective.

E7-57 Finisher Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration)

1. Saddle Folding Sensor is defective.2. Punch PCB is defective.

E7-58 Finisher Punch Sensor (Waste Full))

1. Punch Sensor is defective.2. Punch PCB is defective.

E7-59 Finisher Staple Motor 1. Stack Tray Paper Height detection Sensor, or Paper Hold Lever detection Sensor is defective, or the connector is disconnected.

2. Upper Limit detection Sensor is defective.3. Upper Limit detection Sensor connector is

disconnected.4. PCB is defective.

DA-FS320

only

E7-60 Finisher Aligning: Rear Motor 1. Rear Aligning Home Position Sensor is defective.2. Rear Aligning Motor is defective.

DA-FS325

onlyE7-61 Finisher Aligning: Front Motor 1. Front Aligning Home Position Sensor is defective.

2. Front Aligning Motor is defective. DA-FS320/FS325

E7-62 Finisher Aligning: Stapler 1. Stapler Jam in the Cartridge.2. Stapler Sensor is defective.3. Stapler Motor is defective.

E7-63 Finisher Backup RAM 1 (Punch) Data Error 1. Punch PCB is defective.

DA-FS325

only

E7: Optional Unit Error CodesCode Function Check Points Unit

224APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate Optional Unit Service Manual.

E7-64 Finisher Backup RAM 2 (Finisher) Data Error 1. Finisher Controller PCB is defective.

DA-FS320/FS325

E7-65 Finisher Communication Error (EC PCB-Finisher PCB)

1. Finisher ROM Version is incorrect.2. EC Firmware Version is incorrect.

E7-90 Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.2. Hardware Key is defective.

E13: Out of TonerCode Function Check PointsE13 Toner Sensor 1. Toner Cartridge is not installed correctly.

2. Out of Toner.3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.4. Toner Sensor is defective.5. EC PCB connector is disconnected.6. EC PCB is defective.

Paper Full ErrorDisplay Function Check Points

“Remove Paper from Inner Tray”

Paper Full Sensor 1. Paper Full Sensor is defective.2. EC PCB is defective.

--- Paper Full Sensor 1. Paper Full Sensor is disconnected.2. Paper Full Sensor is defective.3. EC PCB is defective.4. Service Mode F5-173 setting is OFF.

E7: Optional Unit Error CodesCode Function Check Points Unit

225APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.6. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

Fax Information CodesCode Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause012 RCV C, D The length of the received

document is over 2 m.Transmitter Document Jam.

030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not activate within 10 seconds after the document starts feeding.

Document is not set properly.Defective Read Point Sensor.

031 XMTCOPY

C Transmitting document was longer than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in).(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4 in), 600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in))

The document may jam.Defective Read Point Sensor.

061 - A ADF Door is open. Cover is not firmly closed.Connectors are not firmly connected.

200 RCV C Decoding process is not completed at the end of phase C.

Defective FCB PCB.

212 XMT RCV

A-E Interface error occurred between the CPU and modem.

Modem is defective. (FCB PCB)Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)

301 XMT RCV

System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)

331 XMT C 8-minutes timer error. (Germany only)

400 XMT B T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

Wrong number is dialed and the START button is pushed.Telephone line is disconnected while dialing.FCB PCB (Modem) is defective.Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED)

401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for CFR or FTT.

Your machine's ID Number is not programmed.Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password (Password Reception, Selective Receive).Mailbox is full.

402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver while transmitter is waiting for NSF/DIS.

Receiver working in non-CCITT mode only. (Possible incompatibility)

403 RCV(Polling)

B Transmitter had no polling function.

"POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter.

404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) followed by TCF three times, but the receiver did not respond. (CFR or FTT is usually returned)

Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) FCB PCB is defective.Receiver disconnects line during first NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.

405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it transmitted TCF at 2400 bps.Received RTN after communicating at 2400 bps.

Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged due to line noise)Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) FCB PCB is defective.

226APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

406 RCV(Password

Comm.)

B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV-Password mismatched. Selective RCV incomplete.

XMT, RCV password does not match. Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone number.

407 XMT D Transmitter received no response after it transmitted post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or received DCN.

Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper jamming, etc.) Receiver ceased receiving because of excessive error. (Line quality is poor) FCB PCB (Modem) is defective.

408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM.

Receiver receives data with error. (Line quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) FCB PCB is defective.

409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it transmitted a post message, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.

Receiver receives data with error due to poor line quality, and receiving operator requests voice contact.Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) FCB PCB is defective.

410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.)

Interface or line is faulty.Transmitter is defective.

411 RCV(Polling)

B Received DCN after transmitting NSC.

Transmitter is not ready for polling communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver.

412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After transmitting FTT)

Transmitter is defective.FCB PCB is defective.

414 RCV(Polling)

B No response received after transmitting 3rd NSC.

Password does not match between transmitter and receiver.Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.)

415 XMT(Polling)

B Remote side attempted to receive message from your machine in polling communication.

Inform the remote side that your machine does not have the polling transmission feature.

416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post command, such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc.

Transmitter is defective.Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is distorted due to line noise)FCB PCB is defective.

417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in response to post message.

Line quality is poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)FCB PCB is defective.

418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in response to PRI-Q from transmitter. (Transmitting operator requests voice contact)

Line quality is poor. (There are excessive errors in received data)FCB PCB is defective.

420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

There is wrong incoming call.(Non-facsimile communication)Transmitter is defective.FCB PCB is defective.

421 RCV B Busy Tone is detected after sending NSF Signal.

Remote station disconnected the line.Wrong number is dialed.

Fax Information CodesCode Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause

227APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC (or DTC) was invalid.

There is an incompatibility.

427 G3 RCV

B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS transmitted.

The interface is incompatible.

433 XMT RCV

B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station.

434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did not turn OFF within 180 sec. after receiver detected FLAG signal.

Remote unit is defective.FCB PCB is defective.

436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting FTT.

Transmitter is defective or incompatible.Line quality is poor.

456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used.

457 RELAY XMT CONF. XMT/

POLL

B Remote unit does not have Relayed XMT or Confidential Comm. capability.

459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality is poor. (Training signal is distorted due to line noise)FCB PCB is defective.

490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the limit (Function Parameter No. 70) of 64 lines.

Line quality is poor.FCB PCB is defective.

494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was more than 10 sec. when receiver received message data.

Transmitter is defective.Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged due to line noise)FCB PCB is defective.

495 XMT RCV

C During reception, CD turned OFF or continued ON for long time. During communication, lost loop - current.

Line is disconnected.Transmitter is defective.FCB PCB is defective.

496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn ON.

FCB PCB is defective.

501 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B Incompatible Modem on the Remote unit.

502 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF or continued ON for long time. During communication, lost loop - current.

Line is disconnected.Transmitter is defective.FCB PCB is defective.

503 XMT/RCV(V.34)

B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn ON during training.

FCB PCB is defective.Line is disconnected.

504 RCV/V.34(Polling)

B Polling is rejected from the remote station.

No polling original is set.

505 XMT/V.34(Polling)

B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set.

540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd CTC or DCN received.

Incompatible interface.

541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd EOR or received DCN.

Line is faulty.FCB PCB abnormal.


228APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR transmitted or received DCN.

Remote unit is abnormal.

543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without MCF.

Remote unit is abnormal.

544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Transmission.

Line is faulty.FCB PCB abnormal.

550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C has elapsed.

Defective remote station.

554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving EOR.

Faulty line.FCB PCB abnormal.

555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving EOR.

Faulty line and Operator Call requested by RX side.

570 RCV B Password or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication.

571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function.

580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit 155) OFF.

Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function.

581 XMT B Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.


582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.


601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission.

623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built-in dialer engaged)

Operator removed the original from the ADF after dialing was completed.Original was not set properly in the ADF.

630 XMT or RCV(Polling)

B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone is not detected. (Country dependent)Busy tone is detected. (Country dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed without a signal from the receiver.

631 XMT A "STOP" key was pressed during Auto Dialing.

634 XMT Redial count over with no response or busy tone was not detected.Note:

U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected.

638 XMT Power turned Off with applicable data in memory or during communication.

Power switched off. Power failure occurred.

700 XMT RCV

PSTNLAN

Communication terminated by Operator pressing the "STOP" key.


229APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

711 RCV LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect.

712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied from the Mail Server.

Mail Server received an incorrect email address. (Dependent on Server's Mail application)

714 XMT RCV

LAN LAN Interface error.Cannot logon to the LAN.

The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not connected.An unexpected LAN problem occurred.

715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set.Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address.

716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set.No email application is activated on the Mail Server.

717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol transmission.

Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.Mail Server is defective.

718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred while receiving printing data. The paper size selected within your application to print is larger than the paper size loaded in the paper tray(s).

Check the document size and resolution.Ask originator to re-send in a supported size and resolution.

719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a format that is not supported.

Ask the originator to re-send with a supported file attachment:

* In a TIFF-F format.* Image data conforming to A4/Letter size.

720 POP LAN Unable to connect to the POP Server.

Incorrect POP Server address is set.POP Server is down.

721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set.

722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network Parameters (such as: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, etc.) from the DHCP server.

DHCP is not available.(Contact the Network Administrator.)

725 XMT POP

LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.DNS Server is down.

726 XMT POP

LAN Received an error response from the DNS Server.

Incorrect POP Server address is set.Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.

727 XMT LAN Received an Error or No Response from the RemoteInternet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT)

Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT. (Retry is possible)

728 XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory Overflow or No Power. (Retry is not possible)

729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP AUTHENTICATION) when connecting with the SMTP server.

SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name and/or Password are incorrect.(Contact the Network Administrator.)


230APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet parameters or the autodialer via Email from a PC.

Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is set to Valid.

731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Transmission Request was received.

Dial buffer for manual number dialing (70 stations) are being used.

741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name before dialing with Timer Controlled Communications, etc.

800 Relay Comm.

PSTN The machine was requested to relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability.

814 Conf. XMT Conf. Polling

Relay Comm.

PSTN The remote station does not have Relay XMT nor Confidential Communication capability.

815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox is full.816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did

not match.825 Conf. RCV

Conf. PolledPSTN Parameter settings of the remote

station are not properly set.870 MEM XMT

Multi-CopyPSTNLAN

If applicable sub-address is not registered in the phone book of the receiver side when using sub-addressing function.

Receiver side does not have correct sub-address in their phone book.

741 XMT, Polling PSTN Memory overflow occurred while storing documents into memory.

879 MemoryRCV

PSTN Memory overflow occurred during substitute memory reception.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.

LAN Memory overflow.Mail Server sent a reset command while downloading the data to the machine.

Memory overflow on the Fax side.Mail server aborted the download (Busy with other higher priority jobs).

880 - - File Access Error.884 - - File Access Error.961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.

LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.


231APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.

Journal Example

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code-: Not used/defined

Fax Diagnostic Codes

DataDefinition

Manufacturer Code

0 -1 Casio2 Canon3 Sanyo4 Sharp5 Tamura6 Toshiba7 NEC8 Oki9 HitachiA XeroxB FujitsuC MatsushitaD MitsubishiE MurataF Ricoh

************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********

NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC

01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000

****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******

- PANASONIC MACHINE

1st digit 13th digit

232APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222nd Digit

-: Not used/defined

3rd Digit-: Not used/defined


DataDefinition

ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button0 - - - -1 Received - - -2 - Received - -3 Received Received - -4 - - Received -5 Received - Received -6 - Received Received -7 Received Received Received -8 - - - Pressed9 Received - - PressedA - Received - PressedB Received Received - PressedC - - Received PressedD Received - Received PressedE - Received Received PressedF Received Received Received Pressed


DataDefinition

Resolution (dpi) Paper Width0 - A41 S-Fine A42 400 x 400 A43 300 x 300 A44 - B45 S-Fine B46 400 x 400 B47 300 x 300 B48 600 x 600 A49 600 x 600 B4A - -B 600 x 600 A3C - A3D S-Fine A3E 400 x 400 A3F 300 x 300 A3

233APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3224th Digit

-: Not used/defined

5th Digit-: Not used/defined


DataDefinition

Scanning Rate Resolution0 20 ms/line Std1 5 ms/line Std2 10 ms/line Std3 - Std4 40 ms/line Std5 - Std6 - Std7 0 ms/line Std8 20 ms/line Fine9 5 ms/line FineA 10 ms/line FineB - FineC 40 ms/line FineD - FineE - FineF 0 ms/line Fine


DataDefinition

Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Memory/Non-Memory

0 - Manual Communication

Non-Memory

1 Used Manual Communication

Non-Memory

2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory8 - Manual

CommunicationMemory

9 Used Manual Communication

Memory

A - Auto Dialing MemoryB Used Auto Dialing MemoryC - Auto RCV MemoryD Used Auto RCV MemoryE - Remote RCV MemoryF Used Remote RCV Memory

234APR 2005Ver. 1.1


-: Not used/defined



DataDefinition

Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm. Password Comm.

0 - RCV Off Off1 Yes RCV Off Off2 - XMT Off Off3 Yes XMT Off Off4 - RCV On Off5 Yes RCV On Off6 - XMT On Off7 Yes XMT On Off8 - RCV Off On9 Yes RCV Off OnA - XMT Off OnB Yes XMT Off OnC - RCV On OnD Yes RCV On OnE - XMT On OnF Yes XMT On On


DataDefinition

Sub-Address Comm.

Confidential Comm. Relayed Comm. Turnaround

Polling0 - - - -1 Yes - - -2 - Yes - -3 Yes Yes - -4 - - Yes -5 Yes - Yes -6 - Yes Yes -7 Yes Yes Yes -8 - - - Yes9 Yes - - YesA - Yes - YesB Yes Yes - YesC - - Yes YesD Yes - Yes YesE - Yes Yes YesF Yes Yes Yes Yes

235APR 2005Ver. 1.1


-: Not used/defined



DataDefinition

Advanced Comm.

Cover Sheet XMT

0 - -1 Report XMT -2 Check & Call -3 - -4 Memory Transfer -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 - Yes9 Report XMT YesA Check & Call YesB - YesC Memory Transfer YesD - YesE - YesF - Yes


DataDefinition

Short Protocol Standard/ Non-Standard

0 - Standard1 - Standard2 - Standard3 - Standard4 - Standard5 - Standard6 - Standard7 - Standard8 - Non-Standard9 B Non-StandardA - Non-StandardB D Non-StandardC - Non-StandardD B Non-StandardE - Non-StandardF D Non-Standard

236APR 2005Ver. 1.1


-: Not used/defined



DataDefinition

Coding ECM0 MH -1 MR -2 MMR -3 JBIG -4 - -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 MH Yes9 MR YesA MMR YesB JBIG YesC - YesD - YesE - YesF - Yes


DataDefinition

Symbol Rate (V.34) V.34

0 - -1 - -2 - -3 - -4 - -5 - -6 - -7 - -8 2400 sr Yes9 - YesA 2800 sr YesB 3000 sr YesC 3200 sr YesD 3429 sr YesE - YesF - Yes

237APR 2005Ver. 1.1


-: Not used/defined



DataDefinition

Modem Speed Modem Speed (V.34)

0 2400 bps -1 4800 bps 2400 bps2 7200 bps 4800 bps3 9600 bps 7200 bps4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps6 12000 bps 14400 bps7 14400 bps 16800 bps8 - 19200 bps9 - 21600 bpsA - 24000 bpsB - 26400 bpsC - 28800 bpsD - 31200 bpsE - 33600 bpsF - -


DataDefinition

0123456789ABCDEF

238APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)4.8.1. Checking the Basics

4.8.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.

If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:

• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly • Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct• Ensure that the Unit is turned On• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit• No error message is displayed on the Unit • Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box

Problem Possible Solution(s)

Character is not printing in the correct positions or the characters near the edges of the page are missing.

• Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printerdriver to coincide with the application.

• Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.• Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device

requires minimum margins of ¼ inches (5 mm) on all sides.

The font type is incorrect • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in

the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.• Select ”Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer

Driver Properties dialog box.

The character is not smooth.

Fine line print cannot be obtained.

• Select 600 dpi resolution.

Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.

Different character or symbol from the document is printed.

• Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.

The printer does not print anything or prints irregular images from the middle of the

1st page.

• Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install anExpansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in theQuality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• Select 300 dpi resolution.

• Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.

239APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4.8.3. Error Message Appears on the PC

4.8.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

4.8.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Error Message Possible Solution(s)Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/

is 100Base-TX cable properly connected.• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)

Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someonefs print job,please wait, and try again later.

• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.

Cannot print because an error is found in the current printer setting.

• Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with theapplication and the printer driver settings.

Error Message• The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be

enough to complete the print job. Either install an optional Sort Memory, or change the

resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.

• The print settings may not be matched for the system.Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Propertiesdialog box.i.e. Multi-sized printing.

Cannot complete print job Image memory overflow

Cannot print System error

Cannot complete Confirm print condition

• Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties dialog box.

Problem Possible Solution(s)

Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.

240APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5 Service Modes5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.Caution:

The factory default parameters are preset (destination dependent) for optimum performance and in compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed. Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become inoperable.

5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure1. To select the Service Mode

The service mode is selected when “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.

2. To exit the Service ModeThe service mode is reset when the “Function” and “C (Clear)” keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions

Service Modes (For Copier)Service Mode Item Function

F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD and

LEDs.02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page Memory.03-38

Print Test Patterns Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment, etc.

F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key is pressed.

F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start key is pressed.

F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items (selected item numbers) is checked.

F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be changed.

F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be adjusted.

F7 Electronic Counter Electronic Counters for MaintenanceF8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item (selected

by code numbers)F9 Unit Maintenance Fax Service Mode

Service Alert Tel #Firmware VersionPrint Device Info.

241APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

F5-000 Country Version USA/CAN F5-086 PM Cycle (Optics) No F5-004 LSU off timer 15 Sec F5-087 PM Cycle (ADF) NoF5-005 LSU Fan Extention 5 min F5-088 USB Port Function OffF5-007 Language Default None F5-089 LAN Speed/Duplex OffF5-008 Batch Printing Mode F5-090 TCH Panel Beep Sound SoftF5-012 Printer Fan Extention5 min F5-091 M1, Size 70*160F5-013 Paper Out Red Indicator On F5-092 M2, Size 95*220F5-014 Paper Size Tray 1 8.5x11 F5-095 Paper Size(FA) USA/CANF5-015 Paper Size Tray 2 11x17 F5-096 Bypass Detection USA/CANF5-016 Paper Size Tray 3 None F5-097 Bp Tray A4R/FLS/LGL(FA) 8x13

F5-017 Paper Size Tray 4 None F5-104 Red Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1F5-020 ADF Auto F5-105 Green Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1F5-021 Finisher Auto F5-106 Blue Sel(2C/1C Cpy) 1F5-022 System Console Auto F5-107 Prt Paper Photo HT1 ScreenF5-023 Paper Transport Unit Auto F5-108 Ground Color Removal RealTimeF5-026 2-Sided Unit Auto F5-109 JPEG Sampling Ratio 4.1.1F5-032 Job Build And SADF Mode Yes F5-120 Heater Off Timer 1minF5-034 Multi Size Feed Default Off F5-121 Fuser Unit Type USA/CANF5-036 Display DD Key Yes F5-125 ACBias Phase FullSpeed NoF5-038 2-Sided Mode Default No F5-126 ACBias Phase HalfSpeed No

F5-040 Dounle Cont LDR F5-130 AutoPrintImageControl No

F6-000 Registration Clr Normal 0 F6-088 ITMotor Speed Half 0F6-001 Registration Clr Slow 0 F6-090 FuserMotor MSpeed STD 0F6-005 Registration B&W Normal 0 F6-091 FuserMotor CSpeed STD 0F6-006 Registration B&W Slow 0 F6-093 FuserMotor Speed Half 0F6-007 Registration BW CLspeed 0 F6-095 FuserMotor Speed Half L 0F6-010 Paper Loop Tray,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-105 HR Temp Balance1 0F6-011 Paper Loop Tray,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-106 HR Temp Balance2 0F6-012 Paper Loop Tray,*,Slow 0 F6-107 CoolDown Escape Temp1 0F6-015 Paper Loop By-p,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-108 CoolDown Escape Temp2 0F6-016 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-110 Mono HR Temp Balance3 0

F6-017 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Slow 0 F6-111 Mono HR Temp Balance4 0F6-018 PaperLoop Bp,Thick,Slow 0 F6-112 Color HR Temp Balance5 0F6-020 Paper Loop ADU,Clr,Nrm 0 F6-113 Color HR Temp Balance6 0F6-021 Paper Loop ADU,B&W,Nrm 0 F6-115 CoolDown Judg Tmp(OP) 0F6-022 Paper Loop ADU,*Slow 0 F6-116 CoolDown Escape Tmp(OP) 0F6-025 Registration Viod 20 F6-117 Mono SlowDown Temp1 0F6-030 Trail Edge Void A3,LD 20 F6-118 Mono SlowDown Temp2 0F6-031 Trail Edge Void B4,LG 20 F6-119 Mono SlowDown Temp3 0F6-032 Trail Edge Void FLS 20 F6-120 Print Pause Temp 0F6-033 Trail Edge Void A4R,LTR 20 F6-121 Color SlowDown Temp1 0

F6-034 Trail Edge Void B5R 20 F6-122 Color SlowDown Temp2 0F6-035 Trail Edge Void A4,LT 20 F6-123 Color SlowDown Temp3 0F6-036 Trail Edge Void B5,Exc 20 F6-124 WarmUP Timer 0

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02

242APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

2.FIRMWARE VERSION SC : AAT001xxPU

1.MACHINE INFORMATION MACHINE NAME : DP-C322 MAC ADDRESS : 0800230233F0 SERIAL NUMBER : sssssss

SC BOOT : V004 PNL : T00006 EC : 32cpm T1xxxx SCN : T00005 FCB : FCBAATxxxxx_AU FINISHER : 001

3.MEMORY CAPACITY PAGE MEMORY : 640 MB SORT MEMORY : 105 MB FAX MEMORY : 3 MB 4.OPTION 3rd PAPER TRAY : Yes 4th PAPER TRAY : Yes FINISHER : FS325 PUNCH UNIT : No FAX BOARD : Yes NETWORK SCANNER : No PS PRINTER : No EMAIL : Yes DDS : Yes HDD : Yes

5.ERROR LOG TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082 NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J70 XX-00000008 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 E03-311 XX-00000000 (See Remarks) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

**********-MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

****************************** -PANASONIC - ***** - 0001- ********

Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

Remarks: XX-00000140

00 : Printer Error 02 : Scanner Error

Page Count

-PANASONIC -

243APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

F7-01 Key Operator ID Code : 0000

F7-02 Maintenance CountTotal Count : 8PM Count : 8Scanner PM Count : 1ADF Count : 8ADF PM Count : 8

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01

244APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.3. F1 Mode: Self Test

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "1" key on the Keypad.↓

Press the "Start" key.↓

Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.↓

If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.↓

Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display.↓

When the "C (Clear)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.↓

Press "Function" and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F1 Mode

No. Item Function RemarksPrintout Print Mode

00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD. --- ---

01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD and LEDs. --- ---

02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page Memory. --- ---

03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment.

Mono (BK) Color, Full Speed04 Print Test Pattern 2 Color, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)05 Print Test Pattern 3 Mono, Full Speed06 Print Test Pattern 4 Mono, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)07 Print Test Pattern 5 Mono, Mixed Speed08 Print Test Pattern 6 Prints the “Slant” pattern for

setting the Paper position alignment.

Mono, Full Speed09 Print Test Pattern 7 Color, Full Speed10 Print Test Pattern 8 Mono, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)11 Print Test Pattern 9 Prints the “Grid” pattern for

setting the Paper position alignment.

Mono, Full Speed12 Print Test Pattern 10 Color, Full Speed13 Print Test Pattern 11 Mono, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)14 Print Test Pattern 12 Prints the pattern for setting the

“Duplex” Paper position alignment.

Color, Full Speed15 Print Test Pattern 13 Color, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)16 Print Test Pattern 14 Mono, Full Speed17 Print Test Pattern 15 Mono, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)18 Print Test Pattern 16 Mono, Mixed Speed

245APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

19 Print Test Pattern 17 (Only A3/11x17)

Prints the pattern for Color Registration.

Color Color, Full Speed

20 Print Test Pattern 18 Prints the pattern using All Primary Colors

Color (Y)

21 Print Test Pattern 19 Prints the pattern using All Primary Colors

Color (M) Color, Full Speed22 Print Test Pattern 20 Color (C)23 Print Test Pattern 21 Color (BK)24 Print Test Pattern 22 Prints the 2 by 2 pattern Color (Y)25 Print Test Pattern 23 Color (M)26 Print Test Pattern 24 Color (C)27 Print Test Pattern 25 Color (BK)28 Print Test Pattern 26 Prints the 4 by 4 pattern Color (Y) Mono, Half Speed

(1200 dpi)29 Print Test Pattern 27 Color (M)30 Print Test Pattern 28 Color (C)31 Print Test Pattern 29 Color (BK)32 Print Test Pattern 30 Prints the 1 by 1 pattern Color (Y) Color, Full Speed33 Print Test Pattern 31 Color (M)34 Print Test Pattern 32 Color (C)35 Print Test Pattern 33 Color (BK)36 Print Test Pattern 34

(Only A3/11x17)Prints the pattern for Fusing Color (BK)

37 Print Test Pattern 35(Only A3/11x17)

Color (YMC)

38 Print Test Pattern 36(Only A3/11x17)

This test is used for checking the OPC Drum for scratches.

Color Color (1 by 1), Full Speed

F1 Mode

No. Item Function RemarksPrintout Print Mode

246APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.4. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test

Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.↓


Enter the number to activate the test then press "Start" key.↓

Press "Stop" key to cancel the test.↓



F4 Mode (Input Check)

No. Function Condition Message Display Remarks7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

100 Size Sensor X Original detected on the X position.

1

Size Sensor Y Original detected on the Y position.

1

Size Sensor Z Original detected on the Z position.

1

Size Sensor A Original detected on the A position.

1

Size Sensor B Original detected on the B position.

1

101 +24V Line Error Detecting Signal

+24V Line is ON. 1

Home Position Sensor Home position is detected.

1

ADF/Platen Cover Open Sensor

ADF/Platen Cover is open.

1

ADF/Platen Cover Angle Sensor

ADF/Platen Cover isopen more than 30° angle.

1

102 ADF Detection Sensor Unit is not connected. 1ADF Cover Open Detection Sensor

Cover is open. 1

ADF Paper Exit Detection Sensor

Original is detected. 1

ADF Inverting Detection Sensor

Original is detected. 1

ADF Registration Sensor 3 Original is detected. 1ADF Registration Sensor 2 Original is detected. 1ADF Registration Sensor 1 Original is detected. 1

ABZ

Y

X

Platen

Front Side

247APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

103 ADF Original Length Sensor 2

Sensor is activated. 1







ADF Original Sensor Original is detected. 1102-199

Not Used

F4 Mode (Output Check)No. Item Function Remark200 Lamp When SCN PCB CN704-1, CN704-4

signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Lamp operates for 4 seconds.

201 ADF Main Motor Rotating(50% rotation speed)

ADF Main Motor spins at a 50% rate.





204 ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse Rotating(50% rotation speed)

ADF paper Feed Motor spins in reverse at a 50% rate.





207 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CN655-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.

208 ADF Registration Roller 1 Clutch When CN656-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.

209 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch When CN656-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.

210 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch When CN659-6 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.

211 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch When CN659-7 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.



248APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

212 ADF Speed Down Clutch When CN659-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds.

214 ADF Solenoid When CN660-7 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 200ms.

215 ADF Inverting Solenoid When CN660-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 200ms.

216 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid When CN660-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 1 second.

217 ADF Stamp Solenoid When CN658-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 1 second.

218-299

Not Used



300 100V/200V LVPS Signal LVPS is connected. 0 1 : 200V LVPS24V F PS "On" Detection +24V PS Voltage is Off. 124V M PS "On" Detection +24V PS Voltage is Off. 1

301 Right Cover 3 Open/Close Sensor

Cover is open. 1

Right Cover 1 Open/Close Sensor

Cover is open. 1

Right Cover 2 Open/Close Sensor

Cover is open. 1

Front Cover Open/Close Sensor

Cover is open. 1

New OPC Drum Unit K Detection

OPC Drum Unit detected.

1

New OPC Drum Unit C Detection


1

New OPC Drum Unit M Detection


1

New OPC Drum Unit Y Detection


1

F4 Mode (Output Check)No. Item Function Remark

249APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

302 Paper Sensor(2nd Paper Tray)

Paper is detected. 0

Upper Limit Sensor(2nd Paper Tray)


Paper NP Sensor(2nd Paper Tray)


Paper Tray Sensor(2nd Paper Tray)


Size Sensor 1(2nd Paper Tray)


Paper Tray Sensor(1st Paper Tray)


Size Sensor 1(1st Paper Tray)


303 FTR Cam Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated. 0FTR Cam Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated. 0STR Cam Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated. 0STR Cam Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated. 0Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0OHP Sensor OHP is detected. 1

304 IH Core Sensor 2 Sensor is not activated A3 Home Position. (Lo)

0

IH Core Sensor 1 Sensor is not activated A3 Home Position. (Lo)

0


Sensor is not activated Release Position. (Lo)

0


Sensor is not activated Release Position. (Lo)

0

Fuser Unit Enter Sensor Sensor is activated. (Hi) 1IT Belt Home Position Sensor.

IT Belt Home Position is detected.

1

305 Polygon Motor Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Development Motor 2 Ready

Ready state not detected.

1

Development Motor 1 Ready


1

Drum Motor 2 Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Drum Motor 1 Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Paper Feed Motor Ready Sensor


1



250APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

306 IH Fan Ready Ready state not detected.

1

IH Driver Fan Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Toner Bottle Motor Lock Detection Sensor K

Locked position detected.

0

Toner Bottle Motor Lock Detection Sensor C


0

Toner Bottle Motor Lock Detection Sensor M


0

Toner Bottle Motor Lock Detection Sensor Y


0


Rotation not detected.(Low = not detected).

0

307 Belt Motor Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Shutter Sensor 1 LSU closed Shutter detected.

0


Rotation not detected.(Low = not detected).

0

LSU Fan Ready Ready state not detected.

1

Toner Bottle Fan Ready Ready state is detected. 1Pressure Roller Fan Ready Ready state not

detected.1

308 Thermistor 4 Broken Wire Detection

Broken wire detected. 0

Thermistor 3 Broken Wire Detection






Thermistor 4 Abnormal High Temperature Detection

Abnormal High Temperature detected.

0

308 Thermistor 3 Abnormal High Temperature Detection


0



0



0

309 Jam Sensor Paper Jam is detected. 0



251APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

310 Paper Path Sensor(4th Paper Tray)


Upper Limit Sensor(4th Paper Tray)


NP Sensor(4th Paper Tray)


4th Tray Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 04th Tray Sensor Sensor is activated. 1Paper Feed PCB Detection(Paper Tray Option)

PCB is connected. 1

Paper Feed Motor Look Detection(Paper Tray Option)

Motor is Stopped. 1

311 Paper Path Sensor(3rd Paper Tray)


Upper Limit Sensor(3rd Paper Tray)


NP Sensor(3rd Paper Tray)


Paper Remaining Sensor 3(3rd Paper Tray)


Paper Remaining Sensor 4(3rd Paper Tray)


3rd Tray Detection Sensor Unit is connected. 0NP Sensor(3rdth Paper Tray)


Paper Tray Open Sensor(Paper Tray Option)

Door is opened. 0

312 Transportation Unit Path Sensor


Outer Exit Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 0Transportation Unit Cover Sensor

Cover is open. 0

Transportation Unit Detection Sensor

Unit is connected. 1



252APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

313 Paper Size Sensor 3(Sheet Bypass)


Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected. 0Cooling Fan for Main Unit Ready

Fan is stopped. 1

Inner Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor


NP Sensor(1st Paper Tray)


Upper Limit Sensor(1st Paper Tray)


Intermediate Sensor(1st Paper Tray)


314 Size Sensor 3(Sheet Bypass)


Size Sensor 2(Sheet Bypass)


Size Sensor 1(Sheet Bypass)


NP Sensor(Sheet Bypass)


ADU Right Cover Open Sensor

Door is opened. 0

ADU 2 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0ADU 1 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0ADU Inner Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0

315 Coin Vendor Insufficient Amount Signal

Insufficient Amount “0“ is detected.

1

LSU Identification 2 of Machine

Paper is detected.

LSU Identification 1 of Machine

Paper is detected.

Key Counter Detection Sensor


Mechanical Counter Detection Sensor(Color)


Mechanical Counter Detection Sensor(Monochrome)




253APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

316 Developer Unit K Detection Sensor

Developer Unit is connected.

0

Developer Unit C Detection Sensor


0

Developer Unit M Detection Sensor


0

Developer Unit Y Detection Sensor


0

STR Leak Detection Leak is detected. 0Toner Waste Container Full Detection Sensor

Toner Waste Container is full.

1

Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor

Toner Waste Container is detected.

1

317 Finisher Unit Detection Sensor


318-319

Not Used

320 LVPS Fan Ready Ready state not detected.

0

321-399

Not Used

F4 Mode (Output Check)No. Item Function Remark400 Toner Bottle Fan Toner bottle fan rotates.401 IH Driver Fan IH driver fan rotates.402 LSU Fan LSU fan rotates.403 Pressure Roller Fan Pressure roller fan rotates.404 IH Cooling Fan IH cooling fan rotates.405 Right Cover Fan Right cover fan rotates.406 LVPS Fan Operation controlled by SC

board.407-439

Not Used

440 Developing Motor 1 Motor stops automatically after rotating 5 sec.

441 Developing Motor 2 Motor stops automatically after rotating 5 sec.

442 Toner Bottle Motor Y Motor stops automatically after rotating 2 sec.

443 Toner Bottle Motor M Motor stops automatically after rotating 2 sec.

444 Toner Bottle Motor C Motor stops automatically after rotating 2 sec.

445 Toner Bottle Motor K Motor stops automatically after rotating 2 sec.



254APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

446 Intermediate Transfer (IT) Belt Motor

Motor stops automatically after rotating 5 sec.

447 FTR Pressure Motor Motor rotates after detecting home position, and then it stops automatically.

448 STR Pressure Motor Motor rotates after detecting home position, and then it stops automatically.

449 Fuser Motor Rotation in Forward Direction

Press Start : The Fuser Motor rotates in the Forward Direction, initiating contact between the Pressure Roller and Fuser Roller. (ON position)Press Stop : The Fuser Motor rotates in the Reverse direction, initiating separation of the Pressure Roller from the Fuser Roller, and then the motor stops automatically. (OFF position)

Without heating.

450 Fuser Motor Rotation in Reverse Direction

Pressure Roller from the Fuser Roller, and then the motor stops automatically. (OFF position)

451 Core Switching Motor Core switching motor rotates.452 Lift Motor

(1st Paper Tray)Lift motor rotates.

453 Lift Motor(2nd Paper Tray)

Lift motor rotates.

454 Lift Motor(3rd Paper Tray)

Lift motor rotates.

455 Lift Motor(4th Paper Tray)

Lift motor rotates.

456 Paper Feed Motor Paper feed motor rotates.457 Paper Feed Motor

(Paper Tray Option)Paper feed motor rotates.

458 Transportation Unit Motor Transportation unit motor rotates.459 LSU Motor LSU motor rotates.460-479

Not Used

480 STR Guide Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 2 sec.

481 Solenoid(Sheet Bypass)

Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 2 sec.

482 PF Solenoid 1 Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 2 sec.





255APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

486 Paper Exit Path Switching Solenoid (Outer)

Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 0.3 sec.

487 Paper Exit Path Switching Solenoid (Inner)

Solenoid stops automatically after re-energizing for 0.3 sec.

488 Sensor Shutter Solenoid Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 2 sec.

489 ADU Path Switching Solenoid (ADU)

Solenoid stops automatically after re-energizing for 0.3 sec.

490 ADU Path Switching Solenoid (Exit)

Solenoid stops automatically after energizing for 0.3 sec.

491-519

Not Used

520 Registration Clutch Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.

521 Intermediate Roller Clutch Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.

522 Clutch(Sheet Bypass)

Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.

523 PF Clutch 1 Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.




527 ADU Clutch 1 Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.

528 ADU Clutch 2 Clutch stops automatically after energizing for 1 min.

529 Exit 2 Way Roller Rotation in Forward Direction Clutch


530 Exit 2 Way Roller Rotation in Reverse Direction Clutch


531 Paper Feed Intermediate Roller Clutch (Paper Tray Option)


532 Transportation Unit Transport Clutch


533-559

Not Used

560 Mechanical Counter 1 Stops automatically after 1 count.561 Mechanical Counter 2 Stops automatically after 1 count.562-599

Not Used


256APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322



600 Entrance Paper Path Sensor

Paper is detected. 1 1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS320) Only.

Exit Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 1Alignment Home Position Sensor

Home position is detected.

1

Paper Detection Sensor Paper is detected. 1Paper Holding Sensor Paper is detected. 1Upper Limit Detection Sensor


Exit Tray Full Sensor Paper Exit Tray is full. 1Stapler Home Position Sensor


1

601 Stapler Cartridge Sensor No Stapler Cartridge is detected.

1

Staple Empty Limit Sensor Stapler nearly empty is detected.

1

Stapler Unit Lock Sensor Stapler Unit is detected. 1Stapler Cover Switch Cover is open. 0Top Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0Joint Detect Sensor Finisher Unit is detected. 0

602-649

Not Used

F4 Mode (Output Check)No. Item Function Remark650 Transportation Motor Paper transport motor rotates. 1-Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)

Only.651 Alignment Motor Alignment Motor rotates.652 Tray Motor Tray motor rotates.653 Stapler Motor The stapler motor turns one

revolution, then resets.654 Paddle Solenoid The solenoid energizes for 0.5

second cycle.655 Gear Solenoid The solenoid energizes for 0.5

second cycle.656 Paper Set Lever Solenoid The solenoid energizes for one

second cycle.657-699

Not Used

257APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322



700 Punch Timing Sensor Paper is detected. 1 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325) Only.

Paper Path Entrance Sensor


Processing Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 1Folding Position Sensor Paper is detected. 1Joint Detect Switch Finisher Unit is not

detected.0

Front Door Switch Cover is open. 0Front Door Sensor Cover is open. 0Top Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0

701 Paddle Home Position Sensor


1

Stack Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor


1

Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor


1

Rear Alignment Home Position Sensor


1

Front Alignment Home Position Sensor


1

Folding Roller Home Position Sensor


1

Folding Home Position Sensor


1

Folding Paper Tray Home Position Sensor


702 Stapler Connect Signal Stapler is connected. 1 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325) Only.

Stapler Slide Home Position Sensor


1

Stapler Home Position Sensor


1

Stapler Safety Switch Stapler drive ready is detected.

1

Staple Sensor Staple is detected. 1Self Prime Sensor Staple is detected. 1

703 Stack Tray Paper Sensor Paper is detected. 1Paper Surface Sensor Paper surface is

detected.1

Stack Tray Middle Sensor Paper is detected. 1Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor

Upper limit is detected. 1

Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor

Lower limit is detected. 1

704 Punch Unit Connect Signal Punch Unit is connected.

1

258APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

705-749

Not Used

F4 Mode (Output Check)No. Item Function Remark750 Transportation Motor Paper Transport Motor rotates. 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch

Finisher (DA-FS325) Only.751 Saddle Roller Contacting Saddle Roller making contact.752 Stack Delivery Motor rotates in the

forward directionStack Delivery Motor rotates.

753 Stack Delivery Motor rotates in the reverse direction

Stack Delivery Motor rotates.

754 Paddle Rotates Paddle rotates.755 Stack Roller Contacting Stack Roller making contact.756 Slide Motor Stapler Unit horizontal shift.757 Alignment Operation Alignment Plate Shuttle home

position between A4 position.758 Tray Motor Tray Shuttle paper surface between

full position.759 Staple Operation Staple operation.760 Folding Operation Folding operation.761 Transport Motor (Folding) Transport to folding position.762 Folding Clutch Clutch turns ON/OFF for 1 sec.

cycle.763 Punch Operation Punch operation.764 Punch Horizontal Registration

OperationPunch horizontal registration operation.

765-799

Not Used



259APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.5. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)





Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" button.↓


Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.↓

Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

F5 ModeNo. Item Function Default Setting00 Country Version 0 : Japan

1 : USA/CAN2 : Europe3 : Other

Country Dependent

01-03 Not Used04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec.

2 : 10 sec. 3 : 15 sec. 4 : 20 sec. 6 : 30 sec. 8 : 40 sec.10 : 50 sec.12 : 60 sec.

3 : 15 sec.

05 LSU Fan Extention 5 : 5 min. 2 : 2 min. 0 : None

0 : None

06 Not Used

260APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

07 Language Default (Available language selections are Destination Dependent)

EnglishFrenchC. FrenchGermanSwedishItalianDutchPortugalSpanishNorwayDanishFinnishEnglishPolishHungaryJapaneseCzechRussianGreekChineseTaiwanKorean

English

08 Batch Printing Mode 0 : Off1 : On

0 : Off

09-11 Not Used12 Printer Fan Extension 5 : 5 min

2 : 2 min0 : None

0 : None

13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : Off1 : On

1 : On

14 Paper Size Tray 1

[ When "OK" is selected, a prompt comes up asking you what Media Type you want - Trays 2, 3, & 4 work the same way ]

0 : None 3 : A4 5 : B513 : 8.5x1120 :16K

13 : (for USA /Canada)

3 : (for Europe)

20 : (Others)

F5 ModeNo. Item Function Default Setting

261APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

15 Paper Size Tray 2

[ When "OK" is selected, a prompt comes up asking you what Media Type you want - Trays 2, 3, & 4 work the same way ]

0 : None 1 : A3 2 : B4 3 : A4 4 : A4-R 5 : B5 6 : B5-R 8 : A5-R 9 : 8 x 1310 : 8.5 x 1311 : 11 x 1712 : LEGAL13 : 8.5 x 1114 : 8.5 x 11 R15 : 5.5 x 8.519 : 8K20 :16K

1 : (for Europe)


19 : (Others)20 : (Others)

16 Paper Size Tray 3 Same as F5-1517 Paper Size Tray 4 Same as F5-15

18-19 Not Used20 ADF 0 : No

1 : Auto1 : Auto

21 Finisher 0 : No1 : Auto

1 : Auto

22 System Console 0 : No1 : Auto

1 : Auto

23 Paper Transport Unit 0 : No1 : Auto

1 : Auto

24-25 Not Used26 2-Sided Unit 0 : No

1 : Auto1 : Auto

27-31 Not Used32 Job Build And SADF Mode 0 : No

1 : Yes1 : Yes

33 Not Used34 Multi Size Feed Default 0 : Off

1 : On0 : Off

35-37 Not Used38 2-Sided Mode Default 0 : No

1 : 1 to 22 : 2 to 23 : B to 2

0 : No

39 Not Used40 Double Count 0 : No

1 : LDR2 : LDR, LGL3 : A34 : A3, B4

1 : (for USA / Canada)

3 : (for Europe, Other)

41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed1 : At exit

1 : At exit


262APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

42 Key/Dept Counter 0 : No1 : Key Cntr2 : Dept.3 : Card

0 : No

43 Key Counter Timing 0 : At feed1 : At exit

0 : At feed

44 Insert Paper Count 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

45 Dept Code Reentry Again 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

46-50 Not Used51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No

1 : Yes1 : Yes

52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

53 2-Sided Auto Shift 0 : No1 : Auto sft

0 : No

54 Margin Reduction 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

55 Margin Value Default 0 : 5 mm1 : 10 mm2 : 15 mm3 : 20 mm

1 : 10 mm

56 Edge Value Default 0 : 5 mm1 : 10 mm2 : 15 mm3 : 20 mm

0 : 5 mm

57 Book Value Default 0 : 15 mm1 : 20 mm2 : 25 mm3 : 30 mm

1 : 20 mm

58 U14 Clear 0 : Continue1 : Any Keys

1 : Any Key

59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop1 : Continue

0 : Stop

60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

61 Not Used62 Overflow Detection 0 : No

1 : Yes0 : No

63 U13 Clear 0 : Any Keys1 : Func + 1

0 : Any Key

64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : Yes1 : No

0 : Yes

65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : Yes1 : No

0 : Yes

66 Not Used67 Page Insertion Default 0 : Blank

1 : Copy0 : Blank


263APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

68 Cover Mode Default 0 : F, Blank1 : F, Copy2 : FB, Blank3 : FB, Copy

0 : F, Blank

69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

70 PM Cycle 0 : No 1 : 1.5 K 2 : 2.5 K 3 : 5 K 4 : 10 K 5 : 15 K 6 : 20 K 7 : 30 K 8 : 40 K 9 : 60 K10 : 80 K11 : 90 K12 : 120 K13 : 150 K14 : 200 K15 : 240 K

12 : 120 K

71-77 Not Used78 A4/LTR Size Select 0 : No

1 : Yes0 : No

79 Not Used80 Paper Size Priority 1 : A3

2 : B4 3 : A4 4 : A4-R 5 : B5 6 : B5-R 8 : A5-R 9 : 8 x 1310 : 8.5 x 1311 : 11 x 1712 : LEGAL13 : 8.5 x 1114 : 8.5 x 11 R15 : 5.5 x 8.5 19 : 8K 20 : 16K


3 : (for Europe)

19 : (Others)20 : (Others)

81 B4/FLS Size 0 : B41 : 8 x 132 : 8.5 x 13

0 : B4

82 Manual Skyshot Mode 0 : Off1 : M1, On2 : M2, On3 : M1, M2, On

0 : Off

83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : No 1 : Normal2 : Quality

1 : Normal


264APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

84-85 Not Used86 PM Cycle (Optics) 0 : No

1 : 40 K2 : 60 K3 : 120 K4 : 240 K5 : 360 K6 : 480 K7 : 600 K

0 : No

87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No1 : 40 K2 : 60 K3 : 120 K4 : 240 K5 : 360 K6 : 480 K7 : 600 K

0 : No

88 USB Port Function 0 : Off1 : Once2 : On

0 : Off

89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 1 : 10 Half 2 : 10 Full 3 : 100 Half 4 : 100 Full

0 : Auto

90 Panel Beep Sound 0 : Off1 : Soft2 : Loud

1 : Off

91 M1, Size Set the default size for Manual Skyshot Mode, M1 and M2.

70 x 16092 M2, Size 95 x 220

93-94 Not Used95 Paper Size (FA)

(Factory use only)96 Bypass Detection

(Factory use only)97 BP Tray A4R/FLS/LGL (FA)

(Factory use only)98-103

Not Used

104 Red Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1 : 12 : 23 : 3

1

105 Green Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1 : 12 : 23 : 3

1

106 Blue Sel (2C/1C Copy) 1 : 12 : 23 : 3

1

107 Photo Paper HT Mode 0 : Errordif1 : Screen

0 : Errordif

108 Not Used


265APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

109 JPEG Sampling Ratio 3 : 4. 2. 00 : 4. 1. 11 : 4. 2. 22 : 4. 4. 4

0 : 4. 1. 1

110-114

Not Used

115 Accounting Server Func 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

116-119

Not Used

120 Heater Off Timer 0 : None 5 : 5 sec. 10 : 10 sec. 15 : 15 sec. 20 : 20 sec. 25 : 25 sec. 30 : 30 sec. 45 : 45 sec. 60 : 60 sec.120 : 2 min.180 : 3 min.

60 : 60 sec.

121 Fuser Unit Type 0 : Jpn/Euro1 : USA/CAN

1 : (for USA / Canada)0 : (for Europe)

122 Between Pages Timer 0 : None 5 : 5 sec. 10 : 10 sec. 15 : 15 sec. 20 : 20 sec. 25 : 25 sec. 30 : 30 sec. 45 : 45 sec. 60 : 60 sec.

30 : 30 sec.

123-124

Not Used

125 AC Bias Phase FullSpeed 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

126 AC Bias Phase HalfSpeed 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

127-129

Not Used

130 Auto Print Image Control 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

131 Drum Life Laser 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

132 Drum Life Charge 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

133 Drum Temp. Charge 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

134 Not Used135 TDC Deve. Life 0 : No

1 : Yes1 : Yes


266APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

136 TDC Half Speed 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

137 TDC Humidity 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

138 TDC Image Control 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

139 Not Used140 TDC Image Case Y 0 : Low

1 : Medium2 : High

1 : Yes

141 TDC Image Case M 0 : Low1 : Medium2 : High

1 : Yes

142 TDC Image Case C 0 : Low1 : Medium2 : High

1 : Yes

143 TDC Image Case BK 0 : Low1 : Medium2 : High

1 : Yes

144 Not Used145 FTR Control 0 : No

1 : Yes1 : Yes

146 FTR Device 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

147 FTR Humidity 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

148 FTR OPC Drum 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

149 FTR Deve. 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

150 FTR STD Current Y 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium3 : High4 : Max

2 : Medium

151 FTR STD Current M 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium3 : High4 : Max

2 : Medium

152 FTR STD Current C 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium3 : High4 : Max

2 : Medium

153 FTR STD Current BK 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium3 : High4 : Max

2 : Medium

154 Not Used


267APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

155 STR Control 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

156 STR Device 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

157 STR STD Current BK 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium3 : High4 : Max

2 : Medium

158 STR T/H 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

159 Not Used160 Discharge Control 0 : No

1 : Yes1 : Yes

161 Discharge H/T Control 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

162 Transfer Belt Control 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

163 Belt Motor Reverse Ctrl 0 : Off1 : 1/102 : 1/1003 : 1/2004 : 1/3005 : 1/500

3 : 1/200

164 Drum Warning Select 0 : Off1 : On

1 : On

165-169

Not Used

170 Color Reg Control 0 : Off-01 : Off-12 : On

2 : On

171 Skew Control 0 : No1 : Yes

0 : No

172 Color Reg Entry 0 : Min1 : Low2 : Medium

2 : Medium

173 Paper Full Sensor 0 : No1 : Yes

1 : Yes

174 Not Used175 Mechanical Counter1 0 : No

1 : Bk 2 : 1C 4 : 2C 8 : 4C 3 : Bk+1C12 : 2C+4C 7 : Bk+1C+2C14 : 1C+2C+4C15 : Total

0 : (North America)1 : (Others)


268APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

176 Mechanical Counter2 0 : No 1 : Bk 2 : 1C 4 : 2C 8 : 4C 3 : Bk+1C12 : 2C+4C 7 : Bk+1C+2C14 : 1C+2C+4C15 : Total

0 : (North America)14 : (Others)

177 PS Limit Toner Overlap 0 : Off1 : On

1 : On


269APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.6. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)




If you wish to select another function, touch tub key or scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.↓

Touch "Input" key code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" button.↓

If you wish to input minus value, press "Reset" key.↓


Press "Close" key.↓



Note:The Factory Setting is different in each model.

F6 Mode

No. Item Remarks Setting Range

000 Registration Clr Normal Color original registration adjustment for normal scan speed.

-50 - +50 0.21 mm

001 Registration Clr Slow Color original registration adjustment for half of normal scan speed.

-50 - +50 0.21 mm

002-004

Not Used

005 Registration B/W Normal Monochrome original registration adjustment for normal scan speed.

-50 - +50 0.34 mm

(DP-C322)0.27 mm

(DP-C262)006 Registration B/W Slow Monochrome original registration adjustment

for half of normal scan speed.-50 - +50 0.21 mm

007 Registration B/W & CL Mixed original registration adjustment for normal scan speed.

-50 - +50 0.21 mm

008-009

Not Used

010 Paper Loop Tray,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for Monochrome original at standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.34 mm

(DP-C322)0.27 mm

(DP-C262)011 Paper Loop Tray,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for

Color original at standard speed.-50 - +50 0.21 mm

270APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

012 Paper Loop Tray,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for an Individual Tray for Mixed originals at half of the standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.105 mm

013-014

Not Used

015 Paper Loop By-p,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for Monochrome original at standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.34 mm

(DP-C322)0.27 mm

(DP-C262)016 Paper Loop By-p,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for

Color original at standard speed.-50 - +50 0.21 mm

017 Paper Loop By-p,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for Mixed original at half of the standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.105 mm

018 PaperLoop Bp,Thick,Slow Fine Adjustment for the Sheet Bypass for Thick original at half of the standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.105 mm

019 Not Used020 Paper Loop ADU,B/W,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Monochrome

original at standard speed.-50 - +50 0.34 mm

(DP-C322)0.27 mm

(DP-C262)021 Paper Loop ADU,Clr,Nrm Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Color original

at standard speed.-50 - +50 0.21 mm

022 Paper Loop ADU,*,Slow Fine Adjustment for the ADU for Mixed original at half of the standard speed.

-50 - +50 0.105 mm

023-024

Not Used

025 Registration Void Lead edge read point adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

026-029

Not Used

030 Trail Edge Void A3,LD Trail edge void for A3, LD adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

031 Trail Edge Void B4,LG Trail edge void for B4, LG adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

032 Trail Edge Void FLS Trail edge void for FLS adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

033 Trail Edge Void A4R,LTR Trail edge void for A4R, LTR adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

034 Trail Edge Void B5R Trail edge void for B5R adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

035 Trail Edge Void A4,LT Trail edge void for A4, LT adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

036 Trail Edge Void B5,Exc Trail edge void for B5, Exc adjustment. 0 - +99 0.2 mm

037-039

Not Used

040 Side Adjust (Bypass) LSU side to side adjustment for the Sheet Bypass.

-50 - +50 0.2 mm

F6 Mode


271APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

041 Side Adjust (Tray1) LSU side to side adjustment for the Tray 1. -50 - +50 0.2 mm




045 Side Adjust (ADU,By-p) LSU side to side adjustment for ADU, Sheet Bypass.

-50 - +50 0.2 mm

046 Side Adjust (ADU,Tray1) LSU side to side adjustment for ADU, Tray 1.

-50 - +50 0.2 mm


-50 - +50 0.2 mm


-50 - +50 0.2 mm


-50 - +50 0.2 mm

050-054

Not Used

055 Polygon Motor Speed,CL Polygon motor speed adjustment for color printouts.

-99 - +99 0.10%

056 Polygon Motor Speed,B/W Polygon motor speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-99 - +99 0.10%

057-059

Not Used

060 OPC1 MTR CL STD Speed OPC 1 motor standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-99 - +99 0.05%

061 OPC1 MTR CL Half Speed OPC 1 motor half of standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-99 - +99 0.05%

062-064

Not Used

065 OPC2 MTR B/W STD Speed OPC 2 motor standard speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-99 - +99 0.05%

066 OPC2 MTR CL STD Speed OPC 2 motor half of standard speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-99 - +99 0.05%

067 Not Used068 OPC2 MTR Half Speed OPC 2 motor half of standard speed

adjustment for mixed printouts.-99 - +99

0.05%069 Not Used070 DEV1 MTR CL STD Speed Developer 1 motor standard speed

adjustment for color printouts.-99 - +99

0.10%071 DEV1 MTR CL Half Speed Developer 1 motor half of standard speed


0.10%072-074

Not Used

075 DEV2 MTR B/W STD Speed Developer 2 motor standard speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-99 - +99 0.10%

F6 Mode


272APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

076 DEV2 MTR CL STD Speed Developer 2 motor half of standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-99 - +99 0.10%

077 Not Used078 DEV2 MTR Half Speed Developer 2 motor half of standard speed


0.10%079 Not Used080 Feed MTR B/W STD Speed Feed motor standard speed adjustment for

monochrome printouts.-50 - +50 0.10 %

081 Feed MTR CL STD Speed Feed motor standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-50 - +50 0.10 %

082 Not Used083 Feed MTR Half Speed Feed motor half of standard speed

adjustment for mixed printouts.-50 - +50 0.10 %

084 Not Used085 ITMotor B/W STD Speed Intermediate Transfer motor standard speed

adjustment for monochrome printouts.-99 - +99

0.05%086 ITMotor CL STD Speed Intermediate Transfer motor standard speed


0.05%087 Not Used088 ITMotor Half Speed Intermediate Transfer motor half of standard

speed adjustment for mixed printouts.-99 - +99

0.05%089 Not Used090 Fuser MTR BK STD Speed Fuser motor standard speed adjustment for

monochrome printouts.-99 - +99

0.10%091 Fuser MTR CL STD Speed Fuser motor standard speed adjustment for

color printouts.-99 - +99

0.10%092 Not Used093 Fuser MTR Half Speed Fuser motor half of standard speed


0.10%094 Not Used095 Fuser MTR Half Speed L Fuser motor L half of standard speed

adjustment.-99 - +99

0.10%096-123

Not Used

124 WarmUP Timer WarmUP Timer Compensation for special environment.

-20 - +201sec.

125 T4 tmp (color Half Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) half of standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-5 - +51°C

126 T4 tmp (mono Half Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) half of standard speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-5 - +51°C

127 T4 tmp (color STD Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) of standard speed adjustment for color printouts.

-5 - +51°C

128 T4 tmp (mono STD Spd) Fusing temperature (T4) of standard speed adjustment for monochrome printouts.

-5 - +51°C

129 T5 tmp Standby temperature (T5) adjustment. -5 - +51°C

130 OHP Min Temp OHP minimum temperature adjustment. -30 - +301°C

F6 Mode


273APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

131 OHP Max Temp OHP maximum temperature adjustment. -30 - +301°C

132 Long Min Temp Long paper minimum temperature adjustment.

-30 - +301°C

133 Envelope Min Temp Envelope minimum temperature adjustment. -30 - +301°C

134 Envelope Max Temp Envelope maximum temperature adjustment. -30 - +301°C

135 Th1 Temp(Print Start) Thermistor 1 temperature at the start of printing.

0 - +255(Read Only)


0 - +255(Read Only)


0 - +255(Read Only)


0 - +255(Read Only)

139 Not Used140 Th1 Temp(Error) Thermistor 1 temperature when error

occurred.0 - +255

(Read Only)141 Th2 Temp(Error) Thermistor 2 temperature when error

occurred.0 - +255


occurred.0 - +255


occurred.0 - +255

(Read Only)144 Not Used145 IH Voltage(Print Start) IH drive voltage at the start of printing. 0 - +255

(Read Only)146 IH Current(Print Start) IH drive current at the start of printing. 0 - +255

(Read Only)147 Cnt. Ratio(Print Start) Control ratio at the start of printing. 0 - +255

(Read Only)148-149

Not Used

150 IH Voltage(Error) IH drive voltage when error occurred. 0 - +255(Read Only)

151 IH Current(Error) IH drive current when error occurred. 0 - +255(Read Only)

152 Control Ratio(Error) Control ratio when error occurred. 0 - +255(Read Only)

153-199

Not Used

200 Color Text Contrast Color contrast adjustment for text mode. -32 - +311/256 step

201 Color T/P Contrast Color contrast adjustment for text/photo mode.

-32 - +311/256 step

202 Color Photo Contrast Color contrast adjustment for photo mode. -32 - +311/256 step

F6 Mode


274APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

203-204

Not Used

205 Mono. Text Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for text mode.

-32 - +311/256 step

206 Mono. T/P Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for text/photo mode.

-32 - +311/256 step

207 Mono. Photo Contrast Monochrome contrast adjustment for photo mode.

-32 - +311/256 step

208-209

Not Used

210 Color Text Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for text mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

211 Color T/P Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for text/photo mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

212 Color Photo Density(lt) Color image density adjustment for photo mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

213-214

Not Used -32 - +311/256 step

215 Color Text Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for text mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

216 Color T/P Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for text/photo mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

217 Color Photo Density(dk) Color image density adjustment for photo mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

218-219

Not Used

220 Mono. Text Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for text mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

221 Mono. T/P Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for text/photo mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

222 Mono. Photo Density(lt) Monochrome image density adjustment for photo mode (highlight).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

F6 Mode


275APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

223-224

Not Used

225 Mono. Text Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for text mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

226 Mono. T/P Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for text/photo mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

227 Mono. Photo Density(dk) Monochrome image density adjustment for photo mode (dark).(-) : Darker.(+) : Lighter.

-32 - +311/256 step

228-229

Not Used

230 Adjust Text Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital image processing for Text Copy Mode.

-3 - +31 level step

231 Adjust T/P Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.

-3 - +31 level step

232 Adjust Photo Sharpness Scanner Sharpness adjustment using digital image processing for Photo Copy Mode.

-3 - +31 level step

233-234

Not Used

235 Adjust Auto Mode(slice) Slice level adjustment using digital image processing for Automatic Copy Mode.

0 - +151 level step

236 Adjust Auto Mode(area) Area level adjustment using digital image processing for Automatic Copy Mode.

0 - +151 level step

237 Adjust 2C Mode Color/Monochrome level adjustment using digital image processing for 2-Color Copy Mode.

0 - +151 level step

238-239

Not Used

240 Adjust Saturation Chroma adjustment. -32 - +311 level step

241 Adjust Color balance Color balance adjustment. 0 - +101 level step

242 Adjust Tint Tint adjustment. -1 - +21 level step

243 Adjust Hue Circle Hue circle adjustment. -3 - +310°

244-245

Not Used

246 Rm. G-Color Start Y Horizontal start line position adjustment for Digital Sky Shot mode.

+2 - +81921dot.

247 Rm. G-Color End Y Horizontal end line position adjustment for Digital Sky Shot mode.

+2 - +81921dot.

248 Rm. G-Color Start Y(p) Horizontal start line position adjustment for Digital Sky Shot mode.

+2 - +81921dot.

F6 Mode


276APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

249 Rm. G-Color End Y(p) Horizontal end line position adjustment for Digital Sky Shot mode.

+2 - +81921dot.

250 ADF Rm. G-Color Start X Vertical start position adjustment for base hue (ADF).

0 - +161/16

251 ADF Rm. G-Color End X Vertical end position adjustment for base hue (ADF).

0 - +161/16

252 FB Rm. G-Color Start X Vertical start position adjustment for base hue (FB).

0 - +161/16

253 FB Rm. G-Color End X Vertical end position adjustment for base hue (FB).

0 - +161/16

254 Not Used255 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:R Gamma adjustment for real time base hue

(color).-8 - +7

1/256 step256 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:R Offset adjustment for real time base hue

(color).-128 - +1271/256 step

257 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:R Gamma adjustment for real time base hue (monochrome).

-8 - +71/256 step

258 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:R Offset adjustment for real time base hue (monochrome).

-128 - +1271/256 step

259 Not Used260 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:M Gamma adjustment for pre-scan base hue

(color).-8 - +7

1 level step261 CL. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:M Offset adjustment for pre-scan base hue

(color).-128 - +1271 level step

262 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Gmm:M Gamma adjustment for pre-scan base hue (monochrome).

-8 - +71/256 step

263 Mono. Rm. G-Cl. Offset:M Offset adjustment for pre-scan base hue (monochrome).

-128 - +1271/256 step

264 Not Used265 Tone Adjust Under Limit Tone Under Limit adjustment.

(-) : Down.(+) : Up.

-64 - +631/256 step

266-299

Not Used

300 Adj 100% Side-Side Read Identical vertical (side-to-side) size ratio (FB, ADF) adjustment.

-9 - +90.1%

301 100% Selection Select from 99.1% to 100.9% adjustment. (FB, ADF).

-9 - +90.1%

302-304

Not Used

305 Original Registration Platen original registration detection timing adjustment.

-30 - +30 0.2 mm

306 Trail Edge Read Timing Trail edge void adjustment. -9 - 0 0.5 mm

307 CCD Read Position Adj CCD read position adjustment. -50 - +50 0.2 mm

308 Adj 100% Lead-Tail Read Identical horizontal (top-to-bottom) size ratio adjustment.

-9 - +9 0.1%

F6 Mode


277APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

309 Shading Position Offset Shading position offset (FB) adjustment. -10 - +10 0.1 mm

310 FB Lead Void Setting Registration edge void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

311 FB Side Void Setting Registration side void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

312 FB Trail Void Setting Registration trail void (FB) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

313-314

Not Used

315 ADF Lead Void Setting Registration edge void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

316 ADF Side Void Setting Registration side void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

317 ADF Trail Void Setting Registration trail void (ADF) adjustment. 0 - +9 0.5 mm

318-319

Not Used

320 Stamp Position Adjust Verification Stamp position adjustment. -50 - +50 0.3 mm

321 ADF Reverse Stop Posi. ADF reverse stop position adjustment. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

322 ADF Exhaust Stop Posi. ADF ejection stop position adjustment. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

323 ADF Feed Regist.1-Sided Individual Fine Adjustment for ADF 1 sided. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

324 ADF Feed Regist.2-Sided Individual Fine Adjustment for ADF 2 sided. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

325 ADF Read Main Scan Pos. ADF horizontal image read start position adjustment.

-99 - +99 0.05 mm

326 Original Lead Edge ADF ADF Original Lead Edge adjustment. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

327 Original Trail Edge ADF ADF Original Trail Edge adjustment. -99 - +99 0.3 mm

328 ADF 100% Image 1-Sided Identical vertical (side-to-side) size ratio adjustment.

-9 - +9 0.1%

329 ADF 100% Image 2-Sided Identical horizontal (top-to-bottom) size ratio adjustment.

-9 - +9 0.1%

330 FB Lead Void(NWS) Lead edge void for Network Scanner (FB) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

331 FB Side Void(NWS) Side edge void for Network Scanner (FB) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

332 FB Trail Void(NWS) Trail edge void for Network Scanner (FB) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

333-334

Not Used

335 ADF Lead Void(NWS) Lead edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

F6 Mode


278APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

336 ADF Side Void(NWS) Side edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

337 ADF Trail Void(NWS) Trail edge void for Network Scanner (ADF) adjustment.

0 - +9 0.5 mm

338-399

Not Used

400 AC Charge Freq.Adj.Full AC Charge voltage bias frequency adjustment for full speed (color).

----

401 AC Charge Freq.Adj.Half AC Charge voltage bias frequency adjustment for half speed (mixed).

----

402 AC Charge Freq.Adj.B/W AC Charge voltage bias frequency adjustment (monochrome).

----

403-404

Not Used

405 AC Charge Adj. Y Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (Y).

-127 - +923.79 µA/step

406 AC Charge Adj. M Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (M).

-127 - +923.79 µA/step

407 AC Charge Adj. C Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (C).

-127 - +923.79 µA/step

408 AC Charge Adj. BK Full AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (BK).

-127 - +923.79 µA/step

409 Not Used410 AC Charge Adj. Y Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed (Y).-85 - +127

3.60 µA/step411 AC Charge Adj. M Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed (M).-85 - +127

3.60 µA/step412 AC Charge Adj. C Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed (C).-85 - +127

3.60 µA/step413 AC Charge Adj. BK Half AC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed (BK).-85 - +127

3.60 µA/step414 AC Charge Adj. B/W AC Charge bias voltage adjustment (B/W). -125 - +71

32 : 4.24 µA/step

26 : 3.98 µA/step

415-419

Not Used

420 DC Charge Adj. Y Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (Y).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

421 DC Charge Adj. M Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (M).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

422 DC Charge Adj. C Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (C).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

423 DC Charge Adj. BK Full DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed (BK).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

424 Not Used425 DC Charge Adj. Y Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed (Y).-88 - +127

3.71 µA/step

F6 Mode


279APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

426 DC Charge Adj. M Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed (M).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

427 DC Charge Adj. C Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed (C).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

428 DC Charge Adj. Bk Half DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed (BK).

-88 - +1273.71 µA/step

429 DC Charge Adj. B/W DC Charge bias voltage adjustment (BK). -88 - +1273.71 µA/step

430 AC Bias Freqency Adj. AC bias voltage frequency adjustment. -----431 AC Bias Duty Adj. AC bias voltage duty adjustment. -95 - +127

0.1 %/step432 AC Bias 4C Adj. Full AC bias voltage adjustment for full speed

(color).-127 - +1273.91 V/step

433 AC Bias Adj. Half AC bias voltage adjustment for half speed (mixed).

-127 - +1273.91 V/step

434 AC Bias Adj. B/W AC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (B/W).

-127 - +1273.91 V/step

435 DC Bias Adj. Y Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (Y). -125 - +1273.13 V/step

436 DC Bias Adj. M Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (M). -125 - +1273.13 V/step

437 DC Bias Adj. C Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (C). -125 - +1273.13 V/step

438 DC Bias Adj. BK Full DC bias voltage adjustment for full speed (BK).

-125 - +1273.13 V/step

439 Not Used440 DC Bias Adj. Y Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed

(Y).-125 - +1273.13 V/step

441 DC BiasDC Bias Adj. M Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed (M).

-125 - +1273.13 V/step

442 DC Bias Adj. C Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed (C).

-125 - +1273.13 V/step

443 DC Bias Adj. BK Half DC bias voltage adjustment for half speed (BK).

-125 - +1273.13 V/step

444 DC Bias Adj. B/W DC bias voltage adjustment (BK). -125 - +1273.13 V/step

445 DC Charge Y WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed paper spacing (Y).

-127 - +683.13 V/step

446 DC Charge M WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed paper spacing (M).

-127 - +683.13 V/step

447 DC Charge C WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed paper spacing (C).

-127 - +683.13 V/step

448 DC Charge BK WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for full speed paper spacing (BK).

-127 - +683.13 V/step

449 Not Used450 DC Charge Y WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half

speed paper spacing (Y).-127 - +683.71 V/step

F6 Mode


280APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

451 DC Charge M WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed paper spacing (M).

-127 - +683.71 V/step

452 DC Charge C WO/PaperlHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed paper spacing (C).

-127 - +683.71 V/step

453 DC Charge BK WO/PaperHalf DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for half speed paper spacing (BK).

-127 - +683.71 V/step

454 DC Charge B/W WO/Paper DC Charge bias voltage adjustment for paper spacing (B/W).

-127 - +683.71 V/step

455 DC Bias Adj. WO/Paper DC bias voltage adjustment for paper spacing.

-52 - +1273.13 V/step

456 Laser Power Adj. Y Full Laser Power for full speed (Y) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step457 Laser Power Adj. M Full Laser Power for full speed (M) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

458 Laser Power Adj. C Full Laser Power for full speed (C) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step459 Laser Power Adj.BK Full Laser Power for full speed (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

460 Laser Power Adj. Y Half Laser Power for half speed (Y) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step461 Laser Power Adj. M Half Laser Power for half speed (M) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

462 Laser Power Adj. C Half Laser Power for half speed (C) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step463 Laser Power Adj.Bk Half Laser Power for half speed (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

464 Not Used465 Laser Pwr Adj. Y 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (Y) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

466 Laser Pwr Adj. M 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (M) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step467 Laser Pwr Adj. C 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (C) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

468 Laser Pwr Adj.Bk 1200dpi Laser Power for 1200 dpi (BK) adjustment. -127 - +1270.0018 mW/

step469 Laser Power Adj. B/W Laser Power (BK) adjustment. -127 - +127

0.0018 mW/step

F6 Mode


281APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

470 Solid PWM Adj. Y Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

471 Solid PWM Adj. M Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

472 Solid PWM Adj. C Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

473 Solid PWM Adj. BK Full Solid PWM value of LSU for full speed (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

474 Not Used475 Solid PWM Adj. Y Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y)

adjustment.-127 - +1270.39 %/step

476 Solid PWM Adj. M Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

477 Solid PWM Adj. C Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

478 Solid PWM Adj. BK Half Solid PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

479 Solid PWMAdj. B/W Solid PWM value of LSU (BK) adjustment. -127 - +1270.39 %/step

480 Edge PWM Adj. Y Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

481 Edge PWM Adj. M Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

482 Edge PWM Adj. C Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

483 Edge PWM Adj. BK Full Edge PWM value of LSU for full speed (K) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

484 Not Used485 Edge PWM Adj. Y Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y)


486 Edge PWM Adj. M Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

487 Edge PWM Adj. C Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

488 Edge PWM Adj. BK Half Edge PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

489 Edge PWM Adj. Y B/W Edge PWM value of LSU (BK) adjustment. -127 - +1270.39 %/step

490 Dot PWM Adj. Y Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

491 Dot PWM Adj. M Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

492 Dot PWM Adj. C Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

493 Dot PWM Adj. BK Full Dot PWM value of LSU for full speed (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

494 Not Used

F6 Mode


282APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

495 Dot PWM Adj. Y Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

496 Dot PWM Adj. M Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

497 Dot PWM Adj. C Half Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

498 Dot PWM Adj. BKHalf Dot PWM value of LSU for half speed (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

499 Dot PWM Adj. B/W Dot PWM value of LSU (Y) adjustment. -127 - +1270.39 %/step

500 Solid PWM Adj.Y 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

501 Solid PWM Adj.M 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

502 Solid PWM Adj.C 1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

503 Solid PWM Adj.BK1200dpi Solid PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

504 Not Used505 Edge PWM Adj. Y 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y)


506 Edge PWM Adj. M 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

507 Edge PWM Adj. C 1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

508 Edge PWM Adj. BK1200dpi Edge PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

509 Not Used510 Dot PWM Adj. Y 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (Y)


511 Dot PWM Adj. M 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

512 Dot PWM Adj. C 1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

513 Dot PWM Adj. BK1200dpi Dot PWM value of LSU for 1200 dpi (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.39 %/step

514 Not Used515 STR Cleaning Adj. + Cleaning voltage plus value for STR

adjustment.-32 - +9

28.04 V/step516 STR Cleaning Adj. - Cleaning voltage minus value for STR

adjustment.-32 - +127

28.04 V/step517-519

Not Used

520 TDC Gain Adj. Y Toner density sensor gain voltage (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.039 V/step

521 TDC Gain Adj. M Toner density sensor gain voltage (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.039 V/step

F6 Mode


283APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

522 TDC Gain Adj. C Toner density sensor gain voltage (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.039 V/step

523 TDC Gain Adj. BK Toner density sensor gain voltage (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.039 V/step

524 TDC Gain Adj. B/W Toner density sensor gain voltage (B/W) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.039 V/step

525 TDC Image Limit Adj. Y The Upper Limit and the Bottom for F6-610 (Y) adjustment.

0 - +241 V/step

526 TDC Image Limit Adj. M The Upper Limit and the Bottom for F6-611 (M) adjustment.

0 - +241 V/step

527 TDC Image Limit Adj. C The Upper Limit and the Bottom for F6-612 (C) adjustment.

0 - +241 V/step

528 TDC Image Limit Adj. BK The Upper Limit and the Bottom for F6-613 (BK) adjustment.

0 - +241 V/step

529-534

Not Used

535 APIC Solid Target Y (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (Y) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

536 APIC Solid Target M (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

537 APIC Solid Target C (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

538 APIC Solid Target BK (Not Used) Toner density solid target voltage (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

539 Not Used540 APIC Edge PWM Target Y Edge PWM target voltage for Image

temperature sensor (Y) adjustment. Effective for F5-130 : Yes

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

541 APIC Edge PWM Target M Edge PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (M) adjustment. Effective for F5-130 : Yes

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

542 APIC Edge PWM Target C Edge PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (C) adjustment. Effective for F5-130 : Yes

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

543 APIC Edge PWM Target BK Edge PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (BK) adjustment. Effective for F5-130 : Yes

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

544 Not Used545 APIC Dot PWM Target Y Dot PWM target voltage for Image

temperature sensor (Y) adjustment.-127 - +1270.016 V/step

546 APIC Dot PWM Target M Dot PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (M) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

547 APIC Dot PWM Target C Dot PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (C) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

548 APIC Dot PWM Target BK Dot PWM target voltage for Image temperature sensor (BK) adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 V/step

F6 Mode


284APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

549 Not Used550 TDC Gain Voltage Y Toner density sensor gain voltage (Y)

adjustment. Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-127 - +1050.039 V/step

551 TDC Gain Voltage M Toner density sensor gain voltage (M) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-127 - +1050.039 V/step

552 TDC Gain Voltage C Toner density sensor gain voltage (C) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-127 - +1050.039 V/step

553 TDC Gain Voltage BK Toner density sensor gain voltage (BK) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-127 - +1050.039 V/step

554 TDC Gain Voltage B/W Toner density sensor gain voltage (B/W) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-127 - +1050.039 V/step

555 TDC Judg. Lebel Y Toner supply starting judgement voltage level (Y) adjustment. Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-25 - +250.016 V/step

556 TDC Judg. Lebel M Toner supply starting judgement voltage level (M) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-25 - +250.016 V/step

557 TDC Judg. Lebel C Toner supply starting judgement voltage level (C) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-25 - +250.016 V/step

558 TDC Judg. Lebel BK Toner supply starting judgement voltage level (BK) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-25 - +250.016 V/step

559 TDC Judg. Lebel B/W Toner supply starting judgement voltage level (B/W) adjustment.Effective for F8-09 or F8-11.

-25 - +250.016 V/step

560 TDC Max. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum toner output supply (Y).

-25 - +25(Read Only)

561 TDC Max. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum toner output supply (M).


562 TDC Max. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum toner output supply (C).


563 TDC Max. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for maximum toner output supply (BK).


564 Not Used565 TDC Min. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum

toner output supply (Y).+5 - +55

(Read Only)566 TDC Min. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum

toner output supply (M).+5 - +55

(Read Only)

F6 Mode


285APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

567 TDC Min. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum toner output supply (C).

+5 - +55(Read Only)

568 TDC Min. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for minimum toner output supply (BK).

+5 - +55(Read Only)

569 Not Used570 TDC Avg. Read Only Y TDC sensor power adjustment for average

toner output supply (Y).-15 - +35

(Read Only)571 TDC Avg. Read Only M TDC sensor power adjustment for average

toner output supply (M).-15 - +35

(Read Only)572 TDC Avg. Read Only C TDC sensor power adjustment for average

toner output supply (C).-15 - +35

(Read Only)573 TDC Avg. Read Only BK TDC sensor power adjustment for average

toner output supply (BK).-15 - +35

(Read Only)574 Not Used575 Toner Supply Read Y Measures the toner supply (Y). 0 - +7

(Read Only)576 Toner Supply Read M Measures the toner supply (M). 0 - +7

(Read Only)577 Toner Supply Read C Measures the toner supply (C). 0 - +7

(Read Only)578 Toner Supply Read BK Measures the toner supply (BK). 0 - +7

(Read Only)579 Not Used580 TDC Deve. Life Read Y TDC Developer (Y) resistance value

adjustment.Effective for F5-135 : Yes


581 TDC Deve. Life Read M TDC Developer (M) resistance value adjustment. Effective for F5-135 : Yes


582 TDC Deve. Life Read C TDC Developer (C) resistance value adjustment.Effective for F5-135 : Yes


583 TDC Deve. Life Read BK TDC Developer (BK) resistance value adjustment.Effective for F5-135 : Yes


584 Not Used585 DrumLife Charge Read Y

(Not Used)OPC Drum (Y) degradation charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

586 DrumLife Charge Read M (Not Used)

OPC Drum (M) degradation charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

587 DrumLife Charge Read C (Not Used)

OPC Drum (C) degradation charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

588 Drum Life Chrge Read BK(Not Used)

OPC Drum (BK) degradation charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

589 Not Used

F6 Mode


286APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

590 Drum Life Laser Read Y OPC Drum life (Y) Laser power compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-131 : Yes

0 - +127(Read Only)

591 Drum Life Laser Read M OPC Drum life (M) Laser power compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-131 : Yes

0 - +127(Read Only)

592 Drum Life Laser Read C OPC Drum life (C) Laser power compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-131 : Yes

0 - +127(Read Only)

593 Drum Life Laser Read BK OPC Drum life (BK) Laser power compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-131 : Yes

0 - +127(Read Only)

594 Drum Life Laser Adj. 4C Laser compensation (4 color) adjustment. -10 - +100.39 %/step

595 Drum T/H Charge Read Y (Not Used)

OPC Drum (Y) environment temperature and humidity charge adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

596 Drum T/H Charge Read M(Not Used)

OPC Drum (M) environment temperature and humidity charge adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

597 Drum T/H Charge Read C(Not Used)

OPC Drum (C) environment temperature and humidity charge adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

598 Drum T/H Charge Read BK(Not Used)

OPC Drum (BK) environment temperature and humidity charge adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

599 Not Used600 Drum Life Charge Y WO/P Drum life (Y) voltage compensation charge

adjustment. Effective for F5-132 : Yes

-67 - 0(Read Only)

601 Drum Life Charge M WO/P Drum life (M) voltage compensation charge adjustment. Effective for F5-132 : Yes

-67 - 0(Read Only)

602 Drum Life Charge C WO/P Drum life (C) voltage compensation charge adjustment. Effective for F5-132 : Yes

-67 - 0(Read Only)

603 Drum Life Chrge BK WO/P Drum life (BK) voltage compensation charge adjustment. Effective for F5-132 : Yes

-67 - 0(Read Only)

604 Not Used605 Drum T/H Charge Y WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (Y) environment

temperature and humidity compensation charge adjustment.Effective for F5-133 : Yes

-15 - +15(Rad Only)

606 Drum T/H Charge M WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (M) environment temperature and humidity compensation charge adjustment.Effective for F5-133 : Yes

-15 - +15(Rad Only)

607 Drum T/H Charge C WO/Paper Drum paper spacing (C) environment temperature and humidity compensation charge adjustment.Effective for F5-133 : Yes

-15 - +15(Rad Only)

F6 Mode


287APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

608 Drum T/H Charge BK WO/P Drum paper spacing (BK) environment temperature and humidity compensation charge adjustment.Effective for F5-133 : Yes

-15 - +15(Rad Only)

609 Not Used610 TDC Image Read Y TDC image (Y) dot development charge

adjustment. Effective for F5-138 : Yes

-12 - +240.039 V/step

611 TDC Image Read M TDC image (M) dot development charge adjustment. Effective for F5-138 : Yes

-12 - +240.039 V/step

612 TDC Image Read C TDC image (C) dot development charge adjustment. Effective for F5-138 : Yes

-12 - +240.039 V/step

613 TDC Image Read BK TDC image (BK) dot development charge adjustment. Effective for F5-138 : Yes

-12 - +240.039 V/step

614 Not Used615 TDC T/H Read Y TDC (Y) temperature and humidity

compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-137 : Yes

-63 - +63(Read only)

616 TDC T/H Read M TDC (M) temperature and humidity compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-137 : Yes


617 TDC T/H Read C TDC (C) temperature and humidity compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-137 : Yes


618 TDC T/H Read BK TDC (BK) temperature and humidity compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-137 : Yes


619 Not Used620 TDC Half Speed Read Y TDC half speed charge adjustment (Y).

Effective for F5-136 : Yes-63 - +63

(Read only)621 TDC Half Speed Read M TDC half speed charge adjustment (M).


(Read only)622 TDC Half Speed Read C TDC half speed charge adjustment (C).


(Read only)623 TDC Half Speed Read BK TDC half speed charge adjustment (BK).


(Read only)624 Not Used625 FTR/STR Temp. Read FTR / STR temperature sensor value

adjustment.0 - +255

(Read only)626 FTR/STR Humidity Read FTR / STR humidity sensor value adjustment. 0 - +255

(Read only)627-629

Not Used

630 FTR Drive Read Y FTR (Y) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

F6 Mode


288APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

631 FTR Drive Read M FTR (M) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

632 FTR Drive Read C FTR (C) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

633 FTR Drive Read BK FTR (BK) drive current value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

634 Not Used635 STR Drive Read STR drive voltage adjustment. 0 - +255

(Read Only)636 Discharge Drive Discharge drive voltage adjustment. 0 - +255

(Read Only)637-639

Not Used

640 Patch Sens Read Y Patch sensor (Y) value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

641 Patch Sens Read M Patch sensor (M) value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

642 Patch Sens Read C Patch sensor (C) value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

643 Patch Sens Read BK Patch sensor (BK) value adjustment. 0 - +255(Read Only)

644 Not Used645 Reg Sens Dirty Std Read Registration sensor dirty standard

adjustment.-127 - +127(Read Only)

646 Reg Sens Dirty Mon Read Registration sensor dirty monitor adjustment. -127 - +127(Read Only)

647-649

Not Used

650 APIC DC Charge Read Y(Not Used)

APIC DC Charge (Y) compensation adjustment.


651 APIC DC Charge Read M(Not Used)

APIC DC Charge (M) compensation adjustment.


652 APIC DC Charge Read C(Not Used)

APIC DC Charge (C) compensation adjustment.


653 APIC DC Charge Read BK(Not Used)

APIC DC Charge (BK) compensation adjustment.


654 Not Used655 APIC DC Bais Read Y

(Not Used)APIC DC Bias (Y) charge compensation adjustment.


656 APIC DC Bais Read M(Not Used)

APIC DC Bias (M) charge compensation adjustment.


657 APIC DC Bais Read C(Not Used)

APIC DC Bias (C) charge compensation adjustment.


658 APIC DC Bais Read BK(Not Used)

APIC DC Bias (BK) charge compensation adjustment.


659 Not Used660 APIC Laser Read Y

(Not Used)APIC LSU (Y) power charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

F6 Mode


289APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

661 APIC Laser Read M(Not Used)

APIC LSU (M) power charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

662 APIC Laser Read C(Not Used)

APIC LSU (C) power charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

663 APIC Laser Read BK(Not Used)

APIC LSU (BK) power charge compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

664 Not Used665 APIC Edge PWM Read Y APIC Edge PWM (Y) compensation


0 - +255(Read only)

666 APIC Edge PWM Read M APIC Edge PWM (M) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

667 APIC Edge PWM Read C APIC Edge PWM (C) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

668 APIC Edge PWM Read BK APIC Edge PWM (BK) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

669 Not Used670 APIC Dot PWM Read Y APIC Dot PWM (Y) compensation


0 - +255(Read only)

671 APIC Dot PWM Read M APIC Dot PWM (M) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

672 APIC Dot PWM Read C APIC Dot PWM (C) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

673 APIC Dot PWM Read BK APIC Dot PWM (BK) compensation adjustment.Effective for F5-130 : Yes

0 - +255(Read only)

674 Not Used675 Belt Length Read Only Belt circumference compensation adjustment. -30 - +50

(Read only)676-679

Not Used

680 FTR Adj. Y FTR (Y) current for control adjustment.Effective for F5-145 : No

-127 - +1270.147 µA/

step681 FTR Adj. M FTR (M) current for control adjustment.

Effective for F5-145 : No-127 - +1270.147 µA/

step682 FTR Adj. C FTR (C) current for control adjustment.


step683 FTR Adj. BK FTR (BK) current for control adjustment.


step

F6 Mode


290APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

684 Not Used685 STR Adj. Face STR (Y) voltage control adjustment.

Effective for F5-155 : No-57 - +127

28.04 V/step686 STR Adj. Back STR (M) voltage control adjustment.


28.04 V/step687 Discharge Adj. Face STR (C) voltage control adjustment.

Effective for F5-160 : No0 - +127

17.16 V/step688 Discharge Adj. Back STR (BK) voltage control adjustment.


17.16 V/step689 Not Used690 FTR Device Adj. Y FTR (Y) detect resistance voltage adjustment.

Effective for F5-146 : No-100 - +12725.68 V/step

691 FTR Device Adj. M FTR (M) detect resistance voltage adjustment. Effective for F5-146 : No

-100 - +12725.68 V/step

692 FTR Device Adj. C FTR (C) detect resistance voltage adjustment. Effective for F5-146 : No

-100 - +12725.68 V/step

693 FTR Device Adj. BK FTR (BK) detect resistance voltage adjustment. Effective for F5-146 : No

-100 - +12725.68 V/step

694 Not Used695 STR Resistance Adj. STR detect resistance value adjustment.


4 MΩ/step696 STR Voltage Adj. STR detect resistance voltage adjustment.

Effective for F5-156 : No-25 - +12716 V/step

697 Belt Reverse Time Adj. Belt reverse time adjustment. -1 - +1210 msec./

step698-819

Not Used

820 Color Reg Result Y-L-X Color (Y) Left sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

821 Color Reg Result Y-L-Y Color (Y) Left sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

822 Color Reg Result Y-C-X Color (Y) Middle sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

823 Color Reg Result Y-C-Y Color (Y) Middle sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

824 Color Reg Result Y-R-X Color (Y) Right sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

825 Color Reg Result Y-R-Y Color (Y) Right sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

826 Color Reg Result M-L-X Color (M) Left sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

827 Color Reg Result M-L-Y Color (M) Left sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

828 Color Reg Result M-C-X Color (M) Middle sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

F6 Mode


291APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

829 Color Reg Result M-C-Y Color (M) Middle sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

830 Color Reg Result M-R-X Color (M) Right sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

831 Color Reg Result M-R-Y Color (M) Right sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

832 Color Reg Result C-L-X Color (C) Left sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

833 Color Reg Result C-L-Y Color (C) Left sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

834 Color Reg Result C-C-X Color (C) Middle sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

835 Color Reg Result C-C-Y Color (C) Middle sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

836 Color Reg Result C-R-X Color (C) Right sensor horizontal registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

837 Color Reg Result C-R-Y Color (C) Right sensor vertical registration compensation adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

838-839

Not Used

840 Color Reg Calib. L Left sensor color registration LED intensity target value adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

841 Color Reg Calib. C Middle sensor color registration LED intensity target value adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

842 Color Reg Calib. R Right sensor color registration LED intensity target value adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

843-844

Not Used

845 Color Reg Sensor mon.L Left sensor color registration LED intensity target value monitor adjustment.

0 - +255(Read Only)

846 Color Reg Sensor mon.C Middle sensor color registration LED intensity target value monitor adjustment.

0 - +255(Read Only)

847 Color Reg Sensor mon.R Right sensor color registration LED intensity target value monitor adjustment.

0 - +255(Read Only)

848-849

Not Used

850 Color Reg Slice L Color registration of left sensor slice level adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

851 Color Reg Slice C Color registration of middle sensor slice level adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

852 Color Reg Slice R Color registration of right sensor slice level adjustment.

-127 - +1270.016 mV

853-854

Not Used

855 Skew Y Right rotation Color (Y) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90(Read Only)

856 Skew M Right rotation Color (M) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90(Read Only)

F6 Mode


292APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

857 Skew C Right rotation Color (C) skew registration adjustment. -90 - +90(Read Only)

858 Color Reg Main Max Maximum dot color horizontal registration adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

859 Color Reg Sub Max Maximum dot color vertical registration adjustment.

-127 - +127(Read Only)

860 Color Reg Offset L-Y Color registration horizontal offset for left sensor adjustment.

-3 - +31 dot

861 Color Reg Offset C-Y Color registration horizontal offset for middle sensor adjustment.

-3 - +31 dot

862 Color Reg Offset R-Y Color registration horizontal offset right sensor adjustment.

-3 - +31 dot

863-998

Not Used

999 F5/F6 Initialization

F6 Mode


293APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.7. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter









F7 ModeNo. Item Function Remarks00 List Print01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for access

to the counter mode.02 Maintenance

Count00 Total Count B/W Copies / Prints Total Counter.01 Total Count 1C02 Total Count 2C03 Total Count 4C04 Not Used05 Toner Page Count Y Copies / Prints Toner Page Counter.06 Toner Page Count M07 Toner Page Count C08 Toner Page Count BK09 Not Used10 PM Count Preventive Maintenance Counter.11 Scanner PM Count Scanner Reading PM Counter.12 ADF Count Total Originals fed through the ADF Counter.13 ADF PM Count ADF PM counter14 Not Used15 OPC Drum Count Y Recording paper fed through the OPC Drum

PM Counter.16 OPC Drum Count M17 OPC Drum Count C18 OPC Drum Count BK19 Not Used20 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up C OPC Drum Average Print Counter.

(Read only)21 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up B/W22 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up AUT

23-24 Not Used

294APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

02 MaintenanceCount

25 Drum Life Count Down Y Drum Life Count Down Counter.(Read only)26 Drum Life Count Down M

27 Drum Life Count Down C28 Drum Life Count Down BK29 Not Used30 AC Charge Count Y AC Charge Integrated value.31 AC Charge Count M32 AC Charge Count C33 AC Charge Count BK34 Not Used35 DC Charge Count Y DC Charge Integrated value.36 DC Charge Count M37 DC Charge Count C38 DC Charge Count BK39 Not Used40 Deve. Unit Count Y Developer Units Counter.

Perform F8-09 to reset counter. (Read Only)41 Deve. Unit Count M42 Deve. Unit Count C43 Deve. Unit Count BK44 Not Used45 Developer Count Y Developer Units Counter. (Read Only)

Perform F8-09/11 to reset counter.46 Developer Count M47 Developer Count C48 Developer Count BK49 Not Used50 Transfer Belt Count Transfer Belt Unit Counter.

Perform F8-29 to reset counter.51 Belt Life Count Down Transfer Belt Life Count Down Counter.

(Read Only)Perform F8-29 to reset counter.

52 STR Life Count STR / Cleaning Blade Counter. (Read Only)Perform F8-32 to reset counter.

53 Belt RotationTime Count Transfer Belt Running Counter.Perform F8-29 to reset counter.

54 STR RotationTime Count STR Running Counter.Perform F8-32 to reset counter.

55 Deve.UnitRotateCountY Developer Unit Counter.Perform F8-09 to reset counter.56 Deve.UnitRotateCountM

57 Deve.UnitRotateCountC58 Deve.UnitRotateCountBK59 Not Used60 Add Toner Count Y Toner Supply Counter.

Perform F8-09/11 to reset counter.61 Add Toner Count M62 Add Toner Count C63 Add Toner Count BK

F7 ModeNo. Item Function Remarks

295APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

02 MaintenanceCount

64 Not Used65 Fuser Belt Remain Count Fuser Belt Life Counter. (Read Only)

Perform F8-26 to reset counter.66 Fuser Main Remain Count Fuser Life Counter. (Read Only)

Perform F8-27 to reset counter.67-69 Not Used

70 Dot Count Y71 Dot Count M72 Dot Count C73 Dot Count BK74 Not Used75 Total Dot Count BK B/W76 Total Dot Count Y77 Total Dot Count M78 Total Dot Count C79 Total Dot Count BK CL80 Last Page Dot Count Y81 Last Page Dot Count M82 Last Page Dot Count C83 Last Page Dot Count BK84 Not Used85 Fuser Belt Page Count Fuser Belt Unit Counter.

Perform F8-26 to reset counter.86 Fuser Belt Time Count87 Fuser Main Page Count Fuser Unit Counter.

Perform F8-27 to reset counter.88 Fuser Main Time Count89 Not Used90 Drum Extra Count Y OPC Drum Unit Counter.91 Drum Extra Count M92 Drum Extra Count C93 Drum Extra Count BK94 Belt Extra Count Transfer Belt Unit Counter.

03 Paper Feed Count

00 Sheet Bypass Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Sheet Bypass counter.

01 1st Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 1 counter.

02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 2 counter.

03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 3 counter.

04 4th Paper Tray Count Total sheets of paper fed from the Tray 4 counter.

05 Not Used06 2-sided Count 2-sided Total Prints Counter.07 A4 / LETTER Count A4 / Letter Total Prints Counter.08 A4-R / LETTER-R Count A4-R / Letter-R Total Prints Counter.09 A3 / LEDGER Count A3 / Ledger Total Prints Counter.10 B4 / LEGAL Count B4 / Legal Total Prints Counter.

F7 ModeNo. Item Function Remarks

296APR 2005Ver. 1.1

Ver. 1.1

04 ScannerCount

00

00

05 Copy Count 000000

06 PC Count 0000

07 Fax Count 0000

08 All Counter Clear

No. Item

DP-C262/C322

0 ADF Count Total originals fed through the ADF counter.1 ADF Read Count Total originals scanned through the ADF

counter.2 Scanner Count Scanning operations Total Counter.3 Scanner Read Count Scanner Total Read Counter.0 Copy Print Count B/W Copies Total Prints Counter.1 Copy Print Count 1C2 Copy Print Count 2C3 Copy Print Count 4C4 Copy Print Count Single5 Copy Scan Count Copies Total Scan Counter.0 PC Print Count B/W Printed from PC Total Prints Counter.1 PC Print Count 4C2 PC Print Count Single3 PC Scan Count Scanned to PC Total Scan Counter.0 Fax Transmit Count Fax Total Transmit Counter.1 Fax Receive Count Fax Total Receive Counter.2 Fax Print Count Fax Total Prints Counter.3 Fax Print Count Single

Clears All Counters.

F7 ModeFunction Remarks

297APR 2005

DP-C262/C322

5.1.8. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment









F8 ModeNo. Item Remarks00 Exp. Lamp Replacement When replacing the exposure lamp.

Procedure:a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to

the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics home position) where it can be replaced.

b) To return the optical system to the home position, press the Clear key.*

01-05 Not Used06 Error Log Print/View a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine

displays errors or paper jam codes stored in memory, beginning with the oldest code.

Note:Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.

07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.A Message "Error code can be cleared with the Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*

b) Press the Start key.08 Factory Use Only09 Toner Density Adj Toner Density Adjustment Operation.

(When replacing Developer Unit.)10 Not Used11 Deve. Counter Reset Resets the Developer Counter and adjusts the

Toner Density.(When replacing Developer.)

12-18 Not Used19 Move Mirror To Lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the

locked position for transporting the copier.b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will

not accept any numerical key input.Note:

The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again.

20-24 Not Used

298APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

25 Drum Counter Reset Resets the Drum Counter and adjusts the Toner Density.

26 Fuser Belt Counter Reset Resets the Fuser Belt Counter (F7-65).27 Fuser Main Counter Reset Resets the Fuser Main Counter (F7-66).28 Belt Length Control Measures the Transfer Belt Length29 Belt Counter Reset Resets Transfer Belt Counter and measures

Transfer Belt Length30 Color Registration Color Registration Manual Adjustment Operation. 31 Not Used32 STR Counter Reset Resets the STR Counter

33-46 Not Used47 ADF Continuous Test Press START key to begin.48 Platen Continuous Test Press START key to begin.49 Not Used50 Scan Image Test Available when the Network Scanner Option is

installed.

F8 ModeNo. Item Remarks

299APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.1.9. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance




If you wish to select another function, touch tub key or scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.↓

Press "Stop" key.↓



F9 ModeService Mode

Item Remarks

F9 Unit Maintenance

00 Fax Service Mode01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a

machine malfunction occurs.02 Firmware

Version00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC

Boot.02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.03 EC Displays the firmware version for EC.04 SCN Displays the firmware version for SCN.05 Finisher Displays the firmware version for

Finisher.06 FCB Displays the firmware version for FCB.07 Not Used

03 Print Device Info.

00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5 and F6 modes.

01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.02 System Address

Info.Prints the system memory setting.

03-

04

Not Used

05 Calibration Information.

Prints the calibration information.

06 SC Board Check List.

Prints the SC Board check list.

04 RAM Edit Mode

00 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.01 Real Address Setting of Real address.

05 SerialNumber

- - Indicate of Serial number.

300APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

F9 Unit Maintenance

06 RAM Initialize

00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function parameters to default values.Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.02 Not Used03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,

Parameter Initialize & Resets the Counters (Fax).

04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.05 Dept. Counter Clear Clears the Department Counter.06 Job Log Clear Clears the Job Log.

07 FirmwareUpdate

00 Update from F-ROM Master Card

Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card.

01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine with the USB.

08-10

Not Used - - -

11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).

F9 ModeService Mode

Item Remarks

301APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)Caution:

The factory default parameters are preset (destination dependent) for optimum performance and in compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed. Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become inoperable.

5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure

To enter the Fax Service Mode

Press “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously to enter the Service Mode, then F1 will appear in the display.

Press "9" key on the Keypad.↓


Touch "00 Fax Service Mode" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Select the desired function or code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" key.

↓When the "Cancel" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.

↓Press "Stop" key three time.

↓Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

↓Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

Note:The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode:

5.2.2. FAX Service Mode TableThe following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit.

"START" : The new setting value is stored in the machine."V" : Scroll the function parameter number down."/\ " : Scroll the function parameter number up.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)No. Service Mode Description00 Not Used01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home

position, etc.).02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer

Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order Form.

04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem.

302APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

05 Not Used06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function

parameters.Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON

position to enable the parameter settings.07 Not Used08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,

Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter

Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)No. Service Mode Description

303APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.




Touch "01 Function Parameter Setting" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Select the desired function or code number on the Touch Panel display, and then touch the "OK" key.↓

If you wish to code number touch "Input" key code number on the Touch Panel display.If you wish to input minus value, press "Reset" key.

↓When the "Cancel" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.

↓If you wish to select another function or code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.

↓Press “Close” key three time.

↓Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Function Parameter TableNo. Parameter Selections Function000 Monitor/Tel Dial 1 = Monitor

2 = Tel/DialSelects whether the machine starts to TX automatically during On-Hook dialing.Monitor : Start to TX after pressing STARTTEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically

001 Alarm Status 1 = Off2 = Timer3 = Constant

Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.OFF : Alarm is disabled.Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is

pressed or the error is cleared/corrected.

002 Stop Comm. JRNL

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the machine prompts to print the COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication.

003 Continuous Poll 1 = Off2 = Stn (Tx only)3 = Hub (Rx only)

Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is enabled.Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,

then press the assigned Program Key to store or add the documents into a polled file. (See Note 1)

Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the machine will continuously poll originals from the remote stations until it is interrupted by pressing "STOP".

004 Numeric ID Set 1 = Off (will not accept)2 = On (accepts)

Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to set or change the Numeric ID.

304APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

005 Destination Code 000 : Austria001 : U.K.002 : Canada003 : Denmark004 : Taiwan005 : Finland006 : Germany007 : Netherlands008 : Italy009 : Spanish010 : Hong Kong011 : Australia012 : Switzerland013 : Norway015 : Portuguese016 : Ireland017 : Belgium018 : Sweden019 : Turkey020 : U.S.A.021 : France022 : New Zealand025 : Japan029 : Poland030 : Czech031 : Russia032 : Greece033 : Hungary034 : Indonesia035 : South Korea038 : Malaysia039 : China045 : Thailand048 : South Africa049 : Singapore050 : Universal051 : East Euro

Specified destinations only.

006 ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID)2 = Chara (Character ID)

Selects the priority of displaying the ID.

007 JRNL Column 1 = Station2 = RCV’D ID

Selects the contents of the ID to display on the Journal.

008 Monitor 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for monitoring fax signals.(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)

009 DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal)2 = On (Off Hook)

Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back communication test.

010 TX Level 00 = 0 dBm~15 = -15 dBm

Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)

011 RX Level 1 = -43 dBm2 = -38 dBm3 = -33 dBm4 = -48 dBm

Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 dBm.

Function Parameter TableNo. Parameter Selections Function

305APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

012 DTMF Level 00 = 0 dBm~15 = -15 dBm

Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm steps.

013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB2 = 4dB3 = 8dB4 = 12dB

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.

014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB2 = 4dB3 = 8dB4 = 12dB

Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.

015 ~ 016

Not Used

017 TX Start 2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bpsTC7200TC960012000 bps14400 bps

Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32.

018 RX Start 2400 bps4800 bps7200 bps9600 bpsTC7200TC960012000 bps14400 bps

Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.Note:

This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33.

019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off2 = On3 = Select

Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,

when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing.

020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Select the ECM mode.

021 EP Tone 1 = Off (without EP Tone)2 = On (with EP Tone)

Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode.(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)On : AddOff : Do not add

022 Signal Interval 1 = 100 ms2 = 200 ms3 = 500 ms

Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal.

023 TCF Check 1 = Normal (Short)2 = Long

Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short

024 CED Frequency 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)2 = 2100 Hz

Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz

025 COMM. Start-Up 1 = First2 = Second

Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT and Polling).(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)


306APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

026 Non-Standard 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects own mode (Panafax mode).

027 Short Protocol B 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects the short protocol mode.

028 Short Protocol D 1 = Off (Invalid)2 = On (Valid)

Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.

029 Remote Diagnostics

1 = Off (will not accept)2 = On (accepts)

Selects whether the machine accepts Remote Diagnostics from the service station.

030 CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms2 = 1 sec

Selects the pause interval between the CED and the 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

031 RTC = EOL x 12 1 = Off (EOLx6)2 = On (EOLx12)

Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.

032 V34 TX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.033 V34 RX Start 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34

communication, 33600-2400 bps.Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.

034 V34 TX SR 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.035 V34 RX SR 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/

3000/2800/2400 sr.Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.

036 Not Used037 Protocol Display 1 = Off (not displayed)

2 = On (displayed)Selects whether to display the modem speed during communication. (Press the Job Status Key to display)

038 Not Used039 Flash Time 5 = 50 ms

~100 = 1000 ms

Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key.

040 Flash Time (PSTN)

5 = 50 ms~100 = 1000 ms

Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key.(For Germany, Austria and Czech)

041 Pause Time 1 = 1 sec.~10 = 10 sec.

Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for dialing through a switchboard or for international calls.

042 Not Used043 Redial Interval 0 = no waiting

~15 = 15 minutes

Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 minute steps.

044 Redial Count 0 = no redial~15 = 15 times

0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only)

Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step intervals.Note:

In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.


307APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

045 Ring Detect Count

1 = 1 ring~9 = 9 rings

Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1 ring step intervals.

046 On-Hook Time 0 = 0 sec.~90 = 90 sec.

Selects the on-hook time between sequential communication calls in 1 second step intervals.

047 Response Wait Interval

1 = 1 sec.~90 = 90 sec.

20 ~ 150 sec. (For France Only)

Selects the waiting interval for the response after completing the dialing.

048~ 049

Not Used

050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal2 = Rough

Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals.

051 Not Used052 Pulse Rate 1 = 10 pps

2 = 20 ppsSelects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.

053~ 054

Not Used

055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.

056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number.

057 DC Loop Check(Except for USA and Canada)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication.

058 Comm. JRNL + Image

1 = Off (without image)2 = On (with image)

Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. Journal with image.

059 Confidential RCV Report

1 = Off (does not print out)2 = On (prints out)

Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential RCV Report.

060 Version Indicates the Host software version.

061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:******RX:****** CPY:******

Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and copied document count.

062 Print Counter 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61.

063~ 067

Not Used

068 NYSE Fax Forward(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the machine will forward the incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.Note:

Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding via Fax Parameter No. 054 is automatically disabled, an Access Code of "0000" is automatically assigned and Fax Parameter No. 038 has a new setting added called "NYSE".


308APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

069 NYSE Local Print(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Inc2 = On (Always)

Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes after FAX Forwarding.INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.ON : Always prints.

070 Line Error 128 lines256 lines512 lines1024 line2048 linesOff(will not disconnect line)

1. Selects the line disconnect condition during reception. If the number of line errors exceed this setting, the unit will disconnect the line.

Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or

RTN/PIN. (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") (See Note 1)

071 Total Error 1 = 5%2 = 10%3 = 15%4 = 20%

Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN.(Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)(See Note 2)

072 Continuous Error 1 = Off (unlimited)2 = 3 lines/STD3 = 6 lines/STD4 = 12 lines/STD

Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN. (Available if No. 73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)

073 Error Detect 1 = Lines2 = Rate

Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.

074 RTN Receive 1 = Disconnect2 = Continue

Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or continue when "RTN" is received.

075 Coding 1 = MH (MH only)2 = MR (MH or MR)3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR)4 = JBIG

Selects the coding scheme.

076 Batch TX(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the batch transmission is available.

077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited)2 = 2 m

Selects the maximum length of a received document that can be printed.

078~ 079

Not Used

080 Doc Top Feed -99~+99

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position.

081 Doc End Feed -90~+127

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position.

082 JAM Length 1 = 1 m2 = 2 m

Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned.

083 Not Used084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring)

2 = Busy (keep line busy)Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.

085 Not Used


309APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

086 Reduction Fine 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether to fix with Fine Mode or not for the Reduction transmission.

087 Darker Level 0 = Lightest Contrast~15 = Darkest Contrast

Selects the contrast level.0← →15Lightest← →Darkest

088 Normal Level089 Lighter Level

090~ 091

Not Used

092 Smoothing 1 = Off2 = On

Selects whether the smoothing function is available.

093 ~ 094

Not Used

095 Reduction Ratio (70-100) Selects Print Reduction Ratio (%).096 ~ 101

Not Used

102 OriginalRegistration

-30~+30

Adjustment of original registration detection timing.

103 Trail Edge Read Timing

-9~0

Adjustment of trail edge void.

104~109

Not Used

110 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address.111 Not Used112 Insert EMAIL TXT 1 = Off

2 = OnSelects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)Note:

After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers.

113 Not Used114 SYMBOL SET 1 = Standard

2 = ExtendedSelects whether the extended symbols other than "%" is available for Internet Parameters entry.

115 Time Zone 1 = Scroll2 = Direct

Selects the setting method for Time Zone.Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll

through the Time Zone Table.Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone

directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.

116 Overwrite Warning

1 = Yes2 = No

Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email.

117~121

Not Used

122 LDAP 1 = Off2 = On

When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be displayed as different characters.


310APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.

To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last Program Key will be assigned with the “Store 4 Poll” Key name automatically and cannot be changed.

To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.

(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.)

Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

123 One Ring Sound(USA and Canada Only)

1 = Off2 = On(Effective from Oct. 2004 Production)

When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out loud, answering on the second ring count.

124 ~ 139

Not Used

140 Text Density -32~+32

Adjustment of text density.

141 Text / Photo Density (It)

-32~+32

Adjustment of text / photo density.

142 Photo Density (It) -32~+32

Adjustment of photo density.

143~ 145

Not Used

146 T / P Density (dk) -32~+32

Adjustment of text / photo density for dark.

147 Photo Density (dk)

-32~+32

Adjustment of photo density for dark.

148~ 174

Not Used

175 FAX/EMAIL Default

1 = Adr.Book2 = ModeSet

176~ 199

Not Used

SignalSetting

1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:OffMCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 AlwaysRTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -


311APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN

Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.

SignalSetting

1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-

312APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results) From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.

5.2.4.1. Function Parameter ListA list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.




Touch "03 Print Parameter List / Report" key on the Touch Panel display.↓


If you wish to select another function or code number, scroll the menu with the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys.↓

Press “Close” key three time.↓

Press "Function", and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

313APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

-PANASONIC -

***** ******************* -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- *********

000 Monitor/Tel Dial Monitor 050 Ring Detect Mode Normal001 Alarm Status Timer 051 ----------002 Stop Comm. JRNL On 052 Pulse Rate 10pps003 Continuous Polling Off 053 ----------004 Numeric ID Set On 054 ----------005 Destination Code 999 055 Busy Tone Check On006 ID Display Chara 056 Dial Tone Check007 JRNL Column Station 057 DC Loop Check008 Monitor Off 058 Comm. JRNL + Image On009 DC Loop Off 059 Confidential RCV Report On

010 TX Level -9dBm 060 Version ..... AcV........011 RX Level -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY 000080/000168/000003/000000012 DTMF Level -5dBm 062 Print Counter Off013 G3 RX EQL 0dB 063 ----------014 G3 TX EQL 0dB 064 ----------015 --------- 065 ----------016 --------- 066 ----------017 TX Start 14400bps 067 ----------018 RX Start 14400bps 068 ----------019 ITU-T V.34 On 069 ----------

020 ITU-T ECM On 070 Line Error 128021 EP Tone Off 071 Total Error 10022 Sig. Interval 500ms 072 Continuous Error Off023 TCF Check Normal 073 Error Detect Rate 024 CED Frequency 2100Hz 074 RTN Receive Discon025 Comm. Start-Up First 075 Coding JBIG026 Non-Standard On 076 ----------027 Short Protocol B On 077 RX JAM Length 2 m028 Short Protocol D On 078 ----------029 Remote Diagnostics On 079 ----------

030 CED & 300bps 75ms 080 Original Lead Edge ADF 0031 RTC = EQL x 12 Off 081 Original Tail Edge ADF 0032 V34 TX Start 33600bps 082 JAM Length 2 m033 V34 RX Start 33600bps 083 ----------034 V34 TX SR 3429sr 084 Line As No-Paper Ring035 V34 RX SR 3429sr 085 ----------036 --------- 086 Reduction Fine On037 Protocol Display Off 087 ----------038 --------- 088 Normal Level 8039 Flash Time 500ms 089 ----------

040 --------- 090 ----------041 Pause Time 3sec 091 ----------042 --------- 092 Smoothing On043 Redial Interval 3min 093 ----------044 Redial Count 5 094 ----------045 Ring Detect Count 2 095 ----------046 On-Hook Time 5sec 096 ----------047 Response Wait Interval 55sec 097 ----------048 --------- 098 ----------049 --------- 099 ----------

OffOff

314APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4.2. Page Memory TestA test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following procedure.





Press the "03 Page Memory Test" on the display.↓



SC : TX/RX/PRT/CPY : 000123/000456/000789/000666SC BOOT : MEMORY SIZE : (3 MB)PNL : MAC ADDRESS : 08002300E078EC : SHIPMENT SETSCN :Finisher :FCB :

************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01

-PANASONIC -

***** ****************** -PANASONIC - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

315APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4.3. Printer ReportAll printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.





Press the "04 Printer Report" on the display.↓



**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016

CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456 SERIAL NUMBER :

PNL : EC : SCN :

TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475 RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398 COPY COUNTER : 000083 PRINT COUNTER : 000016

01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016

SC :

-PANASONIC -

***** *******************-PANASONIC -*******-12345678901234567890-**************

FIRMWARE VERSION

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|

||

316APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4.4. All Document FilesPrint the document files from the Flash Memory.





Press the "05 All Document Files" on the display.↓



317APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4.5. Protocol TracePrint a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.





Press the "06 Protocol Trace" on the display.↓



*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******

STATUS : OK MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD) SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44

REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR COMMAND LOG.

LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP

REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN

-PANASONIC -

****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************

------------------------------------------------------------------

318APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.4.6. Supply Order FormThe Supply Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.





Press the "07 Toner Order Form" on the display.↓



319APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Explanation of Contents

(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(6) Toner Cartridge No.

************************************* > SUPPLY ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The supplies in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Supplies

Please Contact or Fax This form to your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5)

(6)

P.O. No.(if required):

Serial No.:

Description Order No.

Toner Cartridge (Black) : DQ-TUN28K

Toner Cartridge (Cyan) : DQ-TUN20C

Toner Cartridge (Magenta) : DQ-TUN20M

Toner Cartridge (Yellow) : DQ-TUN20Y

OPC Drum Unit (Black) : DQ-UHN36

TOPC Drum Unit (Color) : DQ-UHN30

Toner Waste Container : DQ-BFN45

Quantity Required:

/ /Print your name and title Signature & Date

320APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)5.2.5.1. Binary SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.




Touch "04 Modem tests" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Press the "01 Binary Signal" on the display.↓

Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on the Control Panel button.

↓Press the "Stop" key on the Control Panel button.


↓Press "Function" and "C (Clear)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Binary Signal Table

Number Signals1 V21 300bps2 V27ter 2400bps3 V27ter 4800bps4 V29 7200bps5 V29 9600bps6 V17 TC7200bps7 V17 TC9600bps8 V17 12000bps9 V17 14400bps

321APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.5.2. Tonal SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure.





Press the "02 Tonal Signal" on the display.↓

Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on the Control Panel button.




Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals1 462 Hz2 1080 Hz3 1100 Hz4 1300 Hz5 1650 Hz6 1850 Hz7 2100 Hz

322APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.5.3. DTMF SignalThis Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

• DTMF Single ToneSet the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad.

↓Press the "Start" key.

↓Touch "00 Fax Service Mode" key on the Touch Panel display.

↓Touch "04 Modem tests" key on the Touch Panel display.

↓Press the "03 DTMF Single Tone" on the display.

↓Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on the Control Panel button.




• DTMF Dual ToneSet the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad.

↓Press the "Start" key.

↓Touch "00 Fax Service Mode" key on the Touch Panel display.

↓Touch "04 Modem tests" key on the Touch Panel display.

↓Press the "04 DTMF Dual Tone" on the display.

↓Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on the Control Panel button.




323APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table

Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz5 1209 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz6 1336 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz

8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz

324APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34)





Press the "05 V34 Modem" on the display.↓

Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Start" key on theControl Panel button.


↓Press “Close” key four time.


Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps02 V34 2400 sr 4800 bps 23 V34 3000 sr 12000 bps 44 V34 3429 sr 7200 bps03 V34 2400 sr 7200 bps 24 V34 3000 sr 14400 bps 45 V34 3429 sr 9600 bps04 V34 2400 sr 9600 bps 25 V34 3000 sr 16800 bps 46 V34 3429 sr 12000 bps05 V34 2400 sr 12000 bps 26 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps 47 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps06 V34 2400 sr 14400 bps 27 V34 3000 sr 21600 bps 48 V34 3429 sr 16800 bps07 V34 2400 sr 16800 bps 28 V34 3000 sr 24000 bps 49 V34 3429 sr 19200 bps08 V34 2400 sr 19200 bps 29 V34 3000 sr 26400 bps 50 V34 3429 sr 21600 bps09 V34 2400 sr 21600 bps 30 V34 3000 sr 28800 bps 51 V34 3429 sr 24000 bps10 V34 2800 sr 4800 bps 31 V34 3200 sr 4800 bps 52 V34 3429 sr 26400 bps11 V34 2800 sr 7200 bps 32 V34 3200 sr 7200 bps 53 V34 3429 sr 28800 bps12 V34 2800 sr 9600 bps 33 V34 3200 sr 9600 bps 54 V34 3429 sr 31200 bps13 V34 2800 sr 12000 bps 34 V34 3200 sr 12000 bps 55 V34 3429 sr 33600 bps14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps

325APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.Note:

This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.




Touch "06 RAM Initialize" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Select the desired Mode on the Touch Panel display, and then press the "Yes" or “No“.↓

Press the "Yes" key to initialize RAM, or press the “No“ key to cancel.↓

Press “Close” key four time.↓


RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description01 PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default

values.Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

02 JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents.03 AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.04 PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys.05 LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.06 LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the Printer Error Log.07 SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information, except parameter number

80 and 81, then set default values.08 FLASH MEMORY CLEAR Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.09 ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

326APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)5.2.7.1. OverviewThis feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:

1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-

registered telephone number or email address.4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically

transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.




Touch "08 Check & Call" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Select the desired code on the Touch Panel display.(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL" Mode key, and then input the email address.)



5.2.7.2. Printer Reports• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted1. Manual print

The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See sect. 5.2.4.3.)2. Automatic transmission/printout

a. Service Alert ReportWhen the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.

b. Maintenance Alert ReportWhen the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.

c. Toner Order FormWhen the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre-registered order information.

d. Call Counter ReportWhen the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.

Note:The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).

327APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report

Error Code Log Tx

Report Remarks

Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.)E13 Out of Toner.Jxx Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.)Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.)U13 M Low Toner.

328APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT


(1) Customer ID(2) Firmware Version(3) Counter Information(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********

**************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < ****************************

(1)

(2)

SERIAL NUMBER :

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

FIRMWARE VERSION

(3)

(4)

COUNTER INFORMATION: CURRENT PM CYCLE

F7-02 Total Count : 13 (------)F7-03 PM COUNT : 13 120000F7-04 Scanner PM Count : 9 (------)F7-05 . . . . . : F7-06 OPC Drum Count : 13 (------)F7-07 Process Unit Count : 13 (------)F7-08 ADF PM Count : 1F7-10 Developer Count : 13F7-11 Sheet Bypass Count : 0F7-12 1st Paper Tray Count : 3F7-13 2nd Paper Tray Count : 0F7-14 3rd Paper Tray Count : 0F7-15 4th Paper Tray Count : 0F7-16 2-Sided Count : 0F7-17 ADF/iADF Count : 0F7-18 ADF/iADF Read Count : 0F7-19 Scanner Count : 0F7-20 Scanner Read Count : 0F7-21 Copy Print Count : 0F7-21 Copy Scan Count : 0

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

SC :

SPC :

PNL :

F7-23 PC Print Count : 0F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0

Call Counter Pri-set Value : 999999

329APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT


(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”(2) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(3) Firmware Version(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters


**************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < ****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY SERIAL NUMBER :

(2)

FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

(4) TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082 COPY COUNTER : 000000 PRINT COUNTER : 000000

-LOGO PANASONIC -

************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

SC : PNL : SPC :

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

330APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.7.5. Toner Order Form


(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)(6) Toner Cartridge No.

************************************* > TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)

To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer

Panasonic Corp. (2)

by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address=========================

Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Attention:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):

Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ /Print your name and title Signature & Date

331APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT


(1) Customer ID(2) Firmware Version(3) Counter Information(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value


***************************************************************** > SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE < *****************************************************************

(1)

(2)

SERIAL NUMBER : CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY

LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

FIRMWARE VERSION

(3)

(4)

COUNTER INFORMATION: CURRENT PM CYCLE

-LOGO PANASONIC -

***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

SC : PNL : SPC :


PRINT ERROR:


F7-23 PC Print Count : 0F7-24 PC Scan Count : 6F7-25 FAX Transmit Count : 0F7-26 FAX Receive Count : 0F7-27 FAX Print Count : 0F7-28 OPC Drum Rotate : 0F7-29 A4/LT Count : 0F7-30 A4R/LTR Count : 0F7-31 A3/LD Count : 0F7-32 B4/LG Count : 0

Call Counter Pri-set Value : 1


PRINT ERROR:


Call Counter Pri-set Value :

332APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)5.2.8.1. OverviewThis Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.




Press the “V”, ”/\” arrow keys to select the "09 System Maintenance" key on the Touch Panel display.↓

Press the "01 Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.↓

Select the desired Fax number.↓

Press "START" to send the Fax. After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.

Note:If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function.Press the “STOP” key twice to exit the service mode.

System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description01 Send RCV'D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine

during a fatal printer error.

333APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6 System Description6.1. Mechanical Operation6.1.1. Scanning Mechanism (Flatbed)

1. Scanning MechanismThe Scanning Mechanism consisting of Lens, Color CCD PCB Assembly, Mirrors, Scanner Lamp, Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket, is used to scan originals.

• The Mirror 1 and Mirrors 2 reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens.• The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the Color CCD.• The Color CCD, mounted on the Color CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an

electrical signal.• The Timing Belt and Driving Wire are driven by the Stepping Motor, move the Scanner Assembly.

2. Transmit Mechanisma. When i-ADF is used, originals are scanned on the Scanning (S) Glass. The Platen (L) Glass is used

when scanning on the Platen. b. The Scanning point is established by the setting on the Panel or by an Automatic Document Size

Detection Sensor. c. Document size is manually set when the Platen is used or is set automatically by the Document

Size Detection Sensor.d. The Transmit Mechanism starts feeding and scanning originals based on the above Document Size

Setting.e. When scanning is completed, the Stepping Motor stops rotating and the Lamp Base and Mirror 2

Brackets return to the standby position.

During scanning, the Lamp Base Bracket and Mirror 2 Bracket move in the direction of the Black arrow and while returning to standby position, it moves in the direction of the White arrow as shown in the illustration. The location of these two brackets and the scanning length are established by the setting on the Panel. The following illustration shows the Drive system.

Scanner Lamp

Mirror 1

Reflection Plate

Scanning (S) Glass

Platen (L) Glass

Driving Wire Timing Belt Mirror 2

Mirror 2

Lamp Base Bracket

Scanning Motor

Scanning Lens

Color CCD PC Board Assembly

Size Sensor 1

334APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

When scanning originals

When returning to Standby position

Scanning Motor

Drive Shaft Assembly

Lamp Base Bracket

Mirror 2 Bracket

335APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.2. Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, oneoriginal at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing or copying ofthe original(s).Its main features are:

1. Place originals Face-Up2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller

The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.

6.2.1. Automatic Document Feeder Operation1. Initialization

The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the PickupRoller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position.

2. Original Setting and Size SensorsPlace the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper.Adjust the Original Guides to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper prevents originalsfrom skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor detects the presence of documentson the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator on the ADF Cover. The two Sensorsmounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are actuated by the OriginalGuides, their position determines the original's width and the Original Length Sensor 1 and LengthSensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original.

3. Feeding and SeparationWhen the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller. The 1storiginal is fed into the Paper Feed Roller and the Separation Roller with the Torque Limiter Assemblypreventing multiple feeding.

4. Transmission and EjectionThe original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 and when the original actuates the Registration Sensor2, the Paper Feed Roller stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 detects the scanning position andthe Registration Roller 2 and Transport Roller transport the original while scanning. The Stamp Headstamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the document is successfully transmitted or stored.It consists of the Stamp Head and Stamp Solenoid. The Exit Roller feeds and ejects the original out ofthe ADF. If there are additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.

5. Final OperationAfter ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raisingthe Original Stopper to its standby position.

6.2.2. i-ADF OperationThe i-ADF automatically inverts 2-Sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. Thisfeature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing or copying.An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception beingthe original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.

1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF ModeAfter passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide1, to the Exit Roller or to the Inverting Roller. For single-sided scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) isrotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid guiding the original to the Exit Roller. For 2-Sidedscanning, the Selection Guide 1 is rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid guiding the

336APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322original to the Inverting Roller. The Selection Guide 1 moves only once, in the direction according towhether a single or 2-Sided scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before the Start button is pressed. It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-Sided scanning, a Single-Sided scanning is performed).

2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an OriginalThe scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-Sided original is accomplished by means of theSelection Guide 1 and Selection Guide 2.After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1,through the Selection Guide 2 that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid and iscarried beyond the Inverting Roller and upper Pinch Rollers into the Sub Tray. The original is carried fora specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the Selection Sensor and stopswithin 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the Selection Guide 2 is rotated clockwise by thePinch Roller Solenoid Assembly and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 pulls the original backaround the Registration Roller 1 and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.

3. Eject by Reverse RotationAfter the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1, through theSelection Guide 2 and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller and lower Pinch Rollers, into the Sub Tray,again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.The Selection Guide 2 is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly and the reverserotation of the ADF Motor 1 pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1, however, this timethe original is routed to the Exit Roller and exits into the ADF Base.

4. Sub TrayThe Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray, which supports the originals during the ejection modeof the 2-Sided scanning operation.

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

210

mm

(A5)

215.

9 m

m (I

NV

OIC

E)

257

mm

(B5-

R)

297

mm

(A4-

R)

330.

2 m

m (F

LS1.

2)

364

mm

(B4)

420

mm

(A3)

431.

8 m

m (L

edge

r)

Sub Tray Inverting Roller

Read Point

Paper Feed Roller

Pick Up Roller

SeparationRoller

Exit Roller

Transport Roller

Anti Drive Registration Roller(Pinch Roller)

Anti Drive Exit Roller(Pinch Roller)

Anti Drive Transport Roller (Pinch Roller)

Anti Drive RegistrationRoller 2 (Pinch Roller)

Registration Roller 2

Registration Roller 1

Registration Sensor 3


Registration Sensor 1Original Stopper

Original Detection Sensor

Original Guide

Original Tray

Selection Guide 2

Selection Sensor

Selection Guide 1

Exit Sensor

Inverting Guide Sheet

Anti Drive Exit Roller(Pinch Roller)

337APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.3. Printer Mechanism6.3.1. Paper Tray

1. Paper Tray (1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th)< NP Sensor Operation >

Note:Above Figure is the 2nd Paper Tray, the operation is the same for all 4 trays.

a. The NP Actuators attached to the Paper Feed Blocks No.1, 2, 3 and 4 determine if there is paper inthe paper tray.

b. The paper in the paper tray lifts up the NP Actuator, allowing the light from the LED to actuate the NP Sensor.

NP Sensor

NP Actuator

Upper Limit Actuator

Upper Limit Sensor

338APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322< Paper Tray Operation >

a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor starts driving the Gears.b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.

The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and is transported.c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a

specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. The paper is transported to the STR area.

d. The paper passes through the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

Pickup Roller

Feed Roller

Registration Roller

Separation Roller

Registration Sensor

Registration Actuator

Clutch

339APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322< Paper Tray (Optional) Operation >

a. When the printing operation begins, the Main Motor and the Drive Motor start driving the Gears.b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Feed Roller.

The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separation Roller and transported by the Intermediate Roller.

c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller starts rotating. The paper is transported to the STR area.

d. The paper passes through the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

Pickup Roller

Feed Roller

Intermiidiate Roller

Clutch

Separation Roller

Drive Motor

340APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322< Paper Tray Lift up Mechanism >

a. When inserting the Paper Tray into the machine, the Upper Limit Sensor activates. At the sametime, the Lift Plate is combined with the coupling which drives the Lift Plate of the machine. The LiftPlate rotates, lifting the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper.

b. Once the Bottom Plate and the Recording Paper are raised, the Upper Limit Sensor is turned ON. The Lift DC Motor stops rotating, maintaining the recording paper at the certain level.

Pickup Roller

Feed Roller

Bottom Plate

Lift Plate

341APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

< Paper Tray Recording Paper Size Setting >The Recording Paper size in the Paper Feed Module is set on the Touch Panel.

NP Sensor

NP Actuator

Lift DC Motor

Upper Limit Actuator

Upper Limit Sensor

342APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Sheet Bypass

< NP Sensor Operation >

a. The NP Actuator attached to the Paper Feed Unit determines if there is paper in the paper tray.b. The paper in the paper tray lowers the NP Actuator and the NP Sensor actuates.

< Sheet Bypass Operation >

a. When the printing operation begins, the PRINT (Print Request Signal) turns On and the Main Motorstarts driving the Gears.

b. The Clutch is energized for a specified period of time and turns ON. This activates the Paper Feed Roller and the Pick Up Roller. The paper is transported to the Separating Roller by the Pick Up Roller. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the Separating Roller.

c. The paper is transported to the Registration Roller, activating the Registration Sensor. d. After a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned ON and the Registration Roller and the

Registration Pinch Roller start rotating. After the paper is transported to the Intermediate Roller (Main), the Clutch is turned OFF. The paper is transported to the STR area by the Intermediate Roller.

e. After the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor and after a specified period of time, the Clutch is turned OFF. The Registration Roller and the Registration Pinch Roller stop rotating.

Feed Roller

Pick Up Roller

NP SensorNP Actuator

Separating Roller

Intermediate Roller

343APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.4. Printing Process

Laser Printer creates an image on the paper using a technique called laser electrophotography. The printer uses the electrographic process known as Discharged Area Development, or “write black”. In this process, a digitally modulated laser scans laterally across a rotating OPC (Organic Photo Conductive) drum that has been negatively charged. Wherever the OPC drum is exposed by laser beam, the image is written and toner is transferred.

Pickup Roller


Reverse Roller

Paper Feed Roller

Paper Feed Roller

Paper Feed Roller

Pickup Roller

Polygon Motor

First Bias Transfer Roller (FTR)

OPCY

TonerCartridge

Y

TonerCartridge

M

TonerCartridge

C

TonerCartridge

BK

OPCM

OPCC

OPCBK

Pickup Roller

PressureRoller

Second Bias Transfer Roller(STR)

FuserRoller

Heat Roller

Heater Belt

(Optional Paper Transport Unit)

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Pickup Roller

Pickup Roller

Intermediate Transfer BeltCleaning Blade

IH Coil

ChargeRoller

ADUPaperRegistration Roller

344APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322To generate a color image, the OPC drum suitably rotates to the image length, one for each of the primary colors and for the black color. During each successive pass, the laser exposes the portions of OPC drum that corresponds to the primary color’s component of the image. Toner is attracted onto the laser-exposed portions of the OPC drum.As each color layer is developed on each OPC drum, they are transferred to the Intermediate Transfer Belt until all four color layers eventually reside one on top of the other on the Intermediate Transfer Belt. At this point, a sheet of paper is advanced under the Intermediate Transfer Belt and the toner is transferred to the sheet of paper. The paper advances to the Fuser, where heat and pressure permanently bondthe toner to the paper. From the Fuser, the paper is driven to the Output Tray.

A cleaning blade scrapes residual toner from the OPC drum before the next primary color toner is applied to the OPC drum. This prevents contamination of the next color layer. The cleaning blade is in constant contact with the OPC drum.An Intermediate Transfer Belt cleaner scrapes residual toner from the Intermediate Transfer Belt. This prevents “ghosting “of the next print.

6.4.1. Charging

The charging roller, comes in contact with the OPC drum surface and charges it to approximately DC-480volts + AC voltage, and ensures a uniform negative potential of approximately -430 volts on the OPC drumsurface by the charging roller, depending on the selected printing quality (Std: 600 dpi, or Enhanced: 1,200dpi) and ambient temperature.


VCH/CMY : -480V VCH/K : -480V

-430V


OPCDrum

Y

OPCDrum

M

OPCDrum

C

OPCDrumBK

TonerCartridge

Y

TonerCartridge

M

TonerCartridge

C

TonerCartridge

BK

Second Bias Transfer Roller(STR)

ChargeRollerDoctor

Blade

345APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.4.2. Laser Exposure and Scanning

1. Laser ExposureAs the OPC drum rotates, the uniformly charged OPC drum is exposed by the modulated laser beam. The vertically-moving OPC drum passes in front of horizontally scanning laser beam, and the negative charge on the OPC drum surface are neutralized by the laser beam. This forms a latent image.Laser output power is either approximately 0.075 mW (1200 dpi), 0.13 mW (600 dpi, Color) or 0.21 mW (600 dpi, Mono) on the OPC drum surface, depending on whether the printer is printing resolution in 1200 dpi mode or 600 dpi mode. The laser exposure, the negative potential on the OPC drum varies from approximately -430 volts (unexposed) to -60 volts (fully exposed).

2. Laser ScanningA laser diode generates the laser beam, and lenses and mirror in the laser scanner direct the beam to the OPC drum. The beam is parallel to the collimator lens and is directed at the rotating polygonal mirror, attached with the polygon motor. The beam is parallel to the collimator lens and is directed at the rotating polygon mirror. The polygon mirror rotates at approximately 24,800 to 40,000 constant revolutions per minute. This transforms the beam into a horizontally scanning beam, which is directed through the primary and the secondary lens, altering the beam’s angular rotation motion into a constant horizontal motion. The cylindrical mirrors corrects the beam for any vertical mis-registration. Next, the beam reflects off of a mirror and passes through a window where it scans across the rotating OPC drum. At the beginning of each horizontal sweep, the horizontal sync mirrors deflect the laser beam to the horizontal sync sensor. This informs the engine control board that the laser beam is beginning its horizontal sweep and that it can begin to modulate the signal with the data to be printed on that line of the image.


Polygon Motor


TonerCartridge

Y

TonerCartridge

M

TonerCartridge

C

TonerCartridge

BK

Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Mirror

Laser Beam

OPCDrum

Y

OPCDrum

M

OPCDrum

C

OPCDrumBK

346APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.4.3. Developing

As the OPC drum continues to rotate, it passes by the developer roller. The currently activated developer roller is charged to a potential approximately DC -410 volts (AC 1,000 Vp-p). Toner is attracted to the exposed portions of the OPC drum in reverse proportion to the negative charge. The greatest amount of toner is transferred to the most positive potential. The developer roller rotates at 2.0 times the speed of the OPC drum to ensure a constant supply of toner.

This supplies a layer of toner onto the developer roller. The doctor blade smooths and evenly distributes the toner on the developer roller.

6.4.4. Toner Transfer to the Intermediate Transfer Belt

As the OPC drum rotates, in contact with the Intermediate Transfer Belt, which is rotating at the same speed. Located under the Intermediate Transfer Belt at the contact point with the OPC drum, the first bias transfer roller carries a charge approximately 8-12 µA for Color mode or 18 µA for Monochrome mode (FTR Current).This strong potential attracts and holds the toner from the OPC drum to Intermediate Transfer Belt. The four color layers are created while the Intermediate Transfer Belt makes one complete rotation.

Any toner remaining on the OPC drum after the transfer to the Intermediate Transfer Belt is scraped off by the OPC drum cleaning blade, which is always in contact with the OPC drum. This leaves the OPC drum clean for the next layer of toner to be transferred from the developing roller into the developer.

OPCDrum

Doctor Blade

-410V

Vp-p : 1000V AC Developer Roller

Toner Supply Auger

OPCDrum

First Transfer Roller (FTR) Intermediate Transfer Belt

347APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.4.5. Developer Unit

The developer unit consists of the Magnet Roller, Sleeve and 2 Toner Auger.The Toner Auger A transfers the developer to the front direction and the Auger B transfers to the rear direction to circulate the developer for mixing. The Toner Auger A also transfers the developer to the Sleeve. The developer on the sleeve forms a brush by the magnetic force of the Magnetic Roller, and makes contact with the electrostatic latent image on the drum. Toner is attracted to the areas of the drum which have been discharged by the laser. The Doctor Blade regulates the height of the magnetic brush which is formed by the developer which is attracted to the sleeve of the Magnetic Roller.

The system uses Dry Dual Components and Trickle developing method to mix the carrier to the Toner. When the Toner is supplied, the Carrier is also supplied a little at the time. When the Carrier is increased over the Constant value, the unnecessary Carrier is transferred together with the Toner by the Auger A to the Toner Waste Container. As a result, it realizes the stable developing without maintenance, without replacing the developer for a long time. The TDC sensor is located near the Auger B to measure the ratio of toner to developer. The Toner Density Control (TDC) is linked with Image Density detection and Image dot count to stabilize the Color Image Quality.

6.4.6. Toner Transfer to Paper

Once all four layers of toner reside up on the Intermediate Transfer Belt, the registration roller clutch is energized to advance a sheet of paper (which has already been picked) to the second bias transfer

OPCDrum

Cleaning Blade

Toner Waste Paddle


Auger B Auger A

To Fuser Unit

From Standard Paper Tray, Sheet Bypass Tray,Optional Paper Tray or Automatic Duplex Unit

VSTR : -1500V

Second Transfer Roller(STR)

Bias Roller

Registration Roller

Intermediate Transfer BeltCleaning Blade


348APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322roller. The toner image on the rotating Intermediate Transfer Belt and the paper that is being fed into the image unit are synchronized for proper alignment. The leading edge of toner image on the Intermediate Transfer Belt is aligned 4 mm from the leading edge of the paper. A strong negative voltage in the bias roller pushes out the toner from the Intermediate Transfer Belt onto the paper. The bias roller voltage is approximately -1500 volts. This voltage varies depending on the ambient temperature, humidity, print speed, and media being printed upon. The paper (or transparency film)advances at the same speed as the Intermediate Transfer Belt.

The Intermediate Transfer Belt Blade scrapes any remaining traces of toner from the IntermediateTransfer Belt prior to the next image transfer. The scraped toner is discharged to the Toner WasteContainer by the spiral paddle shaft.

6.4.7. Induction Heating (IH) Fusing System Operation

After the toner image has been applied to the paper, it passes through the Fuser Unit. When the Heater Belt Motor starts to rotate, the Induction Heating (IH) Coil is turned on, heating the Heat Roller. As a result, the Heater Belt, contacted with the Heat Roller surface, is heated by the Heat Roller. A heated Heater Belt melts the toner and the pressure of the Pressure Roller fuses it into the paper. The melted toner bonds to the paper. After fusing, the paper advances to the output tray. When the printer is idle, the IH coil is turned off and the Heater Belt is not heated. This Heater Belt temperature varies with the selected settings of 600 or 1200 dpi printing mode, thick paper printing mode, transparency printing mode, etc. The Fuser Unit has the Paper Entrance Sensor and Paper Exit Sensor, which are used for determining the Control timings of the paper feeding by detecting the paper entrance, exit and Jam.

Pressure Roller

Paper Exit Sensor

Paper Entrance Sensor

Induction Heating (IH) Coil

Heat Roller

Thermistor

Heater BeltFuser Roller


Second Bias Transfer Roller (STR)

349APR 2005Ver. 1.1

Ver. 1.1

6.4.8. Paper Exit aAfter Fusing, the paper The paper path is switcRoller and Paper Exit Pa

6.4.8.1. Normal PriThe ADU Path Switchinthrough the lower path a

1. Inner Exit Tray

The Paper Exit path Spaper is fed by the 2-

When the Inner Papemessage on the LCD

2. Outer Exit Tray / F

The Paper Exit path Sfed by the 2-Way rolleout to the outer Pape

To Optional PaperTransfer Unit

Inner Paper Exit

DP-C262/C322

nd Paper Switchbackis fed to the Inner Paper Exit Tray, the ADU, or to the Optional Paper Transfer Unit.hed by the combination of ADU Path Switching Solenoid and Three-step 2-Wayth Switching Solenoid.

nting Modeg Solenoid keeps ON and the Lever is switched to the Upper side, the paper is fednd goes into the Three-step 2-Way Roller.

witching Solenoid keeps OFF and the Lever is switched to the Upper side, the Way roller and goes through the lower path and out to the Inner Paper Exit Tray.

r Tray is full, the Paper Full sensor detects, stops printing and displays the Error Panel.

inisher with Paper Transfer Unit

Clutch Reverse Clutch

2-Way Roller

ADU Path

Tray

From Fuser Unit

ADU Path SwitchingSolenoid

Paper Exit PathSwitching Solenoid

ONOFF

Paper Full Sensor

350APR 2005

witching Solenoid keeps ON and the Lever is moved to the lower side, the paper is r and goes through the Lower path and goes to the Paper Transfer Unit, then goes r Tray, or Finisher.

DP-C262/C322

6.4.8.2. Duplex Printing Mode (Paper Switchback)The ADU Path Switching Solenoid switches OFF and the Lever switched to the Lower side, the paper is fed through the Upper path and goes into the Three-step 2-Way Roller.

The Paper Exit path Switching Solenoid keeps OFF and the Lever is switched to the upper side, the paper is fed by the 2-Way roller and goes through the Upper path and fed into the Paper Transfer Unit.

The ADU Pass Sensor 0 detects the end of the paper and the 2-Way Roller Reverse clutch goes OFF, and the paper stops in the middle. The ADU Path Switching Solenoid goes ON and the Lever switches to the Upper side. Then the 2-Way Roller Clutch goes ON and the Roller turns clockwise to feed the paper into the ADU Unit.

While the single side printed paper is feeding into the ADU, the duplex printed paper is also fed out to the Inner Exit Tray to realize high productivity.

ADU Pass Sensor 0

OFFOFF


2-Way RollerTo OptionalPaper Transfer Unit

ADU Path

From Fuser Unit



Paper Full Sensor

ONOFF


2-Way Roller

To OptionalPaper Transfer Unit

ADU Path

From Fuser Unit



Paper Full Sensor

351APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

6.5. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

6.5.1. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Glossary of Electrical AbbreviationsSignal Name Function

*A Sub Motor Phase A*B Sub Motor Phase B+10V +10V DC Power Supply+2.5V +2.5V DC Power Supply+24V +24V DC Power Supply+24V_1 +24V DC Power Supply+24V_2 +24V DC Power Supply+24V_3 +24V DC Power Supply+24VD +24V DC Power Supply+24VF +24V DC Power Supply+24VF_1 +24V DC Power Supply+24VF_2 +24V DC Power Supply+24VF_3 +24V DC Power Supply+24VF_4 +24V DC Power Supply+24VM +24V DC Power Supply+24VM_1 +24V DC Power Supply+24VM_2 +24V DC Power Supply+24VM_3 +24V DC Power Supply+24VM_4 +24V DC Power Supply+24VS +24V DC Power Supply+3.3V +24V DC Power Supply+5V +5V DC Power Supply+5V_1 +5V DC Power Supply+5V_2 +5V DC Power Supply+5V_3 +5V DC Power Supply+5V_4 +5V DC Power Supply+5VADF +5V DC Power Supply+5V_HOME +5V DC Power Supply for Belt Home Position Sensor+5V_LSU_1 +5V DC Power Supply for LSU+5V_LSU_2 +5V DC Power Supply for LSU+5V_RR +5V DC Power Supply Signal for OHP Registration Sensor+5VD +5V DC Power Supply+5VLSU_IN +5V DC Power Supply+5VP +5V DC Power Supply+5VSW_1 +5V DC Switching Power Supply+5VSW_2 +5V DC Switching Power Supply100V/200V Output is controlled by the Signal Level

(100V/120V : 0V; 230V : 5V)100V_200V 100V/200V Identifying Signal24V +24V DC Power Supply3.3V +3.3V VDC Power SupplyA FTR/STR/Fuser/Sub Motor Phase A

352APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

A[0] Address Bus Bit 0A[1] Address Bus Bit 1A[2] Address Bus Bit 2A[3] Address Bus Bit 3A[4] Address Bus Bit 4A[5] Address Bus Bit 5A[6] Address Bus Bit 6A[7] Address Bus Bit 7A0 AddressA1 AddressA10/AP AddressA11 AddressA12 AddressA2 AddressA3 AddressA4 AddressA5 AddressA6 AddressA7 AddressA8 AddressA9 AddressADFFIFOCLK Serial Interface Clock ADFFIFODIN Input Serial DataADFFIFODOUT Output Serial DataADFFIFOENB Serial Interface EnableADFFIFOLD Serial Interface Load SignalADFFIFOLTH Serial Interface Latch SignalADFMMCLK Main Motor Clock ADFPMCLK Paper Feed Motor Clock ADUENB ADU Serial Driver Enable Data SignalADULD ADU Serial LoadADULT ADU Serial LatchADUSICLK ADU Serial ClockADUSIIN ADU Serial Data InputADUSIOUT ADU Serial Data OutputAGND Analog GroundAPFLD AFP Serial LoadAPFLT AFP Serial LatchAPFMCLK APF Motor Clock APFSICLK APF Serial Clock APFSIIN APF Serial Data InputAPFSIOUT APF Serial Data OutputASICRCLK- Reserve Clock -ASICRCLK+ Reserve Clock +ATA0 HDD Address BusATA1 HDD Address Bus


353APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

ATA2 HDD Address BusATAINT HDD B807 SignalATCS0 Second HDD Selection SignalATCS1 Primary HDD Selection SignalATD0 HDD Data BusATD1 HDD Data BusATD10 HDD Data BusATD11 HDD Data BusATD12 HDD Data BusATD13 HDD Data BusATD14 HDD Data BusATD15 HDD Data BusATD2 HDD Data BusATD3 HDD Data BusATD4 HDD Data BusATD5 HDD Data BusATD6 HDD Data BusATD7 HDD Data BusATD8 HDD Data BusATD9 HDD Data BusATIORD HDD Data Read SignalATIORDY HDDRW Ready SignalATIOWR HDD Data Write SignalATRST Reset SignalB Motor Phase BBA0 AddressBA1 AddressBBA0 AddressBBA1 AddressBDCLK0 L Word ClockBDCLK1 H Word ClockBLCNT Back Light Control SignalBLSN_C Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal CBLSN_K Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal KBLSN_M Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal MBLSN_Y Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal YBLUESCLK - Blue AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock -

(BLUESCLK-)BLUESCLK + Blue AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +

(BLUESCLK+)BMA0 AddressBMA1 AddressBMA10 AddressBMA11 AddressBMA12 AddressBMA15 Address


354APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

BMA2 AddressBMA3 AddressBMA4 AddressBMA5 AddressBMA6 AddressBMA7 AddressBMA8 AddressBMA9 AddressBMD0 DataBMD1 DataBMD10 DataBMD11 DataBMD12 DataBMD13 DataBMD14 DataBMD16 DataBMD17 DataBMD18 DataBMD19 DataBMD2 DataBMD20 DataBMD21 DataBMD22 DataBMD23 DataBMD24 DataBMD25 DataBMD26 DataBMD27 DataBMD28 DataBMD29 DataBMD3 DataBMD30 DataBMD31 DataBMD4 DataBMD5 DataBMD6 DataBMD7 DataBMD8 DataBMD9 DataBZ+ Buzzer Power SupplyBZCLK Buzzer ClockC_CLK_CK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)C_CLK_YM Bias Charge AC Output Clock (YM)Card_Detect Card Detection SignalCAS Column Address SelectCB0 No Connection


355APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

CB1 No ConnectionCB2 No ConnectionCB3 No ConnectionCB4 No ConnectionCB5 No ConnectionCB6 No ConnectionCB7 No ConnectionCBTMCLK Belt Motor ClockCBTMGAIN Belt Motor GainCCDASICLK- CCD-ASIC System Clock -CCDASICLK+ CCD-ASIC System Clock +CD/DAT3 DataCK0 ClockCK1 ClockCK2 ClockCKE0 Clock EnableCKE1 Clock EnableCL1 Latch SignalCL2 Shift ClockCLK ClockCMD CommandCREG_LD_L Left Registration Sensor LED ReferenceCREG_LD_M Middle Registration Sensor LED ReferenceCREG_LD_R Right Registration Sensor LED ReferenceCREG_OT_L Input Left Registration SensorCREG_OT_M Input Middle Registration SensorCREG_OT_R Input Right Registration SensorCSSRXD Input CSS RXDCSSTXD Output CSS TXDCT1 Common Terminal 1 SignalD- DataD[0] Data Bus Bit 0D[1] Data Bus Bit 1D[2] Data Bus Bit 2D[3] Data Bus Bit 3D[4] Data Bus Bit 4D[5] Data Bus Bit 5D[6] Data Bus Bit 6D[7] Data Bus Bit 7D_CLK_CK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)D_CLK_nCK Bias Charge AC Output Clock (CK)D_CLK_nYM Developer Bias AC Clock (YM)D_CLK_YM Developer Bias AC Clock (YM)D+ DataD0 DataD1 Data


356APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

D2 DataD3 DataD4 DataD5 DataD6 DataD7 DataDASP HDD Activation SignalDATA_C Image Data (C) +DATA_K Image Data (K) +DATA_M Image Data (M) +DATA_Y Image Data (Y) +DATA0 DataDATA1 DataDATA2 DataDCLKC Data Clock CDCLKK K Data ClockDCLKM M Data ClockDCLKY Y Data ClockDCS_M Middle Registration Sensor Detection Range SwitchDEV1CLK Developer Motor 1 ClockDEV1GAIN Developer Motor 1 GainDEV2CLK Developer Motor 2 ClockDEV2GAIN Developer Motor 2 GainDGLRST Dongle ResetDM0 Data MaskDM1 Data MaskDM2 Data MaskDM3 Data MaskDM4 Data MaskDM5 Data MaskDM6 Data MaskDM7 Data MaskDM8 Data MaskDNGL1 Dongle 1 SelectDNGL2 Dongle 2 SelectDNGL3 Dongle 3 SelectDNGLCD1 Presence of Dongle Key 1DNGLCD2 Presence of Dongle Key 2DNGLCD3 Presence of Dongle Key 3DNLDCL Download ClockDNLDDT Download DataDQ0 DataDQ1 DataDQ10 DataDQ11 DataDQ12 Data


357APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

DQ13 DataDQ14 DataDQ15 DataDQ16 DataDQ17 DataDQ18 DataDQ19 DataDQ2 DataDQ20 DataDQ21 DataDQ22 DataDQ23 DataDQ24 DataDQ25 DataDQ26 DataDQ27 DataDQ28 DataDQ29 DataDQ3 DataDQ30 DataDQ31 DataDQ32 DataDQ33 DataDQ34 DataDQ35 DataDQ36 DataDQ37 DataDQ38 DataDQ39 DataDQ4 DataDQ40 DataDQ41 DataDQ42 DataDQ43 DataDQ44 DataDQ45 DataDQ46 DataDQ47 DataDQ48 DataDQ49 DataDQ5 DataDQ50 DataDQ51 DataDQ52 DataDQ53 DataDQ54 Data


358APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

DQ55 DataDQ56 DataDQ57 DataDQ58 DataDQ59 DataDQ6 DataDQ60 DataDQ61 DataDQ62 DataDQ63 DataDQ7 DataDQ8 DataDQ9 DataDQS0 DataDQS1 DataDQS2 DataDQS3 DataDQS4 DataDQS5 DataDQS6 DataDQS7 DataDQS8 DataECDI1 SC Data Input 1 SignalECDI2 SC Data Input 2 SignalECDO1 SC Data Output 1 SignalECDO2 SC Data Output 2 SignalECPRG Program Download DataECRDY Engine Ready SignalECRST Reset SignalECSTS Engine Status SignalF1 Shift Register Clock 1F2 Shift Register Clock 2F2L Last Stage Shift Register ClockFAN+24V1 GroundFAN+24V2 GroundFAN1SN +24V DC Power SupplyFAN2SN +24V DC Power SupplyFCP Reset Feed Through Level Clamp ClockFLM Frame SignalFR Reset Gate ClockFTG1 Transfer Gate Clock 1FTG2 Transfer Gate Clock 2FTRMCLK FTR Motor ClockFTRMON_C FTR Voltage Monitor CFTRMON_K FTR Voltage Monitor KFTRMON_M FTR Voltage Monitor M


359APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

FTRMON_Y FTR Voltage Monitor YFUMCLK Fuser Motor ClockFUMREF Fuser Motor ReferenceFUROTSN1 Fuser Rotor Sensor 1FUROTSN2 Fuser Rotor Sensor 2GAIN Gain ControlGAIN_K Laser Gain (C, K)GAIN_Y Laser Gain (Y, M)GLA Green LED Anode SignalGLK(GND) Green LED Cathode SignalGND GroundGND_1 GroundGND_2 GroundGND_3 GNDGND_4 GNDGND_5 GNDGND_6 GNDGND_7 GNDGND_8 GNDGND_9 GNDGREENSCLK- Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +GREENSCLK+ Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock +HSYNCC C Horizontal Synchronized SignalHSYNCK K Horizontal Synchronized SignalHSYNCM M Horizontal Synchronized SignalHSYNCY Y Horizontal Synchronized SignalHUMISN Humidity SensorIH_ROTSN2 Fuser Rotor Encoder Output 2IHADIN IH AD Converter Data OutputIHADO IH AD Converter Data InputIHPWR IH Power OWM OutputIO16 16 Bit Block Transfer Control SignalIPRXD Finisher Serial RXDIPTXD Finisher Serial TXDKIN0 Key Input SignalKIN3 Key Input SignalKIN4 Key Input SignalKIN5 Key Input SignalKIN6 Key Input SignalKYE No ConnectionLD_ERS_C1 Discharge LED C Power Supply 1 LD_ERS_C2 Discharge LED C Power Supply 2LD_ERS_K1 Discharge LED K Power Supply 1 LD_ERS_K2 Discharge LED K Power Supply 2LD_ERS_M1 Discharge LED M Power Supply 1LD_ERS_M2 Discharge LED M Power Supply 2


360APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

LD_ERS_Y1 Discharge LED Y Power Supply 1LD_ERS_Y2 Discharge LED Y Power Supply 2LDADUDR Right Sub Cover Sensor Power SupplyLDADUPP0 ADU Path Sensor 0 Power SupplyLDADUPP2 ADU Path Sensor 2 Power SupplyLDBL_C Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal C Power SupplyLDBL_K Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal K Power SupplyLDBL_M Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal M Power SupplyLDBL_Y Bottle Motor Lock Detection Signal Y Power SupplyLDCST1a Tray 1 Sensor a Power SupplyLDCST1b Tray 1 Sensor b Power SupplyLDCST2a Tray 2 Sensor a Power SupplyLDCST2b Tray 2 Sensor b Power SupplyLDCST3 +5V DC Power SupplyLDCST4 +5V DC Power SupplyLDFTR1 FTR 1 Sensor Power SupplyLDFTRÇQ FTR 2 Sensor Power SupplyLDFUEX Fuser Exit Sensor Power SupplyLDFUIN Fuser Entrance Sensor Power SupplyLDFURT1 Fuser Rotor Sensor 1 Power SupplyLDFURT2 Fuser Rotor Sensor 2 Power SupplyLDHFL Sheet Bypass Length Sensor Power SupplyLDHFPE Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Detection Sensor Power SupplyLDHFS1 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor Power SupplyLDHFS2 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 2 Power SupplyLDHFS3 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 3 Power SupplyLDHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (CK)LDHV_T DAC0 Serial Data Latch SignalLDHV_YM AC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (YM)LDIHC1 IH Core Sensor 1 Power SupplyLDIHC2 IH Core Sensor 2 Power SupplyLDINRSN Inner Exit Sensor Power SupplyLDJAM Intermediate Roller Jam Sensor Power SupplyLDJDR Jam Release Door Sensor Power SupplyLDLFTSN +5V DC Power SupplyLDOPC_BK OPC Gear Phase Sensor BK Power SupplyLDOPC_C New OPC Drum Detection Sensor C Power SupplyLDOPC_COL OPC Gear Phase Sensor Color Power SupplyLDOPC_K New OPC Drum Detection Sensor K Power SupplyLDOPC_M New OPC Drum Detection Sensor M Power SupplyLDOPC_Y New OPC Drum Detection Sensor Y Power SupplyLDOQDOSN +5V DC Power SupplyLDPEWSN3 +5V DC Power SupplyLDPEWSN4 +5V DC Power SupplyLDPR1 Pressure Roller Sensor 1 Power SupplyLDPR2 Pressure Roller Sensor 2 Power Supply


361APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

LDSHT Shutter Open and Close Detection Sensor Power SupplyLDSTR1 STR 1 Sensor Power SupplyLDSTR2 STR 2 Sensor Power SupplyLDTF Waste Toner Full Sensor Power SupplyLDTRUCVSN +5V DC Power SupplyLDTRUSN +5V DC Power SupplyLDWTB Waste Toner Bottle Detection Sensor Power SupplyLED0 LED 0 Activation SignalLED1 LED 1 Activation SignalLED2 LED 2 Activation SignalLED24V-1 LED Power SupplyLED24V-2 LED Power SupplyLED3 LED 3 Activation SignalLED4 LED 4 Activation SignalLED5 LED 5 Activation SignalLED6 LED 6 Activation SignalLED7 LED 7 Activation SignalLED8 LED 8 Activation SignalLEDPGND LED ControlLive 100/120/230V VAC Power SupplyLSUDACK LSU DA Converter ClockLSUDALD LSU DA Converter LoadLSUDAOUT LSU DA Converter Data OutputLUM3-1 +24V DC Power SupplyLUM3-2 LUM ControlLUM4-1 +24V DC Power SupplyLUM4-2 LUM ControlLVSCLK- Flat Link LVDS Shift Clock (LVSCLK-)LVSCLK+ Flat Link LVDS Shift Clock (LVSCLK+)mask1 CCD Drive Control Signalmask2 CCD Drive Control SignalMEXFAN Right Cover Fan Power SupplyMGND Power GroundMOTLT Motor Driver Serial LatchMOTSICLK Motor Driver Serial ClockMOTSIOUT Motor Driver Serial Data OutputN.C. No ConnectionnADFDXSN Duplex SignalnADFORGSEN Original Detection Sensor (ADF)nADFRRSN1 Registration Roller Sensor 1 SignalnADFRRSN2 Registration Roller Sensor 2 SignalnADFSN ADF PCB SensornADUCL1 ADU Clutch 1 Control SignalnADUCL2 ADU Clutch 2 Control SignalnADUDRSN Right Sub Cover Sensor SignalnADUENB ADU Serial Driver Enable Data Signal


362APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nADULD ADU Serial Load Data SignalnADULT ADU Serial Latch Data SignalnADUPP0 ADU Path Sensor 0 SignalnADUPP1 ADU Path Sensor 1 SignalnADUPP2 ADU Path Sensor 2 SignalnADUSICLK ADU Serial Data Clock SignalnADUSIDI ADU Serial Data Output SignalnADUSIDO ADU Serial Data Input SignalnAPFENB Serial Interface EnablenBAL0 Remaining Amount Signal nBCAS Column Address SelectnBCD Presence of Page Memory PC Board SignalnBCKE Clock EnablenBCS2 Select for IC 1, 2nBCS3 Select for IC 3, 4nBCS4 Select for IC 5, 6nBCS5 Select for IC 7, 8nBDQMH Data Mask H BitenBDQML Data Mask L BitenBID0 Storage CapacitynBID1 Storage CapacitynBID2 Storage CapacitynBLKCLP High-Active Black Level Clamp Switch Input SignalnBMWT Memory WritenBRAS RAW Address SelectnBTM_C Bottle Motor C Activation SignalnBTM_K Bottle Motor K Activation SignalnBTM_M Bottle Motor M Activation SignalnBTM_Y Bottle Motor Y Activation SignalnBWCT Monochrome CountNC No ConnectionnCBTMENB Belt Motor EnablenCBTMRDY Belt Motor Lock DetectionnCCDRST CCD Board System ResetnCCTCNT Card Counter Activation SignalnCLPIN Input Clamp EnablenCLPIN1 Input Clamp EnablenCPPSN3 Tray 3 Paper Path Sensor SignalnCPPSN4 Tray 4 Paper Path Sensor SignalnCST3 Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor SignalnCST4 Tray 4 Paper Feed Sensor SignalnCSTSN1a Tray 1 Detection SensornCSTSN1b Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (Paper Tray Sensor : Tray 1 )nCSTSN2a Tray 2 Detection SensornCSTSN2b Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (Paper Tray Sensor : Tray 2 )nCSTU3 Tray 3 Unit Sensor


363APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nCSTU4 Tray 4 Unit SensornDATA_C Image Data (C) +nDATA_K Image Data (K) +nDATA_M Image Data (M) +nDATA_Y Image Data (Y) +nDEV1ENB Developer Motor 1 EnablenDEV1RDY Developer Motor 1 Lock DetectionnDEV2ENB Developer Motor 2 EnablenDEV2RDY Developer Motor 2 Lock DetectionnDISPOFF Display Off SignalnERSLED_C Discharge LED C Activation SignalnERSLED_K Discharge LED K Activation SignalnERSLED_M Discharge LED M Activation SignalnERSLED_Y Discharge LED Y Activation SignalNeutral 100V-240V AC Power SupplynFAXRING Fax Received Detection SignalnFCCT Full Color CountnFDOPSN Front Door Open Detection SignalnFEEDCT Paper Feed SignalnFTRMCLK FTR Motor ClocknFTRSN1 FTR 1 SensornFTRSN2 FTR 2 SensornFUEXSN Fuser Exit Sensor SignalnFUINSN Fuser Entrance Sensor SignalnFUMCLK Fuser Motor ClocknFINISHER_SENS Finisher Detection SignalnGYAKUTENCL 2-Way Roller Clutch Control SignalnHFCL Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Feed Clutch Sensor SignalnHFLSN Sheet Bypass Length Sensor SignalnHFPESN Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Detection Sensor SignalnHFSOL Sheet Bypass Tray Pickup Solenoid Sensor SignalnHFSSN1 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor SignalnHFSSN3 Sheet Bypass Width Sensor 3 SignalnHPSN Home Position SensornHSYNC_K Horizontal Synchronizing Signal C, KnHSYNC_Y Horizontal Synchronizing Signal Y, MnHVEN_CK High Voltage Power Supply Output Control Signal (CK)nHVEN_T High Voltage Power Supply Output Enabling Signal (T)nHVEN_YM High Voltage Power Supply Output Control Signal (YM)nIHADCK IH AD Converter ClocknIHADCS IH AD Converter Chip SelectnIHCM_A IH Core Motor Phase AnIHCM_AB IH Core Motor Phase ABnIHCM_B IH Core Motor Phase BnIHCM_BB IH Core Motor Phase BBnIHCSN1 IH Core Sensor 1


364APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nIHCSN2 IH Core Sensor 2nIHDFCNT IH Driver Fan Activation SignalnIHDFRDY IH Driver Fan Lock DetectionnIHRDY IH Fan Lock DetectionnIHRELAY IH Power Fan Relay Activation SignalnINRSN Inner Exit Sensor SignalnIPCCS IPC Chip SelectnJAMSN Intermediate Roller Jam SensornKCCNT Key Counter Activation SignalnKCS Key Counter Pull Out DetectionnLBSN3 Tray 3 Paper Detection Sensor SignalnLBSN4 Tray 4 Paper Detection Sensor SignalnLDENB LSU EnablenLEDACT Active LED (Green) Activation SignalnLEDALM1 Alarm LED (Red) Activation SignalnLEDALM2-1 Alarm 1 LED (Orange) Activation SignalnLEDALM2-2 Alarm 2 LED (Orange) Activation SignalnLEDDAT Print Data LED (Green) Activation SignalnLEDSLP Energy Saver LED Activation SignalnLFTSN Transfer Roller Unit Cover SensornLPCNT Inverter Drive Control SignalnLPF_RDY Signal ReadynLPOW1 +3.3V Power Supply Output ControlnLPOW2 +5V Power Supply Output ControlnLSUTFRDY LSU Cooling Fan Lock DetectionnLUM1 Lift Up Motor 1nLUM2 Lift Up Motor 2nMCCT Monochrome Color CountnMCRUN Activation Monitoring SignalnMEXFRDY Right Cover Fan Ready SignalnMO_C Laser Monitor CnMO_K Laser Monitor KnMO_M Laser Monitor MnMO_Y Laser Monitor YnMOTENB Motor Driver Serial Driver EnablenMOTLT LatchnMOTSIOUT Serial DatanOGMLK Lock SignalnOPC_BKSN OPC Gear Phase Sensor BKnOPC_COLSN OPC Gear Phase Sensor ColornOPC1ENB OPC Motor 1 EnablenOPC1RDY OPC Motor 1 Lock DetectionnOPC2ENB OPC Motor 2 EnablenOPC2RDY OPC Motor 2 Lock DetectionnOPCNEW_C New OPC Drum Detection Signal CnOPCNEW_K New OPC Drum Detection Signal K


365APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nOPCNEW_M New OPC Drum Detection Signal MnOPCNEW_Y New OPC Drum Detection Signal YnOQDOSN Open and Close Tray 4 Light Door Detection SensornOQMCT Motor ControlnOQRRCL Registration Roller ClutchnORGSEN Original Size Sensor SignalnORSIZIN0 Original Size 0 SensornORSIZIN1 Original Size 1 SensornORSIZIN2 Original Size 2 SensornORSIZIN3 Original Size 3 SensornORSIZIN4 Original Size 4 SensornPASN Platen Angle SensornPCRCL Intermediate Roller ClutchnPCSN Sensor Platen CovernPESN1 Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor SignalnPESN2 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor SignalnPESN3 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor SignalnPESN4 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor SignalnPEWSN3 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Warning SignalnPEWSN4 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Warning SignalnPEXFRDY Paper Exit Fan Lock DetectionnPFCL1 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Control SignalnPFCL2 Tray 2 Feed Clutch Control SignalnPFCL3 Tray 3 Feed Clutch Control SignalnPFCL4 Tray 4 Feed Clutch Control SignalnPFMENB Paper Feed Motor EnablenPFMRDY Paper Feed Motor Lock DetectionnPFSOL1 Power Supply for 1st Tray Pickup SolenoidnPFSOL2 Paper Feed Solenoid 2nPMCNT Polygon Motor Activation SignalnPMRDY Polygon Motor Lock DetectionnPNLRST Reset for PNL PCBnPPSN1 Tray 1 Paper Path Sensor SignalnPPSN2 Paper Path Sensor 2nPRFRDY Pressure Roller Fan Lock DetectionnPRGDWN Control Program DownloadnPRSN1 Pressure Roller Sensor 1nPRSN2 Pressure Roller Sensor 2nSRST Scanner CPU PCB ResetnPUSOL3 Tray 3 Solenoid Control SignalnPUSOL4 Tray 4 Solenoid Control SignalnPUSSOLKYUI ADU Path Change Solenoid Control SignalnPUSSORFUK ADU Path Change Solenoid Control SignalnRD ReadnRESERVCLK Sub Motor ClocknRRCL Registration Clutch


366APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nRST5 ResetnRSTMO Motor Driver Serial Driver ResetnSACK Scanner Acknowledge SignalnSCNMA Scan Motor Control AnSCNMAB Scan Motor Control *AnSCNMB Scan Motor Control BnSCNMBB Scan Motor Control *BnSEITENCL 2-Way Roller Clutch Control SignalnSENSB Serial Interface Blue AFE Low-Active Chip EnablenSENSG Serial Interface Green AFE Low-Active Chip EnablenSENSR Serial Interface Red AFE Low-Active Chip EnablenSENTIM Image Sent SignalnSH_C Laser Sample Hold Control CnSH_K Laser Sample Hold Control KnSH_M Laser Sample Hold Control MnSH_Y Laser Sample Hold Control YnSHIN Shading Interrupt SignalnSHTSN Open and Close Shutter Detection SensornSHTSOL Shutter SolenoidnSIZE0 Paper Size Signal 0nSIZE1 Paper Size Signal 1nSIZE2 Paper Size Signal 2nSIZE3 Paper Size Signal 3nSLPKY Sleeve Return SignalnSOLCNT1 Solenoid 1 Control SignalnSOLCNT2 Solenoid 2 Control SignalnSREQ Scanner Request SignalnSTRCLK STR Motor ClocknSTRLK STR Leak SignalnSTRSN1 STR 1 SensornSTRSN2 STR 2 SensornSTSOL STR Guide Solenoid Control SignalnTBFCNT Toner Bottle Fan Activation SignalnTBFRDY Toner Bottle Lock DetectionnTCT_BK Total Counter BK Activation SignalnTCT_CL Total Counter Color Activation SignalnTFSN Waste Toner Full SensornTRUCL Transfer Roller Unit ClutchnTRUCVSN Transfer Roller Unit Cover SensornTRUENB Transfer Roller Unit Serial Interface EnablenTRUMA Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control AnTRUMAB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control *AnTRUMB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control BnTRUMBB Transfer Roller Unit Motor Control *BnTRUSN Transfer Roller Unit Detection SensornULSN1 Tray 1 Upper Limit of Paper Sensor Signal


367APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

nVCNTON LED Contrast ON SignalNVDC0 C Data 0NVDC1 C Data 1NVDC2 C Data 2NVDC3 C Data 3NVDK0 K Data 0NVDK1 K Data 1NVDK2 K Data 2NVDK3 K Data 3NVDM0 M Data 0NVDM1 M Data 1NVDM2 M Data 2NVDM3 M Data 3NVDY0 Y Data 0NVDY1 Y Data 1NVDY2 Y Data 2NVDY3 Y Data 3nVEN Vertical Enable SignalnVGB Voice Guidance PCB DetectionnVREQ Vertical Request SignalnWAKE ADF Wake Up SignalnWR WritenWTBSN Presence of Waste Toner BottlenZCROS Zero Cross InputOPC1CLK OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 ClockOPC1DIR OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 Rotation Direction SwitchOPC1GAIN OPC Drum Unit Motor 1 GainOPC2CLK OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 ClockOPC2DIR OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 Rotation Direction SwitchOPC2GAIN OPC Drum Unit Motor 2 GainOPCNEW-x Presence of Drum UnitOPCNEW-x-5V Drum Unit Detection Sensor Power SupplyOPCNEW-x-GND GroundOQMCLK Motor Clock pADFRRCNT Registration Roller Clutch Drive Control SignalpADFRST ADF ResetpADFRVCNT1 Reverse Clutch 1 Drive Control SignalpADFRVCNT2 Reverse Clutch 2 Drive Control SignalpBLKCLP1 Black Level Clamp Switch SignalpFAXRING Fax Ringing SignalpFDOPSN Open and Close Front Door DetectionpFINISH_POW Finisher Power SupplyPFMCLK Paper Feed Motor ClockPFMGAIN Paper Feed Motor Gain SwitchPGND Power GroundPGND_1 Power Ground


368APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

PGND_2 Power GroundpHOMESN Belt Home Position SensorpIHENB IH EnablepIHFCNT IH Fan Activation SignalpJDRSN Jam Release Door SensorpLDOPSN Open and Close Jam Release Lower Door Detection SensorpLPF_CNT_1 Control Lamp FanpLPF_CNT_2 Control Lamp FanpLPOW1 +3.3V Power Return SignalpLSUTFCNT LSU Cooling Fan Activation SignalPMCLK Polygon Motor ClockpMOTENB EnablePNLRXD PNL PCB RXD DataPNLTXD PNL PCB TXD DatapOHPSN OHP Sensor SignalPOWSW POWSWpPEXFCNT Paper Exit Fan Activation SignalpPF1UPERSN Tray 1 Upper Limit of Paper Sensor SignalpPRFCNT Pressure Roller Fan Activation SignalpRESSN Registration Sensor SignalpRRSN Registration Sensor SignalpRSTMO ResetpSENTIM Scanner LSYNCpSLSYNC1 CCD Activation Control SignalpSLSYNC2 CCD Activation Control SignalpUDOPSN Open and Close Jam Release Upper Door Detection SensorpULSN2 Tray 2 Upper Limit of Paper SensorpVREQ Start to Print RequestRAS RAW Address SelectREDSCLK- Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock-

(REDSCLK-)REDSCLK+ Green AFE Serial Interface Shift Register Clock+

(REDSCLK+)RXD- RXD-RXD+ RXD+S0 SelectS1 Serial ROM AddressSA0 Serial ROM AddressSA1 Serial ROM AddressSA2 Serial ROM AddressSCCMD Control Command SignalSCK Serial ClockSCL Serial ClockSCLKHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (CK)SCLKHV_T DAC0 Serial Data Clock SignalSCLKHV_YM AC0 Serial Data Latch Signal (YM)


369APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

SCN0 Key Scan 0 SignalSCN1 Key Scan 1 SignalSCN2 Key Scan 2 SignalSCN3 Key Scan 3 SignalSCN4 Key Scan 4 SignalSCN5 Key Scan 5 SignalSCNRXD Input Serial DataSCNTXD Output Serial DataSCPCLK Scanner Program Serial Interface Clock SCPDATA Scanner Program Serial Interface DataSCRDY Control Ready SignalSDA Serial DataSDHV_CD DAC0 Serial Data (YM)SDHV_CK DAC0 Serial Data (CK)SDHV_T DAC0 Serial DataSDIB Blue AFE Serial Interface Input SignalSDIG Green AFE Serial Interface Input SignalSDIR Red AFE Serial Interface Input SignalSHIN Shading Interrupt StartSLSYNC1 CCD Drive Control SignalSLSYNC2 CCD Drive Control SignalSOUT Output Serial DataSPEED0 Model Identifying Signal 1SPEED1 Model Identifying Signal 2STRCLK STR Motor ClockSTRMON STR Current MonitorTDCDT_C Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal CTDCDT_K Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal KTDCDT_M Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal MTDCDT_Y Toner Density Sensor Connection Signal YTDCREF_C Toner Density Sensor Reference CTDCREF_K Toner Density Sensor Reference KTDCREF_M Toner Density Sensor Reference MTDCREF_Y Toner Density Sensor Reference YTDCS_C Toner Density Sensor CTDCS_K Toner Density Sensor KTDCS_M Toner Density Sensor MTDCS_Y Toner Density Sensor YTEMPSN Temperature SensorTH1A Thermistor 1 ATH1B Thermistor 1 BTH2A Thermistor 2 ATH2B Thermistor 2 BTH3A Thermistor 3 ATH3B Thermistor 3 BTH4A Thermistor 4 A


370APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

TH4B Thermistor 4 BTRULD Serial Interface Load SignalTRULT Serial Interface Latch SignalTRUMCLK Motor Clock TRUSICLK SI Clock TRUSIDI Input Serial DataTRUSIDO Output Serial DataTxclk- Clock Signal -Txclk+ Clock Signal +TXCLK0OUT- Digital Video Data Shift Clock -TXCLK0OUT+ Digital Video Data Shift Clock + TXCLK1OUT- Digital Video Data Shift Clock -TXCLK1OUT+ Digital Video Data Shift Clock +Txclock- Clock Signal -Txclock+ Clock Signal +TXD- TXD-TXD+ TXD+TXOUT0- Digital Video Data (TXOUT0-)TXOUT0+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT0+)TXOUT1- Digital Video Data (TXOUT1-)TXOUT1+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT1+)TXOUT2- Digital Video Data (TXOUT2-)TXOUT2+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT2+)TXOUT3- Digital Video Data (TXOUT3-)TXOUT3+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT3+)TXOUT4- Digital Video Data (TXOUT4-)TXOUT4+ Digital Video Data (TXOUT4+)VBUS +5 VDC Power SupplyVCON Contrast Compensation VoltageVDD +2.5 VDC Power SupplyVdd +3 VDC Power SupplyVDDID +2.5 VDC Power SupplyVDDSPD +2.5 VDC Power SupplyVINEVEN_Blue CCD Output Blue Even SignalVINEVEN_Green CCD Output Green Even SignalVINEVEN_Red CCD Output Red Even SignalVINODD_Blue CCD Output Blue Odd SignalVINODD_Green CCD Output Green Odd SignalVINODD_Red CCD Output Red Odd SignalVINV Inverter Power SupplyVO2R Diffuse Reflection Right InputVOUT2C Image Level Diffusion InputVREF Reference VoltageVss GroundVSYNCC C Vertical Synchronized SignalVSYNCK K Vertical Synchronized Signal


371APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

VSYNCM M Vertical Synchronized SignalVSYNCY Y Vertical Synchronized SignalWE Write EnableWrite_Protect Write ProtectionX1 LCD Touch Position Signal RightX2 LCD Touch Position Signal LeftY1 LCD Touch Position Signal TopY2 LCD Touch Position Signal BottomYLA Yellow LED Anode SignalYLK (GND) Yellow LED Cathode SignalYOBICLK Sub Motor Clock


372APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7 Installation7.1. Set Up Precautions

Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.

Machine performance and copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions. To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:

1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:

• Extremely high or low temperature and humidity.Ambient conditions Temperature : 50 - 86 °F (10 - 30 °C)

Relative humidity : 30 - 80 %• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity• Exposed to direct sunlight• Dusty environment• Poorly ventilated location• Exposed to chemical gases (Ex: Ammonia gas)• Exposed to strong vibration• Exposed to direct air current (Ex: Air conditioner vent)

2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:DP-C262/C322/AS322: Approx. 360.8 lb (164 kg)

3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC / 15 Amps or 220-240 VAC / 10 Amps accordingly. If you have doubts regarding a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)

4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipes)

5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air.

6. This machine has ventilation openings on both sides and on the rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.

Using the space requirements shown on the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it requires, and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.

373APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322 Space Requirements

Main Unit + Exit Tray (Outer)

Main Unit

Main Unit + 1 Bin Finisher

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

45.14 in (1147mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

11.45 in (291 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

Main Unit + 1 Bin Saddle Finisher

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

59.44 in (1510 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

10.83 in (275 mm)

3.46 in (88 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

69.86 in (1776 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

14.84 in (377 mm)

9.88 in (251 mm)

55.4

8 in

(141

0 m

m)

86.48 in (2197 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

11.81 in (300 mm)

29.53 in (750 mm)

3.94

in (1

00 m

m)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

11.45 in (291 mm)

15.11 in (384 mm)

32.50 in (826 mm)

25.83 in (656 mm)

374APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7.2. Unpacking

Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness or any shipping damage before starting with the installation. Remove all Tesa Tapes and the packing materials used to secure the Units during shipment.

Caution:Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately 360.8 lb (164 kg) without any options. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

Note:1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.3. Supplies (Toner Cartridges) are not included, and are sold separately.

No. Qty. Description RemarksPrinter Unit Packing

1 1 Printer Unit2 1 Model Label3 1 Paper Size Label4 1 AC Power Cord5 1 Operating Instructions Basic Operations6 1 Operating Instructions Setting Up

7 1 Operating Instructions CDMaking Copies, Scanner/E-mail, Fax/Internet Fax, and Function Settings manuals in PDF file format.

8 1 Panasonic-DMS and Print Driver CD Includes Operating Instructions9 1 Installation Instructions This document

Scanner Unit Packing1 1 Scanner Unit2 1 Scanner Base Bracket3 1 Scanner Base Bracket Cover4 1 Scanner Mounting Bracket5 1 SCN Harness

6 7 Screw

7 3 Washer-head Screw

8 1 Unpacking Caution Sheet

375APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

1

8

4

75

2

6

3

<Scanner Unit Packing><Printer Unit Packing>

1

27, 8

5, 6

9 3

4

376APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7.3. Installation Procedure

Note:1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options.2. The following machine illustrations, depict a DP-C322 with a standard configuration.

Caution:1. The scanner is locked in place with a Shipping Screw (Blue) to prevent damage during transit.

Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner (see step 34).2. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Shipping Brackets for the Intermediate Transfer Unit

and the Fuser Unit, to avoid shipping damage.Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before removing the Shipping Brackets.

7.3.1. Installation Procedure

(1) Pull the Handles all the way out to lock them in place.

Note:To release the Handle, push the Release Latch and push the Handle into the machine.

377APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(2) Lift and place the Printer Unit on a suitable Stand / Paper Tray, aligning with the Front and Side Covers.

For DP-C262/C322Paper Tray : (DA-DS320 / DS321)Stand : (DA-DA322)

Caution:The Printer Unit weights approximately 275 lb (125 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the Printer Unit.

Caution:The Scanner Unit weights approximately 85.8 lb (39 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the Scanner Unit.Do not lift the Scanner Unit by the Control Panel, Cord/Harness as it may cause damage and/or bodily injury.

(3) Lift and place the Scanner Unit on the machine, aligning it with the Rear and Side Covers.

378APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(4) Install the Scanner Base Bracket.(5) Secure the Scanner Base Bracket with 5

Screws.

(6) Install the Scanner Base Bracket Cover.(7) Secure the Scanner Base Bracket Cover with 3

Washer-head Screws.

(8) Remove 2 Screws.(9) Remove the Rear Scanner Cover.

(10) Loosen 11 Screws.(11) Remove the Rear Cover.

379APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(12) Connect the SCN Harness to connectors CN702, and CN709 on the SCN PC Board.

(13) Route the Harnesses through the access slot on the machine as illustrated.

(14) Connect the SCN Harness to the pre-installed Harness.

(15) Connect the SCN Harness to CN51 on the SC PC Board.

(16) Connect the USB Cable to CN65 on the SC PC Board.

Caution:Connect the USB Cable to the upper USB port connector on the SC PCB.

(17) Secure the SCN Harness, and USB Cable with 1 Harness Clamp.

(18) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.(19) Connect the Harness to connectors CN56, and

CN57 on the SC PC Board.

380APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(20) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.Caution:

The Tie Wrap should be located on the left side of the Harness Clamp as illustrated.

(21) Connect the Harness to connectors CN58, and CN59 on the SC PC Board.

(22) Install the Scanner Mounting Bracket.(23) Secure the Scanner Mounting Bracket with 2

Screws.(24) Reinstall the Rear Scanner Cover (that was

removed in step 11).

(25) Open the Right Side Cover.

(26) Fasten the Scanner Unit with 1 Thumb Screw.

381APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

<Removing the Protective Shipping Materials>Caution:

If the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and Shipping Brackets) are not removed as instructed, the machine may get damaged when the Power Switches are turned ON.

(27) Remove 2 Tesa Tapes.(28) Remove 4 Blue Screws.(29) Remove 2 Shipping Brackets.

(30) Open the Sheet Bypass.

(31) Open the Feed Cover.

(32) Remove 2 Blue Screws.(33) Pull the Red Wire Strap with the Caution Tag to

remove 2 Shipping Brackets.

Caution:If the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and Shipping Brackets) are not removed as instructed, the machine may get damaged when the Power Switches are turned ON.

382APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(34) Remove the Tesa Tape.(35) Remove 1 Blue Screw to unlock the Scanner.

Caution:If the Shipping Material (Blue Screw) is not removed as instructed, the machine may get damaged when the Power Switches are turned ON.

Note:Store the Shipping Materials (Blue Screws, and Shipping Brackets) in a safe place for future use.

(36) Remove the Protective Strip from the Battery.

<Installing the Toner Cartridge>


(38) Shake the Toner Cartridge 10 to 15 Times to loosen the contents.

Note:Shake it up and down, then turn the bottom up and repeat.

383APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(39) Gently peel the Tesa Tape off in the direction of the arrow as illustrated, however, do not open the Shutter or Toner will spill.

(40) Insert the Toner Cartridge with the arrow label on the top, and pointing to the Unlock Mark.

(41) Turn the Toner Cartridge clockwise gently until it stops (pointing to the Locked Mark).

(42) Firmly close the Front Cover.

384APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(43) Attach the Model Label to the machine as illustrated.

(44) Reinstall and close all Covers.(45) Load paper into the Paper Tray.Note:

1. Ensure that all Tesa Tapes, Packing, and Shipping Materials are removed.

2. For setting the Paper Size on Tray 3 and 4, refer to the Installation Instructions of the System Console 1 (DA-DS320) and System Console 2 (DA-DS321).

(46) Remove the Caution Label covering the AC Inlet on the machine.

(47) Plug the AC Power Cord.(48) If required, connect the LAN / USB Cable

(not included).(49) Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the

Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

385APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7.4. Adjustment7.4.1. Manual Copy Quality Adjustment

1. Press the “Function” key.2. Select “General Settings”.3. Select “01 Manual Copy Quality Adj”.4. Select “On”. 5. Select “OK” to begin the Manual Copy Quality adjustment. Note:

Do not touch any keys, or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops (approximately 1-2 minutes).

6. Press the “Reset” key, to exit the General Settings mode.

7.4.2. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)1. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.3. Select “Quality Adj.”, and then set the Density to the center position.

Select “Black”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial”, and then “OK” to set the machine to Mono Text/ Photo Density.

4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown below.

5. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.6. Press the “6”, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Service Mode.7. Enter F6-221 Mono T/P Density (lt) Mode.8. Select "Input".9. Enter the new content.

10. Enter a 2-digit value.Note:The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.

(+) : Lighter(-) : Darker

11. Select "OK", and then “Close”.12. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter F2 Service Mode.13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.Note:

Repeat Step (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.<Light Part Adjustment>F6-220 : Mono Text Density (lt)F6-222 : Mono Photo Density (lt)


A

1

2

3

Not visible

Hardly visible

Text/Photo

. .. .. .

Not visible Not visible

Clearly visibleNot visible

Photo

Clearly visible Clearly visibleClearly visible

A

1

2

3

. .. .. .

A

1

2

3

. .. .. .

Text

386APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7.4.3. Color Exposure (Special Adjustment for Customer's Requirement)1. Press the "Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "2", and then "Start" keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.3. Select “Quality Adj”, and then set the Density to the center position.

Select “Full Color”, “Text/Photo”, “Commercial”, and then “OK” to set the machine to Color T/ P Den-sity.

4. Make a copy of Color Test Chart 101 (P/N PJQRC0119Z : LDR, PJQRC0120Z : A3), or the Customer’s Document and verify the density.

5. Press the "Reset" key twice to exit to the initial screen of the F2 Service Mode.6. Press the “6”, and then "Start" keys to enter the F6 Service Mode.7. Enter F6-211 Color T/P Density (lt) Mode.8. Select "Input".9. Enter the new content.

10. Enter a 2-digit value.Note:

The "Reset" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.(+) : Lighter(-) : Darker

11. Select "OK", and then “Close”.12. Press “2”, and then “Start” keys to enter the F2 Service Mode.13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.Note:

Repeat Step (3) to (10) until desired density is attained.<Light Part Adjustment>

F6-210 : Color Text Density (lt)F6-212 : Color Photo Density (lt)

<Dark Part Adjustment>F6-215 : Color Text Density (dk)F6-216 : Color T/P Density (dk)F6-217 : Color Photo Density (dk)


7.4.4. Set the Date and the Time1. Press the “Function” key.2. Select “General Settings”.3. Select “09 Key Operator Mode”.4. Enter the 4 Digit Code (default is 0000), and then select “OK”. 5. Select "22 Date Time Setting".6. Select "Input", and then enter the Date and the Time.7. Select "OK".8. Select "Close".9. Press the “Reset” key, to exit the General Settings mode.

387APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8 Options and Supplies8.1. Installing the Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320)8.1.1. Contents

Note:1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.1.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main

Memory (DA-EMN56) are installed first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main Memory (DA-EMN56).

2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.CAUTION!

Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. To protect yourself, disconnect the Telephone Line Cable before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key NWS KEY1 Scan Memory Board 128 MB1 Installation Instructions This document


Caution:If the Red LED on the SC PC Board is lit (ON), the Power to the machine is still ON.Please read the entire section "8.1.2. Installation" above once again.

388APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:The Network Scanner/Email Module for DDS (DA-NS321) cannot be installed together with this option. If the Network Scanner/Email Module for DDS (DA-NS321) is already installed, remove it first.

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN71, CN72, or CN73) on the SC PC Board.

Note:The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.

(4) Install the Scan Memory Board into connector (CN76) on the SC PC Board.

Note:Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the Scan Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.

(5) Proceed with the installation of other options.If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.

(6) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(7) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.

(8) Install the Panasonic-DMS Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

389APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.2. Installing the Network Scanner Module/Email Module for Document Distribution System (DA-NS321)

8.2.1. Contents


8.2.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main

Memory (DA-EMN56) are installed first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) and the Main Memory (DA-EMN56).



Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key DDS KEY1 Scan Memory Board 128 MB1 Installation Instructions This document



390APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:The Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320) cannot be installed together with this option. If the Network Scanner/Email Module (DA-NS320) is already installed, remove it first.



(4) Install the Scan Memory Board into connector (CN76) on the SC PC Board.

Note:Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the Scan Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.




(8) Install the Document Distribution System software (DA-WR10) into the PC by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

391APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.3. Installing the Internet Fax Module (DA-NF320) 8.3.1. Contents


8.3.2. InstallationCAUTION!


Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key IFX KEY1 Installation Instructions This document



392APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322






(7) Perform Parameter Initialization by following the steps below.a) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys

simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.

b) Press "9", and then “Start” keys.c) Select "00 FAX Service Mode".d. Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM

Initialize“.e) Select “V” arrow, and then "01 Parameter

Initialize".f) Select “Yes”. Wait approximately 1-2

seconds, the unit beeps when initialization is completed.

g) Press "Stop".h) Press the "Function" and "Clear” keys

simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.i) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the

machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings.

(8) Install the Internet Fax Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(9) Proceed the communication test to ensure the Internet Fax Option works properly.

393APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

<Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total is available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD32) is installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration from 200 to 1,000 Stations and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD automatically.Note:

1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or RDS as backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the 200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).

3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch) procedure was not followed.

<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).

Note:The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book.When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the C262/C322.1) The "C262/C322" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.2) The "C262/C322 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.

a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the C262/C322.

b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management

System\Network MFP Utilities.2) Click on Network Device Locator.3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device.4) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.5) The Network Address Book Editor "C262/C322" window appears, under the Address Book

Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on

File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).7) Then click the OK button.

c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above.

d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "C262/C322 (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).

e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.)

f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

394APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.4. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG320)8.4.1. Contents


8.4.2. InstallationInstall the Hardware by following the steps below.

CAUTION!Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.

Qty. Description Remarks1 Fax Box1 Speaker Assembly1 USB Cable1 FXB Harness1 Speaker Harness

5 Screw (Short)

1 Screw (Long)

2 Clamp A

6 Clamp B

1 Telephone Line Cable1 TEL /LINE Label1 Type Approval Label For Specified Destination only 1 Telepermit Label For New Zealand only 1 Stamp Solenoid1 Stamp Assembly1 Installation Instructions This document

(1) Connect the FXB Harness to the Fax Box.(2) Connect the USB Cable to the Fax Box.

395APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(3) Connect one end of the Speaker Harness (Black) to the Fax Box.

(4) Secure the Speaker Harness with the Harness Clamp.

(5) Remove 11 Screws.(6) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly.


(7) Install the Fax Box as illustrated.(8) Secure the Fax Box with 3 Screws (Short).

396APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(9) Connect other end of the Speaker Harness (White) to the Speaker Assembly.

(10) Install the Speaker Assembly.(11) Secure the Speaker Assembly with 2 Screws

(Short).

(12) Install 5 Clamps B.(13) Secure the Speaker Harness with 5 Harness

Clamps and 1 Edge Saddle.

(14) Install 1 Clamp B.(15) Secure the Speaker Harness with 1 Harness

Clamp.

397APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(16) Connect the FXB Harness to connector CN64 on the SC PC Board.

(17) Secure the FXB Harness with 2 Harness Clamps.

(18) Install 2 Clamps A.(19) Connect the USB Cable to connector CN67 on

the SC PC Board.(20) Secure the USB Cable with 2 Harness Clamps,

and Edge Saddle.

(21) Open the ADF Cover.(22) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2

Assembly.

(23) Lift the ADF Tray Assembly.

398APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(24) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.

(25) Remove 2 Screws.(26) Remove the Inverting Guide 3 Assembly.

(27) Remove 2 Screws.(28) Remove the Lower Exit Guide.

(29) Connect the Stamp Harness to the Stamp Solenoid.

(30) Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw (Long).

399APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(31) Reinstall the Lower Exit Guide removed in Step (28).

(32) Install the Stamp Assembly.(33) Reinstall all the parts removed in the previous

steps and close the ADF Covers.


(35) Remove 1 Screw.(36) Remove the Cover.

(37) Remove the Protective Tab using a Nipper or a Cutter.

(38) ReInstall the Cover.(39) Secure the Cover with 1 Screw.

400APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(40) Attach the TEL/LINE Label to the Rear Cover as illustrated.


(42) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable to the LINE Jack on the Rear side of the machine, and the other end to the Telephone Jack on the wall.

(43) Attach the Type Approval Label (for specified destinations only) on the top of the other labels to the Rear Cover as illustrated.

Note: (For New Zealand only)Attach the Telepermit Label around the LINE Jack on the Rear Cover.

401APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(45) Perform Parameter Initialization by following the steps below.1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2) Press "9", and then “Start” keys.3) Select "00 FAX Service Mode".4) Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.5) Select "01 Parameter Initialize".6) Select “Yes”. Wait approximately 1-2 seconds, the unit beeps when initialization is completed. 7) Press the "Reset" key to exit to the initial screen of F9 Service Mode.8) Press the "Function" and "Clear” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.9) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to

enable the parameter settings.(46) Proceed the communication test to ensure the Fax Option works properly.

Note:If the machine does not start dialing properly, change the Fax Parameter “68 Dial Tone Check” tothe “Off” position by following the steps below.

(44) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.

PB : UKPF : France PK : ChinaPM: GermanyPP : PolandPS : SwedenPT : TaiwanPU : USA

Note:For other destinations, set the Function Parameter #005 (Destination Code).

000 : Austria001 : U.K.002 : Canada003 : Denmark004 : Taiwan005 : Finland006 : Germany007 : Netherlands008 : Italy009 : Spanish010 : Hong Kong011 : Australia012 : Switzerland013 : Norway015 : Portuguese016 : Ireland017 : Belgium018 : Sweden019 : Turkey020 : U.S.A.021 : France022 : New Zealand025 : Japan029 : Poland030 : Czech031 : Russia032 : Greece033 : Hungary034 : Indonesia035 : South Korea038 : Malaysia039 : China045 : Thailand048 : South Africa049 : Singapore050 : Universal051 : East Euro

402APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3221) Press the "Function" key.2) Select “Fax/Email Settings”.3) Select "04 Key Operator Mode".4) Enter the 4 Digit Code (default is 0000), and then select “OK”.5) Select "01 Fax Parameters".6) Select “V” arrow, and then "68 Dial Tone Check".7) Select “Off”, and then “OK”. 8) Press "Reset" key.9) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to

enable the parameter settings.


1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software, or the RDS as a backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the 200 addresses that were registered on the F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).


<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy andpaste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).






File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).7) Then click OK.

403APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode

described above.d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as

above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "C262/C322 (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).

e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step (b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step (d). Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.)


404APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.5. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32)8.5.1. Contents


8.5.2. InstallationInstall the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below.

CAUTION!Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (When the Fax option is installed, there is a remote possibility of electrocution when servicing the unit during a Lightning Storm. To protect yourself, disconnect the Telephone Line Cable before unplugging the AC Power Cord.)

No. Qty. Description Remarks1 1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)2 1 DC12 PC Board Assembly3 1 HDD Bracket4 1 HD Harness5 1 HD2 Harness6 1 DC12 Harness7 1 Harness Clamp (Metal)

8 4 Black Screw

9 4 Screw

- 1 Installation Instructions This document

(1) Install the HDD Bracket over the HDD. (2) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Black Screws.

1

2

35

6

9

4

87

405APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(3) Connect the HDD Harness to the HDD connector.

Note:Make sure that the HD Harness is connected to the HDD connector correctly as illustrated.

1) The Key on the connector must be facing Downwards.

2) Either connector of the HD Harness will fit into the HDD connector. However, the correct one is shown in the illustration (Harness comes out from the top of the connector).

(4) Connect the HD2 Harness to connector CN143 on the DC12 PC Board.

(5) Secure the HD2 Harness with 2 Harness Clamps.

Caution:The Tie Wrap should be located on the right side of the Harness Clamp as illustrated.

(6) Connect the DC12 Harness to connectors CN141 and CN142 on the DC12 PC Board.

(7) Secure the DC12 Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.

Caution:The Tie Wrap should be located on the right side of the Harness Clamp as illustrated.


HDD

Correct Incorrect

Key Key

HDD

406APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322


(10) Install the DC 12 PC Board Assembly.(11) Secure the DC 12 PC Board Assembly with 1

Screw.

(12) Install the HDD Assembly.Note:

Make sure that the 2 Hooks are latched properly.

(13) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws.

(14) Connect the HDD Harness to connector CN74 on the SC PC Board.

(15) Secure the HDD Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.

(16) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness Clamp (Metal) and 1 Screw.

407APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

CAUTION!

<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch>After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.

1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard

Disk Drive Unit.3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.

(This interrupts all the power to the machine)4. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect

the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax option is installed.)


1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software, or the RDS as a backup.

2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the 200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved).


(17) Connect the DC12 Harness to connector CN55 on the SC PC Board.

(18) Connect the HD2 Harness to the HDD connector.

(19) Secure the HD2 Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.(20) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.(21) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main

Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Note:It takes approximately 10-15 minutes for formatting the Hard Disk Drive.


408APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (using copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).






File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).7) Then click OK.

c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above.

d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "C262/C322 (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).

e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b) and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.)


409APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.6. Installing the Main Memory 256MB (DA-EMN56)8.6.1. Contents




Qty. Description Remarks1 Main Memory Board 256 MB (PJWPF217MPU)1 Installation Instructions This document



410APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(3) Install the Main Memory Board into the Socket (CN78) on the SC PC Board.

Note:Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the Main Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.

Note:The Main Memory Board must always be installed into Socket (CN78) for the PS Printer Option to function.




411APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.7. Installing the Page Memory 256MB (DA-PMN56)8.7.1. Contents




Qty. Description Remarks2 Image Memory Board 128 MB (DZEC103878)1 Installation Instructions This document



412APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(3) Install 2 Image Memory Boards into two connectors (CN75, and CN77) on the SC PC Board.

Note:Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the Image Memory Board at a 20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down.




413APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.8. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)8.8.1. Contents


8.8.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32) is installed into

the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD32).2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the

prompts of the Installation Wizard.3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.

1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.

2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters).3) Press the "Start" key.4) Select “V” arrow several times, and then “42 KEY/DEPT Counter“.5) Select "Dept.", and then "OK" to activate the Dept. Counter function.6) Press the "STOP" key.7) Press the "Function" and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

Note:The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is recommended to change this code.Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code:• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode.• Press the "Start" key, and then select "01 Key Operator Mode".• Select "Start", and then input a 4-digit code.• Select "OK", and then press "Stop" key to exit to the initial screen of F7 Service Mode.• Press the "Function" and "Clear" keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.1) Press the "Function" key, and then select "GENERAL SETTINGS".2) Select "V" arrow several times, and then "09 Key Operator Mode".3) Input the 4 Digit Code, and then select “OK” to enter the Key Operator Mode.4) Select "V" arrow several times, and then "21 Dept. Counter Mode".5) Select "Identification Code", and then one of the Dept Counter Codes ("001:" up to

"1000:").6) Select "Input"; enter a new Departmental Counter Code (up to 8-digit), and then select

"OK".7) Enter a desired name in the "Departmental Counter Data/Enter Text" field, and then

select "OK".8) Select "OK", and then "Close".9) Press the "STOP" key to return to the standby mode.

Qty. Description Remarks1 Accounting Software CD Includes Operating Instructions1 Installation Instructions This document

414APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.9. Installing the Printer Controller Module (DA-MC320) 8.9.1. Contents


8.9.2. Installation1. Before installing this option, make sure the Main Memory Board (DA-EMN56) is installed into

the Socket (CN78) on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Main Memory Board (DA-EMN56).

2. Before installing this option, make sure the SD Memory Card is installed into the Slot on the SC PC Board. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the SD Memory Card.



Qty. Description Remarks1 Hardware Key PS KEY1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions1 Adobe PostScript 3 Label1 Installation Instructions This document

(1) Loosen 11 Screws.(2) Remove the Rear Cover 1.


415APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN71, CN72 or CN73) on the SC PC Board.





(7) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes".

(8) Install the PS Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(9) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label onto the Front Panel as illustrated.

416APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.9.3. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PS Option Installation To use PS (DA-MC320) option, the standard firmware must be updated, changing to Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the option.

Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctlyidentify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions forthe appropriate option.

The firmware for SC, EC, SCN and FCB must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update thefirmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.

Firmware Version Table

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions




1. Updating through a LAN PortThe firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossovercable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.

1. Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code,or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool.

Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio".Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2. Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on theCD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download thelatest Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the

Standard Firmware(SC = Type A)

PostScript Firmware(SC = Type D)

SC CMFP1_SCAAVxxxxx_xx \CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x

417APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File:DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3. Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeBefore starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit'sKey Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

4. Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder in theC:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and proper FirmwareFiles are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. Then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.

5. ConfirmationAfter the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.Confirm the F5 & F6 parameters according to the printed lists in Step 1 above if the settings aredifferent.

Note:a. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the

type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions.

b. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update.

c. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, refer to Section 3.7.7. “Firmware Emergency Recovery”.

d. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.


\ Sc_Ps \ CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x\ Fcb \ CMFP1FCBAAVxxxxx_xx\ Ec \ CMFP1_ECAAVxxxxx\ Scn \ CMFP1SCNAAVxxxxx_xx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

418APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Updating through the USB PortIf the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port.

1. Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PCThe option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code, oraccess onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.Operating Instructions:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)Setup:\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

2. Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on theCD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download thelatest Tool and Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into thedesignated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File:DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3. Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware UpgradeBefore starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet.Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port.

Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC.

4. Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware CodeStart the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Parent Firmware File Folder intheC:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder. The Firmware Type window appears and properFirmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. Then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.


\ Sc_Ps \ CMFP1_SCDAVxxxxx_x\ Fcb \ CMFP1FCBAAVxxxxx_xx\ Ec \ CMFP1_ECAAVxxxxx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type.The transferring order is set up automatically.

419APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3225. Confirmation

After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.Confirm the F5 & F6 parameters according to the printed lists in Step 1 above if the settings aredifferent.Note:



3. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory CardIf the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package.(1 SD Memory Card required if the SD Memory Card capacity is Large enough size for all necessaryFirmware.)Caution:

1. Remove the PCMCIA/PC Card Adapter from the PCMCIA/PC Card Slot in Front of the machine.2. Install the Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.

Do not install it into the Card Slot on the SC PCB, or the machine will automatically format the SD Card for the Fax Image Memory.

3. Do not remove the SD Memory Card from the SD Card Slot in Front of the machine or turn the power OFF during Formatting or while Updating the Firmware.

<Procedure>1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00).2. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the Card Slot in Front of the machine.4. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the ON position.5. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously. 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Card).7. The firmware is copied into the machine.

If selecting the "Auto Mode", copies all the necessary firmware at once, and after the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.

8. Turn the Power Switch on the back side of the machine to the OFF position.9. Remove the Master Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine.

10. Turn the Power Switch on the back of the machine to the ON position.11. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are

other than factory default.

Caution:If the unit does not boot up properly in Step 5, refer to Section 3.7.7 “Firmware Emergency Recovery”.

3.1. Creating a Master Firmware SD Memory Card using a PC1) Install the “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” to your PC.

The “SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool” can be downloaded from your sales company’s Web Site or the PCC DIC Service Web site. Please refer to the Readme file for additional details.

2) Preparing the Firmware CodeDouble click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC, or access onto the Service Web site to download the latest Tool and Firmware Code. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.

420APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Example:From:Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.batFirmware Code File: DP-C322_C262_xx_xxxxxx.exe To:Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data

3) Preparing the Master Firmware SD Memory Card1. Insert the SD Memory Card (128 MB to 1 GB) into the SD Memory Card Slot.2. Perform the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool.3. After all firmware codes are copied, remove the SD Memory Card from the Slot.

The SD Memory Card is now ready to use for firmware update.(Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD and the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool OI.)

421APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.10. Installing the SD Memory Card (64 MB up to 1 GB)8.10.1. Contents

Note:The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.

8.10.2. Installation1. Ensure that the Write Protect Switch of the SD Memory Card is in the “Unlock” position.2. Ensure that there is no Fax Jobs in memory. If there is a Fax Job in memory, clear all Jobs first

by following the steps below.1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service

Mode.2) Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).3) Select "00 Fax Service Mode".4) Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.5) Select "09 All Job Clear", and then "Yes".After clearing the jobs, the machine reboots automatically and returns to the standby mode.

3. Install the SD Memory Card by following the steps below.CAUTION!


Qty. Description Remarks

1

SD Memory Card (RP-SD064****) 64 MBSD Memory Card (RP-SD128****) 128 MBSD Memory Card (RP-SD256****) 256 MBSD Memory Card (RP-SD512****) 512 MBSD Memory Card (RP-SD01G****) 1 GB


422APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Caution:Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the power OFF during Formatting.

Note:1. When a New (Blank) SD Memory Card is detected for the first time, a prompt for Formatting will appear

on the LCD. The machine will format the SD Card for DATA (used for G3 Fax / Internet Fax Image, PSFonts), and it takes approximately 3 to 12 min. to format depending on the manufacturer, SD MemoryCard Size or Data Access Speed of the SD Card.

2. If the SD Memory Card is formatted by the machine, clear all Jobs by following the steps below.1) Press the "Function", "Copy" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2) Press "9", and then "Start" keys to enter the F9 Service Mode (Unit Maintenance).3) Select "00 Fax Service Mode".4) Select “V” arrow, and then “06 RAM Initialize“.5) Select "09 All Job Clear", and then "Yes".



(3) Gently insert the SD Memory Card into the SD Card Slot (CN70) on the SC PCB as illustrated (Logo facing outward).

Caution:Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage to the card or machine.




423APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.11. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS320) and System Console 2 (DA-DS321)

8.11.1. Contents

<DA-DS320> System Console 1

<DA-DS321> System Console 2




Qty. Description Remarks1 Paper Tray Unit1 Paper Size Label2 Bracket

2 Screw

1 Installation Instructions This document

Qty. Description Remarks1 Paper Tray Unit1 Paper Size Label2 Bracket

2 Screw


(1) Carefully unpack the System Console 1 or 2, and remove all shipping Tesa Tapes.

(2) Remove 2 Screws.(3) Remove the Rear Cover.

424APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

<On the Printer Unit>(4) Pull the Handles all the way out to lock them in

place.

Note:To release the Handle, push on the Release Latch, and push the Handle into the machine.

(5) Lift and place the Printer Unit on the Paper Tray, aligning with it the Front and Side Covers.

Caution:The Printer Unit weights approximately 275 lb (125 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel, and the proper equipment to lift, or move the Printer Unit.

425APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(6) Loosen 3 Screws.(7) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(8) Connect the pre-installed Harness in the machine to the pre-installed Harness in the Paper Tray.

(9) Install 2 Brackets as illustrated.(10) Secure each Bracket with 1 Screw.

426APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(11) Open the Paper Tray 3.(12) Fasten the Paper Tray with 1 Thumb Screw.

<Paper Size setting (Paper Tray 3 and 4) to your customer's requirement>

Default Paper Size setting For USA and Canada

Paper Tray 3 : 11 x 17”Paper Tray 4 : 11 x 17”

For Europe and Other DestinationsPaper Tray 3 : A3Paper Tray 4 : A3

(13) Remove 5 Screws.

427APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.11.3. Paper Size Setting (System Console)1. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "5", and then "Start" keys to enter the F5 Service Mode.3. Select "16 Paper Size Tray 3".4. Select the desired Paper Size, and then “OK”.5. Select a Media Type, and then select “OK”.Note:

For System Console 1 (DA-DS320), skip to step (9).For System Console 2 (DA-DS321), follow the steps below.

6. Select "17 Paper Size Tray 4".7. Select a desired Paper Size, and then “OK”.8. Select a Media Type, and then “OK”.9. Press the "Reset" key to exit to the initial screen of the F5 Service Mode.

10. Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.11. Confirm that System Console (Tray 3 and/or Tray 4) is displayed on the Touch Panel Display.

(14) Adjust the Paper Guides.Note:

1. Adjust the Front Paper Guide to lineup with the Paper Size Marker as illustrated (Ex: Legal, Letter or FLS2, etc.).

2. Adjust the Rear Paper Guide proportionally.Caution:

Confirm that Paper Guides are adjusted to the correct position.

(15) Secure the Paper Guides with 5 Screws.(16) Load paper into the Paper Tray.(17) Close the Paper Tray 3.Note:

For System Console 2 (DA-DS321), repeat the same steps for the Paper Tray 4.

(18) Attach the appropriate Paper Size Label(s) onto the 3rd/4th Paper Tray(s) as illustrated.




(22) To level the machine and to add more stability, adjust the 2 Levelers behind the front casters as illustrated.

428APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.12. Installing the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320)8.12.1. Contents




Qty. Description Remarks1 Paper Transport Unit1 Front Cover1 Bracket1 Bracket Cover

1 Screw (Short A)

1 Screw (Long)

3 Screw (Short B)

2 Screw (Medium)


Note:1. For Finisher Option (DA-FS320 or DA-FS325),

skip to step (3).2. For Exit Tray (Outer) (DA-XT320), follow the

steps below.

(1) Remove 1 Screw.(2) Remove the Gear Cover Bracket.

(3) Install the Bracket Cover over the Bracket.(4) Do not use force to secure the Bracket Cover

with 1 Screw (Short A).Note:

Do not tighten the Screw (Short A) too tight, as it may crack the plastic.

429APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(5) Remove 1 Screw.(6) Remove the Connector Cover.

(7) Remove 1 Screw.(8) Remove the Exit Sub Guide.

(9) Install the Paper Transport Unit as illustrated.

(10) Connect the Harness into the machine's connector.

430APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(11) Install the Bracket Assembly by Lifting up the Paper Transport Unit.

(12) Secure the Bracket Assembly with 1 Screw (Long), 2 Screws (Medium) and 2 Screws (Short B).

(13) Install the Front Cover.(14) Secure the Front Cover with 1 Screw (Short B)

by pushing the Flap downward as illustrated.(15) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, reinstall all Harnesses and Covers.(16) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main



431APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.13. Installing the Exit Tray (Outer) (DA-XT320)8.13.1. Contents

Note:1. Before installing this option, make sure the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320) is installed to

machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320).2. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination.3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.



Qty. Description Remarks1 Exit Tray1 Outer Cover Assembly

5 Screw


(1) Insert 2 Screws first and tighten them 1/2 way.

(2) Install the Outer Cover Assembly.(3) Secure the Outer Cover Assembly with

3 Screws.(4) Tighten 2 Screws installed in Step (1) above.

432APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(5) Install the Exit Tray onto the Outer Cover Assembly.




433APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.14. Installing the 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS320)8.14.1. Contents


machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320).2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.4. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Finisher (DA-FS320), read these entire

instructions.



Qty. Description Remarks1 1-Bin Finisher1 Finisher Tray Assembly1 Base Bracket1 Front Slide Guide Bracket1 Rear Slide Guide Bracket1 IPC PC Board1 Optional LVPS1 Optional LVPS Harness2 Snap Ring

4 Screw (M4 x 6)

2 Screw (M3 x 6)


Note:Make sure that there will be adequate space for working area (Ex: Loading paper, replacing supplies, etc.).

69.86 in (1776 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm) 3.94 in

(100 mm)

434APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(1) Connect the Optional LVPS Harness to connector CN64 on the Optional LVPS.



(4) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.

435APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(5) Remove the Dummy Plug.Note:

The Dummy Plug is used for Safety Purposes.Store it in a safe place for removing the Optional LVPS just in case.

(6) Release 2 Harnesses from Harness Clamp.

(7) Connect the pre-installed Harness to the Optional LVPS Harness.

(8) Connect the pre-installed Harnesses to connectors CN65 and CN66 on the Optional LVPS.

(9) Install the Optional LVPS.(10) Secure the Optional LVPS with 2 Screws

(M3 x 6).

436APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(11) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board into connector CN535 on the EC PC Board.

Note:Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.

(12) Hook the Base Bracket and secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 6).

Note:It is easier to align the screw holes, if you insert the Front Screw first.

(13) Place the Finisher on the Base Bracket.Note:

Make sure that the 2 Lock Levers Hook into the Guide Brackets properly.

(14) Install 2 Slide Guide Brackets.(15) Secure 2 Slide Guide Brackets with 2 Screws

(M4 x 6).

437APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(16) Install the Finisher Tray Assembly.(17) Secure the Finisher Tray Assembly with

2 Snap Rings.

(18) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with the Interface Cable.




438APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.15. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325)8.15.1. Contents


the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Paper Transport Unit (DA-FK320).

2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.4. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS325), read these

entire instructions.



Qty. Description Remarks1 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher1 Stapler1 Delivery Tray1 Stand1 Latch Plate

6 Screw (M3 x 6)

6 Screw (M4 x 7)

2 Screw (M4 x 30)

1 IPC PC Board1 Optional LVPS1 Optional LVPS Harness1 Label1 Installation Instructions This document

1. Selecting the Installation Site

Make sure that there will be adequate space for work (Ex: Loading paper, replacing supplies, etc.). Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the same floor surface as its host machine (Ex: At the same height, slope, etc.).

86.48 in (2197 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

3.94 in (100 mm)

55.48 in (1410 mm)

439APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

2. Unpacking

Note:This finisher is protected with Packing Materials such as Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to remove them before using the finisher.

Caution:The finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the finisher.Move the finisher next to the left side of the machine and remove the packing materials using the following procedure.

(1) Unpack the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories.(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,

Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing materials.

Note:The removed tapes and packing materials will be needed when transporting the finisher for relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them away for future use.

3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher Installation

(1) Connect the Optional LVPS Harness to connector CN64 on the Optional LVPS.


440APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322


(4) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.

(5) Remove the Dummy Plug.Note:

The Dummy Plug is used for Safety Purposes.Store it in a safe place for removing the Optional LVPS just in case.

(6) Release 2 Harnesses from the Harness Clamp.

441APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(7) Connect the pre-installed Harness to the Optional LVPS Harness.

(8) Connect the pre-installed Harnesses to connectors CN65 and CN66 on the Optional LVPS.

(9) Install the Optional LVPS.(10) Secure the Optional LVPS with 2 Screws

(M3 x 6).

(11) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board into connector CN535 on the EC PC Board.

Note:Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.

(12) Install the Latch Plate.(13) Secure the Latch Plate with 4 Screws (M3 x 6).Note:

Before connecting the Finisher to its Host Machine, be sure to attach the Latch Plate to the Host Machine.

442APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(14) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips type Screwdriver as illustrated.

(15) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper or a Cutter.

4. Attaching to the Host Machine

Caution:Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can result in improper paper feed.

(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting holes on the side panel of the Host Machine, then secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30).

(2) Slide the Slider of the Stand outward, loosen the Screws securing the Bracket, then secure the Slider.

(3) Place the Finisher on the Slider of the Stand, and loosely secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 7).

443APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Caution:When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap between the Finisher and the Stand. A gap would indicate the Finisher is overlapping. Remove and re-mount the Finisher correctly.

(4) Align the positioning lines of the Finisher and the Stand. Keep checking the alignment by moving the Finisher back and forth, and tighten 2 Screws when they are aligned.

(5) Attach the Delivery Tray with 4 Screws (M4 x 7) as illustrated.

(6) Open the Front Door of the Finisher, then insert the Stapler along the Guide Rails.

(7) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.

No Gap

Finisher

Stand

444APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(8) Place the Bracket in its original position, then secure it with Screws. Slide the Finisher toward the Host Machine and connect it to the Host Machine.

(9) Attach the Label as illustrated.

(10) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with the Interface Cable.

Caution:Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock hazards.

(11) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the perpendicular position of the Finisher to the machine. (Gaps “A” and “B” should be identical).

Note:If the Finisher is not latched properly, loosen 2 Screws and adjust the height using the adjusters.

(12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

445APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.16. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)8.16.1. Contents

Note:1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.



Qty. Description Remarks1 Punch Unit1 Punch Relay Harness (Orange)1 Punch Relay Harness (Violet)1 Jam Removal Label1 Punch Dust Label

1 Screw (M4 x 6)


1. Removing Packing Materials

Note:This machine is protected with packing materials such as tapes and spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to remove them before using the machine.

(1) Unpack the Punch Unit and its accessories.(2) Remove the tapes securing the Covers and

Front Door.

2. Preparing the Finisher for Punch Unit Installation

(1) Turn OFF the Host Machine, and disconnect the Finisher's Interface Cable from the Host Machine.

(2) Release the Latch on the Finisher, and separate the Finisher from the host machine.

(3) Open the Front Door. While pinching the Tabs remove the Jam Release Dial.


Screw

Screw

JamReleaseDial

Tab

Front Door

446APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(5) Raise the clips under the Latch Release Lever and remove the Latch Release Lever.

(6) Remove 3 Screws.(7) Open the Jam Access Cover, and detach the

Front Cover.(8) Close the Jam Access Cover.


(10) Remove 1 Screw.(11) Detach the Rear Cover.

Screws

Screw

Latch Release Lever

Front Cover

JamAccessCover

Rear Cover

Screws

Screw

Rear Cover

447APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322


(13) Remove 2 Screws.(14) Detach the Upper-Right Cover Assembly.

3. Attaching Punch Unit to the Finisher

(1) Place the Punch Unit onto the Finisher as illustrated.

Note:Make sure that the Front and Rear Latches are positioned correctly.

Upper-Right Cover Assembly

Screws

Screws

Upper-Right Cover

Latch

Positioning Pin

Punch Base Cover

448APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(2) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher using 2 Screws (M4 X 6) removed in Step (12) above, and 1 Enclosed Screw (Screw with Threaded Star Washer, M4 x 6).

(3) Open the Upper Cover.(4) Fit the clips of the Upper-Right Cover into the

square holes in the Punch Unit.(5) Attach the Upper-Right Cover to the Punch Unit.(6) Close the Upper Cover.

Screw

Screw

Screw with ThreadedStar Washer

Upper-Right Cover

Upper CoverPunch Unit

449APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(7) Secure the Upper-Right Cover to the Finisher using the 2 Screws (M4 x 6) removed in Step (13) above.

(8) Attach the Jam Access Label onto the outline of the Label Frame on the Upper-Right Cover.

(9) Attach the Punch Dust Label onto the Dust Box.

(10) Connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness (Orange) to J1004 on the Punch Controller Circuit Board and connect the other Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to J1003 on the same circuit board.

Screws

Upper-Right Cover

Upper-Right Cover

Jam Access Label

Punch Dust Label

Punch ControllerCircuit Board

J1004

J1003

Punch RelayHarness (Violet)

Punch RelayHarness (Orange)

450APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(11) Connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness (Orange) to CN14 on the Finisher Controller Circuit Board and connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to CN12 on the same Circuit Board.

(12) Insert the Punch Relay Harnesses into a Harness Clamps and Harness Guides.



CN14

CN12

FinisherControllerCircuit Board


HarnessGuide

HarnessClamp


FinisherControllerCircuit Board

451APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(13) Attach the Front Cover, Latch Release Lever, Jam Release Dial, and Rear Cover.

Note:When attaching the Front Cover, attach it with the Side Guide set inside of the Front Cover as illustrated.If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide set on the outside, the up and down operation of the Ejection Tray may malfunction.

(14) Loosen 2 Screws securing the Finisher and the Finisher Frame.

(15) Slowly move the Finisher back and forth towards the Host Machine and adjust the Finisher so that the notch of the Latch Plate aligns with the protrusion of the Punch Base Cover.

(16) Tighten 2 Screws loosened in Step (14) above.(17) Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine and

connect the Finisher's Interface Cable to the Host Machine.

(18) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Side Guide

Front Cover

Screws

Host Machine

Latch Plate

Punch BaseCover

Align

Finisher

452APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.17. Installing the ADF Handle for Accessibility (DA-UD321)8.17.1. Contents




Qty. Description Remarks1 ADF Front Cover1 ADF Caution Label1 Operating Instructions

(1) Open the ADF Unit.(2) Remove 2 Screws.(3) Remove the ADF Front Cover.

(4) Install the new ADF Front Cover.(5) Secure the ADF Front Cover with 2 Screws.(6) Close the ADF Unit.

(7) Attach the ADF Caution Label to the ADF Front Cover as illustrated.




453APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.18. Installing the Mechanical Counter (PJWEF2170PU)(Supplied as a Service Part for USA and Canada)


Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord, if the Fax Option is installed.)

Two (2) Mechanical Counters can be installed as Counter 1 and 2.


(2) Remove 1 Screw.(3) Remove the Mechanical Counter Cover.

(4) Release the pre-installed Harness(es) in the machine from the Harness Clamp(s).

(5) Connect the Harness(es) to the Mechanical Counter(s).

454APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.18.2. Mechanical Counter Setting 1. Press the “Function”, “Copy” and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode.2. Press the "5", and then "Start" keys to enter the F5 Mode.3. Select "175 Mechanical Counter 1".4. Select a Counter Type, and then select “OK”.Note:

For one (1) counter, skip to step (8).For two (2) counters, follow the steps below.

5. Select "176 Mechanical Counter 2".6. Select a Counter Type, and then select “OK”.7. Press the "Reset" key to exit the F5 Mode.8. Press the “Function” and “C” (Clear) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.9. Confirm that Counter(s) count properly.

(6) Install the Mechanical Counter(s).(7) Secure the Mechanical Counter(s) with 1

Screw each.Note:

Upper : Counter 1Lower : Counter 2

(8) Remove the Protective Tab(s) on the Mechanical Counter Cover by a Nipper or a Cutter.

(9) Secure the Mechanical Counter Cover with 1 Screw, that was removed in step (2).

(10) Close the Front Cover.(11) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Main



455APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

8.19. Replacing the OPC DrumRefer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic Operations, Problem Solving Section).

8.20. Replacing the Toner Waste ContainerRefer to the Operating Instructions (For Basic Operations, Problem Solving Section).

456APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9 General Network Information9.1. Network Protocol9.1.1. OSI Reference ModeHaving a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.

The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.

7 Application

Layer Name Function Protocol

6 Presentation

5 Session

4 Transport

3 Network

2 Datalink

1 Physical

NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...

SMBSMTP

FTPDNS

HTTPTelnetetc...

TCP/IPIPX/SPX

Net BEUIApple Talk

etc...

EthernetToken Ring

FDDIATMetc...

TDI

TCP, UDP

IP, IPX, etc...

PPP...

IP Address etc...

MAC Address

RS-232C, X21...

ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

RepeaterHub

NICSW Hub

Router

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

457APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.1.2. ProtocolOne reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.

TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.

The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.

9.1.3. CableFor the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω. Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.

Category Purpose1 Voice grade telephone line2 ISDN3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)4 Token Ring (16M)5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI

Session, Presentation and Application layers. Protocols at this layer provide network services.

6 Presentation5 Session

4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer. Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork.

3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks.

2 Data Link Network Interface

Corresponds to the bottom two layers of the OSI model. This correspondence enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network.

1 Physical

Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

458APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.2. Layer Functions and Technology9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.

9.2.2. Network ControlCSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows:

Wait for the next available timing to send,Send out a frame,Perform collision sensing simultaneously,Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)

802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer.Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately.

Token PassingToken passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.

The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

XXXXXX XXXXXX

Unique value

Manufacturer IDPCC : 080023

Most significant bitPre-amble8 byte

Destination MAC address6 byte

Source MAC address6 byte

Data type2 byte

Data 46 1500 byte

FCS 4 byte

Least significant bit

459APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame.

When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.

Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.

Token Frame Format

Data Frame Format

There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

Most significant bitStart De-limiter (SFD)1 byte

P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)1 byte

P: priorityS: Status

0 = Token Frame1 = Data Frame

R: Reserved


Most significant bitSFD1 byte

AccessControl1 byte

Framecontrol1 byte

DestinationMAC6 or 2 byte

SourceMAC6 or 2 byte

Data FCS4 byte

ED1 byte

FrameStatus1 byte

Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)Max 17779 (16M)


460APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.2.3. EthernetEthernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T)

Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)

10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)

100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

10 BASE 5

10 BASE - T

Logical speed(Mbps)

BASE : baseband (digital)BROAD: broadband (analog)

Max length (x 100m)

TP Twisted Pairhyphen "-" means type of cableno "-" means max length

Ethernet Configuration

461APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.

Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.

If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.

There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.

9.2.4. RepeaterThe main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions.

They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated.

Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.

9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

1 1

2 2

3 3

6 6

1 1

2 2

3 3

6 6Straight Cable Crossed Cable

TX (+)

TX (-)

RX (+)

RX (-)

TX (+)

TX (-)

RX (+)

RX (-)

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

"1" "0"

0 V

-2.05 V

462APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.3. Network Layer9.3.1. IP AddressAn IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses.

Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.

Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.

Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID.

There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:

Class A : First octet reserved for the network addressClass B : First two octets reserved for the network addressClass C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

0Class A

1Class B 0

1Class C 1

Network address represented as

0

463APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.3.2. Subnet MaskA subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.

1. Host address is set to all “0”2. Host address is set to all “1”

Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”

IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified. Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.

4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”Reserved for default route for non-destination address

5. Most significant bit starting with “127”Reserved for loop back address

1IP

192.168.32.1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0192

255 255255

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Subnet Mask255.255.255.0

NetworkAddress

192.168.32.0

IPSubnet Mask

Network Address Configuration

168 32 1

0

190.0.3.1255.255.255.0

190.0.3.2255.255.255.0

190.0.3.3255.255.255.0

190.0.2.1255.255.255.0

190.0.2.2255.255.255.0

190.0.2.3255.255.255.0

190.0.1.1255.255.255.0

190.0.1.2255.255.255.0

190.0.1.3255.255.255.0

GroundFloor

SecondFloor

ThirdFloor

Router

Global IPAddress190.0.0.0

255.255.0.0

NoteUpper: IP addressLower: Subnet mask

Class B Subnet Outline

464APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.3.3. Internet ProtocolThe IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.

It performs the following typical functions:1. Identifies the IP address2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram3. Routing of the IP address

Terms DetailVersion Currently version 4Internet Header Length

IP Header field length

Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence)

ID Identification frame number for upper layer communicationFlags Packet disassembly informationFragment Offset Offset from most significant bitTime To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the routerProtocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header dataSource Address Sender’s IP AddressDestination Address Destination’s IP AddressOption When implementedPadding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit

Version InternetHeader Length Type Of Service Total Length

4 byte

Fragment OffsetFlagsIDTime To Live Protocol Header Checksum

Source AddressDestination Address

Option + Padding (size varies)

Data

IP Datagram

465APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.3.4. RouterRouters, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address.

Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information.

These are the typical functions:

1. RoutingThis controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.

2. Packet FilteringThis performs the access and security control for specified routing.

3. Address ConversionNAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address.

4. IP Masquerade:This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer.

5. Designated ReplyThese are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all wellknown techniques to keep a live connection.

PC-A192.168.32.1/24

Router B

PC-B192.168.32.2/24

PC-C192.168.33.1/24

PC-D192.168.33.2/24

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23

OKOK

permission denied permission denied

192.168.32/24

Packet Filtering Sample

192.168.33/24

466APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.4. Transport Layer9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.

The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

TCP Segment in IP Datagram

IP Header(20 byte)

Application Data(vary)

TCP segmentIP Datagram

TCP Header(20 byte)

TCP Segment Outline

Header Length(4 bit)

Reserved(6 bit)

Control Flag(6 bit) Window (6 byte)

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)Sequence Number (4 byte)

Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)

Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)Option PAD

Data (Segment)

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

467APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.

The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

468APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.5. Upper Layer9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources.

Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:

Panasonic.comMail.panasonic.comifax.panasonic.com

can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.

Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device.

This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name.Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.

• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

469APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:

1. Query the local DNS Server.2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.3. The “Com” root DNS Server sends the query to the “jp” root DNS Server.4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.

All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server.

9.5.2. Primary Name ServerA primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

9.5.3. Secondary Name ServerA secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.

470APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) RecordEach database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows:

IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>

An example of the syntax is shown below:

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.The following list explains the other parameters:

* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be

expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]).

* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.

* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.

* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails.* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the.* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is

sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authorized for: ;@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 7200 1209600 172800) ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ;

; refresh every 12 hours; retry after 2 hours; expire after 2 weeks; default ttl is 2 days

471APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.5.5. A (Address) RecordThe A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.

9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) RecordPointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.

They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:

<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>

9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) RecordThe CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:

<alias name> CNAME <host name>

Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy

$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.

IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212ifaxos01ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29

IN A 172.21.97.26

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.;

472APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.5.8. NS (Name Server) RecordThe Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below:<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>

An example of a name server record follows below:

@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp

The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name server.

9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) RecordThe Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:

<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>

For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

9.5.10. Reverse LookupThis is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.

9.5.11. ForwardingA Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands.There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly & Associates, Inc.

473APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel.

The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply.

The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://www.imc.org/rfc821

9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

SMTP Server

PCPC DNS Server POP Server

Internet

SMTP POP 3

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

Received: from nwr35 by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 for <[email protected]>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)Message-Id: <[email protected]>Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicFrom: "Panasonic" <[email protected]>Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

Delivery route

Message ID

Content-Type

474APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 (New RFC3965)The Internet Fax protocol had been developed and proposed by Panasonic Communications Company, used be Matsushita Graphic Communication Systems, Inc. in 1997, and has been defined by ITU and IETF.

9.7.1. Mode of OperationThe Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC3965. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.

Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.

Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.

9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender

Receiver

Required

Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S fileProvide notice in case of local transmission problemProvide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant

Strongly Recommended

Include Message-IDUse Base 64 encoding for image data

OptionalUse other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiverProvide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications

Required

Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than displayBe capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single messageProvide notice in case of reception or processing problems

Optional Use other TIFF Profiles

475APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Offramp Gateway (when implemented)

9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations

RFC Reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

Note:The RFC2301-2306 had been defined by IETF as Proposed Standards for the Internet Fax, and had been used Worldwide. These Proposed Standards have now been upgraded to Draft Standards and New RFC numbers have been assigned, and these numbers will be used in near future by IETF rule..

Required

Be SMTP compliantProvide delivery failure notificationBe able to process PSTN/FAX email addressComply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmissionAttempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminalsEnsure DSN for delivery failure notification

Strongly Recommended

Use DSN for delivery failure notificationUse an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users

OptionalTranslate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminalUse a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

IETF Internet Engineering Task ForceRFC Request For CommentMIME Multipurpose Internet Mail ExtensionsPOP3 Post Office Protocol version 3SMTP Simple Mail Transfer ProtocolDSN Delivery Status NotificationMDN Message Disposition NotificationTIFF Tagged Image File FormatIFD TIFF Image File DirectoryOfframp Gateway

Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/G4 facsimile terminals

Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiverNotice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to

be determined by the device

Definitions Proposed Standards --->

New RFC: Draft

StandardsFile Format for Internet Fax RFC2301 ---> RFC3949Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Subtype Registration RFC2302 ---> RFC3302

Minimal PSTN address format for Internet Mail RFC2303 ---> RFC3139Minimal FAX address format for Internet Mail RFC2304 ---> RFC3192A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305 ---> RFC3965Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile RFC2306 --- ---

476APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.7.4. File Format for Internet FaxSending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC3949], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.

Class Color Coding Method RemarksS B/W MH Internet Fax minimal setF B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full modeJ B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed modeC Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal setL Color JPEG (lossless,

grayscale)One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous tone color and grayscale images

M Color Mixed Raster Content

Multiple coders and resolution within a page

S (MH)

C (JPEG)

L (JPEG) M (MRC)

J(JBIG)

F(MMR, MR)

B/W Color

MRC: Mixed Raster Content

477APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.7.5. Minimal SetThe minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.

The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.

9.7.6. AddressingA simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services.

Baseline Fields ValuesBits Per Sample 1Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4Fill Order Least significant bit firstImage Width 1728 (A-4)Image Length N: total number of scan lines in imageNew Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page documentPage Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count mPhotometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means blackResolution Unit 2: inchRows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one stripSamples Per Pixel 1Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF stripStrip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF stripX Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)Extensions FieldsT4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs

byte aligned

FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com

FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com

Global-phoneService selector

DomainSub addressSelector

Global-phoneService selector

Service selectorGlobal-phone Domain

Domain

(1) Offramp

(2) Sub address

(3) Others

478APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Note:

For RFC3965, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words “MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”, “RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119

1. MUSTThis word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification.

2. MUST NOTThis phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification.

3. SHOULDThese words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course.

4. SHOULD NOTThis phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.

9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Header

IFD (Page 0)

Long ValuesImage Data

(Page 0)

IFD (Page 1)

Long ValuesImage Data

(Page 1)

IFD (Page 2)

Strip Offset

Strip Offset

Next IFD Offset

Next IFD Offset

First IFD OffsetValue Offset

Value Offset

File Structure

479APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.7.8. Delivery FailureIn the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.

9.7.9. Image File FormatThe Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.

The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

Message Header Contents

480APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.8. Communication ProtocolsThe set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.

Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.

A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready

SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com

250 ef1.labo.pcc.com

MAIL FROM: <[email protected]>

250 OK

RCPT TO: <[email protected]>

250 OK

DATA

250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

DATA BLOCK 1

DATA BLOCK 2

DATA BLOCK n

CR/LF . CR/LF

250 OK

QUIT

221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing transmission channel

Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

[5 minutes]

[5 minutes]

[2 minutes]

[5 minutes]

[3 minutes]

[3 minutes]

[10 minutes]

SMTP Server(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

DAT

A B

LOC

KC

losi

ngS

MT

P C

omm

and

TCP 3 Way Handshake &

Opening Session

your Panasonic Device(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

481APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.8.1. Opening and ClosingAt the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing:

HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>QUIT:<CRLF>

In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.

9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.

9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.

9.8.4. Data (DATA)The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.

9.8.5. SendThis command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

9.8.6. Reset (RSET)This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.

9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP ServerSMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

482APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

211 System status or system help reply220 <domain> Service ready221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel250 Requested mail action okay# completed251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path> 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF> 421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel

[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox busy]451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage 500 Syntax error# command unrecognized

[This may include errors such as command line too long]501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments502 Command not implemented 503 Bad sequence of commands504 Command parameter not implemented550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable

[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]551 User not local; please try <forward-path>552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed

[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect] 554 Transaction failed

483APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)9.9.1. IntroductionOn certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time.The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939

9.9.2. Basic OperationInitially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.

Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.

Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.

A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed.

A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

484APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’ duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary

Note:With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply.

Minimal POP3 Commands:

USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION statePASS stringQUIT

STAT valid in the TRANSACTION stateLIST [msg]RETR msgDELE msgNOOPRSETQUIT

Optional POP3 Commands:

APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state

TOP msg n valid in the TRANSACTION stateUIDL [msg]

POP3 Replies:

+OK-ERR

From: To:

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

485APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

+OK POP Server ready<[email protected]>

your Panasonic Device(ef1.labo.pcc.com)

POP 3 Server(sv2.labo.pcc.com)

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

USER s50055

DELE 1

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

+OK Password required for s50055PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).STAT

+OK 2 126040

QUIT+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)+OK POP Server ready

<[email protected]>

USER s50055

+OK Password required for s50055

PASS !xxxx

+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).TOP 1 1

+OK 69762 octetsText DATAText DATA

PETR 1+OK 69752 octets

Text DATAText DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

+OK Message 1 has been deleted.

DELE 2

TOP 2 1+OK 1 56288 octets

Text DATA

Text DATAPETR 2

+OK 1 56288 octetsText DATAText DATA

Text DATA :end with .(period)

+OK Message 2 has been deleted.

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

QUIT+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

TCP 3 way handshake &

Opening Session

486APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PCTroubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.

One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.

Note:Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

Command Sample PurposePing Ping 192.168.1.30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target

destination (192.168.1.30)

Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of Ipconfig/all

Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination(192.168.2.245)

Netstat NetstatNetstat -nr

Active connection listActive route for your subnet.All special assigned IP addresses are also shown

Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host NameNslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.

This command is available for Windows NT only.

487APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)

START

Is the LAN connected to an ISP

Is this a Dialup connection ?

Yes

Is static IP address available ?

No No

Is G3 Gateway function being used ?

Yes

No

Yes

Is POP account available ?

No

Yes

Set network parameters for SMTP receiving

Set network parameters for POP receiving

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ?

Is POP account available ?

Yes

Yes

Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device

Yes

No

No

No

No

DHCP Client?

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.

Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

If not readyIf not readyIf not ready

Yes

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ?

Important Notice:Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware ofhow the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may askthe Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changingthe configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.

488APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended FeatureDHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP.

DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.

DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address).In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.

"DHCP client"A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address.

"DHCP server"A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.

Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.

Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

Message CommentsDHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration

parameters.DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server

and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address.

DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address.

DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired

DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has

externally configured network address.

489APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.

DHCPOFFER

DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST

DHCPRELEASE

DHCPACK

DHCPDISCOVERDHCPDISCOVER

DHCPOFFER

(not selected)Server

(selected)Client Server

Commits configuration

Discards lease

Determinesconfiguration

Collects repliesSelects configuration

Begins initialization

Initialization complete

Graceful shutdown

Determinesconfiguration

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address

DHCPACK

DHCPREQUESTDHCPREQUEST

DHCPACK

Server Client Server

Locates configuration

Begins initialization

Locatesconfiguration

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address

Initialization complete

Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored

490APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.

For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from the following URL:http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

T1 expires/Send

DHCPREQUESTto leasing server

INITIALIZATION

INITIALIZE/REBOOT

REBOOTING

SELECTING

REBINDINGREQUESTING

BOUND

RENEWING

-/Send DHCPREQUES

DHCPNAK/Restart

DHCPOFFER/Discard

DHCPACK/Record lease, set

timers T1, T2

T1 expires/Send DHCPREQUEST

to leasing server

DHCPNAK/Discard offer

DHCPACK(not accepted)/

Send DHCPDECLINE

DHCPOFFER/Collect replies

-/Send DHCPDISCOVER

DHCPNAK, Lease expired/Halt network

Select offer/send DHCPREQUEST


/timers T1,T2DHCPACK/

Record lease, set/timers T1,T2


timers T1, T2

T2 expires/Broadcast

DHCPREQUEST

DHCPNAK/Halt network

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client’s lease will expire.To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

491APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended FeatureThe confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC3965]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.

(1) Delivery confirmation (required)(2) Additional document features (optional)

In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.Your Panasonic device supports MDN.

Delivery Status Notification (DSN)A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.

SMTP Server SMTP ServerDSN

DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.

fail

SMTP Server SMTP ServerMDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed

492APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from the Options menu of Outlook Express.

Additional Document CapabilitiesSection 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC3965] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 3949, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.

(1) RequestIf the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using following formula.

SMTP Server SMTP Server

(1)

(2)(3)

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging

Internet FAXInternet FAX

Read Receipt

Capabilities

MDN Request

MDN Response

493APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(2) Recipient's MDN ResponseRecipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.

Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicContent-Transfer-Encoding: 7bitDate: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500Message-Id: <[email protected]>From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <[email protected]>Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: <[email protected]>Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0X-Mailer: Internet FAX, PanasonicContent-Transfer-Encoding: 7bitDate: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500Message-Id: <[email protected]>From: <[email protected]>Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAXTo: [email protected]: <[email protected]>References: <[email protected]>Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

********** Read Receipt **********

This message was opened by ’[email protected]’ dd Mmm yyyy 15:42

******************************************

Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected]: <[email protected]>Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatchedMedia-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

MDN Response Sample

BODYTEXT

MESSAGEHEADER

ATTACHEDFILE

494APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322(3) Processing Confirmation

The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.

For more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

495APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended FeatureThe protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure.

It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that “http” & “html” are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.

From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature

The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.

Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.

An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality.

A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:

<process-ID.clock@hostname>

where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.

496APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name'' parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.

When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.

Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

Client Server

+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets)

+OK 1

STAT

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)

+OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]>

APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fbDigest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD<[email protected]>PASSWD

Produces a 16 octet digest value ofc4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

Challenge Response<[email protected]>

Possible Responses: +OK -ERR permission denied

Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

497APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature

SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply.

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

Client Server

250-smtp.example.com

250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5

AUTH CRAM-MD5

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)

220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready

EHLO jgm.example.com

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

334PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

235 Authentication successful

SMTP AUTH overview

Genrates Digest parameterChallenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:USER

Produces a Challenge

334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=Challenge Response

BASE64 decoded string

BASE64 encoded string

Fred

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

<[email protected]>

9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e

498APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply.

If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.

The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".

Error CodesThe following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.

432: A password transition is needed

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism.

538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.

454: Temporary authentication failure

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure.

530: Authentication required

This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

499APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended FeatureDirect Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the DNS Server. For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled in the General Settings (For Key Operator).Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's Intranet.

Several new service extensions were assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command

Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview

Sender Recipient

Establish TCP connectionTCP Port No. 25

Checks for Capability

250-<[email protected]> recipient ok250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)250- (MRC-mode=0)250- (color=Binary)250- (|(&(dpi=204)250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )250- (&(dpi=200)250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )250- (&(dpi=400)250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )250- (size-x<=2150/254)250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )250 (ua-media=stationery) )

Capability contents sample

Request for Capability

220

250

EHLO

250 Response of CONNEG

250 Capacity Exchange

Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

MAIL FROM:<[email protected]>

RCPT TO:<[email protected]> CONNEG

500APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.18. Remote Entry9.18.1. Remote Entry OverviewRemote entry is a feature enabling remote computers to send email to this machine and edit itssettings, such as its Internet parameters and the address book.Email sent from remote computers to this machine edits Internet parameters as its local stationinformation, the address book, transaction journals and so on.Note:

This feature works when “158 PC Remote Update” has been set to “Valid” in the Function Settings (Fax/Email Settings). The factory setting of “158 PC Remote Update” is “Invalid”. For instructions on how to modify the factory setting, refer to Fax/Email Settings of the Operating Instructions (For Function Settings) on provided CDROM.

Command + Password

setparameters

Internet

Internet

Internet Fax

Internet Fax

PC

PC

abbr

Command + Password

getparametersabbrjnl

-Internet Parameters-Auto Dialer (Phone Book Dialer)-Transaction Journal

Update or Restore

-Internet Parameters-Auto Dialer (Phone Book Dialer)

-Edit-Back up

501APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.18.2. Commands That Can Be UsedThe "Subject" field of an email message can be used as a command line field.

The following commands can be used with this machine:

9.18.3. Internet Parameters That Can Be Entered and Retrieved1. FROM selection (user name: up to 20 characters)2. Default domain3. Selected domain (up to 10 domains)4. Relay domain (up to 10 domains can be programmed for relayed transmission)5. Administrator email address6. Relay password7. Domain name (name of a relay domain, up to 30 characters)8. Community name9. Device name

10. Device locationNote:

1. All other parameters need to be programmed as local station information in the Function Settings.2. The remote password that has been defined as an Internet parameter (local station information) for this

machine is used to enter and retrieve Internet parameters. (Ex: 1234567879)

set: Entryget: Retrievalparameters: Internet parametersaddr: Address bookjnl: Transaction journalpassword: Remote password predefined as an entry item of local station

information about this machine.(Example: 123456789)Enter the password enclosed with parentheses “().”

Enter the command in single-byte characters, enclosed with # the sharp sign (#).

Enter a command here

Comma nd entered in the "Subje ct" fie ld Explanation

1 #set parameters (password)# Enter Internet parameters

2 #get parameters (password)# Retrieve Internet parameters

3 #set abbr (password)# Program an address book

4 #get abbr (password)# Retrieve the address book

5 #get jnl (password)# Retrieve the current transaction journal

502APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. Execution of this command will overwrite the existing settings of Internet parameters.

As a precaution, you should retrieve the Internet parameters first as instructed later and back them up.

9.18.4. Retrieving InformationRemote entry enables you to retrieve Internet parameters, the address book and the transactionjournal.To retrieve such information, send an email message (text mail) from a remote computer to thismachine with one of the commands specified below being entered in the “Subject” field of the email.

Note:1. The password that is entered here is the remote password that has been programmed as local station

information about this machine. Set the remote password for security assurance at all times.2. Leave other fields, such as CC and Bcc, blank.

9.18.5. Handling the Transaction Journal1. When the transaction journal is retrieved, convert it into a fixed-width font (for example, Terminal or

Courier) and align its data on the computer.2. Another email message (“Internet Fax Return Receipt”) is sent to the email address of the

administrator preprogrammed as own information of this machine, to report the transmission of the transaction journal.

(1) Destination (To) : Email address of this machineSender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email

message is created, but it contains the default emailaddress. This field is used to receive Internet parametersand post error messages.

Subject (Subject) : Write #get parameters (password)#, #get addr(password)# or #get jnl (password)# to retrieve data.

Command Information that can be retrieved

#get parameters (password)# Internet parameters (Local station information)

#get abbr (password)# Address book

#get jnl (password)# Transaction journal

Internet Parameter Email Example

(1)

503APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.18.6. Backing Up Internet Parameters and the Address Book Retrieved or EditedEdit the Internet parameters or the address book that has been retrieved. Save the edited versions of dataas text (.txt) files as backup copies.To edit information, follow the steps below:

1. Create a new message and fill out the To, From and Subject fields as follows:

2. Open the backup Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created email message.

3. If there is header information in the message text, delete it to prevent possible errors.The information that follows the “#” symbol may be deleted or retained, it will be ignored by this machine anyway.

4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s).5. When the editing is completed, select “Save As” from the “File” menu and save the file as an updated

file with “txt” extension as a backup.6. Email the edited version of information to this machine.

Destination (To) : Email address of this machineSender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email

message is created, but it contains the default emailaddress. This field is used to receive Internet parametersand post error messages.

Subject (Subject) : Write one of the following for data entry:#set parameters (password)##set abbr (password)#

504APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(1) Destination (To) : Email address of this machineSender (From) : This field is normally not displayed when a new email message

is created, but it contains the default email address. This field is used to receive Internet parameters and post error messages.Write #set parameters (password)# for data entry.

Internet Parameter Email Example

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

[Delete this header before sending the email.]

(a)

(b)(c)

(d)

(a)

(b)(c)

(d)

(a)

(c)(b)

(b) (c)(d)

(a)

From: "Your Machine" <[email protected]>Subject: Your Machines SYSTEM PARAMETER ListTo: [email protected]

#---------------------------------------------# Your Machines SYSTEM PARAMETER List## STATION : PANASONIC# EMAIL : [email protected]# DATE/TIME : MMM-dd-yyyy 12:34#---------------------------------------------#---------------------------------------------# Internet parameters## IP ADDRESS :192.168.3.21# SUBNET MASK :255.255.255.0# SMTP SERVER :es1.panasonic.com# DEF.ROUTER :192.168.3.22# DNS SERVER :192.168.3.1# 2ND DNS SERVER :0.0.0.0# POP SERVER :es1.panasonic.com# POP USER NAME :ifax2#---------------------------------------------@sender01;PANASONIC;[email protected];PCC;[email protected]@end@select-domain01;pcc.panasonic.com02;panasonic.com@end@relay-domainpanasonic.compcc.panasonic.comsales.panasonic.companasonic.com@end@systemdomain;panasonic.commanager;[email protected];"rlypass"remote;"1234567890"@end@ldapserver;ldapsvrlogin;sonic777password;"sbste7"base;psonic789@end@mibcom_name1;commu1com_name2;commu2device;Panasonic DP-XXXXlocation;devloca@end

505APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(2) @sender to @end : @sender and @end: Enter sender (From) information between@sender and @end in (2).Enter up to 24 user names and email addresses for senderselection.Enter a semicolon (;) to delimit each block of data. If thesubsequent fields are blank, insert a semicolon (;) to delimiteach blank field.Each set of sender selection entry data must be complete withina single line.The syntax is <Sender selection number>; <User name>; <email address>.(a) 01 to 24 : Sender selection number indication(b) User name : (up to 20 alphanumeric characters)(c) Email address : (up to 52 characters)

(3) @select-domain to @end : @select-domain to @end: Enter selected domain namesbetween @select-domain and @end in (3). Up to 10 selecteddomain names can be programmed.

(4) @relay-domain to @end : @relay-domain to @end: Enter domain names between @relaydomain and @end in (4).Enter the names of up to 10 domains authorized to relaytransmissions on a LAN from Internet Fax to general Fax.

(5) @system to @end : @system to @end: Enter Internet parameters in place of@system to @end in (5).The following Internet parameters need to be programmed:(a) Default domain (up to 30 characters)

The syntax is domain; <Default domain>(b) Administrator email address (up to 52 characters)

The syntax is manager; <administrator email address>(c) Relay password (up to 10 characters)

The syntax is relay; "<relay password>"(d) Remote password (up to 10 characters)

The syntax is remote; "<remote password>"The remote password must be enclosed with a double quote (") as in the example.

(6) @ldap to@end : Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between@ldap to @endblock. Register the following InternetParameters.(a) LDAP Server Name (up to 60 characters).

The syntax is: server; <LDAP Server Name>(b) LDAP Login Name (up to 40 characters).

The syntax is: login; <LDAP Login Name>(c) LDAP Password (up to 10 characters).

The syntax is: password; "<LDAP Password>". Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example.

(d) LDAP Search Base (up to 60 characters).The syntax is: base; <LDAP Search Base>

(7) @mib to @end : (a) Community name (1) (up to 32 characters) The syntax is com_name1; < community name>.

(b) Community name (2) (up to 32 characters)The syntax is com_name2; < community name>.

(c) device name (up to 32 characters)The syntax is device; < device name>.

(d) Device location (up to 32 characters)The syntax is location; <device location>.

506APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(8) The header needs to be deleted before email can be transmitted to this machine to reprogram the Internet parameters.

(9) The information that follows the "#" symbol may be deleted or retained; it will be ignored by this machine anyway.

(1) To : Your machine's email address.From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email

message(s). It is your default email address (email application),for retrieving the Auto Dialer (Address Book Dialing) data and for error message notification.(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your emailprogram.)

Subject : To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#(2) @sender to @end : Defines the Auto Dialer (Address Book Dialing) to be set in

section (2) @begin to @end block.Edit, Delete or Register the information.Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remainingfields are to remain blank, insert a semi-colon (;) for each blankfield)The data string for each station should be defined within a single line.The syntax is: <Entry-number>;<Station-name>;<Keyname>;<Station-address>;<Routing-subaddress>;<Routing-idnumber>

Address Book Email Example

From: "Your Machine" <[email protected]>Subject: Your Machine's SYSTEM PARAMETER ListTo: [email protected]

#---------------------------------------------# Your Machine's ADDRESS BOOK List## STATION : PANASONIC# EMAIL : [email protected]# DATE/TIME : MMM-dd-yyyy 17:45#---------------------------------------------@begin000;SALES DEPT;SALES DEPT;[email protected];1111;5551234;001;SP-200;SP-200;#0003;;;002;SP-200IFAX;SP-200IFAX;[email protected];;;003;LONDON;LONDON;[email protected];;;004;ROME;ROME;#396111234;;;@end@program P01 "POP3" POPuser;POP3password;"pop-pswd"delete;on@end@program P02 "Group1;Group1" GROUP001-002@end

(4)

[Delete this header before sending the email.]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

(g)(a) (b) (c)

(d)(e)

(f)

(j)

(i)(g) (h)

507APR 2005Ver. 1.1

Ver. 1.1

Note:1. If a POP user acco

key cannot be dele2. The email address

a. Address book (Ab. Received documec. While the machi

3. When the email addsent back.

4. Some email applicacharacters in a line of characters per lin

(3) @select-doma

(4) This header mAuto Dialer (Admachine, there

DP-C262/C322

unt is programmed into the P1 to P12 program keys, the data programmed for thisted, even when the delete command is specified.and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when:

(a) Entry-number : One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keysto be programmed 000 to 199: IndicatesAddress Book entries 000 to 199 (up to200 stations)

(b) Station-name : Name of the station being programmed(up to 15 alpha-numeric characters)

(c) Key-name : Name of the key being programmed (upto 15 alpha-numeric characters)

(d) Station-address: email address or telephone number ofthe station being programmed

(e) Routing-subaddress : sub-address to be used for routing (up to 20-digit)

(f) Routing-id-number : TSI to be used for routing (up to 20-digit)(g) The End Receiving Station’s telephone number is entered

after the hash sign (#).in to @end : Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP

Access Key to be set in section (3) between @program to @end block.Edit, Delete or Register the information.(a) Program Key : P01 - P12(b) Station-name : Name of the station as a POP key.(c) POP : The syntax used to set the Program Key

as a POP Access Key.(d) POP User-name : Name of the POP user account (up to 40

alpha-numeric characters)(e) POP Password : POP Password (up to 10 alpha-numeric

characters)(f) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after

retrieving the emails.(g) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being

programmed (up to 15 alpha-numeric characters).(h) Key-name: Name of the key being programmed (up to 15

alpha-numeric characters).(i) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group

Key(j) Entry-number: Address Book entries 000 to 199 (up to 200

stations)ust be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming ofdress Book Dialing).The information following the “#” sign is ignored by yourfore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you wish.

508APR 2005

uto Dialer) Number has been used for communication reservation.nts are stored in the image data memory of the machine.ne is communicating or printing.ress and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result email is

tions automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the number of exceed a specific number. Turn “Off” the automatic line feed, or define the number e to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored.

DP-C262/C322

9.18.7. Deleting the Entire Address BookEnter the following command as email text to clear the address book on this machine completely:@commanddelete@endThis command can be inserted before the @begin to @end block to clear the address book entiretyand then reconfigure it with new data.If this method is used, the message "The "Overwrite Warning" message is not displayed in the emailthat is returned from this machine.To delete the entire data in the address book, enter the following command on the line in the "Subject"field in the email.

Note:The execution of “delete” will clear the address book, resetting it to its factory setting.

#set abbr (password)#: This password is a remote password preprogrammed as localstation information about this machine.Before transmitting this command, receive data on yourcomputer and back it up as instructed in the earlier sections of this chapter

509APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

9.19. Error Messages Generated during Remote EntryIf errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, error messages are Emailedfrom this machine to the sending station.

9.19.1. Error MessagesIf errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, the following errormessages are Emailed from this machine to the sending station:

9.19.2. Error Messages on Remote Entry FailureIf errors occur during remote entry in the address book or program dialing, the following errormessages are Emailed from this machine to the sending station:

No. Error message Probable cause and recommended action

1 554 Data transfer error (broken header) Process was aborted due to an error occurring while encoding the header or sub-header. Resend.

2 554 Data transfer error (broken data) Process was aborted due to an error occurring while encoding data. Resend.

3 554 Data transfer error (Fax module) A data transfer error occurred on the Fax module while communicating with the LAN module. Resend.

4 554 MIME attachment not supported (message/file)

An unsupported MIME file attachment was transmitted. Resend the document with text data alone.

5 554 MIME format not supported An unsupported MIME type was transmitted. Resend the document with text data alone.

6 554 Fax relay permission denied The name of the domain requesting relay is not preprogrammed.

7 554 Relay address unknown The telephone number of the final receiving station requesting relay is unknown.

8 554 Memory fully (Fax module) Fax memory is full. Resend later.

9 554 Data transfer error This error is not on the list. Resend later.


1 There is an error in the @command block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@command " block. Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

2 The @begin command is missing. The block start command "@begin" is missing in the "@begin" block. Resend with the addition of an "@begin" command.

3 There is an error in the @begin block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@begin" block. Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

4 There is an error in the @system block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@system " block.Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

5 There is an error in the @sender block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@sender " block.Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

6 There is an error in the @domain block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@domain" block. Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

510APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

7 There is an error in the @program block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@program " block. Resend with the addition of an "@end " command.

8 The "@system " command is missing. The system block start command "@system " is missing in the "@system " block. Resend with the addition of an "@system " command.

9 Remote retry is disabled because Fax is in operation.

If a Fax reservation session has been reserved, let the Fax operation finish before resending the document.Check the reservation report and resend in a reservation-free condition.

10 Remote entry password check error Correct the password and resend.

11 Remote entry is not permitted. Set "158PC Remote Update "to "VALID" in the Function Settings (Fax/Email Settings> Fax Parameters).

12 Format Error:< error line> The input format is invalid, or it is incomplete because each set of destination selection entry data is not complete within a single line.

13 Warning: <error line> The input format is invalid, or the input character string exceeds the maximum allowable character length. Fix and resend.

14 Data is too long. The character length of the station name, domain name, sender name, program name or the like is too long. Fix the character length and resend.

15 There is an error in the @List block. The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@list" block. Resend with the addition of an "@end" command.

16 There is an error in the @select-domain block.

The block end command "@end" is missing in the "@ select-domain" block. Resend with the addition of an "@end" command.

17 The following data has been overwritten: <overwritten data) >

This error message is sent to alert you that the data has been overwritten.

18 Direct incoming dialing data is notpreprogrammed:< error line) >

The dialing number corresponding to the modem direct inward dialing failed to preprogram. Verify the dialing setting of the station.


511APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

memo

512APR 2005Ver. 1.1

APR 2005

DP-C262/C322DP-C262/C322

M1

5

4

2

3

M1

5

4

2

3

CN

401

1

2

3

S

L

3

2

4

5

3

5

3

4

2

1

1

6

2

7

8

7

5

6

4

2

3

1

1

CN

400

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

1

2

3

12

3

C

L

2

1

CN

612

1

2

3

S

L

3

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

12

14

8

11

10

4

5

7

9

1

2

3

13

C

L

2

1

1

CNHUC

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

1

2

3

12

3

M

CN524

CN

522

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

CN

508

1 96

10

11

9

7

8

4

1

3

6

5

M

1

9

2

8

6

7

3

11

10

5

4

CN

511

22

20

21

19

17

18

14

13

16

15

M

1

9

2

8

6

7

3

11

10

5

4

CN

505

M

20

18

19

17

15

16

12

9

11

14

M

11

9

10

8

6

7

3

1

2

5

4

CN

507

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

8

9

10

5

6

7

CN

503

M

M

M

M

6 8 18 195 7 10 12 21 229 11 2015 23 2413 14 171 32 4 16

CN518

1

2

3

1234

TDC_Y(5414) (5414) (5414) (5414)

Tone

r Was

te

Con

tain

er

Sen

sor

(440

6)12345

CN

7C

N9

CN

14

CN

53

5

CC L

L

C

S L

L

2

1

2

1

1

2

12

3

12

3

12

3

1

2

3

CN

611

12

12

12

12

1234 1234 1234

123456 123456 123456 123456

L

30

28

29

27

25

26

21

24

23

M

10

11

8

9

7

5

6

1

2

4

3

21

1

9

7

3

11

5

TDC_KTDC_M TDC_C

M

1

8

2

7

5

6

9

11

10

4

3

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

9

10

1

3

2

10

12

2

N528

6

109

8

7

8

8

5

7

6

3

4

2

1

13

5

6

11

3

6

1

10

2

9

7

8

5

4

CN

550

CN

509

CN

553

CN

552 1

54

2

3

13

12

14

15

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

10

7

8

11

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

7

8

10

11

13

12

14

15

1

2

3

4

4

M

1

23

1

23

1

23

123

FM

2 13

1 2 3 4 5 6

CN

403

23 1

23 1

2

3

1

1

2

3

CC

L L

FM

2

1

2

1

3

2

1

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

11

10

7

8CN

506

1212

3132

21

22

24

23

22

12

12

17

15

16

12

14

13

12

3

4 12

3

12

2A

M

11

9

10

8

6

7

3

1

2

5

4

1.5A

12

6

6

6

25 26 27 3028 29

9

10

3

21

3

2

1

CN

409

CN

410

CN

411

CN

408

CN

407

CN

404

4

11

CN

406

CN

613

8 131211109 14 15

0.9A

0.9A

0.9A

14

15

15

16

16

14

CN

405

CN

402

16

16

34333231

12345

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

40

123456

23 1

23 1

FM2

1

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

12

3

1

2

3

1

3

2

4

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

7

8

3

5

4

7

6

2

1

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

1

2

3

12

11

10

5

4

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

S L

C

L

1

2

1

2

2

3

1

RR/OHPSN(2110)

OHP Film Sensor1

3

2

4

5

12

S L

C L

1

2

1

23

7

7 CN12

10987

SFULC

LSU

Fan

(43

02)

IH Fan (4804)

Right Cover Fan (4801)

Lift

Mot

or

(Tra

y2)

(200

1)

r 2001)

te

2way Ordinary Roller Clutch (2731)

ADU Paper Guide Solenoid (23212)

2way Inverting Roller Clutch (2731)

ADU Roller Clutch 1 (2313)

ADU Roller Clutch 2 (2731)

STR Solenoid (2533)

Bottle Motor C (5302)

Bottle Lock Detection Sensor_Y

Bottle Lock Detection Sensor_M

Bottle Lock Detection Sensor_C

Bottle Lock Detection Sensor_K

Bottle Motor BK (5302)

STR Cam Sensor 2

STR Cam Sensor 1

FTR Cam Sensor 2

FTR Cam Sensor 1

Bottle Motor M (5302)

Bottle Motor Y (5302)

Paper Feed Motor (6126)

Drum Motor 1 (5903)

Drum Motor 2 (5901)

STR Motor (3706)

Fuser Motor (6116)

FTR and LSU Shutter Motor (3706)

Belt Motor (5905)

Developer Motor 2 (5902)

Developer Motor 1 (5904)

Paper Transport Unit Motor (7208)

Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray3) (1947)

Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray3) (1917)

Sheet Bypass Size Sensor 1

Sheet Bypass Size Length Sensor





Paper Exit Guide Solenoid (7115)

Paper Transport Unit Roller Clutch (7213)

(660

4)

NP Sensor (Tray1)

Upper LimitSensor (Tray1)

Paper Path Sensor (Tray1)

Feed Cover 2 Open Sensor

Paper Path Sensor (ADU1)


Inner Exit Sensor


Right Cover Open Sensor

Pap

er T

ray

Sen

sor

1 (T

ray2

)

Pap

er T

ray

Sen

sor

2 (T

ray2

)

Pap

er T

ray

Sen

sor

1 (T

ray1

)

Pap

er T

ray

Sen

sor

2 (T

ray1

)

Sheet Bypass NP Sensor

Paper Transport Cover Open Sensor

Outer Exit Sensor

Paper Path Sensor

AD

UT

RU

FR

M

PC

BIP

C P

CB

(640

2)E

CM

OT

Driv

er(6

504)

(650

1)

+5V

GND_1

+24VM_1

+24VM_2

PGND_1

PGND_2

nOPC1ENB

OPC1DIR

OPC1GAIN

OPC1CLK

nOPC1RDY

+5V_1

GND_1

+24VM_1

+24VM_2

PGND_1

PGND_2

+24VM

+24VM

_1+5V_2

GND_1

+24VM_1

+24VM_2

PGND_1

PGND_2

+5V

GND

+24VM

+24VM

PGND

PGND

LDADUDR

GND

nADUDRSN

nBTM_Y

+24VM_2

nBTM_M

+24VM_4

nBTM_C

+24VM_3

nBTM_K

+5V_2

+24VM_3

+24VM_4

PGND_3

PGND_4

nOPC2ENB

OPC2DIR

OPC2GAIN

OPC2CLK

nOPC2RDY

TDCR

EF_Y

+24V

F_1

TDC

S_Y

GN

D_1

GN

D_6

TDCD

T_Y

GN

D_2

GN

D_4

GN

D_8

GN

D

nWT

BS

N

nTFS

N

LDW

TB

LDTF

LDADUPP0

GND

nADUPP0SN

LDADUPP2

GND

nADUPP2SN

ADUCL2

KYUUIN

FUKKYU

SEITENCL24V

GYAKUTENCL

LDADUPP1GND

nADUPP1SN

ADUCL1

LDHNSPP

nHNSPPSN

GND

LDLEFTOUT

nLEFTOUTSN

GND

LDHNSDO

nHNSDOSN

GND

FUKKYU

TRFMOT_A

+24VM

HNSUCL

TRFMOT_B*

TRFMOT_A*

TRFMOT_B

+24VM

KYUUIN

nFUM_BB

nFUM_B

nFUM_AB

nFUM_A

GND_1

BLSN_Y

GND_2

BLSN_M

GND_3

BLSN_C

GND_4

BLSN_K

LDSTACKFUL

GND_3

nSTACKFULSN

+5V_1

GND_1

+24VM_1

+24VM_2

PGND_1

PGND_2

nDEV2ENB

DEV2GAIN

DEV2CLK

nDEV2RDY

nDEV1ENB

DEV1GAIN

DEV1CLK

nDEV1RDY

PGND

+5V

GND_1

+24VM_2

+24VM_1

PGND_1

PGND_2

nPFMENB

PFMGAIN

PFMCLK

nPFMRDY

LDBL_Y

LDBL_M

LDBL_C

LDBL_K

+24VM_1

ADULD

ADULT

ADUSIIN

ADUSICLK

ADUSIOUT

nADUENB

TRUSIDO

TRUSICLK

TRUSIDI

TRULT

TRULD

TRUMCLK

nTRUENB

24V

24VM

24VM

+24VM

2A

1.5A

1.5A

TDCR

EF_M

+24V

F_2

TDC

S_M

GN

D_3

TDCD

T_M

TDCD

T_C

TDCD

T_K

2.2A

+24VM

+24VM

TDCR

EF_C

+24V

F_3

TDC

S_C

TDCR

EF_K

+24V

F_4

TDC

S_K

GN

D_7

+24VM

nSTRM_BB

nSTRM_B

nSTRM_AB

nSTRM_A

+24VM

FTRM_BB

FTRM_B

FTRM_AB

FTRM_A

nSTRSN1

GND_8

LDSTR1

nFTRSN1

GND_5

LDFTR1

+24V

M

nLU

M2

GND_2

PGN

D

nLSU

TFR

DY

nLSU

TFCN

T

nFTRSN2

GND_6

LDFTR2

nSTRSN2

GND_7

LDSTR2

+24VM_1

+24VM_2

PGND_2

+5V

GND

MOTLT

MOTS1CLK

nRSTMD

nMOTENB

nFUMCLK

nFTRMCLK

FUMREF

MOTSIOUT

PGND_1

nSTRMCLK

+24VM

nSTRKPSOL

GN

D

+24V

M

nCST

SN1a

nRR

CL

GND

LDC

ST2a

GN

D

+24V

M

nCST

SN2a

nPC

RC

L

LDFUEX

LDINR

nINRSN

nFUEXSN

LDC

ST1a

GND

PGND

nMEXFRDY

nMEXFAN

+5V_2

+24VM_3

+24VM_4

PGND_3

PGND_4

nBTMENB

BTMGAIN

BTMCLK

nBTMRDY

GND_2

+24VM

+24VM

LDC

ST2b

GN

D

nCST

SN2b

GN

D

nCST

SN1b

LDC

ST1b

nRRLEDON

pPRESSN

pOHPSN

nPF1UPERSN

nRESEVCLK

pIHFCNT

nIHRDY

GN

D_5

LDFHS1

GND

nHFSSN1

LDHFS2

GND

nHFSSN2

LDHFL

GND

nHFLSN

LDHFS3

GND

nHFSSN3

+5V_RR

GND

+24VM

LDHFPE

GNDnHFPESN

nHFSOL

+24VM

nRRSN

nOHPSN

nHFCL

GND

nPESN1

+5V

GND

nULSN1

+5V

GND

nPPSN1

+5V

+24VM

nPFSOL1

+24VM

nPFCL1

GND

LDPCR

nPCRSN

BTMDIR



Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Sheet Bypass) (3021)

Inner Upper Limit SensorPickup Roller

Solenoid (Sheet Bypass) (3018)

513Ver. 1.1

10 Schematic Diagram10.1. General Circuit Diagram

1220

3040

F

USB

SW

1

1

2

3

4

LN

N

L

N

LN

LN

L Therm3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 138

CN526

CN

606

CN

601

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

21M

91011121314151617181920876543 2122 4 123 41 2 3 5

4 1235

CN517 CN516 CN515

CN

525

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

11

CNSTR

DC

G ST

R

FT

R(Y

)

FT

R(M

)

FT

R(C

)

FT

R(K

)

1

3

2

4

6

5

CN

520

1

2CN

519

CN110

L E N

L E N

INLE

T

CN

134

CN

133

1

2

1

23

1

2

CN

132

CN

131

CN

1

1

3

CN

3C

N5

1

3

2

4

6

5

1

3

2

4

12

CN

1

CN

6

14

16

15

17

19

18

22

20

21

CN

2C

N4

CN

502

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

14

9

11

10

15

1617

18

7

8

13

20

19

2

1

3

1

4

1

3

2

1

3

21

3

2

1

CN51010 89 7 56 2 14 3

2 41 3F

M

2 1

FM

1 32 4 65 7 8

CN521

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1234

1 2

1234

CN504

1 23

S

L

12

Therm2

Therm1

16 17 18

5 12346 5 12345

7 8 9 10 11 12 2928 3013 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 214 5 61 2 3

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

14

9

11

10

15

16

17

18

7

8

13

20

19

1 32 4 65 129 11107 865 9 107 8

CN120

CN6

23

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

7

8

10

19 2120 22 2423

CN2 CN1 CN5

1

CNFTR (Y)

1

CNFTR (M)

1

CNFTR (C)

1

CNFTR (K)

PS

78 56

41 2 3 7 85 6

21

78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22456 123

2 1

CN

605

CN

604

CN

603

CN

602

1

3

2

4

1

3

2

4

5

11

10

12

1

2

1

2

1

3

2

4

6

5

9

11

10

7

8

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

S L

C1

2

1

2

6

9

7

8

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

4

1

3

2

4

5

11

10

12

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

S L

C

L

1

2

1

2

6

9

7

8

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

3

2

M

1

3

2

1

3

2

M

M

1

3

2

4

5

8

6

C

L

1

2

1 32 4

1 32 4 65 129 11107 8 13

S

LC

L

1 2 1 2

1 32 1 32 1 32

3

2

1

7

9

10

11

19

CN11

19

CN22

14

14

3

1

2

14

CN2

13

1

2

CN55

6

CN

529

1

3

2

4

CN

4

1

3

2

4

CN

53

1

3

2

4

6

5

7

8

CN

6

CN

52

1

3

2

4

6

5

7

8

14

13

12

CN

96

CN

79

CN

75

CN

76

PSPSPSPS

CS

L

S

L

CC

LL

CC

LL

L

S

L

Original Sensor

Exit Sensor


PM

MM

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

2

2

2

2

5

5

3

3

3

7

7

9

9

11AD

F P

aper

Fee

d M

otor

(92

5)A

DF

Fee

d M

otor

(92

6)E

xit

Rol

ler

C

lutc

h (8

02)

Inve

rtin

g R

olle

r C

lutc

h 1

(101

0)

Inve

rtin

g R

olle

r C

lutc

h 2

(101

0)

Sta

mp

Sol

enoi

d (7

25)

AD

F P

inch

S

olen

oid

(615

)

AD

F In

vert

ing

Rol

ler

Sol

enoi

d (6

21)

Reg

istr

atio

n C

lutc

h 2

(801

)

Reg

istr

atio

n C

lutc

h 1

(824

)

11

3

1

1

2

2

1

2

CL

ADF Cover Open Sensor



ADF Paper Pass Sensor

Original Size Sensor 4




Paper Feed Clutch (910)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

CN530

1 62 3 4 5

KE

YC

T

CA

RD

RE

AD

Key C

ounte

r

LPH

T1

CN

HT

6

CN

HT

1C

NH

T2

CN

HT

4

CN

HT

5

1 2

1 21 2

1 2

1 2

SW

4

2

1

2

1

CNL

CNNCN173

CN

1711

2

1 2

CN172

1 2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

22

21

20

19

18

17

23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

9

10

11

12

13

14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

CN

661

CN

656

CN

658

CN

654

CN

652

CN

650

1

2

3

4

5

6

CN

659

1

2

3

4

5

CN

660

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

CN

653

1

2

CNADF

1

2

3

4

5

CN

655

CN

657

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CN

662

1

2

3

4

5

6

CN

651

14

8

7

7

6

3

6

11

12

24

25

26

10

11

12

13

27

28

G6 G5

CN

710

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

19

18

17

16

15

20

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

12

13

14

15

CN

707

16

17

11

18

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CN

P70

9

CN

51

43

12

3

4

CN

921

2

CN74 HDD 40P

HD

D

CNSHD1

CN

PH

D1

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

CN

703

INV

ER

TE

R

1

3

5

7

9

11

EXP LAMP

1

2

3

4

CN

58

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

3

4

12

CN

59

1

2

CN

9

1

2

3

4

CN

11

1

2

CN

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

3

4

15

CN

5

12

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

4

1 2 3 41 2 3 4 17 18 19 20

CN1 CN2

1 2 3

CN7

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

3

4

CN

280

15

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

3

4

CN

250

CN

290

Home Position Sensor

Paper Size Sensor 3

Paper Size Sensor 2

Paper Size Sensor 1

ADF Angle Sensor

ADF Open Sensor

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1234C

N14

1

5

1

45

8CN

142

CN

1435

8

10

13

15

2

3

4

7

Option F

inis

her

Connecto

r 1

5

6

G1

Pow

er C

ord

E

123

CN64

1

2

CN

66

CN

65

1

2

SW3

FX

B

1

2

3

4

5

6

CN

64

1

2

3

4

5

6

CNSP

12

14

13

16

13

AP

FH

T2

AP

FH

T3

CN

HT

9

CN

HT

10

1 2 1 2

1A2A

1B

2B

Whi

te

Bla

ck

Whi

te

Bla

ck

1A

2A

1B

2B

Rig

ht U

pper

C

over

Inte

rlock

S

witc

h 2

(420

9)

Rig

ht L

ower

C

over

Inte

rlock

S

witc

h 2

(420

9)

10

9

109

1

3

2

4

6

5

7

8

CN

7

12

9

10

11

12

13

14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

5

4

3

SH

D

SH

D

DF

13

DF

13

SH

DS

HD

SH

DS

HD

CN

352

CN

353

12

CN

356

CN

67

CNSPC

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

3

4

12

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

4

13 13

14 14

CN

8

CN

56

15

15

CN

78

CN

77

DF

11-8P

CN

71

USB123

CN

65

68

P

CN

61

CN

501

CN

57

9P

CN

70

SD

C

ard

SD

C

ard

CN

691

23

45

67

8

LAN

I/F

1

2

3

4

5

CN

54

3

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

20

19

18

17

16

15

4321

3

CN

63

3CN

98

CN110

65 9 107 81 32 4

CN513

13 246 5 129 1110 78 1418 151920 131617

12

34

CN

141

5

1

5

8

CN

142

12 CN

143

3

15

14

CST2

CST3

CST4

Fus

er

COIL

1234

1

3

2

4

6

5

7

8

CN

702

13

13

2

2

25

24

12

11

6 5 4 3 2 1

7

10

8

6

9

11

4

8

11

1

1

1

1

3

2

4

12

15

14

25242322

1 23

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 23

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 23

6 5 4 3 2 1

Y_L

ED

M_L

ED

C_L

ED

K_L

ED

CN523 C

1

3

2

4

6

5

12

9

11

10

7

8

13

CNAPFC

1

CN531

1 2 3

26 27

6 5 4321

43 21

CN

508

15

14

15

16

4

14

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

2130

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

13 246 5

IHC

M

1 32 4 65 7 8 9 10

1

2

3

4

5

76

80

79

78

77

3

2

1

4

5

76

77

80

79

78

14

14

12 11 10 9

1211109

17

32

31

11

123123123123

1

CN

72

3

3

21

3

21

Therm4 2

1

2 41 3F

M

CN

1

CN

2

26

7

456 13 2

123 123

1

3

2

1

LVPS Fan (4103)

Control Panel Power Switch (1412)

3

2

D3

7

1 2

6 45 3 12711 10 9 8126 45 3711 10 9 8

3

for Coin Vendor

L N NL

L

N3

6

1

4

PS

4

CN

708

DC

G

3231

CN514

13 246 512 911 10 78

2 1

36353433

5

6

3

4

7

7

AP

FH

T1

CN

HT

8

1 2

16

17

18

18

17

16

1

2

3

4

6

5

6

5

CN

608

1

3

2

4

5

6

CN

607

1

3

2

4

5

11

10

6

9

7

8

17

18

15

15

5

2

CN

176

15 14 13 12

8

38

37

36

35

34

33

1

2

CN

532

12

CN175

12

3C

N51

2

5

6

2827 2625

123

F

10

32

4

1

CN

HT

7

1 2 3

1

3

2

1

3

2

23 1S

N

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 16 5 4 3 2 1

DRSW1 DRSW3DRSW2

12

1 2

2 1F

DO

PS

NC

4

3

CN

94 21

4

5

CN

66

1 2 31

2

CN

2

CN1

1

3

2

4

6

5

7

8

CN52

1 2 3 4 5 6

JW3

JW4

JW5

JW6

JW3

JW4

JW5

JW6

JW1

JW2

JW1

JW2

FM

IH D

river

Fa

n (4

008)

Pre

sssu

re

Rol

ler

Fan

(480

1)

Scanning Motor (1713)

IH C

ore

Mot

or (

4807

)

Fron

t Cov

er

Det

ectio

n S

witc

h (4

202)

Dru

m

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r_Y

Dru

m

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r_M

Dru

m

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r_C

Dru

m

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r_K

Fron

t Cov

er

Det

ectio

n S

witc

h (4

202)

Mec

hani

cal

Cou

nter

2 (

4423

)

Mec

hani

cal

Cou

nter

1 (

4423

)

Lift

Mot

or

(Tra

y1)

(200

1)

Lift Moto(Tray4) (

Optional Paper Feed Motor (6808)

Lift Motor (Tray3) (2001)

Optional IntermediaRoller Clutch (6813)

NP Sensor (Tray4)



Rig

ht U

pper

C

over

Det

ectio

n S

witc

h (4

202)

Rig

ht L

ower

C

over

Det

ectio

n S

witc

h (4

202)

NP Sensor (Tray3)



NP

S

enso

r (T

ray2

)

Sen

sor

Sen

sor

Upp

er

Lim

itS

enso

r (T

ray2

)

Pap

er

Pat

h S

enso

r (T

ray2

)

Paper Tray Sensor 2 (Tray4)



Option Feed Cover OpenSensor


PAR

TS

WIT

H A

MA

RK

ON

TH

IS S

CH

EM

ATIC

D

IAG

RA

M I

NC

OR

PO

RAT

E S

PE

CIA

L F

EAT

UR

ES

IM

PO

RTA

NT

FO

R S

AF

ET

Y.

WH

EN

SE

RV

ICIN

G,

IT I

S E

SS

EN

TIA

L T

HAT

ON

LY

MA

NU

FAC

TU

RE

R'S

SP

EC

IFIE

D P

AR

TS

AR

E U

SE

D F

OR

T

HE

CR

ITIC

AL

CO

MP

ON

EN

TS

IN

TH

E P

AR

TS

ID

EN

TIF

IED

WIT

H A

MA

RK

IN

TH

E S

CH

EM

ATIC

.

*1: J

apan

Spe

cific

atio

n O

nly

*2: E

urop

e S

peci

ficat

ion

Onl

y

IMP

OR

TA

NT

SA

FE

TY

NO

TIC

E

CS

T

LSU

NF

L

LVP

SIH

AD

F(6

503)

DCB

LCD

Touc

hP

anel

PN

L2

PN

L1

SC

PN

L3IN

V

X2

Y1

X1

Y2 F

PN

L4

RLB

LVS2

AF

E

CC

D

SC

N(6

502)

(660

3)

(402

0)

FR

OM

8

72P

72P

72P

60P

Mem

ory

Mem

ory

Mem

ory

DC

C

KE

Y

(163

0)

(163

1)

(133

3)

(650

5)

(133

1)(1

332)

(132

7)

(132

5)

(1326)

(640

1)

(1217)

(161

2)

(1615)

(650

6)

(401

8)

(6602)

(4014)HVPS MY (4014)HVPS

(4015)HVPS 2

CK

(450

2)

(450

2)

(450

2)

(450

2)

(4303)

(411

6)

(411

7)

(6605)

(660

1)

M

ORSIZ1

ORSIZ3

+5V

GND

+5V

1

ORSIZ22

3

4

5

1

2

3

ORSIZ4

+5V

GND

1

2

3GND

ORSIZ5

1

5

CN

8 4

3

2 CO

IL*2

BLA

CK

WH

ITE

+5V

+5V

GND

GND

+5VLSU

+24NV

D_C

LK_Y

M

+24V

M

nMO

_Y

nSH

_Y

nLD

ENB

LSU

DAO

UT

SPEE

D0

DATA

_M

nDAT

A_M

LSU

DALD

DATA

_C

nDAT

A_C

LSU

DAC

K

DATA

_K

nDAT

A_K

+5VL

SU_1

GN

D_1

nHSY

NC

_Y

GAI

N_Y

PMC

LK

nPM

RDY

nPM

CN

T

PGN

D_1

+24V

F

TH1A

TH1B

TH2A

TH2B

THSTT2

GND

nFUINSN

GND

FUROTSN1

GND

LDFURT1

TH3A

TH3B

LDFUIN

LDPR1

+24V

MLDO

PC_Y

GN

D_1

nOPC

NEW

_Y

nER

SLED

_Y

+24V

F_2

PGN

D_3

nTBF

RDY

+5V

GND

+24VM_2

+24VM_1

PGND_2

PGND_1_APFSIOUT

nAPFENB

APFLT

APFSICLK

APFLD

APFSIIN

+5V

CR

EG_L

D_R

VO2R

GN

D

+24V

F_1

nTCT

_CO

L

nSH

TSO

L

+24V

F

+5V

HU

MSN

Tenp

erat

ure

& H

umid

ity

Sens

or (3

819)

Den

sity

&

Col

or

Dev

iatio

n Se

nsor

(382

0)

Den

sity

&

Col

or

Dev

iatio

n Se

nsor

(382

0)

Col

or

Dev

iatio

n Se

nsor

(382

1)

IH Core Sensor 2

IH Core Sensor 1





Fuser Enter Sensor

TEM

PSN

pLDO

PSN

GN

D_1

GN

D_5

pFDO

PSN

PGN

D_1

LDFURT2

GND

FUROTSN2

ACL

ACN

AC(N)

AC(L)

COM

LCOIL

THSTT1

TS

2T

S1

GN

D

PGN

D

PGN

D

+24V

M

D_C

LK_n

YM

D_C

LK_C

K

D_C

LK_n

CK

SCLK

HV_

T

SDH

V_T

LDH

V_T

FTR

MO

N_Y

FTR

MO

N_M

FTR

MO

N_C

FTR

MO

N_K

SDH

V_C

K

LDH

V_YM

SDH

V_C

D

SCLK

HV_

YM

C_C

LK_Y

M

nSTR

LK

nHVE

N_T

STR

MO

N

nNH

VEN

_YM

nZCROS

IHPWR

pIHENB

nIHADCS

nIHADCK

IHADIN

nIHRELAY

IH_ROTSN2

IHADO

+5V

APFMCLK

+5V

CR

EG_L

D_M

CR

EG_O

T_M

GN

D

+5V

CR

EG_L

D_L

CR

EG_O

T_L

GN

D

+5VL

SU_2

GN

D_2

nHSY

NC

_K

GAI

N_K

+24VM

+24VM

PFCL3

PUSOL3

+5V

CPPSN3

GND

+5V

LBSN3

GND

+5V

PESN3

GND

+24VM

+24VM

PFCL4

PUSOL4

+5V

CPPSN4

GND

+5V

LBSN4

GND

+5V

PESN4

GND

LUM4-1

LUM4-2

+5V

OQDOSN

GND

+5V

CST3a

LUM3-1

LUM3-2

+24VM

+24VM

PGND

PGND

OQMCT

OQMLK

OQMCLK

+24V

OQRRCL

+24V

M_2

nTCT

_BK

nLU

M1

+5V

GN

D

nULS

N2

+5V

GN

D

nPPS

N2

nPFS

OL2

+24V

M

nPFC

L2

+24V

M

nPES

N2

GN

D

GAIN

SGND

+5V

nPRF

CNT

nTBF

CNT

GND

GND

GND

+24V

M

nKC

CN

T

GN

D

nKC

S

nCC

TC

NT

+5V

LMA

24VS

LMAB

LMB

24VS

LMBB

+24V

+5V

+5VP

GND

PNLRXD

PNLTXD

nPNLRST

nLPOW2

nSLPKY

nLPOW1

nWAKE

nDISPOFF

GND

24VO1

SDCL

PPSOL

24VO1

STPSL

PMA

24VO1

PMAB

PMB

24VO1

PMBB

MMA

24VO1

MMAB

MMB

24VO1

MMBB

24VO1

RRCL1

24VO1

RRCL2

24VO1

DXSL1

SBCL1

24VO1

SBCL2

GND

PFOSN

+5V

24VO1

DXSL2

24VO1

24VO1

GND

ADFRST

ARRSN1

ADXSN

ARRSN2

ARRCNT

ARVCL2

ARVCL1

24VO1

+5V

+5V

PGND

PGND

GND

+5VP

AFDOUT

AFENB

AFLTH

AFCLKAFLD

AFDIN

APMCLKAMMCLK

AORGSN

GND

24VO1

PFCL

GND

OPDSN

GND

DXPSN

+5V

GND

ARR2SN

+5V

GND

ARR3SN

+5V

GND

ORSSN3

+5V

GND

ORSSN4

+5V

GND

ORSSN1

+5V

GND

ORSSN2

+5V

+5V

GND

ARR1SN

+5V

GND

ORGSN

5VP

SUBSW

GND

+5V

HPSN

GND

+5V

PCSSN

GND

+5V

PANSN

GND

12V

GND

GND

+5V

+24V

GN

D

+5V

D

GN

D

GND_1

pFINI_POW

GND_2

IPRXD

IPTXD

GND_3

SWL1

SWL2

SWN1

SWN2ACLRLB

ACNRLB

AC

L

AC

N

+24V

GND

PGN

D

+24V

M

LDH

V_C

K

SCLK

HV_

CK

C_C

LK_C

K

nHVE

N_C

K

SDH

V_C

K

ACN

ACL

100V_200V

PGND

PGND

+3.3V

+24V

GND

pLPOW1

+5V

5VP

5V

GND

GND

24V

24V

PGND

PGND

nSACK

SCNRXD

24VS

IICSDA

pSENTIM

nPRST

SCNTXD

IICSCL

nPRGDWN

nSREQ

nVEN

pVREQ

nORGSEN

GND

+24NV

PGND

+5V

GND

+3.3V

GND

GNDSPK

TXOUT0-

+3.3V

TXOUT0+

GND

TXOUT1-

TXOUT1+

GND

TXOUT2-

TXOUT2+

GND

TXCLK-

TXCLK+

GND

+5VP

nLPOW2

GND

+3.3V

SDI

+24V

GND

pLPOW1

+2.5V

PGND

+24V

nPRSN2

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

+3.3V

nVCNTON

nPR

FRDY

GND

GND

+5VD

+2.5V

GND

GND

+5VP

GND

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

OPCN

EWY

nPRSN1

+5V

LD_E

RS_

Y1

LDO

PC_M

GN

D_2

nOPC

NEW

_M

nER

SLED

_MOP

CNEW

M

OPCN

EWC

OPCN

EWK

CR

EG_O

T_R

DC

S_M

CD

SN_C

OL

VO2L

1.4A

GN

D_3

nOPC

NEW

_C

GN

D_4

nSH

_M

nSH

_C

nSH

_K

nMO

_K

nMO

_C

nMO

_M

SPEE

D1

+5V

CST4b

GND

LDPR2

GND

LDIHC1

GND

nIHCSN1

nIHCSN2

LDIHC2

GND

TH4A

TH4B

nIH

CM

_A

+24V

M_1

+24V

M_2

nIH

CM

_AB

nIH

CM

_B

nIH

CM

_BB

pFAXRING

DATA

_Y

nDAT

A_Y

GN

D_4

GN

D_3

GN

D_2

GN

D_1

+24V

F_1

PGN

D_2

nIH

DFR

DY

nIHD

FCNT

LDO

PC_C

nER

SLED

_C

nOPC

NEW

_K

LDO

PC_K

nER

SLED

_K

ADFSN

GND

PGND

LDJD

R

pJD

RSN

GN

D

GN

D

LDJA

M

nJAM

SN

pUDO

PSN

GN

D_2

PGND

PGND

+5VP

+5V_PNL2

LED6

SCN0_PNL2

LED7

SCN5_PNL2

KIN6

LED0

KIN3

GND_PNL2

SCN2_PNL2

SCN1_PNL2

SCN4_PNL2

SCN3_PNL2

KIN4

KIN5

SCN1_PNL3

SCN4_PNL3

SCN3_PNL3

SCN2_PNL3

LED8

LED1

LED5

LED4

KIN0

LED3

LED2

+5V_PNL3

+5VP_PNL3

nLEDSLP

nSLPKY_PNL3

BZ+

BZCLK

GND_PNL3

+5V_PNL4

nLEDACT

nLEDALM2-1

nLEDALM1

nLEDALM2-2

nLEDDAT

+5V

CST4a

GND

+5V

CST3b

GND

SUBSW

+24NV

PGND

+24VF

+24NV

PGND

GN

D

nSH

TSN

LDSH

T

nFIN_SNS

+5VSW

+5VSW

LD_E

RS_

Y2

LD_E

RS_

M1

LD_E

RS_

M2

LD_E

RS_

C1

LD_E

RS_

C2

LD_E

RS_

K1

LD_E

RS_

K2

ACL

ACN

+24V

Vcn

t

GN

D

nHOMESN

+5V_HOME

GND_6

Pap

er F

eed

Rol

ler

Clu

tch

(T

ray2

) (1

947)

Pic

kup

Rol

ler

Sol

enoi

d (T

ray2

) (1

917)

.....

.....

.....

.....

..... 1

20/2

20-2

40 V

AC

Lin

e +

24 V

DC

Lin

e +

12 V

DC

Lin

e +

5 V

DC

Lin

e +

3.3

VD

C L

ine

APR 2005Ver

DP-C262/C322

514. 1.1

memo

DP-C262/C322

11 Finisher Options11.1. DA-FS325, DA-SP4111.1.1. General Description11.1.1.1. Features

1. Through-type StaplerAdoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching.

2. Three Different Auto Stapling PositionsThree different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-pointstapling) are supported.

3. Saddle StitchingA maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle.

4. Punch Mechanism (Option)Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no transparencies).

515APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.1.2. DA-FS325, DA-SP41 Specifications1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly

Item Description RemarksStacking 2 locations

(1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)Face-down(2) Bind Tray (fixed type)

Feed Reference Center referenceStacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS2 Large-size: A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS2

Paper Weight Finisher assembly: 17-24 lb (64 to 90 g/ m2)Saddle Assembly : 17-24 lb (64 to 90 g/ m2)Non-sort mode : Bond 17-40 lb, Index 90-121 lb

(64-220 g/ m2)Mode Non-Sort stack

Sort stackStaple stackBind stack

Stack Height (Note 1) Non-Sort Staple Large-size : 500 sheets Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2)Staple Sort Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheetsFolded stack Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets Stack of 2 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets

Paper Detection Delivery tray : YesBind tray : Yes

Control Panel NoDisplay NoSize (W x D x H) 26.0 x 23.71 x 18.3 in

(661 x 603 x 464 mm)(Excludes installing kit)

Weight 60 lb (27.5 kg)Power Supply 24 VDC from host machineMaximum Power Consumption

At standby : 13 WIn operation : 84 W (staple sort)

Stapling Rotary cam typeStapling Position See Fig. 1-001.Stapling Thickness Finisher

Large-size : 25 sheetsSmall-size : 50 sheetsSaddle : 10 sheets

20 lb (75 g/m2)20 lb (75 g/m2)20 lb (75 g/m2)

Staple Supply Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples)Replacement Staples FQ-SS66 3 CartridgesStaple Detection Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)

516APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note 1 :The number of sheets is computed based on 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper.

Note 2 :Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more.

Stapling Size Front 1-Point Stapling A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5 LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS2Rear 1-Point stapling A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5 LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS2Middle 2-Point Stapling A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5 LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS2Middle 2-Point Stapling A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R

With the saddle in use.

Manual Stapling NoneFolding Method Roller contactFolding Mode Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)Folding Position Center of sheet Requires a margin of ± 0.08

in (± 2 mm) in the center of the sheet for a middle margin.

Saddling Size A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R No special paper.

Item Description Remarks

517APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Staple Position

Fig. 1-001

Stacked Paper Alignment

Fig. 1-002

0.2±0.08 in(5±2 mm)

0.18

±0.0

8 in

(4.5

±2 m

m)

0.2±

0.08

in(5

±2

mm

)

A3 or A4

0.2±0.08 in(5±2 mm)

0.18

±0.0

8 in

(4.5

±2 m

m)

Front 1-point stapling

Middle 2-point stapling

Middle 2-point stapling (w/ saddle in use)

Rear 1-point stapling

3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm)

7.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm)

0.2±

0.08

in(5

±2

mm

)

A4-R

1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm)

6.28±0.16 in (159.5±4 mm)

0.2±

0.08

in(5

±2

mm

)

LDRor LTR

2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm)

7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm)

0.2±

0.08

in(5

±2

mm

)LGL or LTR-R8.5 FLS

1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)

0.2±

0.08

in(5

±2

mm

)

B4 or B5

2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)

7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)

A3

3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm)±1.5 mm1210±2.0 mm2 148.5±2.0 mm27.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm)

A4-R

1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm)

6.28±6.16 in (159.5±4 mm)

LDR

2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm)

7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm)

LTR-R

1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)

B4

2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)

12

12

7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)

Tra

nsfe

r di

rect

ion

Folding position

182±2.0 mm2

12

±1.5 mm1 ±1.5 mm1

±1.5 mm1216±2.0 mm2

12

±1.5 mm1139.7±2.0 mm2

12

1.57

in m

ax.(

40 m

m)

0.79 in max.(20 mm)

Delivery Direction

518APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Punch Unit (Option)

Table 1-002

Item Description RemarksPunching Method Reciprocating method

(sequential processing method)Paper Size 2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU)

2-hole / LGL, LTR-R3-hole / LDR, LTR

For USA and Canada

2- / 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB)4-hole / A3, A4

For EU and Other Destinations

Paper Weight Bond : 17-40 lb, Index : 90-110 lb (64 g/m2~ 200 g/m2)

No transparencies.

Punch Hole Diameter 2-/ 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU)2-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm3-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm

For USA and Canada

2- / 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB)6.5 mm


Punch Waste 2-/ 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU)2-hole / 1500 sheets3-hole / 1500 sheets

For USA and Canada

2- / 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB)1500 sheets


Size (W x D x H) 3.54 x 22.05 x 6.69 in (90 x 560 x 170 mm)

Weight 8.82 lb (4.0 kg)Power Supply 24 VDC / 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit.Maximum Power Consumption

Standby : 2 W max.Operating : 21 W max. (punching)

519APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Hole Position

Fig. 1-003

4.27±0.12 in (108.5±3 mm)3.48±0.12 in (88.5±3 mm)2.56±0.12 in (65±3 mm)2.01±0.12 in (51±3 mm)

A3/A4B5/B4A4-RB5-R

1.12±0.12 in (28.5±3 mm)A3/A4

1.24±0.12 in (31.5±3 mm)

LDR/LTR

2.87±0.12 in (73±3 mm)LGL/LTR-R

1

1

1

1

3.15±0.04 in (80±1 mm)

0.47±0.12 in(12±3 mm)

2.76±0.04 in (70±1 mm)

0.47±0.12 in(12±3 mm)

4.25±0.04 in(108±1 mm)

4.25±0.04 in(108±1 mm)

0.47±0.12 in(12±3 mm)

3.15±0.04 in(80±1 mm)

0.47±0.12 in(12±3 mm)

3.15±0.04 in(80±1 mm)

3.15±0.04 in(80±1 mm)

[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1)

[2] 2-/3-Holes (Puncher Unit-K1)

[3] 4-Holes (Puncher Unit-G1)

520APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.1.3. Names of Parts11.1.1.3.1. Cross Section

1. Finisher Unit

Fig. 1-004

[1] Delivery Tray [2] Aligning Plate (Front, Rear)[3] Paddle [4] Delivery Roller[5] Processing Tray Stopper [6] Feed Roller[7] Punch Unit (Option) [8] Delivery Belt[9] Stack Delivery Roller [10] Stapler

[11] Saddle Unit

[1] [2] [3]

[8] [9] [10] [11]

[4] [5] [6] [7]

521APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Saddle Unit

Fig. 1-0053. Punch Unit (Option)

Fig. 1-006

11.1.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User

Table 1-003

[1] Bind Stopper [2] Bind Tray[3] Stack Feed Roller [4] Bind Delivery Roller[5] Paper Fold Roller [6] Paper Pushing Plate

(1) Die (2) Cam(3) Hole Puncher (Punch Blade) (4) Punch Waste Case

No. Item Timing1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)2 Punch Waste Removal (Optional) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[1] [2] [3] [4]

522APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2. Outline of Operation11.1.2.1. Basic Operations11.1.2.1.1. SpecificationsThe Finisher serves to deliver sheets coming from its host machine. The mode of delivery may be non-sort stack, job offset*, or staple delivery.The Saddle Unit build into the Finisher is used to fold a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher Unit in half for delivery.

All these operations are controlled by various commands sent by the Host Machine in addition to the commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.The Punch Unit (option) is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine.

The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.

Fig. 2-001

Caution:The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.

Puncher Unit DriveSystem (Puncher Unit;Option)

Alignment Drive System

Con

trol

Sys

tem

Stapler Drive System

Delivery Drive System

Feed Drive System

Tray Drive System

Saddle Unit Drive System

523APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.1.2. Outline of the Electrical CircuitryThe sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial).

The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors and other loads in response to the various commands from the Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors and switches to the Host Machine by way of the serial communication line.

The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions:• IC13 (CPU)

Controls sequence of operations.• IC12 (EEP-ROM)

Backs up adjustment settings.• IC6 (EP-ROM)

Stores sequence programs.• IC11 (communication IC)

Communicates with the host machine.• IC1 (regulator IC)

Generates 5 V.

Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.

Fig. 2-002

Motor

IC13CPU

IC12EEP-ROM

IC6EP-ROM

IC1Regulator IC

IC11Communication

IC

Clutch

Switch

Sensor

Finisher Unit

FinisherControllerPCB

Sensor

Motor

Punch ControllerPCB

Punch Unit (Option)

Host Machine DCController PCBPCU

524APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

Fig. 2-003

PI1 CN44-3

-1-2

CN43-1

-3-2

CN42-3

-1-2

+5VENT_S

CN16-10

-12-11

PI6 CN30-3

-1-2

CN29-1

-3-2

CN28-9

-7-8

+5VADJ_TRAY_S

CN5-1

-3-2

PI7 CN31-3

-1-2

-4

-6-5

-6

-4-5

+5VEJCT_BLT_HP

-4

-6-5

PI8 CN32-3

-1-2

-7

-9-8

-3

-1-2

+5VTRY_EMPS

-7

-9-8

PI3 CN55-3

-1-2

CN54-1

-3-2

CN53-3

-1-2

+5VBDL_ROL_HP

CN9-7

-9-8

PI9 CN35-3

-1-2

CN34-1

-3-2

CN33-3

-1-2

+5VLVL_S

CN5-10

-12-11

PI10 CN39-3

-2-1

CN38-1

-2-3

CN37-9

-8-7

+5VBIND_PBIND_L

CN16-1

-2-3

PI2 CN51-1

-3-2

+5VPDL_HP

CN9-1

-3-2

PI4 CN23-3

-1-2

+5VF JOG_HP

CN4

-3-2

PI5 CN36-3

-1-2

+5VR JOG_HP

CN5-13

-15-14

Inlet Sensor

Finisher Controller PCB

When the sensordetects paper, ‘1’.

When the paddle is at home position, ‘1’.

When the swing guide is at home position, ‘1’.

When the aligningplate (Front) is athome position, ‘1’.

When the aligningplate (Rear) is athome position, ‘1’.


When the delivery beltis at home position, ‘1’.

When paper is presenton the tray, ‘1’.

When the paper surface is detected, ‘1’.

When paper is detected, ‘0’.When LED is lit, ‘1’.

Paddle HomePosition Sensor

Swing GuideHome PositionSensor

Aligning PlateHome PositionSensor (Front)

Aligning PlateHome PositionSensor (Rear)

ProcessingTray Sensor

Delivery BeltHome PositionSensor

Paper SurfaceSensor

Folding PositionSensor

Tray Paper Sensor

525APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Fig. 2-004

PI11 CN40-3-1-2

CN38-4-6-5

CN37-6-4-5

+5VBIND_HP

CN16-4-6-5

PI12 CN41-3-1-2

-7-9-8

-3-1-2

+5VBIND_ROL_HP

-7-9-8

PI13 CN47-3-1-2

+5VBIND_EMPS

CN15-1-3-2

PI14 CN52-1-2-3

+5VBIND_CLK

CN9-6-5-4

PI15 CN50-3-1-2

+5VSIFT_UPLMT

CN15-10-12-11

PI16 CN49-3-1-2

+5VSIFT_DNLMT

CN15-7-9-8

PI17 CN48-3-1-2

+5VSIFT_CLK

CN15-4-6-5

PI22 CN25-3-1-2

+5VFDOOR_S

CN4-7-9-8

PI23 CN24-3-1-2

+5VTOPCOV_S

CN4-4-6-5

PI24 CN73-3-1-2

+5VPAPER_F

CN19-1-3-2

MS2N.O. CN69-2

-1

CN8-6

-5

+24VP

Folding HomePosition Sensor

Stack Feed Roller(Upper) HomePosition Sensor

Bind Tray Sensor

Staple/Fold MotorClock Sensor

Shift Upper LimitSensor

Shift Lower LimitSensor

Shift Motor ClockSensor

Front Door Sensor

Upper Cover Sensor

Full Stack Sensor

Joint Switch

Front Door Switch

Stapler Safety Switch


When at folding home position, ‘0’.

When the stack feed roller(Upper) is at home position, ‘1’.


When the tray is at theupper limit, ‘1’.

When the tray is at thelower limit, ‘1’.

When the front dooris open, ‘1’.

When the upper coveris open, ‘1’.

When the paper is full, ‘1’.

When connected tothe host machine, ‘1’.

When the frontdoor is closed, ‘1’.

When the swingguide is closed, ‘1’.

When the staple/fold motor isrotating, alternates between‘1’ and ‘0’.

While the shift motor is rotating, alternates between ‘1’ and ‘0’.

MS1N.O. CN68-2

-1

CN8-4

-3

MS3N.O. CN66-2

-1

CN8-2

-1

JOINT SW

FRONT SW

STPLSAFE SW

526APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

Fig. 2-005

CL1

-1

-2

-2

-1

CN18-1

-2

+24V

B_CLU

Binding Clutch

Feed Motor

Paddle Motor

Delivery Motor

Alignment Motor(Front)

Alignment Motor(Rear)


When the drive is transmitted, ‘1’.

Switches between ‘1’ and ‘0’ according to thedirection of motor rotation.





CN

72

CN56-2

-5

CN10-1

-2

-3 -3

-1 -4

-4 -5

-6 -6

+24V

FEEDMTR_A

FEEDMTR_*A

FEEDMTR_B

FEEDMTR_*B

M2

-6

-5

-1

-2

CN10-7

-8

-4 -3 -9

-3 -4 -10

-2 -5 -11

-1 -6 -12

+24V

PDLMTR_A

PDLMTR_*A

PDLMTR_B

PDLMTR_*B

CN

57M1

-6

-5

-1

-2

CN13-1

-2

-4 -3 -3

-3 -4 -4

-2 -5 -5

-1 -6 -6

+24V

EJCTMTR_A

EJCTMTR_*A

EJCTMTR_B

EJCTMTR_*B

CN

59M3

CN63-1

-2

CN62-5

-4

CN3-1

-2

-3 -3 -3

-4 -2 -4

-5 -1 -5

+24V

FJOGMTR_A

FJOGMTR_*A

FJOGMTR_B

FJOGMTR_*B

M4

CN65-1

-2

CN64-5

-4

CN3-6

-7

-3 -3 -8

-4 -2 -9

-5 -1 -10

+24V

RJOGMTR_A

RJOGMTR_*A

RJOGMTR_B

RJOGMTR_*B

M5

527APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3224. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Fig. 2-006

-2

-1

-2

-1SIFTMTR_1

SIFTMTR_0

Shift Motor


Switches between ‘+’ and‘-’ according to thedirection of motor rotation.C

N70

-2

-1

-2

-1

CN6-1

-2CN

70M6

-2

-1

-2

-1BINDMTR_1

BINDMTR_0

Staple/Fold Motor

Switches between ‘+’ and‘-’ according to thedirection of motor rotation.C

N71

CN6-3

-4M7

528APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3225. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller

Fig. 2-007

PI18

CN72-5 CN72A-5 CN72A-5 SLID_HPCN11-3

Slide HomePosition Sensor

Staple HomePosition Sensor

Staple Empty Sensor

Staple Top Position Sensor

Slide Motor

Finisher Controller PCBStapler Unit

When the stapler is at homeposition, ‘1’.

When the stapler is at stapling home position, ‘0’.

When the cartridge has staples, ‘0’.

When the staple is at top the stapler, ‘0’.

When the stapler is connected, ‘0’.

Switches between ‘1’ and‘0’ according to the directionof motor rotation.

Communication line

PI19CN72-4 CN72A-4 CN72A-4 STPL_HPCN11-4

+5V

+5V

PI20CN72-3 CN72A-3 CN72A-3 HOOK_SCN11-5

+5V

PI21CN72-2 CN72A-2 CN72A-2

SELF_P

STPL_CNCT

SLIDMTR_A

SLIDMTR_*A

SLIDMTR_B

SLIDMTR_*B

GND

CN11-6

+5V

CN72-1 CN72A-1 CN72A-1 CN11-7

CN72-6 CN72A-6 CN72A-6 CN11-2

CN72-7 CN72A-7 CN72A-7 CN11-1

CN72-10 CN72B-5 CN72B-5 CN7-3

CN72-11 CN72B-4 CN72B-4 CN7-4

CN72-12 CN72B-3 CN72B-3 CN7-5

CN72-13 CN72B-2 CN72B-2 CN7-6

+5V+5V

-6

CN2-1

-2

-3

GND-4

TXD-5

RXD-7

+24V

CN1-1+24V

M8

HostMachine

529APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB

Fig. 2-008

PI1P J2008-3

-1-2

+5VPUNCH

J1006-4

-6-5

PI2P J2007-3

-1-2

+5VSLIDE

J1006-1

-3-2

PI3P J2009-3

-1-2

+5V

+5V

+5V+5V

CLOCK

DUSTLED

DUSTPTR

SREG1*SREG2*SREG3*SREG4*PAEND*

J1006-7

-9-8

J1005-1

-2

J1005-3

-4

J1007-12-11-10

-9-8-7

-13

Punch HomePosition Sensor

HorizontalRegistrationHome PositionSensor

Punch MotorClock Sensor

LED121

Waste full LED PCB

PT131

Waste Full Photosensor PCB

Photosensor PCB

PT1PT2

PT3PT4

PT5

Punch Controller PCB

When the hole puncher isat home position, ‘0’.

When the punch slide unit is at home position, ‘1’.

When the light is blocked, ‘0’.

When paper is detected, ‘0’.

While the punch motor is rotating, alternatesbetween ‘0’ and ‘1’.

530APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB

Fig. 2-009

+5V

LEDON5LEDON4LEDON3LEDON2LEDON1

A

B

A*

B*

J1007-6

-1-5-4-3-2

Punch Motor

HorizontalRegistration

Motor

LED5

LED4

LED3LED2

LED1

LED PCB


When ‘1’, LED goes ON.

Switches between ‘+’and ‘-’ according tothe direction of motorrotation.

Switches the pulsesignals according tothe rotation of the motor.

M1P

J1002-1

-2

M2P

J1001-1

-2

-3

-4

531APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.2. Feed / Drive System11.1.2.2.1. OutlineThe Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in two).

If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray.Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):

Fig. 2-010

1. Normal Deliverya. Simple Stacking

The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.

Fig. 2-011

Deliverymethod

Normal delivery

Punching Simple stacking

Job offset

Stapling Front 1-point stapling

Stitching Middle 2-point stapling

Rear 1-point stapling

Middle 2-point stapling

Saddle delivery

Tray

Paper

532APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322b. Job Offset

The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets)

Fig. 2-012

Results of offset delivery (4 jobs)

(Delivery Direction)

3rd set

1st set

4th set

2nd set

533APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322c. Stapling

The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.

Fig. 2-013

d. Saddle DeliveryThe Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.

Fig. 2-014

534APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.2.2. Feed / Delivery1. Outline

The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray, or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded.

Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving and aligning sheets. These motors are controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB.

The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or passage of sheets.

If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates the presence of a jam to the Host Machine.

Table 2-001

Notation Name Description Connector on Finisher Controller PCB

M1 Paddle Motor Stepping Motor CN10M2 Feed Motor Stepping Motor CN10M3 Delivery Motor Stepping Motor CN13M4 Alignment Plate Motor (Front) Stepping Motor CN3M5 Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Stepping Motor CN3M7 Staple / Fold Motor Brush DC Motor CN6

535APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 2-015

Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Alig

nmen

t Pla

te M

otor

(fron

t) dr

ive

sign

al F

JOG

MTR

Shi

ft M

otor

Driv

e S

igna

l SIF

TMTR

Del

iver

y M

otor

Driv

e S

igna

l EJC

TMTR

Slid

e M

otor

Driv

e S

igna

l SLI

DM

TR

Sta

ple/

Fold

Mot

or D

rive

Sig

nal B

IND

MTR

Sta

ple/

Fold

Mot

or C

lock

Det

ect S

igna

l B

IND

_CLK

Alig

nmen

t Pla

te M

otor

(rea

r) d

rive

sign

al R

JOG

MTR

Bin

d C

lutc

h D

rive

Sig

nal B

_CLU

Feed

Mot

orD

rive

Sig

nal F

EE

DM

TR

Pad

dle

Mot

orD

rive

Sig

nal P

DLM

TR

M4 M5 M2 M1

CL

M7

M3

M6M8

PI14

536APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 2-016

Table 2-002

Notation Name Description Connector on Finisher Controller PCB

PI1 Inlet Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16PI10 Fold Position Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16


Inle

t pap

er d

etec

t sig

nal E

NT

_P

Fol

d po

sitio

n pa

per

dete

ct s

igna

l BIN

D_P

PI1

PI10

537APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.2.3. Job Offset1. Outline

"Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled forward or backward for sorting.

Switching between the forward and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate (Front) and an aligning plate (Rear).The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray and then fed toward the stopper by the Paddle.

A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling.

At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4) and the Aligning Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions.

Table 2-003

Fig. 2-017

Sensor Symbol Connector Function Motor SymbolAligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor

PI4 CN4-3 Drives the Aligning Plate (Front)

Aligning Plate (Front) Motor

M4

Aligning Plate (Rear) Home Position Sensor

PI5 CN5-15 Drives the Aligning Plate (Rear)

Aligning Plate (Rear) Motor

M5

Swing Guide Home Position Sensor

PI3 CN9-9 Drives the Swing Guide Drive

Paddle Motor M2

Paddle Home Position Sensor

PI2 CN9-3 Drives the Paddle (feeds paper)

Paddle Motor M2

Aligning Plate(Front)

Light-Shielding Plate

Alignment Plate (Front) Motor (M4) Aligning plate (Rear)

motor (M5)

Aligning plate (Rear)

Paper

Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)

(Front)

Aligning plate (Rear) home position sensor (PI5)

Light-shielding plate

538APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Processing Tray Paper Stacking Operation

A sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray. Then, the Paddle Taps on the sheet surface twice (once for the second and subsequent sheets) to position the sheet against the Processing Tray Stopper.

Fig.2-018

3. Offset OperationEach sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front) and the Aligning Plate (Rear).The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.

Fig. 2-019 Offsetting in the forward direction

Fig. 2-020 Offsetting in the backward direction

PaperAligning Plate

Paddle

Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

Swing Guide

Processing Tray Stopper

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Delivery Belt

Aligning Plate (Rear)

Aligning Plate (Front)

Sheet to be offset

Tray

Aligning Plate (Rear)

Aligning Plate (Front)

Sheet to be offset

Tray

539APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3224. Stack Delivery Operation

Stack delivery takes place when 10 sheets of large-size paper or 30 sheets of small-size paper (A5- and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets) have been stacked on the Processing Tray with them offset in either direction.

The Paddle Motor rotates and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.

Fig. 2-021

Job offset sequence

Fig. 2-022

Swing Guide

Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Start signal

360msec 360msec

60msec 30msec 220msec

CW rotation CCW rotation

360msec 360msec

Host machine delivery signal

Processing Tray Sensor(PI6)

Feed Motor (M1)

Delivery Motor (M3)

Delivery Belt HomePosition Sensor (PI7)

Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)Stapler Safety Switch (MS3)Alignment Motor (Front) (M4)Aligning Plate Home PositionSensor (Front) (PI4)

Aligning Plate Home PositionSensor (Rear) (PI5)

Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5)

Paddle Motor (M2)

540APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.3. Stapling Operation11.1.2.3.1. OutlineStaple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit. The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size.

When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor (M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state.

Table 2-004

Fig. 2-023

Sensor Symbol Connector Function RemarksSlide Home Position Sensor

PI18 CN11-3 Detects the home position for the stapler moving back and forth

—

Staple Home Position Sensor

PI19 CN11-4 Detects the home position for the stapling operation

In the stapler

Staple Empty Sensor PI20 CN11-5 Detects presence or absence of staples in the cartridge

In the stapler

Staple Top Position Sensor

PI21 CN11-6 Detects the staple top position In the stapler

Function Motor Symbol RemarksMoves the Stapler. Slide Motor M8 —Performs Stapling Operation. Staple/Fold

MotorM7 —

Slide Motor(M8)

Paper Stack

Stapler


Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)

(Deliver Direction)

541APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.3.2. Stapling OperationWhen stacking and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers.

The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position (when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.

Fig. 2-024

Fig. 2-025

Paper Stack

Swing Guide

Delivery Tray


Processing Tray Stopper

Stapler

StackDeliveryRoller

(Lower)

12±3 mm

Paddle Motor (M2)

Swing Guide HomePosition Sensor (PI3)


Staple Safety Switch(MS3)

Swing Guide

Stack Delivery Roller(Upper)

Stack Delivery Roller(Lower)

542APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.3.3. Delivery Operation after StaplingWhen stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction.

The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.

Fig. 2-026

Fig. 2-027

Paper Stack

Swing Guide

Delivery Belt

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Delivery Tray Stapler

Paddle Motor (M2)

Staple SafetySwitch (MS3)

Swing Guide

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower) Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)


543APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.3.4. Stapler UnitThe Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19).The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer (IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB.

When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position.The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge.The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the Staple Cartridge.

The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch (MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger in the stapler.

Fig. 2-028

Fig. 2-029Finisher Controller PCB

Sta

ple

hom

e po

sitio

n de

tect

sig

nal

Sta

ple

empt

y de

tect

sig

nal

Sta

ple

top

posi

tion

dete

ct s

igna

l

Sta

ple/

hold

mot

or d

rive

sign

al

M7

544APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3221. Stapler Movement Controller

The Stapler Unit is moved by the Slide Motor (M8). Its home position is detected by the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18). The Stapler waits at the back irrespective of the staple mode and paper size. After paper has been stacked on the Processing Tray, the Stapler is moved to the specified stapling position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine.

Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple mode.

a. Front 1-Point StaplingThe Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation.

Fig. 2-030

b. Rear 1-Point StaplingThe Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.

Fig. 2-031

Feed direction

Standby position

Stapling position

Stapler

Stopper

Feed direction

Standby positionStapling position

Stapler

Stopper

545APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322c. Middle 2-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation. The Stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then staples it at the front stapling position.

Fig. 2-032

d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode)The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then staples it at the front stapling position.

Fig. 2-033

Feed direction

Standby position

Stapling position

Stapling position

Stapler

Stopper

Feed direction

Standby position

Stapling position

Stapling position

Stapler

Stopper

546APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Stapling Operation SequenceRear 1-Point Stapling of 2 Sheets

Fig. 2-034

Start Signal

20msec

CW rotation CCW rotation

Host Machine Delivery Signal

10msec

360msec 360msec

???StapleInlet Sensor (PI1)

Processing Tray Sensor(PI6)

Feed Motor (M1)

Delivery Motor (M3)

Delivery Belt HomePosition Sensor (PI7)

Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)

Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)

Stapler Safety Switch (MS3)

Alignment Motor (front) (M4)

Aligning Plate Home PositionSensor (front) (PI4)

Staple Home PositionSensor (PI9)

Staple/Fold Motor (M7)

Paddle Motor (M2)

547APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.4. Delivery Tray Operation11.1.2.4.1. OutlineThe Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit.The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this tray. This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper.

The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up and down using a shift motor (M6).The Finisher has a tray paper sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray.The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position.

When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking operation.

The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is ascending.The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending.The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paperaccording to the stack height.

Fig. 2-035

Shift Upper Limit Sensor(PI15)

Shift Lower Limit Sensor(PI16)

Tray Paper Sensor (PI8)

Shift Motor Clock Sensor(PI17)

Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)

Edge

Delivery Tray

Full Stack Sensor (PI24)

Shift Motor (M6)

548APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.5. Saddle Unit11.1.2.5.1. Basic Operations

1. OutlineThe Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher.These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB.The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.

11.1.2.5.2. Feed / Drive System1. Outline

This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher, folds it, and delivers it to the Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine.

That is, the machine performans the following operations :1) Paper Feed-in2) Stitching3) Stack Feed4) Folding / Delivery

Fig. 2-036

1) Paper feed-in2) Stitching

3) Stack feed

4) Folding/delivery

549APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322a. Paper Feed-in

After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.

Fig. 2-037

b. StitchingWhen the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the Stapler stitches the paper stack.When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without performing the stitching operation.

Fig. 2-038


Paper Stack


Staple

Stapler (Lower)

Stapler (Upper)

550APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322c. Stack Feed

The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller's nip part.

Fig. 2-039

d. Folding / DeliveryThe Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind Tray.

Fig. 2-040

Stack Feed Roller (Upper)

Paper Pushing Plate

Paper Fold Roller

Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Paper Fold Rollers

Bind Delivery Rollers

551APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.5.3. Paper Feed System1. Outline

The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step (stitching and folding) to be performed.

When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2) rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack (stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading edge of the paper stack is not bent.

Fig. 2-041

Paper stack

Fold Position Sensor




552APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.5.4. Stack Feed System1. Outline

The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position.When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1) is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor (M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.

Fig. 2-042

Feed Amount


Stack Feed Roller (Upper)

553APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.5.5. Fold / Delivery System1. Outline

The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate.The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14).

Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit and to prevent a paper stack from touching the rollers.

A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers and Paper Pushing Plate.

The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers.The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7).A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack; however, it is not used to detect a jam.

2. Paper FoldingPaper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate.Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then, the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers.

Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area and the area at the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center and left and right ends, allowing a paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing a paper stack to be folded while being fed.

Fig. 2-043

Sensor Flag

Cam

Paper stack

Paper Fold Roller (Upper)

Staple/FoldMotor

M7

Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)

Paper Pushing Plate

Paper Fold Roller (Lower)

554APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 2-044

[Paper Folding Start Position]

Fig. 2-045

FoldingHome Position Sensor (PI11)

Paper Pushing Plate

Paper Fold Roller (Upper)

Staple/FoldMotor M7

Paper Fold Roller (Lower)

Paper stack

Paper Stack

Paper Push Plate

Folds/feeds a paper stack.

Inlet

Outlet

Feeds a paper stack.

555APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 2-046CW rotation CCW rotation

?????StapleFeed Motor (M2)

Delivery Motor (M3)

Paddle Motor (M1)

Paddle Home PositionSensor (PI2)

Swing Guide HomePosition Sensor (PI3)

Stapler Safety Switch(MS3)

Slide Motor (M8)

Staple/Fold Motor (M7)

Staple Home PositionSensor (PI19)

Folding Position Sensor(PI10)

Stack Feed Roller (Upper)Home Position Sensor (PI12)

Binding Clutch (CL1)

Bind Tray Sensor (PI13)

Folding Home PositionSensor (PI11)

50msec

13571msec

556APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.6. Punch Unit (Option)11.1.2.6.1. Basic Operations

1. OutlineThe Punch Unit is an option and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher. The Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host Machine move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher.

When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.

Fig. 2-047

Fin

ishe

r U

nit C

ontr

ol S

yste

m

Punch ControllerPCB

Punch Drive System

Horizontal RegistrationDrive System

557APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.6.2. Punching Operation1. Outline

The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets that have been sent from the Host Machine and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along the trailing edge of the sheet.

The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade).The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching operation.The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P).

A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180° from its home position.As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path, together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes.

The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping Motor.

The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB.

558APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 2-048

Punch Controller PCB (1/2)

Punch Controller PCB (2/2)

Tra

iling

Edg

e D

etec

tion

Sig

nal

(LE

D5,

PT

5) P

AE

ND

Hor

izon

tal R

egis

trat

ion

Det

ectio

nS

igna

l (LE

D1~

4, P

T1~

4) S

RE

G1~

4

Hor

izon

tal R

egis

trat

ion

Mot

or(M

2P)

Driv

e S

igna

l

Pun

ch M

otor

(M

1P)

Driv

e S

igna

l

Pun

ch M

otor

Clo

ck (

PI3

P)

Det

ectio

n S

igna

l PU

NC

HC

LK

Was

te F

ull D

etec

tion

Sig

nal

(LE

D12

1, P

T13

1) D

FU

LL

Hor

izon

tal R

egis

trat

ion

Hom

e P

ositi

on(P

I2P

) D

etec

tion

Sig

nal S

RE

GH

P

Pun

ch H

ome

Pos

ition

(P

I1P

)D

etec

tion

Sig

nal P

UN

CH

HP

PT12

34

52

34

5

LED1

PT131

LED121

559APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Punching Operation

The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).

The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB).The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180° from the home position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole).

a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole TypeThe home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON.

The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper.1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.

Fig. 2-049

2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.

Fig. 2-050

Punch Home PositionSensor (PI1P)

Sensor Flag

Punch Shaft

Eccentric Cam HolePuncher

Die

Die

(Punch Shaft at Rest/Home Position)

(Punch Shaft CW Rotationby 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /Punching operation Ends)

Paper

Waste Paper


(Punch Shaft CCW Rotationby 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /End of Punching Operation)

560APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322b. 2-/3-Hole Type

The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes, the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180° (half circumference) and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference of the Punch Shaft.The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° counter-clockwise and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the other half circumference of the Punch Shaft.

The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper:1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.

Fig. 2-051

While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction.

Fig. 2-052

2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.

Fig. 2-053


Sensor Flag

Punch Shaft

Eccentric Cam HolePuncher

Die

Die


(Punch Shaft CW Rotationby 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /End of Punching Operation)

Paper

Waste Paper


(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 90 /Punch at Upper Limit)

(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /Punch Back to Limit Position)


(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /End of Punching Operation)

561APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction(moving up the Hole Puncher).

Fig. 2-054

3. Horizontal Registration OperationThe horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1 through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in relation to the size of the sheet).

The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows:1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor

(LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward the front.

Fig. 2-055


(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 90 /Punch at Upper Limit)

(Punch CCW Rotation by 180 /Punch Back at Initial Position)

Punch Slide Unit

Horizontal RegistrationMotor (M2P)

(Direction of Paper Delivery)

Trailing Edge Sensor(LED5, PT5)

Paper

562APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size

signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.

Fig. 2-056

3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch holes in the sheet.

Fig. 2-057

4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide Unit to its home position.

5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.

Fig. 2-058

Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1);used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4,LTR, 279x432 (11"x17").

Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2);used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5,LTR-R, LGL.

Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 (LED3, PT3);used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R.

Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 (LED4, PT4);used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.

Punch

CW Rotation CCW Rotation

Trailing Edge Sensor(LED5, PT5)

Horizontal RegistrationSensor (LED1~4, PT1~4)


Horizontal Registration HomePosition Sensor (PI2P)

Horizontal RegistrationMotor (M2P)

Feed Motor (M2)

Punch Motor (M1P)

563APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.7. Detecting Jams11.1.2.7.1. OutlineThe Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the Host Machine).

Fig. 2-059

1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011)If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.

Fig. 2-060

2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021)If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor detected the paper's front edge.

Fig. 2-061

PI1

PI10

PI1 : Inlet SensorPI10 : Folding Position Sensor


Jam check

Inlet Sensor (PI1)

approx. 1.5sec.

Normal

Feed Motor (M1)


Jam check

Inlet Sensor (PI1)

approx. 1.5sec.

Jam

Feed Motor (M1)

Jam check

Inlet Sensor (PI1)

approx. 2sec.

Normal

Feed Motor (M1)

Jam check

Inlet Sensor (PI1)

approx. 2sec.

Jam

Feed Motor (M1)

564APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. Folding Position Sensor Delay Jam (1012)

In bind mode, the Folding Position Sensor does not detect paper 1200 msec after the Intermediate Processing Tray starts to send paper to the stapling position.

Fig. 2-062

4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022)In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the Staple/Fold Motor is driven.

Fig. 2-063

5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008)The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened while the system is in operation (paper on the move).

6. Staple Jam (1006)The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON).

7. Punch Jam• Paper stuck at punch stapler• Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.

Jam CheckFolding PositionSensor (PI10)

1200 ms

Normal

Delivery Motor (M3)

Jam CheckFolding PositionSensor (PI10)

1200 ms

Jam

Delivery Motor (M3)

Jam Check

Folding PositionSensor (PI10)Staple/FoldMotor (M7)

Approx. 10.5sec.

Normal

Jam Check

Folding PositionSensor (PI10)Staple/FoldMotor (M7)

Approx. 10.5sec.

Jam

565APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.2.8. Power Supply System11.1.2.8.1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly

1. OutlineWhen the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24 VDC; one is for the motors and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1) of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors and ICs on PCBs.

If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24 VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) is open.Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :

Fig. 2-064

2. Protective MechanismA circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.

11.1.2.8.2. Punch Unit (Option)1. Outline

When the Host Machine is turned on, the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with 24-V and 5-V power.The 24-V power is used to drive the motors, while the 5-V power is used by sensors and the ICs on the Punch Controller PCB.The 24-V power to the motors will be cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2) or the Front Door Switch (MS1) of the Finisher Unit is open.

Host Machine

Motor

Motor

Clutch

Sensor

Logic System

Punch Controller PCB(Puncher Unit; Option)

Regulator IC

Circuit Breaker(CB1)

FinisherController PCB

(IC1)

24VP

24V

24V

24V

5V

5V

Joint Switch(MS2)

Stapler Safety Switch(MS3)

Front Door Switch(MS1)

24VL

566APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322Fig. 2-062 is a block diagram for the power supply system :

Fig. 2-065

2. Protective MechanismsThe 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P) and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.

FinisherControllerPCB

24V 24V

5V

5V


Motors

Sensors

Logic System5V

567APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.3. Mechanical Systems11.1.3.1. Finisher Saddle Unit11.1.3.1.1. External Components

Fig. 3-001

[1] Tray (4)[2] Rear Cover (3)[3] Front Cover (5)[4] Front Door[5] Upper Door[6] Upper Right Cover Assembly (4)[7] Jam Removal CoverThe number in parentheses indicates the number of Mounting Screws used.

Fig. 3-002

1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray(1) Remove the four Screws [1], and detach the

Delivery Tray [2].

Fig. 3-003

1-2. Removing the Front Cover(1) Open the Front Door [1].(2) While picking the Claw [2], detach the Fold Jam

Releasing Dial [3].(3) Remove 2 Screws [4].

[1] [5] [6] [2]

[7]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]

[1] [4]

[3]

[2]

[4]

568APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-004

(4) Remove 3 Screws [5], and detach the Front Cover [6].

Fig. 3-005

1-3. Removing the Rear Cover(1) Remove 2 Screws [1] on the pickup side, and

remove 1 Screw [2] on the delivery side; then, detach the Rear Cover [3].

Fig. 3-006

[6]

[5]

[5]

[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

569APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-007

1-4. Removing the Upper Cover(1) Open the Upper Cover [1], and turn the Cover

Band Retainer [2] to the left to remove it.(2) Remove the Cover Band [3].

Fig. 3-008

(3) Remove 1 Screw [4], and detach the Processing Tray Rear Cover [5]; then, detach the Upper Cover [6].

[3] [2]

[1]

[6]

[5]

[4]

570APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-009

1-5. Removing the Processing Tray Upper Cover(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)(3) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)(4) Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove the

Screw [2].

Fig. 3-010

(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

571APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-011

Fig. 3-012

1-6. Removing the Upper Right Cover Assembly(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)(3) Remove 2 Screws [1] at the front and the two

Screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the Upper Right Cover Assembly [3].

Fig. 3-013

1-7. Removing the Saddle Guide(1) Remove the Delivery Tray. (See 1.)(2) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)(3) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)(4) Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate (front) [1]

and the Delivery Tray Support Plate (rear) [2] to the outside from the rail grooves.

(5) Remove 4 Screws [3].

Fig. 3-014

(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and free the engagement of the Paper surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side Guide [4].

[1]

[3]

[3]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[5]

[4]

572APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-015

Caution:Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5] in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (middle) [6].After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide is mounted securely.[5]

[5]

[6]

[6]

573APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.3.1.2. Feeding System

Fig. 3-016

2-1. Removing the Stapler Unit

(1) Open the Front Door [1].(2) Slide out the Stapler Unit [3] while pressing the

Stopper Lever [2].

Fig. 3-017

Caution:Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots staples will shift from the position where the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives Staples.

Fig. 3-18

2-2. Adjusting the Stapler PhaseWhen the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason, the staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) does not match the staple bending timing of the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler). Adjust the Stapler phase following the procedure described below.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

Gear

Timing Belt

Gear

574APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-019

(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple Driver [1].

(2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side Cover [5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].

Fig. 3-020

(3) Remove 2 E-Rings [6] to remove the Staple Jam Releasing Gear [7], Timing Belt [8], and Relay Gear 1 [9]. Remove the Spacer and Spring at the back of the Staple Jam Releasing Gear.

(4) Remove 1 Screw [10] and Spring [11] to remove the Belt Tentioner [12].

Fig. 3-021

(5) Remove the Timing Belt [13].(6) Remove 1 E-Ring [14] to remove the Staple

Position Check Gear [15].

[4]

[1][2]

[5]

[3]

[7]

[6]

[11]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[12]

[14]

[13]

[15]

575APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-022

(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at the back.

Fig. 3-023

(8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the Gear.

Fig. 3-024

(9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in the Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole [20] at the back.

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

576APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-025

(10) Insert a Pin [21] with a diameter of approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the Gear.

Fig. 3-026

(11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the Timing Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].

Fig. 3-027

(12) Mount the Staple Position Check Gear [27] so that the Blue Mark [25] on the Staple Position Check Gear is aligned with the Round Hole [26] in the frame.

Caution:The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with the Round Hole is the home position for stapling. If the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some reason, the home position deviates, making it impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge. If such a case, the Gear can be returned to the home position by checking Blue Mark position. Therefore, it is necessary to mount the Gear at the correct position.

Fig. 3-028

(13) Remove the Pin securing the Gear to the Cam.(14) Assemble the Spring [28], Spacer [29], Staple

Jam Releasing Gear [30], Timing Belt [31], and Relay Gear [32] and secure them with 1 E-Ring [33].

[21]

[23]

[22]

[24]

[25]

[27]

[26]

[31]

[32]

[33]

[29]

[30]

[28]

577APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-029

2-3. Adjusting the Phase of the Gear in the Saddle UnitIf the Gears at the front of the Saddle Unit or the Paper Fold Rollers in the Sale Unit are replaced or removed for some reason, adjust the Gear phase following the procedure described below.

(1) The Paper Fold Rollers [1] and Saddle Cam [2] must be positioned as shown below.

Fig. 3-030

(2) With the Paper Fold Rollers and Saddle Cam positioned as shown in Fig. 3-029, mount Gears as shown in Fig. 3-030.

• Align the mark (either of two marks) on the saddle cam drive gear [3] with the mark on the relay gear [4] (on the half of the periphery where gears with a smaller face width are arranged).

• With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [3] aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear [4], align the other mark on the relay gear with the rib of the Paper Folding Roller Drive Gear [5].

Fig. 3-031

2-4. Removing the Saddle Unit(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)(3) Open the Jam Removal Cover [1]; then, remove

2 Screws [2] and the Right Stay [3].

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[2]

578APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-032

(4) Turn the Fold Jam Releasing Dial Assembly [4] to move the Paper Retaining Plate Assembly [5] to the inside.

Fig. 3-033

(5) Remove the Stop Ring [6], and detach the Timing Belt [7].

(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [8].

Fig. 3-034

(7) Remove 3 Screws [9], and slide out the Stapler Unit [10] slightly to the front.

(8) Slide out the Saddle Unit [11] to the front.

Fig. 3-035

2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly(1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover.

(See 1-5.)(2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.)(3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5

Connectors [2].

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9] [11]

[10] [9]

[1]

[2]

[2] [2][1]

579APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-036

(4) Pull the processing Stopper Base [3] to the front, and free the Claw [5] at the front and the Claw [6] at the rear of the Processing Stopper [4].

Fig. 3-037

(5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [7].(6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and

detach the Motor Harness [9].

[3]

[6]

[4] [4][5]

[9]

[8]

[7]

580APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-038

(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the flange [15], and detach the Timing Belt [11].

(8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].

Fig. 3-039

(9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the Processing Tray Assembly [16] to the rear; then, lift it to detach.

[12]

[14]

[13][10]

[15]

[11]

[16]

[15]

581APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-040

2-6. Removing the Paddle Assembly(1) Remove the Processing Tray Assembly.

(See 2-3.)(2) Place the Processing Tray Assembly [1] as

shown.Caution:

Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning Plate [2].

Fig. 3-041

(3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2 Screws [4].

Fig. 3-042

(4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5] and the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.

[1]

[2]

[4]

[4]

[3]

[6]

[5]

582APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-043

2-7. Removing the Staple/Fold Drive Unit(1) Open the Front Door [1], and slide out the

Stapler Unit [2] slightly to the front.

Fig. 3-044

(2) Remove 1 screw [3], and detach the Interface Retainer [4].

(3) Free the six Harness Retainers [5], and disconnect the Connector [6].

(4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness Retainer [5].

(5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8]; then, disconnect the two Connectors [9].

Fig. 3-045

(6) Release the Harness Retainer [10], and disconnect the Connector [11].

(7) Free the Harness [12] from the Harness Retainer [10].

(8) Free the Harness [12] for the Edge Saddle [13]; and disconnect the two Connectors [14].

[1][2]

[9]

[8][7]

[5]

[5][5]

[7]

[7]

[7][4]

[3][5]

[6]

[11]

[12]

[10][13]

[14]

583APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-046

(9) Remove 1 Screw [15], and free the Claw [17] of the Harness Guide from the Long Angle [16] of the Base Plate.

Fig. 3-047

(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].

Fig. 3-048


[15]

[16] [17]

[18]

[20]

[18] [19]

[21]

[21]

[21]

584APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-049

(12) Remove 1 Screw [22], and detach the Staple/Fold Drive Unit [23].

Fig. 3-050

2-8. Removing the Feed Motor Unit(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)(2) Release the Harness Retainer [5], and

disconnect the Connector [6].(3) Disconnect the Connector [7].(4) Remove 1 Screw [1], and detach the Harness

Guide [2].(5) Remove 3 Screws [3], and detach the Feed

Motor Unit [4].

[22]

[23]

[3]

[3]

[1]

[2][4]

[7]

[6]

[5]

585APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-051

2-9. Removing the Feed Roller(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)(2) Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly.

(See 1-6.)(3) Remove the Feed Motor Unit. (See 2-6.)(4) Remove 1 Screw [1].(5) Remove the Stop Ring [2], and detach the

Bushing [3].

Fig. 3-052


[1] [3]

[2]

[4]

586APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-053

(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6] while spreading the Claw.

(8) Remove the Stop Ring [7], and detach the Bushing [8].

(9) Remove 1 Screws [9], and detach the Inlet Sensor [10].

(10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].

Fig. 3-054

(11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].

Fig. 3-055

2-10. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (upper)(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)(2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.

[5][9]

[10]

[11]

[7] [6]

[8]

[12]

[1]

587APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-056

(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (upper) [3].

Fig. 3-057

(4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4] from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller (upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].

Fig. 3-058

(5) Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4], and then push it down to detach the Stack Deliver Roller (upper) [4].

(6) Likewise, remove the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [6] at the front.

[3]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[4]

588APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-059

2-11. Removing the Paddle(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)(2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.

Fig. 3-060

(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (upper) [3].

Fig. 3-061

(4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[5]

[4]

589APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-062

(5) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].

Fig. 3-063

(6) Remove the Paddle [6] in the direction of the arrow.

(7) Likewise, remove the other Paddle.

Fig. 3-064

2-12. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (lower)/Delivery Belt

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly, and separate it from the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-4.)

(2) Slide the Aligning Plate (front) [2] and the Aligning Plate (rear) [3] of the Processing Tray Assembly [1] by sliding them to the outside.

Fig. 3-065

(3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].

[4]

[5]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

590APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-066

(4) Remove the Screw [5], and detach the Paper Guide (front) [7] while freeing 2 Claws [6].

Fig. 3-067

(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].

Fig. 3-068

(6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2 Bushings [12] to the inside.

Fig. 3-069

(7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to detach.

[5]

[7]

[6]

[8]

[10]

[9]

[12]

[12]

[11]

[11]

[13]

[14] [13]

591APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.3.1.3. PCBs

Fig. 3-070

(8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller (lower) [15] and 2 Delivery Belts [16].

Fig. 3-071

Caution:Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.

Fig. 3-072

3-1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)(2) Disconnect 17 Connectors [1], and remove 1

Screw [2].(3) Free the PCB Retainer [3], and detach the

Finisher Controller PCB [4].

Fig. 3-073

3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB(1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on

the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to slide the Stapler to the frontmost point.

(2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)

[16]

[15]

[17]

[2]

[1][1]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

592APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-074

(3) Place the Stapler Unit [3] as shown.(4) Remove 2 Screws [4], and detach the Guide [5].

Fig. 3-075

(5) Turn the Tab [2] on the Stapler side in the direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw [7] of the Slide Home Position PCB [6] is in view through the round hole.

(6) Remove the Fixing Screw [7].

Fig. 3-076

(7) Disconnect the Connector [8].(8) Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer [9].(9) Free the Lock [10] of the Connector in the

direction of the arrow; then, detach the Flexible Cable [11], and then detach the Slide Home Position PCB [12].

[4]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[2]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[12]

[9]

[10]

[11]

593APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.3.2. Punch Unit (Option)11.1.3.2.1. Puncher Driving System

Fig. 3-077

1-1. Removing the Punch Motor(1) Remove 2 Screws [1].(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the

Punch Motor [3].

Fig. 3-078

1-2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor(1) Disconnect Connector J1001 [1].(2) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide

[2].(3) Remove 2 Screws [4] to remove the Horizontal

Registration Motor [5].

Fig. 3-079

1-3. Removing the Punch Unit(1) Remove the Waste Case.(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] to detach the Jam

Processing Cover [2].

Fig. 3-080

(3) Disconnect the Connector J1005 [3].(4) Remove the Harness [5] from the Harness Guide

[4].

[2]

[1] [3]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2][5]

[1] [2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

594APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-081

(5) Disconnect the Connector [6].(6) Remove 1 Screw [7] and Sensor Support Plate

[8].

Fig. 3-082

(7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10].(8) Disconnect the Connector [11].(9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base Cover

[13].

[6]

[8] [7]

[9]

[10]

[13]

[11] [12]

595APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.3.2.2. PCBs

Fig. 3-083

(10) Remove 4 Screws [14] to remove the Upper Transmission Sensor Unit [15] and Lower Transmission Sensor [16].

Fig. 3-084

(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the Horizontal Registration Motor Assembly [17].

Fig. 3-085

2-1. Removing the Punch Controller PCB(1) Remove 2 Screws [1].(2) Disconnect 5 Connectors [2] to remove the

Punch Controller PCB [3].

[15]

[14] [14] [14][16]

[17]

[18]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

[3]

596APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-086

2-2. Removing the Photo Sensor PCB(1) Remove the Punch Motor. (See 1-1.)(2) Remove 1 Screw [1].(3) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide

[2] on the PCB, then detach the PCB Cover [4].

Fig. 3-087

(4) Disconnect the Connector [5] to remove the Photosensor PCB [6].

Fig. 3-088

2-3. Removing the LED PCB(1) Remove the Waste Case.(2) Disconnect Connector J1005 [1].(3) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide

[2].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[2]

597APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-089

(4) Remove the Screw [4] and Washer [5].(5) Disconnect the Connector [6].(6) Remove 1 Screw [7] to detach the Base Cover

[8].

Fig. 3-090

(7) Remove 1 Screw [9].(8) Disconnect the Connector [10] to remove the

LED PCB [11].

[4]

[5]

[8]

[6] [7]

[9] [10]

[11]

598APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Fig. 3-091

2-4. Removing the Waste-Full Photo Sensor PCB(1) Remove the Punch Controller PCB. (See 2-1.)(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] to remove the PCB Film

[2].

Fig. 3-092

(3) Disconnect the Connector [3] to remove the Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].

Fig. 3-093

2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB(1) Remove 1 Screw [1].(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the

Waste-full LED PCB [3].

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1][3]

599APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.4. Maintenance and Inspection11.1.4.1. Periodically Replaced Parts11.1.4.1.1. Finisher / Saddle UnitThe unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.1.4.1.2. Punch Unit (Option)The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.1.4.2. Consumables and DurablesSome components of the Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed.

11.1.4.2.1. Saddle / Finisher Unit

Table. 4-001

11.1.4.3. Scheduled Maintenance

Table. 4-002

No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks

1 Stapler 4G1-4268-000 1 300,000 operationsA single cartridge is good for about 5,000 operations.

Item Interval Description RemarksFeeding Assembly Roller

Minimum maintenance intervals of host machine Cleaning

Wiping with water.Feeding Assembly MemberPaper Path GuideTransmission Type Sensor(Optional Punch Unit) Dry wiping.

600APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5. Troubleshooting11.1.5.1. Standards and Adjustments11.1.5.1.1. Electrical System (Finisher / Saddle Unit)

1. Adjusting the Folding PositionThe folding position is adjusted by matching it with the stapling position.IF you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new PCB. Perform the following if the folding position must be adjusted for some reason.

Caution:Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.

1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

Fig. 5-001

2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm.

• To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.• To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.• Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press PSW1 and PWS2 at

once, and settings can be cleared.

Fig. 5-002

3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB to OFF.

4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range ±5 mm).

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

- direction + direction

601APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Adjusting the Middle 2-Point Stapling Position (Adjustment area : ±5 mm)

The stapling position is adjusted by matching it with the folding position.If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new PCB. Perform the following if the stapling position must be adjusted for some reason.

Caution:Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper.In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.

1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

Fig. 5-003

2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm.

• To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.• To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.• Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the

same time clears the adjustment value.

Fig. 5-004

3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB to OFF.

4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the stapling position is adjusted properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

- direction + direction

602APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.1.2. Electrical System (Punch Unit; Option)1. Adjusting the Punch Hole Position

This mode requires operation in service mode. The range of hole displacement is between 3 and -3 in 1-mm increments. A higher setting will move the hole toward the leading edge of sheet. (See the Service Manual of the Host Machine.)

2. Adjusting the Sensor OutputPerform the following when the Punch Controller PCB, Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB), or Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photosensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) has been replaced.

1) Shift bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

Fig. 5-005

2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the sensor output.

• The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002, LED1003.

3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.

3. Registering the Number of Punch HolePerform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have replaced the Punch Controller PCB.

1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

Fig. 5-006

2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.• Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom).

Table 5-001

3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB.

• A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.

4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.

Number of Punch Hole LED1001 LED1002 LED10032 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ) ON OFF OFF2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) ON ON OFF4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) OFF ON OFF

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

603APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

4. After Replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)1) Turn off the Host Machine.

2) Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

Fig. 5-007

3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time.• The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will

go ON.

4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.

ON

1 2 3 4

604APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.2. Arrangement of Electric Components11.1.5.2.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit

1. Sensors, Microswitches, and Clutch

Fig. 5-008

PI19PI20

PI21

PI18

PI4

MS1

MS3

PI24

MS2

PI22

PI23

PI16

PI17

PI13

PI15

PI12

PI1

PI11PI10

PI9

PI7

PI8PI6

CL1

PI3PI2

PI5

PI14

605APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Table 5-002

Name Notation DescriptionPhoto-interrupters PI1 Inlet paper detection

PI2 Paddle home position detectionPI3 Stack roller home position detectionPI4 Aligning plate home position (front) detectionPI5 Aligning plate home position (rear) detectionPI6 Processing tray paper detectionPI7 Delivery belt home position detectionPI8 Tray paper detectionPI9 Paper surface detectionPI10 Folding position detectionPI11 Folding home position detectionPI12 Folding roller home position detectionPI13 Bind tray paper detectionPI14 Stapler / fold motor clock detectionPI15 Shift upper limit detectionPI16 Shift lower limit detectionPI17 Shift motor clock detectionPI18 Slide home position detection (inside stapler)PI19 Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler)PI20 Staple detection (inside stapler)PI21 Staple top position detection (in stapler)PI22 Front door open detectionPI23 Upper cover open detectionPI24 Paper full detection

Micro Switch MS1 Front door open detectionMS2 Joint open detectionMS3 Staple safety detection

Clutch CL1 Bind clutch

606APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Motor PCBs

Fig. 5-009

M1

M2

M8

M5

M4

M3 M7

M6

[1]

607APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Table 5-003

Name Notation DescriptionMotor M1 Paddle Motor

M2 Feed MotorM3 Delivery MotorM4 Alignment Motor (front)M5 Alignment Motor (rear)M6 Shift MotorM7 Staple / Fold MotorM8 Slide Motor


[1] Finisher Control

608APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.2.2. Punch Unit (Option)1. Sensors

Fig. 5-010

Table 5-004

Name Notation DescriptionPhoto-interrupters PI1P Puncher home position detection

PI2P Horizontal registration home position detectionPI3P Punch motor clock detection

PI3P

PI1P

PI2P

609APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Motors

Fig. 5-011

Table 5-005

Name Notation DescriptionMotor M1P Punch Motor

M2P Horizontal Registration Motor

M1

M2

610APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. PCBs

Fig. 5-012

Table 5-006

Ref. Name[1] Punch Controller PCB[2] Photosensor PCB[3] LED PCB[4] Waste Full Photosensor PCB[5] Waste Full LED PCB

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

611APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.3. LEDs and Check Pins by PCBOf the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.Caution:

Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require special tools and a high degree of accuracy.

11.1.5.3.1. Finisher Controller PCB

Fig. 5-013

Table 5-007

Switch DescriptionSW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.PSW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.PSW2 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.PSW3 Factory mode

6CN8

1 1CN18

21

CN1012 1

CN310

1CN13

6

1C

N7

7

3C

N19

1

1CN11

79

CN911

CN17SW1

PSW3

LED3

6

1C

N16

121

CN

125

1C

N2

75

CN

14C

N1 CB

1

13

1

9C

N4

115

CN

51

12C

N15

1

4CN6

1

PSW2

LED2

PSW1

LED1

612APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.3.2. Punch Controller PCB

Fig. 5-014

Table 5-008

Switch DescriptionSW1001 Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.SW1002 Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.SW1003 Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.

13J1007

1

J100

1J1

005

51

J100

2 12

41

J100451

J1003

SW1001

SW1002

101

J100

69

1

SW1003

LED1001LED1002LED1003

613APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.4. Troubleshooting11.1.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)

1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault

Table 5-010

2. E7-21, Feed Motor Fault

Table 5-011

3. E7-51, Delivery Motor Fault

Table 5-012

Finisher Controller PCB1)Turn off and then on the Host Machine. Is the problem corrected?

YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Stack Feed Roller (upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12)1) Check the stack feed roller (upper) home position sensor. Is it normal?

NO :Replace the sensor.Wiring

2) Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the feed motor normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Feed Roller3) Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller

(upper) move up/down normally?NO :Correct the mechanical system.

Feed Motor (M1), Finisher Controller PCB4) Try replacing the feed motor. Is the problem corrected?


Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7)1) Check the delivery belt home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the delivery motor normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Stack Delivery Roller3) Try turning the stack delivery roller by hand. Is the rotation smooth?

NO :Correct the mechanical system.Delivery Motor (M3), Finisher Controller PCB

4) Try replacing the delivery motor. Is the problem corrected?YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

614APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3224. E7-22, Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Fault

Table 5-0135. E7-23, Staple / Fold Motor Fault

Table 5-014

Table 5-015

Table 5-016

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (rear; PI5)1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (rear). Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the rear alignment motor (rear) normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Aligning Plate (rear)3) Is there mechanical trapping in the path of the aligning plate?

YES:Correct the mechanical mechanism.Alignment Motor (rear; M5), Finisher Controller PCB

4) Try replacing the alignment motor (rear). Is the problem corrected?YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Wiring1) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple/Fold Motor

normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Stapler Unit2) Try turning the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?

YES : Correct the mechanical system.Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB

3) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Finisher Controller PCB, Stapler Unit1) Does the stapler / fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?

YES:Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.NO :Check the stapler unit drive mechanism: if faulty, correct it; if normal.

Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB2) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?


Saddle Unit3) Try turning the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?

YES:Correct the mechanical mechanism.

615APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3226. E7-24, Slide Motor Fault

Table 5-018

7. E7-22, Alignment Motor (front) Fault

Table 5-019

8. E7-27, Shift Motor Fault

Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)1) Check the slide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?

NO :Replace the sensor PCB.Wiring

2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the slide motor normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Stapler Unit 3) Is there mechanical trapping in the stapler path?

YES : Correct the mechanical system.Slide Motor (M8), Finisher Controller PCB

4) Try replacing the slide motor. Is the problem corrected?YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front; PI4)1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (front). Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate motor (front) normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Aligning Plate (front)3) Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path?

YES : Correct the mechanical system.Alignment Motor (front; M4), Finisher Controller PCB

4) Try replacing the Alignment motor (front). Is the problem corrected?YES:End.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)1) Check the paper surface sensor. Is the sensor normal?

NO :Replace the sensor.Tray Up / Down Mechanism

2) Check the tray up/down mechanism. Is the mechanism normal?NO :Correct the mechanism.

Finisher Controller PCB3) Is 24 VDC supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB to the shift motor as soon as

the tray is driven?NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

616APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Table 5-020

9. E7-52, Paddle Motor Fault (For DA-FS325 only)

Table 5-024

Shift Motor (M6), Wiring4) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the shift motor normal?

YES:Replace the shift motor.NO :Correct the wring.

Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)1) Check the paddle home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?

NO :Replace the sensor.Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)

2) Check the swing guide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?NO :Replace the sensor.

Wiring3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal?

NO :Correct the wring.Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly

4) Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hands. Is there mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the swing guide?YES:Correct the mechanical mechanism.

Paddle Motor (M2), Finisher Controller PCB5) Try replacing the paddle motor. Is the problem corrected?


617APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.4.2. Troubleshooting (Punch Unit, Option)1. E7-54, Communication Faulty

Table 5-025

2. E7-55, Punch Unit Power Supply Fault

Table 5-027

Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Controller PCB1) Turn off and then on the host machine. Is the problem corrected?

YES:End.Wiring

2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Power Supply3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the Finisher

Controller PCB. Is it 24VDC?YES:Replace the punch controller PCB.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Finisher Controller PCB, Host Machine DC Controller PCB1) Turn off and then off the host machine. Is the problem corrected?

YES:End.Wiring

2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Power Supply3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN4-3 (-) on the Finisher

Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC?YES:Replace the punch controller PCB.NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

618APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3223. E7-28, Punch Motor Fault

Table 5-028

4. E7-57, Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Fault

Table 5-029

Punch Motor Home Position Sensor (PI1P)1) Check the punch home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?

NO :Replace the sensor.Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P)

2) Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?NO :Replace the sensor.

Wiring3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensor normal?

NO :Correct the wring.Punch Mechanism, Punch Motor (M1P)

4) Is there a fault in the punch mechanism?YES:Correct the punch mechanism.NO :Replace the punch motor.

Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB5) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?


Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photo Sensor PCB / LED PCB)1) Check the horizontal registration sensor. Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the horizontal registration sensor normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem correct?


619APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3225. E7-58, Punch Sensor (Waste Full) Fault

Table 5-030

6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault

Table 5-031

Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB)1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal?NO :Correct the wring.



Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P)1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?


2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration home position sensor normal?NO :Correct the wring.

Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism?

YES:Correct the horizontal registration mechanism.NO :Replace the horizontal registration motor.



620APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.5.5. Self Diagnosis11.1.5.5.1. Alarm

1. Finisher / Saddle Unit

Table 5-034

Error Condition Timing of Detection Operation Resetting

Stapler Absent The stapler is not set.

Monitored at all times

The staple / fold motor (M7) and the slide motor (M8) will stop.

Set the stapler.

Stapler Absent The staple cartridge has run out of staples.

Monitored at all times

Normal operation will continue; however, operation is subject to instructions from the host machine.

Replace the staple cartridge; or, set it correctly.

Mixed Sheets Sheets of different sizes are deposited in the compartment.

When a sheet of a different size is placed.

The sheet will be aligned based on maximum size width and delivered as a stack.

—

Overstacking for Stapling

The number of sheets in the compartment has exceeded the limit imposed on stapling.

When an extra sheet is placed.

The sheets will be delivered with stapling.

—

Stack Tray Overstacking

The number of sheets deposited on the delivery tray has exceeded the limit imposed on the tray. (sheets, sets)


Normal operation will continue.

Remove the sheets from the delivery tray.

Saddle Overstacking

Remove the stack from the bind tray. More than 10 stacks are deposited on the folded stack tray.


Normal operation will continue.

Remove the stack from the bind tray.

621APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C3222. Punch Unit (Option)

Table 5-035

Error Condition Timing of Detection Operation Resetting

Punch Waste Paper Full

The amount of waste paper in the waste case has reached the limit.

During punching. Normal operation will continue.

Remove the waste paper from the waste case.

Punch Waste Paper Excess (Overflow)

The amount of waste paper in the waste case has exceeded the limit.

During punching. Punching will be disabled.

Remove the waste paper from the water case.

622APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.6. Appendix11.1.6.1. Signals and AbbreviationsThe following presents the abbreviations of signals used in this manual and in drawings, and the meaning of each signal.

Reference:Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals.

Finisher / Saddle-Stitch UnitSignal Name Function

ADJ_TRAY_S Jog Tray Paper Detect SignalB_CLU Bind Clutch Drive SignalBDL_ROL_HP Swing Guide HP Detect SignalBIND_CLK Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect SignalBIND_EMPS Bind Tray Paper Detect SignalBIND_HP Folding HP Detect SignalBIND_L Fold Position LED ON SignalBINDMTR Staple/Fold Motor Drive SignalBIND_P Fold Position Paper Detect SignalBIND_ROL_HP Bundle Feed Roller HP Detect SignalEJCT_BLT_HP Eject Belt HP Detect SignalEJCTMTR Eject Motor Drive SignalENT_S Inlet Paper Detect SignalFDOOR_S Front Door Open Detect SignalFEEDMTR Feed Motor Drive SignalFJOG_HP Front Jog Plate HP Detect SignalFJOGMTR Front Jog Motor Drive SignalFRONT_SW Front Door Switch SignalHOOK_S Hook Empty Detect SignalJOINT_SW Joint Switch SignalLVL_S Paper Surface Detect SignalPAPER_F Paper Full Detect SignalPDL_HP Paddle HP Detect SignalPDLMTR Paddle Motor Drive SignalRJOG_HP Rear Jog Plate HP Detect SignalRJOGMTR Rear Jog Motor Drive SignalSELF_P Hook Top Position Detect SignalSIFT_CLK Sift Motor Clock Detect SignalSIFT_DNLMT Sift Down Limit Detect SignalSIFTMTR Sift Motor Drive SignalSIFT_UPLMT Sift Upper Limit Detect SignalSLID_HP Slide HP Detect SignalSLIDMTR Slide Motor Drive SignalSTPL_CNCT Stapler Connect Detect SignalSTPL_HP Staple HP Detect SignalSTPLSAFE_SW Staple Safety Switch SignalTOPCOV_S Top Cover Open Detect SignalTRY_EMPS Tray Paper Detect Signal

623APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Punch Unit (Option)Signal Name Function

CLOCK Punch Motor Clock Detect SignalDUSTLED Dust LED ON SignalDUSTPTR Dust Full Detect SignalPAEND Paper End Detect SignalPUNCH Punch HP Detect SignalSLIDE Side Registration HP Detect SignalSREG1 Side Registration Detect Signal 1SREG2 Side Registration Detect Signal 2SREG3 Side Registration Detect Signal 3REG4 Side Registration Detect Signal 4LEDON1 LED1 ON SignalLEDON2 LED2 ON SignalLEDON3 LED3 ON SignalLEDON4 LED4 ON SignalLEDON5 LED5 ON Signal

624APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.7. Schematic Diagram11.1.7.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit General Circuit Diagram

CN23

-3DC

+5V

CN23

-2SG

NDCN

23-1

FJO

G_H

P

1 2 3

CN20

-1FG

NDCN

20-2

PGND

CN20

-3DC

+24V

PCN

20-4

N.C.

9 2 1

CN20

A-1

SGND

CN20

B-1

N.C.

CN20

B-2

N.C.

CN20

B-3

N.C.

CN20

B-4

N.C.

CN20

B-5

N.C.

CN20

B-6

N.C.

CN20

B-7

N.C.

CN20

B-8

N.C.

CN20

A-2

DC+2

4VP

CN20

A-3

RXD

CN20

A-5

SGND

CN20

A-6

N.C.

CN20

A-7

SGND

CN20

A-4

TXD

4 3 5 6 8 7

PI4

Aligning PlateHome PositionSensor (Front)

CN24

-3DC

+5V

CN24

-2SG

NDCN

24-1

TOPC

OV_

S

4 5 6

PI23

Upper CoverSensor

CN25

-3DC

+5V

CN25

-2SG

NDCN

25-1

FDO

OR_

S

7 8 9

PI22

Front DoorSensor

CN30

-3DC

+5V

CN30

-2SG

NDCN

30-1

ADJ_

TRAY

_S

1 2 3

PI6

ProcessingTray

Sensor

CN31

-3DC

+5V

CN31

-2SG

NDCN

31-1

EJCT

_BLT

_HP

4 5 6

PI7

Delivery BeltHome Position

Sensor

CN32

-3DC

+5V

CN32

-2SG

NDCN

32-1

TRY_

EMPS

7 8 9

PI8

Tray PaperSensor

PI9

Paper SurfaceSensor

PI5

Aligning PlateHome PositionSensor (Rear)

PI10

FoldingPositionSensor

PI11

FoldingHome Position

Sensor

PI12

Stack FeedRoller (Upper)Home Position

Sensor

CN29

-1DC

+5V

CN29

-2SG

NDCN

29-3

CN28

-9CN

28-8

CN28

-7AD

J_TR

AY_S

1 2 3

1 2 3CN

29-4

CN28

-6DC

+5V

44

CN29

-5CN

28-5

SGND

55

CN29

-6CN

28-4

EJCT

_BLT

_HP

66

CN29

-7CN

28-3

DC+5

V7

7

CN35

-3DC

+5V

CN35

-2SG

NDCN

35-1

LVL_

S

1 2 3

CN36

-3DC

+5V

CN36

-2SG

NDCN

36-1

RJO

G_H

P

13 14 15

CN34

-1CN

33-3

DC+5

V10

1CN

34-2

CN33

-2SG

ND11

2CN

34-3

CN33

-1LV

L_S

123

CN29

-8CN

28-2

SGND

88

CN29

-9CN

28-1

TRY_

EMPS

99

CN39

-3DC

+5V

CN39

-2BI

ND_P

CN39

-1BI

ND_L

1 2 3

CN40

-3DC

+5V

CN40

-2SG

NDCN

40-1

BIND

_HP

4 5 6

PI1

InletSensor

CN41

-3DC

+5V

CN41

-2SG

NDCN

41-1

BIND

_RO

L_HP

7 8 9

CN38

-1DC

+5V

CN38

-2BI

ND_P

CN38

-3

CN37

-9CN

37-8

CN37

-7BI

ND_L

1 2 3

1 2 3CN

38-4

CN37

-6DC

+5V

44

CN38

-5CN

37-5

SGND

55

CN38

-6CN

37-4

BIND

_HP

66

CN38

-7CN

37-3

DC+5

V7

7

CN44

-3DC

+5V

CN44

-2SG

NDCN

44-1

ENT_

S

1 2 3

PI13

Bind TraySensor

CN47

-3DC

+5V

CN47

-2SG

NDCN

47-1

BIND

_EM

PS

1 2 3

PI17

Shift MotorClock

Sensor

CN48

-3DC

+5V

CN48

-2SG

NDCN

48-1

SIFT

_CLK

4 5 6

PI16

ShiftLimit

Sensor

CN49

-3DC

+5V

CN49

-2SG

NDCN

49-1

SIFT

_DNL

MT

7 8 9

PI15

Shift UpperLimit

Sensor

PI2

Paddle HomePositionSensor

CN50

-3DC

+5V

CN50

-2SG

NDCN

50-1

SIFT

_UPL

MT

10 11 12

CN43

-1CN

42-3

DC+5

V10

1CN

43-2

CN42

-2SG

ND11

2CN

43-3

CN42

-1EL

T_S

123

PI14

Staple/FoldClock

Sensor

PI3

Swing GuideHome Position

Sensor

PI24

Full StackSensor

CN51

-3DC

+5V

CN51

-2SG

NDCN

51-1

PDL_

HP

1 2 3

CN52

-3DC

+5V

CN52

-2BI

ND_C

LKCN

52-1

DC+5

V

4 5 6

CN55

-3DC

+5V

CN55

-2SG

NDCN

55-1

BDL_

ROL_

HP

1 2 3

CN54

-1CN

53-3

DC+5

V7

1CN

54-2

CN53

-2SG

ND8

2CN

54-3

CN53

-1BD

L_RO

L_HP

93

CN73

-3DC

+5V

CN73

-2SG

NDCN

73-1

PAPE

R_F

1 2 3

CN38

-8CN

37-2

SGND

88

CN38

-9CN

37-1

BIND

_RO

L_HP

99

DC+5

VSG

NDCN

4-1

CN4-

2CN

4-3

FJO

G_H

P

1 2 3CN

4-4

DC+5

V4

CN4-

5SG

ND5

CN4-

6TO

PCO

V_S

6CN

4-7

DC+5

V7

CN4-

8SG

ND8

CN4-

9FD

OO

R_S

9

CN56

-1CN

56-2

CN56

-3

1 2 3CN

56-4

4CN

56-5

5CN

56-6

6

CN56

-6CN

56-5

CN56

-4CN

56-3

CN56

-2CN

56-1

DC+2

4VL

N.C.

CN2-

1CN

2-2

CN2-

3SG

ND

3 4CN

2-4

SGND

5CN

2-5

TXD

6CN

2-6

SGND

7CN

2-7

RXD

8

DC+2

4VN.

C.CN

1-1

CN1-

2CN

1-3

PGND

1 2

DC+5

VSG

NDCN

5-1

CN5-

2CN

5-3

ADJ_

TRAY

_S

1 2 3CN

5-4

DC+5

V4

CN5-

5SG

ND5

CN5-

6EJ

CT_B

LT_H

P6

CN5-

7DC

+5V

7CN

5-8

SGND

8CN

5-9

TRY_

EMPS

9CN

5-10

DC+5

V10

CN5-

11SG

ND11

CN5-

12LV

L_S

12CN

5-13

DC+5

V13

CN5-

14SG

ND14

CN5-

15RJ

OG

_HP

15

DC+5

VBI

ND_P

CN16

-1CN

16-2

CN16

-3BI

ND_L

1 2 3CN

16-4

DC+5

V4

CN16

-5SG

ND5

CN16

-6BI

ND_H

P6

CN16

-7DC

+5V

7CN

16-8

SGND

8CN

16-9

BIND

_RO

L_HP

9CN

16-1

0DC

+5V

10CN

16-1

1SG

ND11

CN16

-12

ENT_

S12

DC+5

VSG

NDCN

15-1

CN15

-2CN

15-3

BIND

_EM

PS

1 2 3CN

15-4

DC+5

V4

CN15

-5SG

ND5

CN15

-6SI

FT_C

LK6

CN15

-7DC

+5V

7CN

15-8

SGND

8CN

15-9

SIFT

_DNL

MT

9CN

15-1

0DC

+5V

10CN

15-1

1SG

ND11

CN15

-12

SIFT

_UPL

MT

12

DC+5

VSG

NDCN

9-1

CN9-

2CN

9-3

PDL_

HP

1 2 3CN

9-4

SGND

4CN

9-5

BIND

_CLK

5CN

9-6

DC+5

V6

CN9-

7DC

+5V

7CN

9-8

SGND

8

DC+5

VSG

NDCN

19-1

CN19

-2

SGND

CN17

-1TX

D2CN

17-2

RXD2

CN17

-3DS

RCN

17-4

DTR

CN17

-5RE

SET

CN17

-6

CN19

-3PA

PER_

F

1 2 3

CN9-

9BD

L_RO

L_HP

9

CN20

-1CN

20-2

CN20

-3CN

20-4

CN20

A-1

CN20

A-2

CN20

A-3

CN20

A-5

CN20

A-6

CN20

A-7

CN20

A-4

To

Hos

tM

achi

ne


Sta

pler

Uni

t

To

Pun

ch U

nit (

Opt

ion)

CN10

-1+1

2VCN

10-2

+12V

CN10

-3FE

EDM

TR_A

1 2 3CN

10-4

FEED

MTR

_*A

4CN

10-5

FEED

MTR

_B5

CN10

-6FE

EDM

TR_*

B6

CN10

-7+2

4V7

CN10

-8+2

4V8

CN10

-9PD

LMTR

_A9

CN10

-10

PDLM

TR_*

A10

CN10

-11

PDLM

TR_B

11CN

10-1

2PD

LMTR

_*B

12

CN13

-1+2

4VCN

13-2

+24V

CN13

-3EJ

CTM

TR_A

1 2 3CN

13-4

EJCT

MTR

_*A

4CN

13-5

EJCT

MTR

_B5

CN13

-6EJ

CTM

TR_*

B6

1 2 3 4 5 6

MO

TF

eed

Mot

orM

1

7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6

MO

TP

addl

e M

otor

CN57

-1CN

57-2

CN57

-3CN

57-4

CN57

-5CN

57-6

CN57

-6CN

57-5

CN57

-4CN

57-3

CN57

-2CN

57-1

+12V

+12V

FEED

MTR

_AFE

EDM

TR_*

AFE

EDM

TR_B

FEED

MTR

_*B

CN59

-1CN

59-2

CN59

-3

1 2 3CN

59-4

4CN

59-5

5CN

59-6

6

CN59

-6CN

59-5

CN59

-4CN

59-3

CN59

-2CN

59-1

1 2 3 4 5 6

MO

TD

eliv

ery

Mot

or

+24V

+24V

PDLM

TR_A

PDLM

TR_*

APD

LMTR

_BPD

LMTR

_*B

CN62

-5CN

62-4

CN62

-3

1 2 3CN

62-2

4CN

62-1

5CN

3-1

+24V

CN3-

2CN

3-3

FJO

GM

TR_A

1 2 3CN

3-4

FJO

GM

TR_*

A4

CN3-

5FJ

OG

MTR

_B5

CN3-

6FJ

OG

MTR

_*B

6CN

3-7

+24V

7CN

3-8

8CN

3-9

9CN

3-10

10

1 2 3 4 5

Alig

nmen

t Mot

or (

Fro

nt)

6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

Alig

nmen

t Mot

or (

Rea

r)

Sta

pler

Saf

ety

Sw

itch

CN64

-5CN

64-4

CN64

-3CN

64-2

CN64

-1

CN65

-1CN

65-2

CN65

-3CN

65-4

CN65

-5

+24V

M2

M3

M4

M5

MS

3

MS

1

MS

2

M6

M7

CL1

+24V

+24V

EJCT

MTR

_AEJ

CTM

TR_*

AEJ

CTM

TR_B

EJCT

MTR

_*B

RJO

GM

TR_A

RJO

GM

TR_*

ARJ

OG

MTR

_BRJ

OG

MTR

_*B

CN8-

1ST

PLSA

FE_S

WCN

8-2

CN8-

3FR

ONT

_SW

1 2 3CN

8-4

FRO

NT_S

W4

CN8-

5JO

INT_

SW5

CN8-

6JO

INT_

SW6

DC+2

4VP

CN11

-1ST

PL_C

NCT

CN11

-2CN

11-3

DC+5

V

1 2

CN11

-7SG

ND73

CN11

-4SL

ID_H

P4

CN11

-5ST

PL_H

P5

CN11

-6HO

OK_

S6

SELF

_P

CN12

-1PN

CH_T

XDCN

12-2

CN12

-3SG

ND

1 2 3CN

12-4

PNCH

_RXD

4CN

12-5

PNCH

_CNC

T5

PNCH

_TM

_S

CN14

-1PN

CH_+

5VCN

14-2

CN14

-3PN

CH_S

GND

9 10 11CN

14-4

PNCH

_PG

ND

CN14

-5N.

C.12

PNCH

_+24

V

CN7-

1+2

4VCN

7-2

CN7-

3+2

4V

8 9

CN7-

7N.

C.

10CN

7-4

SLID

MTR

_A11

CN7-

5SL

IDM

TR_*

A12

CN7-

6SL

IDM

TR_B

13SL

IDM

TR_*

B

CN63

-1CN

63-2

CN63

-3CN

63-4

CN63

-5

FJO

GM

TR_A

FJO

GM

TR_*

AFJ

OG

MTR

_BFJ

OG

MTR

_*B

+24V

RJO

GM

TR_A

2 1CN

66-2

CN66

-1NO CO

MST

PLSA

FE_S

HFD

OO

R_SH

RJO

GM

TR_*

ARJ

OG

MTR

_BRJ

OG

MTR

_*B

MO

T

MO

T

Join

t Sw

itch

6 5CN

69-2

CN69

-1NO CO

MJO

INT_

SHDC

+24V

P

Fro

nt D

oor

Sw

itch

4 3CN

68-2

CN68

-1NO CO

MFD

OOR_

SHJO

INT_

SH

Shi

ft M

otor

CN6-

1SI

FTM

TR_1

CN6-

2CN

6-3

SIFT

MTR

_0

1 2 3CN

6-4

BIND

MTR

_14

BIND

MTR

_0

CN18

-1+2

4VCN

18-2

B_CL

U

1 2

1 21 2

CN70

-2CN

70-1

CN70

-2CN

70-1

SIFT

MTR

_1SI

FTM

TR_0

1 2CN

70-2

CN70

-1CN

70-2

CN70

-1SI

FTM

TR_1

SIFT

MTR

_0

1 23 4

CN71

-2CN

71-1

CN71

-2CN

71-1

BIND

MTR

_1BI

NDM

TR_0

Sta

ple/

Fol

d M

otor

MO

T

MO

T

1 21 2

CN72

-2CN

72-1

CN72

-1CN

72-2

+24V

B_CL

US

lide

Mot

orCL

U

CN72

A-1

CN72

A-2

CN72

A-3

7 6 5CN

72A-

44

CN72

A-5

3

CN72

A-7

1

CN72

-1CN

72-2

CN72

-3CN

72-4

CN72

-5

CN72

-7

SGND

SELF

_PHO

OK_

SST

PL_H

PSL

ID_H

PCN

72A-

62

CN72

-6DC

+5V

STPL

_CNC

TCN

72A-

8CN

72B-

7CN

72B-

6

8 9CN

72B-

510

CN72

B-4

11

CN72

B-2

13

N.C.

CN72

-8CN

72-9

CN72

-10

CN72

-11

CN72

-13

N.C.

+24V

+24V

CN72

B-3

12CN

72-1

2

CN72

B-1

CN72

-14

CN72

C-1

14CN

72-1

5FGN.

C.

SLID

MTR

_ASL

IDM

TR_*

ASL

IDM

TR_B

SLID

MTR

_*B

ST

PL_

HP

Sta

pler

Hom

eP

ositi

on S

enso

rS

LIP

HP

Sta

pler

Slid

e H

ome

Pos

ition

Sen

sor

HO

OK

SH

ook

Sen

sor

SLI

DM

TR

Slid

e M

otor

(M

8)

P11

8

P11

9

P12

0

P12

1

M8

1

F

23

45

67

89

1011

12

E D C B A

625APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.1.7.2. Punch Unit General Circuit Diagram

10

CN

12C

N12

CN

14C

N14

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10987654321

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

54321

J200

3J2

004

10987654321

54321

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2

221

11

J100

3J1

004

4321J1

001

J200

1

J200

2

J100

15 4 3 2 1

56

67

78

89

9 4 3 2 1

321

J100

6

J200

8

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

321

J200

921

J200

521

2121

J200

6

J200

5

J200

6

321

J200

7

J100

6

J100

5J1

005

J100

2J1

002

M

21

M

321321321

212

33

44

55

661

J201

0J1

007-

6J1

007-

5J1

007-

4J1

007-

3J1

007-

2J1

007-

1

J201

0

J2010-1J2010-2J2010-3J2010-4J2010-5J2010-6

J2011-7J2011-6J2011-5J2011-4J2011-3J2011-2J2011-1

77

J100

7-7

212

33

44

55

661

J201

1J1

007-

13J1

007-

12J1

007-

11J1

007-

10J1

007-

9J1

007-

8

J201

1

10987654321

J100

7

10111112121313

987654321

J100

7

Finisher Unit


Pho

to-s

enso

rP

CB

Was

te B

ottle

Ful

lP

hoto

-sen

sor

PC

B

PI3

PP

unch

Mot

or C

lock

Sen

sor

PI1

PP

unch

Hom

e P

ositi

onS

enso

r

PI2

PH

oriz

onta

l Reg

istr

atio

n H

ome

Pos

ition

Sen

sor

M2P

Hor

izon

tal R

egis

trat

ion

Mot

or

M1P

Pun

ch M

otor

LED

PC

B

Was

te B

ottle

F

ull L

ED

PC

B

1

F

23

45

67

89

1011

12

E D C B A

626APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2. DA-FS32011.2.1. General Description11.2.1.1. Features

1. Compact and light weight

2. Sorting and stapling by shift-sortSheet Stacking, matching, offset stacking, and stapling are performed on a Halfway-processing Tray.

3. Stack Tray loadingThe Stack Tray is capable of holding approximately 500 small-sized sheets, or 250 large-sized sheets.

11.2.1.2. Specifications

Item Description RemarksStacking 1 location

Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)Face-down

Feed Reference Center referenceStacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5, B4, B5, B5-R

LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLS Paper Weight 17 - 24 lb (64 - 90 g/m2)Mode Non-Sort stack

Sort stackStaple stack

Stack Height Non-SortSmall-size: 500 sheets

A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R,LTR, LTR-RLarge-size : 250 sheets

A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLSShift-Sort

Small-size: 500 sheetsA4, A4-R, B5, LTR, LTR-R

Large-size : 250 sheetsA3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS

StapleSmall-size : 10- 30 sheets; 45-16 sets

2-9 sheets; 70-50 setsA4, A4-R, B5, LTR, LTR-R

Large-size : 10- 20 sheets; 25-12 sets2-9 sheets; 70-28 sets

A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS

Note 1, 2

Paper Detection NoControl Panel NoDisplay NoSize (W x D x H)

7.17 x 19.61 x 10.12 in (182 x 498 x 257 mm)

Excluding the installation kit

Weight Approx. 22 lb (10 kg)Power Supply 24 VDC from Host machineMaximum Power Consumption

Less than 48 W

Stapling Rotary cam type

627APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note 1 :The number of sheets is computed based on 75 g/m2 paper.

Note 2 :Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes or Staple/Shift-Sort modes.

Stapling Position:

Stapling Position Rear 1-Point staplingRefer to the illustration as follows.

Stapling Thickness Small-size : 30 sheetsA4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LTR, LTR-R

Large-size : 20 sheetsA3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS

Staple Supply Cartridge of Staples (3,000/Cartridge)Replacement Staples DQ-SS35Staple Detection YesStapling Size A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, FLSManual Stapling None

Item Description Remarks

6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in

6±3 mm / 0.24±0.12 in

Delivery direction

628APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.1.3. Electrical Components

11.2.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User

Name Notation DescriptionMotor 1 Feed Motor

2 Alignment Motor3 Stack Tray Elevation Motor

Solenoid 4 Paddle Solenoid5 Large Gear Solenoid6 Paper Detection Solenoid

Stapler Unit 7 Stapler UnitMicro Switch 8 Staple Safety detection

9 Stapler Cover detectionPhoto-interrupters 10 Upper Cover Open detection

11 Inlet Paper detection12 Aligning Home Position Plate detection13 Paper Exit detection14 Stack Tray Paper Height detection15 Paper Hold Lever detection16 Stack Tray Upper Limit detection17 Paper Full detection18 Finisher Detachment detection

No. Item Timing1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted

(indicator on Host machine's Control Panel)

629APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.2. Maintenance and Inspection11.2.2.1. Periodic Part ReplacementThe unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.2.2.2. Consumables and DurablesSome components may require replacement due to wear, deterioration or damage. Replace them as required.

11.2.2.2.1. Finisher Unit

11.2.2.2.2. Scheduled Maintenance

11.2.2.3. Disassembly and Assembly

No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks

1 Stapler GH03-7811 1 200,000 operations A single cartridge contains 3,000 staples.

Item Interval Description RemarksFeeding Assembly Roller

Shortest cleaning interval of theHost machine Cleaning

Wipe with clean cloth moistened in water.Feeding Assembly Member

Paper Path GuideTransmission Type Sensor Wipe with a dry cloth.

<Removing Finisher Cover Assembly>

(1) Open and hold the Finisher Cover (14108).(2) Release the Front and Rear Arms (14109 and

14110).(3) Release the Rear Latch and remove the

Finisher Cover (14108).

(4) Remove 1 Screw (14133).(5) Remove the Front Cover Assembly (14101).

Note:When re-installing the Cover, make sure 1 Latch Hook is in the hole and the Release Lever works correctly.

630APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(6) Remove 1 Screw (14021).(7) Remove the Rear Cover Assembly (14105).

Note:When re-installing the Cover, make sure 2 Latch Hooks are in the holes.

<Removing Finisher Tray Cover Assembly>

(8) Remove 2 Screws (14021).(9) Remove the Tray Assembly (14015).

<Removing Finisher Controller PC Board>

(10) Remove 2 Screws (14132) and 2 Washers (14134).

(11) Remove the Right Cover (14104).

(12) Lift the PCB Cover Mylar (14135) up.

631APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(13) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the CONT PC Board.

(14) Remove 1 Screw (14133).(15) Remove the CONT PC Board (14528).

<Removing Rollers>

(16) Lift up the Guide Base (14301) Assembly.(17) Clean the Exit Roller (14437).

(18) Disconnect the Harness.(19) Remove 1 Screw (14021) and 1 Screw (14131).(20) Remove the Guide Base (14332) Assembly.

(21) Release the Tension Spring (14524) and Latch, and then remove the Lock Arm (14525).

632APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(22) Remove the Tension Spring (14524).(23) Remove 1 Snap Ring (14523).(24) Remove the Lock Lever Shaft (14520)

Assembly as illustrated.

(25) Loosen 1 Screw (14206).(26) Remove 2 Screws (14132).

(27) Remove the Upper Guide Assembly as illustrated.

Note:When re-installing, rotate the Timing Belt counter-clockwise and then fasten 1 Screw.

633APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(28) Remove 1 Snap Ring (14234).(29) Remove the Feed Roller Gear (14202).(30) Remove the Bushing (14419).

(31) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly (14411).

(32) Remove the Feed Arm Assembly (14413).

(33) Remove 1 Screw (14021) and 1 Screw (14133).(34) Remove the Tray Guide Assembly (14111).

634APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(35) Disconnect 3 Harnesses (14129).

Note:When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are connected correctly as illustrated.

(36) Remove 1 Snap Ring (14234).(37) Remove the Exit Roller Gear (14201).

(38) Remove the Bushing (14419).

635APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(39) Lift up the Guide Base (14301) Assembly.(40) Lift up the Paper Guide (14421).(41) Remove the Exit Roller Assembly (14436) as

illustrated.

<Removing the Staple Unit>

(42) Remove 1 Screw (14443).(43) Remove the Staple Safety Switch (14441).(44) Release the Harness (14129) from the Harness

Clamp.(45) Disconnect the Harness (14129).

(46) Remove 2 Screws (14021).(47) Remove the Staple Unit (14438) Assembly.

Note:When re-installing, ensure that Staple Unit Assembly is installed (hooked) correctly as illustrated.

636APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(48) Remove 2 Screws (14236).(49) Loosen 1 Screw.(50) Remove the Staple Unit (14438).

<Removing the Finisher Interface Cable>

(51) Remove 2 Screws (14133).(52) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamps.(53) Disconnect 2 Harnesses and remove the

Finisher Interface Cable.

<Removing the Motors>

(54) Disconnect the Harness.(55) Remove 2 Screws (14530).(56) Remove the Sensor Hold Bracket (14508).

(57) Remove 2 Screws (14133).(58) Remove the Drive Motor (14514).

637APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

(59) Disconnect the Harness.(60) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(61) Remove 4 Screws (14132).(62) Remove 2 Screws (14021).(63) Remove the Slide Base Bracket (14503).

(64) Remove 2 Screws (14021).(65) Remove the Set Motor (14431) Assembly.

(66) Disconnect 2 Harnesses.(67) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

638APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

Note:When re-installing, ensure that the Harnesses are connected correctly as illustrated.

(68) Remove 2 Screws (14442).(69) Remove the Set Motor (14431).

639APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.3. Operation and System Description11.2.3.1. Outline of OperationDA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication and carry out the following 3 operation modes.

• Normal ExitDischarge the paper into the Stack Tray.

• Staple ExitJog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, then staple when they reach the specified number, and discharge into the Stack Tray.

• Shift ExitJog sheets of paper one at a time at the interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into the Stack Tray.

11.2.3.2. Stapling MechanismStapling Mechanism 1.

• The stapler's motor rotation drives the stapler by the rotating cam via gear.• The link is in contact with the cam. When the cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.

Stapling Mechanism 2.

Staple CartridgeFQ-SS32

Staple Motor

Cam

Staple Sensor

Staple Home Position Sensor

Cartridge Sensor

Staple Table

Staple Table

Staple Plate

Cam

640APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.3.3. Electrical Parts (Motor and Solenoid Functions)11.2.3.3.1. Feed Motor Control

1. Feed Motor, which moves Paper Feed, Paddle Drive, Stack Delivery Unit Elevation, is 1-2 phase exciting type, 2 phase stepping motor. Its control circuit is shown below.

2. Each signal pulse output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and rotates the coil in each phase. The Motor drive current is controlled by the duty cycle from P24 of IC2.

3. Motor stops when the output signals from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC2 are changed to H and the power supply to the motor coils are cut off.

11.2.3.3.2. Alignment Motor Control1. The Alignment Motor, which jogs papers in the stack and carries out offset operation in Paper Exit Unit,

is a W1-2 phase exciting type, 2-phase stepping pulse motor. Its control is shown below.2. Each signal pulse output from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 in Control PCB (PBA-CONT) excites and

rotates the coil in each phase. And it combines with this output and is IC2. The electromagnetic excitation is changed by the output of P14 and P15, and it controls the W1-2 phase exciting drive.

3. Motor stops when the output signals from P10, P11, P12, P13 of IC2 are changed to H and the power supply to the motor coils are cut off.

641APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.3.3.3. Elevation Motor Control1. Elevation Motor, which moves Stack Tray up and down, is a +24V DC brush motor. The control circuit

is shown below.2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P52 and P53 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). Stack

Tray is elevated when H is output from P52 and P53 respectively, and Stack Tray is descended when H and L are output from P52 and P53 respectively.

3. Motor stops and brakes when L and H are output from P52 and P53.

11.2.3.3.4. Staple Motor Control1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC brush motor. Its control circuit is shown below.2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from PF1, PF0 and P50 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).

Stapling is done when L, L and H are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively. Staple is at home position when H, L and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 respectively.

3. Staple Motor stops and brakes when L, H and L are output from PF1, PF0 and P50 for forward and reverse rotations.

642APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DP-C262/C322

11.2.3.3.5. Large Gear Solenoid Control1. An up-and-down motion of the Delivery Unit is performed by changing the drive of feed motor, which is

controlled by the Large Gear Solenoid. If the Large Gear Solenoid is turned on during rotation of the feed motor, the Delivery Unit will move up and will be opened widely. When the Large Gear Solenoid is turned off, the Delivery Unit will move down and will be closed.The Solenoid is driven by +24V DC. Its control circuit is shown below.

2. It is controlled by the signal from P27 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P27 is H, the Large Gear Solenoid is turned on.

11.2.3.3.6. Paddle Solenoid Control1. Paddle Solenoid switches the drive of the feed motor to the Paddle, which is a Flapper typed Solenoid

and is operated by +24V DC. The control circuit is shown below.2. Solenoid is turned ON and drives the Paddle when the signal H is transmitted from PG0 of IC2 in

P.C.B. (PBA-CONT).

11.2.3.3.7. Paper Detection Solenoid Control1. A +24V DC plunger solenoid along with a paper detection lever is used for detecting the height of the

paper delivered to the Stack Tray. Its control circuit is shown below.2. It is controlled by the signal from P26 of IC2 in P.C.B. (PBA-CONT). When the P26 is H, the Solenoid is

turned on to pull the paper detection lever inside. When the P25 is H, the Solenoid is turned off to push the paper detection lever outside.

643APR 2005Ver. 1.1

DZSD001829-11

88

Panasonic®

Software

Operating Instructions

Network Firmware Update Tool (Service Tool) Version 3

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Page 2

Table of Contents

1. General 3 1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2. Installation 4 2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4 2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4 2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6 3.1.2 For other models 6

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7

1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1

3rd Edition : 2002 December 5

4th Edition : 2003 April 10


6th Edition : 2003 December 18


8th Edition : 2004 August 3


10th Edition : 2004 October 22

11th Edition : 2005 March 18

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.


Page 3

1. General The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.

1.1 Supporting OS

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS

• Windows 98 / Me • Windows NT 4.0 • Windows 2000 • Windows XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

Please refer to the service manual of each model.

.


Page 4

2. Installation 2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator).

2.

Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

3. Enter the installation password. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.

4.

Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

5. The completion message is displayed when install is completed. Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.

2. The Configuration dialog box appears.

General Tab

Please change the settings if necessary.

File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode When you select this mode, the tool acquires the type of firmware and version from the device(s) of the specified address, and updates the device to the latest version from the “Local Firmware Folder”.

However, this mode cannot change the type of firmware, so you must use the manual mode when changing from the standard firmware to the option firmware.

3. Click [OK] to finish the setup.


Page 5

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.

Start Microsoft Windows.


2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.

3.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

4.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.


Page 6

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)

1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.1.2 For other models

1. If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication. As for three-digit Key Operator Password device, only “000” of the default value is judged “0000” in the value.

2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)


Page 7

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.

Click [Next>].

Note:

1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application are set correctly.

2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...). 3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote

unit, or a communication error may occur. 4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the

firmware update isn’t done properly and the device will not boot up again. 5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20

minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.

3. Click [Device Address List].


Page 8

4. Enter the destination device(s) by using Manual Input or Device Address List.

Click [OK].

5. Confirm the destination device(s).

Click [Next>].


Page 9

6 Specify the Firmware Code File using the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 6a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 6b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select Independent File Folders --> Step 6c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select independent file folders here.

Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isn’t indicated.

6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.


Page 10

6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe

6a3 Extracting...

6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 11

6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228

6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].


Page 12

6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders" and click [Browse...] button.

6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and

click [OK].

ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN


Page 13

6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder and click [OK].

6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].

7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.

Click [Next>].


Page 14

8. Verify that the information you want to update is correct.

Then click [Next>].

Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are transmitted separately and each time the unit erases, writes and reboots in the normal mode. If you check "Send at once", all firmware will be sent at once and then erase, write and reboot. This "Send at once", function cannot be used if the firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit SC version is V1.xxxx (DP-3510/4510/6010).

9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.

Set timer communication if necessary.

Then click [Next>].

10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started.

The Spooler screen appears automatically showing the progress of the data transfer.

The spooler will take time to open depending on the number of addresses to update.


Page 15

11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in the spooler disappear and the communication log is displayed.

Click [Finish] to close the tool.

After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again automatically.

DZSD000965-16

Panasonic®

Software

Operating Instructions

Local Firmware Update Tool (Service Tool) Version 3

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

Page 2

Table of Contents

1. General 3 1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2. Installation 4 2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4 2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4 2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5 2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6

3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7 3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7 3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8

1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30

3rd Edition : 2000 September 8

4th Edition : 2000 November 28

5th Edition : 2001 June 20

6th Edition : 2001 September 7



9th Edition : 2003 December 18

10th Edition : 2004 January 19

11th Edition : 2004 February 10




15th Edition : 2004 October 22

16th Edition : 2005 March 18

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Page 3

1. General The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface.

1.1 Supporting OS

This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS

• Windows 98 / Me

• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)

• Windows 2000 / XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models Please refer to the service manual of each model.


Page 4

2. Installation 2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine

1 Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed. Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.

2 Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and your PC.

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1 Start Microsoft Windows.

For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2 Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.

3 Installation Destination Folder

Click [Next] button.

4 Program Folder

Click [Next] button.


Page 5

5 Copying...

6 The installation is completed.

Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)

1 After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed automatically.

Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service Manual.

2 Searching...

Installing driver...

3 When the install screen disappears, the installation of the Firmware Update (USB) Driver is completed.

Note: 1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.

2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation

3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1

4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.


Page 6

2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.

Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1.

Start Microsoft Windows.


2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.

3.

Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

4.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.

Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be deleted properly.


Page 7

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.

C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data

Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)


Page 8

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

1 Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel cable or USB cable.

Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver installation.

2 Please close the all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

3 From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard.

Click [Next>].

Note: Please close all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

4 Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or Parallel.

Click [Next>].

Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is only displayed if you installed it with the unit Plug and Play.

Port ControllerStatus Monitor


Page 9

5 Specify the Firmware Code File by the following methods.

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 5a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 5b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary.

Select an Independent File --> Step 5c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select an independent file here. When updating multiple firmware files, you must repeat the file selection operation.

5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].

ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe

5a3 Extracting...


Page 10

5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 11

5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)

Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].

ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327

5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].


Page 12

5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 13

5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click [Browse...] button.

5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].

ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].


Page 14

6 The selected Firmware Code File(s) are indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need to transfer a file.

On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.

Click [Next>].

7 The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

When there is more than one file to be updated, the operation will be the following;

For USB connected unit: they are transferred in turn automatically if the unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file.

Note: If you are updating the DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn't done automatically. The "Waiting..." display on the PC will not advance to "Executing..." until you set the unit back to USB Firmware Update on the machine to start receiving the next file. See Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode on the next page.

For Parallel connected unit: the confirmation screen is displayed when the current firmware code file transfer is finished and there are remaining firmware code files. Click [OK] when the machine is ready to receive the next file.


Page 15

Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the firmware update. When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.

For USB Connected Unit (Other models): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the firmware update automatically. When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.

For Parallel Connected Unit: Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.

8 When the transfers of all the firmware files are finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.

Note: For USB Connected Unit only. When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup. Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug and Play window.

DZZSM00298

dp_c262_sm

Documents

Transcript of dp_c262_sm